Same Laser 110 130 150 Workshop Manual

Tractor Manuals Scotland
FRONT AXLE
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 WHEE
WHEEL
L HU
HUB
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
151
FRONT
FRONT AXL
AXLE
E ASS
ASSEMB
EMBLY
LY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Disass
Disassem
embly
bly an
and
d rea
reasse
ssemb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
151
1
Remova
Remo vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
144
4 Checks an
Checks and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Checks
Checks an
and d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 WHEE
WH EEL
L SH
SHAF
AFT.
T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Disass
Disassem
embly
bly an
and
d rea
reasse
ssemb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
152
2
POWER
POWER STE
STEERI
ERING.
NG... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
147
7 TRACK
TRACK VAR
VARIAT
IATION
ION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
154
4
Disassembly, checks and verifications, TOE
TOE -INCHE
-INCHECK
CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 END- FLO
FLOAT
AT ADJ
ADJUST
USTMEN
MENT
T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 TECHNICAL
TECHNICAL DATA AND SPECI
SPECIFICAT
FICATIONS.
IONS. . . . 156
STEERI
STEERING
NG TIERODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Tech
Techni
nica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
156
6
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
148
8 Checks
Checks an
and
d adj
adjust
ustmen
ments
ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques
es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Gene
General
ral spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
158
8
STEERI
STEERING
NG CEN
CENTRELEVER
TRELEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND
Remova
Removall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 CORRECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
141
Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy


FRONT AXLE
GENERAL FEATURES
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY

1 - Steering tie rod
2 - Clamp
3 - Sleeve
4 - Ball joint
5 - Steering central lever
6 - Grease nipple
7 - Seeger ring
8 - Fifth wheel
9 - Gasket
The group of telescopic type, substitutes the driving 10 - Power steering
axle in the two-wheel drive models, although maintai- 11 - Shovel ring
13 - Gasket
ning
ning th
the
e sa
sameme ro
robu
buststne
ness
ss an
andd so
soli
lidi
dity
ty.. It is co
comp
mpos
osed
ed
14 - Bush
of a ce
cent
ntra
rall ax
axle
le wh
whic
ich
h is se
secu
cure
redd to th
thee fro
front
nt mo
moun
unti
ting
ng 15 - LH side axle
through a pin, and two side axles. It permits the track 16 - Cover’
to be adjusted according with the use requirements. 17 - Gasket
In addition to the shafts and wheel hubs, the side 18 - Castle nut
axles, also hold the steering tie rods through levers. 19 - Shoul
Shoulder
der ring
The steering movement is obtained through two po- 20 - Oute
Outerr bearing
wer ste
steeri
ering
ng an
andd tra
transm
nsmiss
ission
ion lev
levers
ers pla
placedced in cen
centra
trall 21 - Wheel hub
position. 22 - Spacer
23 - Inner bearing
24 - Seal ring
25 - Wheel shaft
26 - O-ring
27 - Thrust bearing
28 - Pin
29 - Central axle
30 - Pin securing axle
31 - Shim
32 - Pin
33 - Disk
34 - Lower tapered roller bearing
36 - Upper tapered roller bearing
37 - Cover
142


FRONT AXLE
143


FRONT AXLE
REMOVAL 6. Unscrew the two screws securing pin 1 to axle

mounting 2
mounting 2..
1. Leave the vehicle on a level surface, operate the
parkin
par kingg bra
brake,
ke, an
and
d pos
positi
ition
on a saf
safety
ety sta
stand
nd 2 un
unde
derr the
engine oil sump, interposing a wooden block to pre-
vent metal parts coming into contact.
2. Unscrew the six nuts securing wheels 1
wheels 1..
3. Sling front axle 3
axle 3 with
with a chain, and lift the vehicle.
4. Remove the wheels, then lower the vehicle resting
it on safety 2
safety 2..
1 - Pin
2 - Axle support
7. Use a light alloy hammer and punch to tap on rear

end of pin 1
pin 1..
1 - Wheels
2 - Safety stand
3 - Front axle
5. Place appropriate containers under the power stee-

ring; unscrew unions 1
unions 1 of
of power steering 3
steering 3 from
from hoses
2 side.
1 - Pin
1 - Unions
2 - Hoses
3 - Power steering
144


FRONT AXLE
8. By means of two levers 1,

levers 1, withdraw
withdraw pin 2
pin 2 forwards,
forwards, 11. Position axle 1 on
axle 1 on three stands 2
stands 2,, ensuring that it
and rec
recove
overr the shi
shims
ms int
interp
erpose
osed
d be
betwe
tween
en fla
flang
nge
e and rests safely.
front mounting.
CAUTION
Keep the two shim packages separated so that the
correct positioning can be maintained on reassem-
bly.
1 - Front axle Assembly

2 - Stands
1 - Levers
2 - Pin
CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS
9. Remove the axle from front mounting by slightly 1. Verify
that bushes 1 of central axle are not worn,
tapping on central axle with a hammer. checking
checking that inde
indentati
ntations
ons are still pres
present.
ent. If requ
required
ired,,
10. Lower axle 1
axle 1 very
very slowly, ensuring that operation remove the bushes using a hammer and a punch.
is not hindered, then remove shovel rings 2
rings 2..
1 - Bush
2 - Central axle
2. Veri
Ve rify
fy th
that
at pi
pin
n su
surfa
rface
ce is fr
free
ee fr
from
om cr
crac
acks
ks,, de
defo
form
rma-
a-
tions, or splinters. Replace the pin if required.
1 - Front driving
driving axle
2 - Shovel rings
145


FRONT AXLE
INSTALLATION
Carry out installation by proceeding as follows.
1. Use very fine abrasive paper to eliminate any signs of oxidation from the pin and front mounting.
2. Grease the bushes and the pin using the grease prescribed.
3. Lay a coat of grease on the shovel rings of front mounting to facilitate the positioning.
4. By means of a light alloy hammer and punch, tap on spacer 6, 6 , moving it forwards.
5. Insert pin 5
pin 5 into the spacer.
6. Lift the axle and insert the pin into bush 3
bush 3..
7. Push the pin almost fully home.
8. Position shims 7
shims 7,, and screws 7
screws 7 securing
securing the pin to front axle.
1 - Front axlet
3 - Axle bushes
5 - Pin
6 - Spacer
7 - Shims
8 - Screw
9. Complete the installation by reversing the order of removal, complying with the following.
— Check the end-float, and adjust it if necessary (refer to: End - Float Adjustment).
—
Restore the oil level in the hydrostatic steering system and bleed it (refer to: Hydrostatic Steering - Hydraulic
System Assembly - Bleeding).
146


FRONT AXLE
POWER STEERING
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front axle from vehicle (refer to: Front Axle Assembly - Removal).
2. Remove Seeger ring 1
ring 1,, fifth wheel 2
wheel 2,, and gasket 3
gasket 3,, on the outer connection point, wheel hub side.
3. Repeat the same operations on the connection point with the central lever.
4. Unscrew grease nipple 5
nipple 5 on pin 6
pin 6..
5.
Use a le
derneath. lever
ver to fac
Should facili
ilitat
the tate
e rem
remova
power ovall of po
steering power
wer
be steeri
steering
blocked ngby4pin 6
from
fro
pin m,the
6, two sec
remove securi
uring
it by ng pin
pins,s, an
operating andd rec
as recove
overr the two gas
follows. gasket
kets
s 3 un-
(1) Withdraw the split pin, and unscrew castle nut 7 nut 7..
(2)) By me
(2 mean
ans
s of a li
ligh
ghtt al
allo
loy
y ha
hamm
mmerer,, ta
tap
p up
upwa
ward
rdss on pipin
n 6 un
unti
till ex
extr
trac
acti
ting
ng it fr
from
om ththe
e st
stee
eeriring
ng ce
cent
ntre
re le
leve
ver,
r, an
and
d re
re--
move the power steering together with the pin.
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Fifth wheel
3 - Gasket
4 - Power steering
5
6 -- Pin
Grease ripple
7 - Casti e nut
DISASSEMBLY, CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS, REASSEMBLY

Procee
Proceed
d to ins
instal
talll thepowe
thepowerr ste
steeri
ering
ng by op
opera
eratin
ting
g as de
descr
scribe
ibed
d in “Hy
“Hydro
drosta
static
tic Ste
Steeri
ering
ng - Po
Power
wer Ste
Steeri
ering
ng Hou
Housin
sing”.
g”.
INSTALLATION
Install the power steering housing by reversing the order of removal, complying with the following.
— Thoroughly grease the pins securing power steering housing using the grease prescribed.
— Tighten the castle nuts of the pins securing the jacks to the prescribed torque.
Tightening torque
Castle nuts securing power steering housing
157 N-m
(16 Kgm; 115.68 ft lb)
— Verify that the nut slot coincides with the split pin hole obtained on the pin; if the slot and the hole do not
coincide, tighten the nut further until they coincide. Use a new split pin.
147


FRONT AXLE
STEERING TIE RODS

REMOVAL
6. Ifrequired, remove the ball joints at the end of tie
1. Remove the front axle from the vehicle (refer to: rods, by operating as follows.
Front Axle Assembly - Removal). (1) Secure tie rod 1 on a vice fitted with protective
2. Extract the split pin securing castle nut 1nut 1.. jaws.
3. Un
Unscr
screw
ew the cas
castle
tle nu
nutt sec
securi
uring
ng ba
ballll joi
joint
nt 2 to ext
exter-
er- (2) Loosen locknut 2
locknut 2,, then unscrew ball joint 3
joint 3,, taking
nal lever 3.
3 . care
movetoit.count the number of turns necessary to re-
1 - Tie rod
2 - Locknut
3 - Ball joint

1. Ch
Chec
eck
k th
that
at ba
ball
ll jo
join
ints
ts of th
the
e st
stee
eeri
ring
ng ti
tie
e ro
rods
ds,, ar
are
e no
nott
worn or damaged, and verify that they rotate without
1 - Castle nut seizing or remarkable backlash in their seat. If not so,
2 - Ball joint replace them.
3 - Steering external lever 2. Check for good conditions of ball joints rubber pro-
tection; if not so, replace the joints.
4. Repeat the same operations as for the two ball 3. Check for damage or deformations of the tie rods.
joints 2
joints 2 secured
secured to control lever 3.
3 .
5. Withdraw the pins of ball joints 2, and remove tie
rods 1
rods 1..
INSTALLATION
Installl thesteer
Instal thesteeringtie
ingtie rod
rods
s by rev
revers
ersingthe
ingthe ord
order
er of re-
moval, complying with the following.
— If previously removed, install the ball joints taking
care to screw the joint by the same number of
turns counted when unscrewing.
— Carefully lubricate the pins securing the ball
joints with the grease prescribed.
— Tighten the ball joint castle nuts to the prescribed
torque given in the following table, according with
the threading features.
1 - Steering tie rods

2 - Ball joints
148


FRONT AXLE
Tightening torques
Ball joint castle nuts
Threading Tightening Tightening

meas. torque torque
uni t Nm k gm
M14x1,5 7 3 ,6 7 ,5
M12x1,5 4 9 ,1 5
M10x1 3 4 ,3 3 ,5
M20x1,5 157 16
M18x1,5 132,5 13,5
M15x1,5 118 12,0
M18x1,5 157 16
— Verify that the nut slot coincides with the split pin
hole obtained on the pin; if not so, tighten the nut
further until they coincide. Use a new split pin.
STEERING CENTRE LEVER

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Re
Remo
move
ve th
the
e fr
fron
ontt ax
axle
le fr
from
om th
the
e dr
driv
ivin
ing
g ax
axle
le,, an
and
d re
re-- 4. By mea
means
ns of a uni
univer
versal
sal pu
pulle
ller,
r, rem
remove
ove cen
centre
tre lev
lever
er
move the power steering housing 2 (refer to: Power 1 together with bearing 2
bearing 2..
Steering Housing - Removal).
2. Detach the steering tie rods from the central lever
by operating as follows.
(1) Extract the split pin securing nuts 2
nuts 2,, and unscrew
them.
(2) Withdraw the pins of ball joints 3
joints 3,, and disconnect
tie rods 1
rods 1 from lever 4.
4 .
3. Extract split pin 7 unscrew castle nut 5 securing
steering wheel central lever 4, 4 , and remove cover 6.
6 .

2 - Upper tapered roller bearing
1 - Steering tie rods 5. Bymeans of a universal puller, remove bearing 3

3,,
2 - Castle nut then remove disk 2
disk 2 with related O-ring 1
O-ring 1..
3 - Ball joint
4 - Steering centre lever .
5 - Castle nut
6 - Cover
7 - Split pin
149


FRONT AXLE
7. Install the centre lever by reversing the order of re-

Before reassembly, lubricate thoroughly the ta-
—
pered roller ‘bearings and related races with the

grease prescribed.
Before mounting the lower bearing on the axle, fit
—
a new disk, and a new O-ring.

Comply with the following when fitting the castle
—
nut.
•
•
Tighten fullynut
Loosen the theand
nut
an to set theitbearings.
d retighten bearings.
until the bac-
klash is eliminated, then insert a new shake-
proof split pin. Should the pin hole not coincide
with the nut slot, tighten the nut further, until a
new split pin can be inserted.
— At the end of reassembly, grease the pin and the
bearings with the grease prescribed through the
grease nipple housed on the lever..

1. Ch
Chec
eck
k th
that
at th
the
e le
leve
verr is no
nott de
defo
form
rmed
ed or da
dama
mage
ged.
d. If
1 - O-ring not so, replace it.
2 - Disk
2. Carefully examine the bearings by letting them ro-
3 - Lower tapered roller bearing
tate
tat e slo
slowly
wly,, che
checki
cking
ng for vib
vibrat
ration
ions,
s, no
noisy
isy or sli
sligh
ghtt sei
sei--
zing.
3. Exa
Examin
minee thecond
theconditi
ition
ons
s of bo
both
th rol
rollin
ling
g ele
eleme
mentsnts an
and
d
6. If required, secure central lever 1
1 on a vice and, by races
race s surfa
surfaces
ces chec
checking
king for scrat
scratches
ches,, prin
prints,
ts, grin
grinding
ding
means
mean s of a ha
hamm
mmer
er an
and
d pu
punc
nch,
h, re
remo
move
ve ou
oute
terr ra
race
ces
s2 signs due to scoring generated by foreign matter. Re-
of tapered
tapered bearing, housed in the central hole, taking place the damaged components.
care to extract first the upper race having smaller dia-
meter, by tapping outwards.
1 - Steering centre lever

2 - Bearing outer races
150


FRONT AXLE
WHEEL HUB
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY 7. Usea universal puller to withdraw hub assembly 2
assembly 2
from pin 1
pin 1..
1. Pla
Place
ce the tra
tracto
ctorr on a lev
level
el sur
surfac
face,
e, op
opera
erate
te the pa
par-
r-
king brake, and position a safety stand 2 under the
axle.
2. Unscrew the six nuts securing wheels 1
wheels 1..
3.
Sling front
4. Remove theaxle
axle 3
3 with
with
wheel, a chain,
then lower and lift the resting
the tractor vehicle.it
on safety stand 2
stand 2..
1 - Wheel hub pin

2 - Hub assembly
1 - Wheels
2 - Safety stand 8. By means of the appropriate puller, remove front
3 - Front axle ball bearing 1
bearing 1,, and withdraw spacer 2. 2 .
9. By levering, extract seal ring 5
ring 5,, then remove rear
5. Unscrew the four screws securing cover 3;
3; remove ball bearing 4
bearing 4 with
with the appropriate puller.
the cover and gasket 2
gasket 2 underneath.
6. Remo
Remove
ve spl
split
it pin 1, an
and
d un
unsc
scre
rew
w nu
nutt 5 secu
securing
ring hub
4 bear
bearings
ings,, and remo
removeve the shou
shoulder
lder ring unde
undernea
rneath.
th.
1 - Front ball bearing

2 - Spacer
1 - Split pin 3 - Wheel hub
2 - Gasket 4 - Rear ball bearing
3 - Cover 5 - Seal ring
4 - Hub
5 - Nut
151


FRONT AXLE
10. Reassemble the hub by reversing the order of di- CAUTION

sassembly, complying with the following. If a be
bear
arin
ing
g ca
can
n no lo
long
nger
er be us
used
ed,, re
repl
plac
ace
e bo
both
th in
in--
— Before reassembly, lubricate the internal bearing ner and outer ones.
2 and
and 4
4 and
and the new seal ring 1
ring 1 with
with the grease
prescribed.
— Carefully insert the seal ring 1
ring 1 by
by means of a 3. Che
Check
ck tha
thatt the wh
wheel
eel sha
shaft
ft is no
nott dam
damag
aged
ed,, an
and
d tha
thatt
light alloy hammer and punch. the thr
thread
eading
ing is in go
good
od con
condit
dition
ion;; rep
replac
lace
e it if req
requir
uired
ed
— Mount the hub 3
hub 3 on
on the pin 7
pin 7 by
by slightly tapping (refer to: Wheel Shaft - Disassembly and Reassem-
with a hammer. bly).
—
Tighten the castle nut 5

nut 5 to
to the prescribed torque. 4. Verify
that through hole,matter;
hole, 1
1 securing
not obstructed by foreign if so,outer cover
remove is
the
obstacle to permit the hub to be lubricated.
Tightening torque
Castle nut securing hub
See: GENERAL
Method of tightening nuts
— Verify that the nut slot coincides with the split pin
hole obtained on pin; if not so, tighten the nut fur-
ther until they coincide. Use a new split pin.
— Check that the hub 3
hub 3 has
has an axle play of 0.12
0.12 to
0.48 mm (0.0047
mm (0.0047 to 0.0188 in) with respect to
the wheel shaft pivot 7
pivot 7..
1 - Through hole
2 - Wheel hub
WHEEL SHAFT
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
1. Remove the wheel hub (refer to: Wheel Hub - Di-
1 - Real ring
2 - Intern
Internal
al ball beari
bearing
ng sassembly and Reassembly).
3 - Wheel hub 2. Extract the split pin, and unscrew nut 3.
nut 3.
4 - Outside ball bearing 3. Withdraw the ball joint 2
joint 2 pin
pin from lever 4.
4 .
5 - Castle nut 4. Unscrew and remove bolt 5 securing lever lever 4 to
6 - Shovel ring wheel shaft 6
shaft 6..
7 - Wheel shaft pin
8 - Spacer
CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS CAUTION

Suppor
Supportt the wh
wheel
eel sh
shaft
aft su
suita
itably
bly to pr
preve
event
nt it fro
from
m
Thoroughly clean the bearings and the other compo- dropping accidentally
accidentally..
nents, and dry them with compressed air.
1. Examine the bearings carefully by letting them ro-
tate
tat e slo
slowly
wly che
checki
cking
ng for vib
vibrat
ration
ions,
s, no
noisy
isy,, or sli
sligh
ghtt sei
sei--
zing.
2. Examine the conditions of both races and rolling
elements
elem ents surfa
surfaces
ces chec
checking
king for scrat
scratches
ches,, print
prints,
s, grin
grin--
di
ding
If ng
so,sig
signs
ns du
due
replace ethe
to sco
scorin
ring
g gen
bearing.genera
erated
ted by for
foreig
eign
n ma
matte
tter.
r.
152


FRONT AXLE
6. Remove thrust bearing 2

bearing 2 and O-ring 3
O-ring 3 by withdra-
wing them from shaft 1
shaft 1..
7. If required, remove race 4
race 4 of
of thrust bearing using a
light alloy hammer and punch.

2 - Ball joint
3 - Castle nut
4 - Steering outer lever
5 - Bolt
1 - Wheel shaft
6 - Wheel shaft
2 - Thrust bearing
3 - O-ring
5. Supp
Support
ort whee
wheell shaf
shaftt 3, rem
remove
ove lev
lever
er 1
1 and gask
gasket
et 2 4 - Thrust bearing race
underneath; withdraw wheel shaft.
8. If re
requ
quir
ired
ed,, re
remo
move
ve th
the
e bu
bush
shes
es in
insi
side
de th
thee si
side
de ax
axle
le,,
using a light alloy hammer and punch.
9. Rea
Reassessembl
mble e the whe
wheel
el sha
shaft
ft by rev
revers
ersing
ing the ord
order
er
of disassembly, complying with the following.
— Fit a new O-ring on the shaft seat, and lubricate
the O-ring seat.
— Lubricate the bushes of outer axle on which the
shaft rotates.
— When reassembling, keep the wheel shaft forced
upwards.
— Fit the bolt securing the steering outer lever to
wheel shaft, with the nut pointing forwards.
— At the end of reassembly, grease the unit using
the grease nipple located on the side axle.
1 - Steering outer lever

2 - Gasket
3 - Wheel shaft
153


FRONT AXLE
Wash the components thoroughly, and dry them with

compressed air.
1. Check for signs of oxidations on wheel shaft; if so
remove them using very fine abrasive paper.
2. Check that the wheel shaft is not deformed or da-
maged; if so, replace it.
3. Carefully check the thrust bearing for signs of grin-
ding, scr
ding, scratc
atche
hes,
s, or pri
prints
nts on the rol
rollin
ling
g ele
eleme
ments
nts or the
races; if so, replace the worn components.
4. Check that both upper and lower bushes 1 of side
axle are not worn, ensuring that indentations are still
present; if not so, replace them.
1 - Bushes
TRACK VARIATION
1. Unscrew the nuts securing pins 2 for positioning

side axle
axles s 3. Re
Remomove ve pi
pins
ns 2 an
andd sha
shakeke pro
proof
of was
washehers
rs
4 and
and 5 5..
2. Uns
Unscre crew w thebolts of tie rod
rodss 1, andremo
andremove ve the
them.
m.
3. Lif
Liftt thevehic
thevehicle le by memeansof
ansof lif
lift,
t, an
andd ext
extrac
ractt bot
both
h sid
side
e
axle and steering tie rod by the quantity required by
tapping, if necessary, with a light alloy hammer.
4. Insert pins 2
pins 2,, fit washers 4
washers 4 and
and 5 5,, and the nut.

2 - Pin
3 - Side axle
4 - Washer
5 - Washer
154


FRONT AXLE
5. Rotatesleeve 1 around its axis so that joint 2

sleeve 1 joint 2 is in
the position shown in the figure (i.e verify that joint
working angle is 90°), then insert and tighten the two
bolts securing the sleeve.
Left side (front view)
Right side (front view)
1 - Sleeve
2 - Ball joint
TOE-IN CHECK
1. Place the vehicle on a level surface with the stee- (2) Repeat the same operations on the other tie rod.
ring wheel in central position and, by means of a sui- (3) Loosen locknuts 2
locknuts 2 and
and screw or unscrew both ball
table caliper, measure distances A and B on a hori- joints 4
joints 4 by
by the same number of turns in order to leng-
zontalplanepassi
zon talplanepassingng thr
throu
ough
gh thewhee
thewheell axe
axess alw
always
ays in then or shorten the two steering tie rods by the same
the same point of the rim. quantity, so as to restore the correct toe in valve.
(4) Tighten locknuts 2
locknuts 2,, and install tie rods 1
rods 1 be
be rever-
sing the order of removal.
Direction
2. Rota
Rotate
te the whee
wheell by half turn, and repeat the pre-
vious
vio us opopera
eratio
tions
ns to tak
take
e not
note
e of anyrim de
defor
forma
matio
tions.
ns.
3. If the difference A-B between the two measures is
not within the values given in the table “Axle Assem-Assem- 1 - Tie rod
bly”” (re
bly (refer
fer to: Tec
Techni
hnical
cal Dat
Dataa an
and
d Spe
Specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns - 2 - Locknut
Checks and Adjustments) for the model of tractor in 3 - Castle nut
object, carry out the adjustment by proceeding as fol- 4 - Ball joint
lows. 5 - Steering outer lever
(1) Remove the split pin, and unscrew nut 3
nut 3,, then dis-
dis-
connect the pin of ball joint 4
joint 4.. (5) Repeat the operations described until obtaining
the correct toe-in valve.
155


FRONT AXLE
END-FLOAT ADJUSTMENT
1. Pu
Push
sh th
the
e ax
axle
le to
towa
wardsthe
rdsthe rea
rearr sid
side,
e, an
and
d by me
mean
ans
s of a fe
feel
eler
er ga
gaug
uge,
e, ve
verif
rify
y tha
thatt th
the
e ma
max
x ba
backl
cklas
ash
h “G”doesnot ex
exce
ceed
ed
0.4 mm (0.02 in).
2. If the measured value exceeds the value prescribed, operate as follows.
(1) Unscrew screws 5
screws 5 securing
securing pin 2
pin 2 to
to front mounting 1
mounting 1..
(2) Slightly move the pin and remove such a number of shims 4
shims 4 from
from underneath the flange to restore the correct
backlash.
(3) Screw screws 5

screws 5 and
and recheck the backlash.
Sect. A-A
1 - Front mounting
2 - Pin
4 - Shims
5 - Screw
TECHNICAL DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL DATES
Complete axle
Type Model 110
wheels up to 20" mm 2÷6

Toe - in
wheels from 20" to 30" mm
mm 3÷9
Axle swing 12°
Camber 30
Tyre air pressure kg/cm2 (bar) 2,40 (2,35)
Right 70°
Steering angle
Left 50°
156


FRONT AXLE
CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS

Complete axle
Type of control Model 110
Max. axle play “G” between

0,4 mm
front bearing and axle
Angle “a” of work of steering Left side (front view)

90°
rod ball joint
Right side (front view )
Direction
Toe-in “A- B” 2 ÷ 4 mm
157


FRONT AXLE
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Unit of measure: Nm (kgm)
Particulars Model 110
157 (16)
M14x1,5 73,6 (7,5)

Retaining nuts for steering jack pins (1)
M12x1,5 49,1 (5)
M10x1 34,3 (3,5)
M20x1,5 157 (16)
M18x1,5 132,5 (13,5)

Retaining nuts for ball joint pins (1)
M15x1,5 118 (12)
M18x1,5 157 (16)
(1) If after tightening, the nut slot does not coincide with the split pin hole tighten further until they do coincide.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fluids and Lubricants
Application Type Denomination Model Q.ty
Bushes and holding shaft pin -
Front bearing spacer -
Steering jack retaining pins -
Ball joint retaining pins -

Gre
reas
ase
e AGIP
AGIP Gre
reas
ase
e 30 - (G
(Gre
reas
ase
e 30
30)) 110
110 - 13
130
0 - 15
150
0
Central drive lever roller bea-
-
ring
Hub bearing and holding link -
Bush and wheel shaft -
158


FRONT AXLE
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIONS
Trouble Probable cause Corrective action
Disassemble
Disassem ble the comp
components
onents,, chec
check
k
No grease in the hubs and/or steering
for goo
goodd con
condit
dition
ions,
s, the
then
n gre
grease
ase as
pins and/or in the axle rocking bushes
Noisy when running prescribed
Axle and/or hub bearings worn Replace
Exce
Excess
ssiv
ive
e en
end
d - fl
floa
oatt of ax
axle
le Rest
Restor
ore
e co
corr
rrec
ectt ba
back
ckla
lash
sh
Noisy during pick up
Nuts of the pins securing side axle lo-
Tighten the nuts
ose
Tyres too worn Replace if required

Wheels oscillates
Steering ball joints worn Replace if required
159


FRONT AXLE
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANC
160

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
FRONT
FRONT DRI
DRIVIN
VING
G AXL
AXLE
E ASS
ASSEM
EMBLY
BLY . . . . . . . . . 162 Flange
Flange supp
supportin
orting
g diffe
different
rential
ial . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Remova
Removall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
183
ROCKIN
ROCKING
G MO
MOUNT
UNTING
INGS.
S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Crown
Crown whe
wheel
el an
and
d pin
pinion.
ion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
183
3
Remova
Removall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Differ
Differen
entia
tiall cas
casing
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Pinion
Pinion crown whee
wheell posi
position
tion adju
adjustme
stment.
nt. . . . . . . . 185
HUB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 DIFFER
DIFFERENT
ENTIALLOCK
IALLOCK SYS
SYSTEM.
TEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
186
6
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 General

Gene ral fea
featur
tures
es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
186
6
Checks
Che cks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Bear
Bearin
ings
gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
172
2 Reasse
Reassemb
mbly
ly andadju
andadjustm
stmen
entt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fork
Fork an
and
d ax
axlebod
lebody.
y. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 TOE-
TOE-IN
IN CH
CHEC
ECK.
K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
189
9
Axle shafts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 STEERI
STEERING
NG ANG
ANGLE
LE ADJ
ADJUST
USTMEN
MENT
T . . . . . . . . . . 190
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
173 TECHNICAL
SPECIFICAT
FICATIONS.
IONS. . . . 191
Fork
Fork be
beari
aring
ngs
s pre
preloa
load
d adj
adjust
ustme
ment
nt . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Tech
Techni
nica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
191
1
EPICYC
EPICYCLlCREDUC
LlCREDUCTIO
TION
N GEA
GEAR
R . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Checks
Checks an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
192
2
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
194
4
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Gene
General
ral pre
prescri
scripti
ptions
ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
195
5
Pinsandgears. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 SPECIAL

SPECIAL TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Bear
Bearin
ings
gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
177
7 TROUBLE
TROUBLE SHOO
SHOOTING
TING AND CORR CORRECTIO ECTIONS NS . . 197
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
177
CROWN
CROWN WHE
WHEEL
EL AND PIN
PINION
ION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
161


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
FRONT DRIVING AXLE

ASSEMBLY
1 - Axle body
2 - Front support
3 - Shim
GENERAL FEATURES 4 - Shoulder ring
5 - Bush
The pepecul
culiar
iarity
ity tha
thatt dis
distin
tingu
guish
ishes
es the fro
front
nt whe
wheel
el 6 - Rear floating mounting
drive, consists in the fact that the propeller shaft rota- 7 - Spacer
8 - Seal ring
tion centre coincides with the centre of front axle.
9 - Pin
The propeller shaft is without universal joints. It trans- 10 - Hydrostatic steering jack
mits mo
mits motition
on to th
the
e tw
twoo fr
fron
ontt dr
driv
ive
e wh
wheeeels
ls th
thro
rougugh h a di
dif-
f- 11 - Dust cover
ferential and two final epicyclic reduction gears inser- 12 - Spacer
ted into the hubs. 13 - Front brakes control hose
Two anchor pins permit the axle to perform a wide 14 - Shim
oscillatio
oscil lation
n which
which,, besi
besides
des making the tractor very 15 - Pin
agil
ag ile
e al
also
so on ve
very
ry st
stee
eepp te
terr
rrai
ains
ns,, al
also
so pe
permrmitits
s th
thee ax
axle
le 16 - Fork
to be eaeasi
sily
ly di
disc
scon
onne
nect
cted
ed fro
fromm th
thee fro
front
nt su
supp
ppor ortt in th
thee 17 - Dust cover
18 - Shoul
Shoulder
der ring
event of any repair operations, thus requiring only the
19 - Roller bearing
end-float check to be performed on reassembly. 20 - Steering angle adjusting screw
Two pins, inserted into tapered bearings, connect the 21 - Ball joint
side
sid e hu
hubs
bs to thecentr
thecentralal pa
partrt of axl
axle,
e, thu
thus
s pe
permi
rmitti
tting
ng the 22 - Front differential control tie rod
friction generated by hub rotation when steering to be 23 - Differential lock control lever
reduced. 24 - Threaded pin
25 - Pin
26 - Tie rod
27 - Oil drain plug
28 - Shoul
Shoulder
der ring
29 - Bush
30 - Front floating mounting
31 - Grease nipple
32 - Front flange
33 - Shims
162


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
163


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
CAUTION
Alwa
Always
ys us
use
e a li
ligh
ghtt al
allo
low
w ha
hamm
mmer
er or a pu
punc
nch
h wh
when
en
tapping on cast iron components.
1. Remove the propeller shaft protection and remove

the driving shaft (refer to: Engine - Engine Removal
Preliminary Operations).
2. Unscrew the screws securing the two brackets 1
supporting hose 2
hose 2..
3. Pl
Place
ace a sui
suitab
table
le con
contai
taine
nerr for col
collec
lectin
ting
g the bra
brakin
king
g
system oil, under fork 4
fork 4..
1 - Screw securing pin
4. Unscrew union 3
union 3 on
on fork 4
fork 4,, and disconnect hose 2
hose 2 2 - Pin securing jack
plugging it suitably. 3 - Hydrostatic steering housing
4 - Dust cover
5 - Spacers
7. Extract split pin 1

pin 1,, withdraw pin 2
pin 2,, and disconnect
tie rod 3.
rod 3.
1 - Split pin
2 - Pin
3 - Differential lock control tie rod
8.
1
2 -- Brackets
Braking system oil hose Position
care a support
to interpose stand under
a wooden wedgethe engine taking
to prevent metal
3 - Union components coming into contact.
4 - Fork 9. Loo
Loosenthe
senthe scr
screws
ews sec
securi
uring
ng thefront whe
wheels
els,, lif
liftt the
vehicl
veh icle
e by me
means
ans of an hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic jac
jack,
k, and rem
remove
ove the
wheels; lower the vehicle.
CAUTION
5. Uns
Unscrew
crew screw 1 secu
securing
ring pin 2 to fo
fork,
rk, an
and
d ex
extra
tract
ct Ensure
Ensure that veh
vehicle
icle is safe
safely
ly pos
position
itioned
ed on the
the pin by removing it with a lever. support
6. Repeat the same operations for the other three
pins, detach Rower steering housing
housing 3, and recover
dust cove
covers
rs 4, an
and
d sp
spac
acer
ers
s 5. Su
Supp
pporortt th
the
e po
powe
werr st
stee
ee--
10. Sling the front axle suitably and keep sling taut.
ring housing by securing them temporarily to the ve-
11. Uns
Unscre
creww the fou
fourr nu
nuts
ts sec
securi
uring
ng roc
rockin
king
g mo
moun
untin
tings
gs
hicle.
1, and remove the nuts and washers.
12. Lower axle 2
axle 2 and with the aid of the levers, with-
draw supp
supports
orts 4 and spac
spacers
ers 3 fro
from
m stu
studs;
ds; rem
removethe
ovethe
CAUTION axle from the front side, and position it on a suitable
Do not disconnect the related supply piping from support.
the power steering housing.
164


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
1 - Feeder gauge
2 - Shoulder ring
3 - Differential casing
1 - Rocking mountings (3) If the backlash value is not correct, loosen the four
2 - Front axle nuts securing front rocking mounting 3
mounting 3 to
to axle 1
axle 1,, and
3 - Spacers add
ad d or re
remo
move
ve sh
shim
ims
s 2 acco
accordin
rdingly,
gly, until obta
obtainin
iningg the
4 - Rocking mounting correct backlash.
13. Pro
Procee
ceed
d to ins
instal
talll thefront axl
axle
e by rev
revers
ersingthe
ingthe or-
der of removal, complying with the following.
— Tighten the nuts securing the rocking mountings
to the prescribed torque.
Tightening torque
Nuts securing rocking mounting
Front 142 Nm
(14,5 kgm;104.84 ft lb)
Rear 89 Nm
(9,1 kgm; 65.79 ft lb)
— Proceed to check (and adjust if required) the

end-float by operating as follows.
(1) Mo
(1) Move
ve ax
axle
le fo
forw
rwar
ards
ds by ta
tapp
ppin
ing
g wi
with
th a no
non-
n-ca
cast
st ir
iron
on
hammer. 1 - Front axle
2 - Shims
3 - Front rocking mounting
(2) By me
(2) mean
anss of fe
feel
eler
er ga
gaug
ugee 1 check
check tha
thatt the
end-float between shoulder ring 2
ring 2 and
and differential ca- — Bleed the braking system (refer to: Brakes - Bra-
sing 3
sing 3 is within the values given in the table “Driving king System Bleeding).
Axle Assembly” (refer to: Technical Data and Specifi- — Proceed to check the toe-in (refer to: Toe-in
cations - Checks and Adjustments). Check) and if required, adjust the differential lock
control tie rod. (Refer to: Differential Lock Sys-
tem - Reassembly and Adjustments - Step 11.).
165


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
ROCKING MOUNTINGS
1. Proceedto remove the front axle as indicated in 4. Only if required, remove the bushes housed inside
“Complete Front Driving Axle - Removal and Installa- the rocking mountings securing these last into a vice,
tion”. and
and us
usin
ing
g a ha
hamm
mmerer an
andd a pu
punc
nch
h fo
forr th
the
e re
rear
ar su
supp
ppor
ort,
t,
2. Remove both front 1
front 1 and
and rear 2 rocking
2 rocking mountings and a suitable puller for the front one, respectively.
together with shoulder rings 3.
rings 3. 5. Carryout installation by reversing the order of re-
3. Only if required, unscrew the four nuts securing moval, complying with the following.
front flange 4
flange 4 to axle body 5
body 5,, and remove it together If previously removed, install the front flange ta-
—
with the shims underneath. king care to fit underneath the shims removed
during removal.
By means of the appropriate grease nipples,
—
grease the two mountings before using the ve-

hicle.
Proceed to check (and adjust if required) the axle
—
end-float by operating as indicated in “Complete

Front Driving Axle - Removal and Installation”.
Bleed the braking system (refer to: Brakes - Bra-
—
king System Bleeding).

Proceed to check the toe-in (refer to: Toe-in
—
Check).

1. Visually check that the bushes housed inside the
rocking mountings are free from signs of excessive
wear,
wea r, sei
seizin
zingg or de
defor
format
mation
ion.. Ve
Verif
rify
y als
also
o tha
thatt the bu
bush
sh
bore is within the values given in the table “Rocking
Mountings” (refer to: Technical Data and Specifica-
tions
tio ns Che
Checks
cks an
andd Ad
Adjus
justme
tmentsnts).
). If no
nott so, repreplac
lace
e
them.
2. Visually check that the mating surface of pins with
the mo
moununtin
tings
gs are fre
free
e fro
from
m sig
signs
ns of sei
seizin
zing,
g, de
defor
forma
ma--
tion or excessive wear: if not, replace the damaged
components.
3. Visually
check that mounting outer surfaces are
free from cracks, deformation, or any type of damage
that could compromise the correct functioning. If not,
replace the mounting.
1 - Front rocking mounting

2 - Rear rocking mounting
3 - Should
Shoulderer rings
4 - Front flange
5 - Axle body
166


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
HUB
1 - Dust cover 15 - Bleeder screw 29 - Bearing

2 - Shoulder ring 16 - Valve 30 - Seal ring
3 - Roller bearing 17 - Fork 31 - Differential carrier
4 - Axle body 18 - Dowel pin 32 - Oil drain plug
5 - Seeger ring - internal 19 - Seal ring 33 - Roller bearing
6 - Bearing 20 - O-ring 34 - Side pinion
7 - Seal ring 21 - Brake piston 35 - Pin
8 - Axle shaft 22 - Counter disk and intermediate disk 36 - Bearing
36
9 - Cross journal 23 - Brake disks 37 - Internal gear
10 - Constant velocity joint 24 - Flange 38 - O-ring
11 - Wheel shaft 25 - Cover 39 - Adjusting shims
12 - Shim 26 - Spacer 40 - Flange
13 - Pin 27 - O-ring 41 - Protection
14 - Grease nipple 28 - Seeger ring 42 - Seeger ring
167


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
DISASSEMBLY 5. Unscrew the screw securing pin 6 to fork; extract

the pin using a lever, and recover dust covers 7 and
spacers 5
spacers 5..
6. Unscrew the securing screw, and remove valve
protection 3
protection 3..
CAUTION
Always use a light alloy hammer or punch when
1. Position a support stand with wooden wedge inter-

posed,, und
posed under
er theengin
theenginee to pre
preven
ventt me
metal
tal com
compoponenents nts
from coming into contact.
2. Loo
Loosenthe
senthe scrscrews
ews sec
securi
uring
ng the fro
front
nt whe
wheels
els,, lif
liftt the
vehicl
veh icle
e wit
with
h an hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic jac
jack,
k, an
andd rem
remove
ove thewhee
thewheels; ls;
lower the vehicle.
CAUTION
Ensure that vehicle is safely positioned on sup-
ports.
3. Placeappropriate containers underneath – forks,

unscrew the two plugs located in the lower side of
forks, and plug 1
plug 1 located
located underneath the front rocking
mounting, and drain the oil.
1 - Braking system oil hose

2 - Union
3 - Valve protection
4 - Fork
5 - Spacers
6 - Pin securing jack
7 - Dust cover
8 - Hydrostatic steering jack
7. Withdraw split pin 1,

1, and
and unscrew nut 2 securing
kingpin 3
kingpin 3 to fork.
8. Use the appropriate puller to remove from its seat
kingpin 3 oftie rorod
d 4 bet
betwee
ween n thetwo for
forks.
ks. Re
Repea
peatt the
1 - Front axle oil drain plug same operation for the other kingpin, and remove the
tie rod.
4. Position a suitable container to collect the braking

systemoil
sys temoil un
unde
derr for
fork
k 4. Uns
Unscre
creww un
union
ion 2 on for
fork
k 4,and
disconnect hose 1
hose 1 plugging
plugging it suitably.
168


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
1 - Split pin
2 - Nut
3 - Kingpin
4 - Tie rod
1 - Seeger ring
9. Unscrew cover 6
6 placed at the centre of hub, and 2 - Seal ring
remove it. 3 - Seeger ring
10. Extract seeger ring 5
ring 5 located
located in front of spacer 4;
4 ; 4 - Spacer
use too
tooll 5.9
5.903
030.6
0.618
18.4/
.4/10
10 wit
with
h ap
appro
propri
priate
ate un
union
ion to re- 5 - Seeger ring
move the spacer. 6 - Bearing
11. Remove seal ring 2
ring 2,, and seeger ring 3
ring 3..
12. Unscrew the ten nuts securing epicyclic reduction
gear 1 to
1 to fork 2
fork 2..
13. Screw the two longest screws 3
screws 3 into
into the holes wi-
thout studs, by tightening them fully home onto fork;
remove reduction gear 1 and the O-ring underneath.
1 - Epicyclic reduction gear

2 - Fork
3 - Screws
169


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
14. Unscrew the twelve self locking screws securing

brake unit flange 1
flange 1,, and remove it together with the oil
deflector sheet steel 2
steel 2..
1 - Brake disks
2 - Intermediate disk
3 - Counter disk
4 - Brake control piston
1 - Brake unit flange
2 - Oil deflector sheet plate 16. Sling the fork and support it with the aid of a sui-
table lift.
17. Unscrew the three screws securing upper pin 1.
15. Extractbrake discs 1, intermediate disc 2, and Tighten partially screws 2
screws 2 into
into the three threaded ho-
counter disk 3, then let compressed air into the brake les nor
norma
mally
lly not use
used.
d. Rep
Repea
eatt the sam
samee op
opera
eratio
tions
ns for
oil union, and remove brake control piston 4. the lower pin.
CAUTION
For the models where it is present, countermark
the mo
mount
unting
ing pos
positi
ition
on of bo
both
th cou
counte
nterr dis
disk
k an
and
d in-
termediate disk.
NOTE
Models 110 have one disk only, and are without inter-
mediate disk.
1 - Upper pin securing fork

2 - Screws
3 - Shim
18. Tig
Tighte
hten
n tho
thorou
rough
ghly
ly the six scr
screws
ews pre
previo
viousl
usly
y po
posi-
si-
tioned, and extract the two pins 10,
pins 10, and
and shims 9,
shims 9, then
then
remove
remo ve fork
fork 1. Reco
Recover
ver dust cove
covers
rs and shoulder
shoulder
rings 3
rings 3..
CAUTION
Take
Ta ke ca
care
re no
nott to dr
drop
op th
the
e lo
lowe
werr ta
tape
pere
red
d ro
roll
ller
er be
bea-
a-
ring 4.
170


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
NOTE
If required, remove the outer race of tapered roller bearing 4
4,, by heating uniformly the fork in correspondence with
the race.
19. Withdraw axle shaft 8

shaft 8 complete
complete with constant velocity joint and wheel shaft, by pulling it outwards.
20. If required, remove seal ring 7
ring 7,, and seeger ring 6
ring 6 from
from axle 1
axle 1 then,
then, by means of the appropriate puller, extract
bearing 5
bearing 5..
1 - Axle body
2 - Dust cover
3 - Shoulder ring
4 - Tapered roller bearing
5 - Roller bearing
bearing
6 - Seeger ring
7 - Seal ring
8 - Axle shaft
9 - Shim
10 - Pin
11 - Fork
21. If required, disassemble the constant velocity joints by operating as follows.
(1)) Ex
(1 Extra
tract
ct th
the
e tw
twoo se
seeg
eger
er ri
ring
ngs
s 1 of on
onee pi
pin
n of cr
cros
oss s jo
jour
urna
nals
ls 2 by tap
tappin
ping,
g, if req
requir
uired
ed,, wit
with
h a non
non-ca
-cast
st iro
iron
n ha
hamme
mmer r
and punch.
(2) Secure the constant velocity joint fork on a vice fitted with protective jaws.
(3)) Li
(3 Ligh
ghtl
tly
y ta
tapp wi
with
th a ha
hamm
mmer er on th
the
e fo
fork
rk of wh
whee
eell sh
shaf
aftt 1 so th
that
at be
bear
arin
ing
g ca
cann be wi
with
thdr
draw
aw up
upwa
ward
rds
s fr
from
om it
its
s se
seat
at on
fork 1
fork 1.. Separate cross journal 4
journal 4 from
from fork 1
fork 1..
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Constant velocity joint cross journal
171


FRONT DRIVING AXLE

Before examining the components, wash them tho-
roughly with appropriate solvents, and dry them im-
mediately after with compressed air.
Check brake conditions (refer to: Brakes - Front Bra-
kes - Checks and Verifications).
Verify the epicyclic reduction gear (refer to: Epicyclic
Reduction Gear - Checks and Verifications).
PINS
Check
Chec k th
that
at th
the
e pi
pin
n su
surfrfac
aces
es ar
are
e no
nott da
dama
mage
ged d or wo
worn
rn;;
if the damage is slight, smooth the surfaces with very
fine
fin e ab
abras
rasive
ive pa
pape
per.
r. If no
nott rep
replac
lace
e the pin
pins.
s. Pro
Procee
ceed
d li-
kewise for the pin seats on forks.
BEARINGS
1. Carefullyexamine the bearings by letting them ro-

tate slowly: check for vibrations, noise or slight sei-
zing.
2. Examine the conditions of ring surfaces and rolling
elements
eleme nts che
checki
cking
ng for scr
scratc
atche
hes,
s, pri
prints
nts,, gri
grind
nding
ing
signs due to scoring generated by foreign matter. Re-
place the damaged components.
FORK AND AXLE BODY
Visual
Visu ally
ly in
insp
spec
ectt th
that
at fo
forks
rks an
and
d ax
axle
le bo
body
dy ar
are
e fre
free
e fro
from
m
1 - Wheel shaft fork damage, scratches or dents that could someway af-
2 - Roller bearing
bearing
fect the efficiency and safety of functioning. If not, re-
3 - Roller bearing
bearing
4 - Cross journal place the damaged components.
(4) Fo
Follo
llowin
wing g the sam
same
e pro
proced
cedure
ure,, sep
separa
arate
te the cro
cross
ss
journal from the constant velocity joint fork and axle AXLE SHAFTS
shaft fork. 1. Check that teeth on axle shafts are not worn or da-
(5) Recover bearing rollers 1,
rollers 1, and
and the related dust co-
ver rings 2
rings 2.. maged.
mage d. In pre
presen
sencece of scr
scratc
atche
hed
d ele
elemen
ments,ts, che
check
ck tha
thatt
the
the gegear
arss me
meshshin
ing
g wi
with
th th
the
e de
defe
fect
ctiv
ive
e to
toot
oth h ar
are
e no
nott da
da--
maged.
2. Ve
Veri
rify
fy th
that
at th
the
e ro
roll
llin
ing
g su
surf
rfac
aces
es ar
aree ve
very
ry sm
smoo
ooth
th an
andd
free from cracks. If required, proceed to smooth them
with a very fine abrasive paper.
3. In presence of seizing, or if movement is difficult or
noisy, verify the wear degree of needle bearings and
races on constant speed joints cross journals.
Verify also good conditions of bearing dust covers. In
presence
pres ence of dam
damaged
aged comp
compone
onents,
nts, repl
replace
ace the whol
whole e
cross journal.
1 - Rollers
2 - Dust cover rings
172


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
REASSEMBLY (For 130 - 150)
1 - Axle body 21 - Valve 41 - Oil drain cap

2 - Crown wheel 22 - Cover 42 - Brake discs
3 - Differential half casing 23 - Intermediate disc 43 - Counter disc
4 - Shoulder ring 24 - Flange 44 - O-ring
5 - Spider pin 25 - Epicyclic reduction gear 45 - Brake piston
6 - Side pinion 26 - O-ring 46 - Support link
7 - Differential flange casing 27 - Side pinion 47 - Lower pin
8 - Flange supporting differential 28 - Seal ring 48 - Constant velocity joint
9 - Adjusting shims 29 - Roller bearing 49 - Roller bearings
10 - Differential flange casing 30 - Pin 50 - Seeger ring
11 - Differential lock control lever 31 - Seeger ring 51 - Cross velocity joint
12 - Axle shaft 32 - Cap 52 - Seeger ring
13 - Roller bearing 33 - Spacer 53 - Spacer
14 - Seal ring 34 - O-ring 54 - Coupling
15 - Tapered roller bearing 35 - Ball bearing 55 - Contrate Coupling
16 - Shoulder ring 36 - Wheel shaft 56 - Ball bearing
17 - Dust cover 37 - Spider pin casing 57 - Shoulder ring
18 - Upper pin 38 - Ball bearing 58 - Crown wheel
19 - Adjusting shims 39 - Dowel pin 59 - Tapered roller bearing
20 - Fork 40 - Flange
173

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
For 110
1 - Axle body 21 - Valve 41 - Brake discs

2 - Crown wheel 22 - Cover 42 - Counter disc
3 - Differential half casing 23 - Flange 43 - O-ring
4 - Shoulder ring 24 - Epicyclic reduction gear 44 - Brake piston
5 - Spider pin 25 - O-ring 45 - Support link
26 - Side pinion 46 - Lower pin
6
7 -- Differential
Side pinion flange casing 27 - Seal ring 47 - Constant velocity joint
8 - Flange supporting differential 28 - Roller bearing 48 - Roller bearings
9 - Adjusting shims 29 - Pin 49 - Seeger ring
10 - Differential flange casing 30 - Seeger ring 50 - Cross velocity joint
11 - Differential lock control lever 31 - Cap 51 - Seeger ring
12 - Axle shaft 32 - Spacer 52 - Spacer
13 - Roller bearing 33 - O-ring 53 - Coupling
14 - Seal ring 34 - Ball bearing 54 - Coupling
15 - Roller bearing 35 - Wheel shaft 55 - Contrate coupling
16 - Shoulder ring 36 - Spider pin casing 55 - Ball bearing
17 - Dust cover 37 - Ball bearing 56 - Shoulder ring
18 - Upper pin 38 - Dowel pin 57 - Crown wheel
19 - Adjusting shims 39 - Flange. 58 - Tapered roller bearing
20 - Fork 40 - Oil drain cap
174

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
Referr tocros
Refe tocross
s se
sect
ctio
ion
n onpag
onpagee 17
173
3 fo
forr mo
mode
dels
ls 15
1500 an
and
d FORK BEARINGS PRELOAD
130 (page 174 for models 110) and reassemble the ADJUSTMENT
hub by reversing the order of disassembly, complying
with the following. After having assembled the various componen
components
ts as
— If previously disassembled, proceed to assemble de, scribed in “Reassembly” proceed to measure the
the constant velocity joint. To facilitate the posi- fork end-float by strictly following the procedure be-
tioning of the needles of bearing 49
bearing 49 (48),
(48), it is low.
good practice to lay a coat of the grease prescri-
bed on the bush containing them.
—
Use the grease prescribed to lubricate tapered NOTE
roller bearings 15
bearings 15 of of fork 20
fork 20,, and position shoul- When using shim package, pack several shims into
der rings 16
rings 16 and
and dust cover 17. 17 . one: e.g. it is better to use a shim 0.2
shim 0.2 mm (0.0078
mm (0.0078 in)
— When inserting axle shaft 22
shaft 22,, take care not to da- thick instead of two 0.1
two 0.1 mm (0.0039
mm (0.0039 in) thick.
mage roller bearing 13
bearing 13 and
and seal ring 14
ring 14..
Enclencher correctement I’éxtremité du demi-
axe 12
axe 12 sur
sur les planétaires 57
planétaires 57 (58)
(58) différentiel. - 1. Apply the magnetic base support N. 5.9030.267.0
Insert the end of axle shaft 12
shaft 12 correctly
correctly onto with centesimal comparator N. 5.9030.272.0 on the
crown wheels 57
wheels 57 (58).
(58). Verify that the axle shaft axle,
axl e, and pla
place
ce the rel
relate
ated d pro
probe
be pe
perpe
rpend
ndicu
icular
larly
ly wit
with
h
rotates freely. resp
re spec
ectt to lo
lowe
werr pi
pin,
n, in pr
prox
oxim
imit
ity
y to th
the
e ce
cent
ntre
re,, an
andd re
re--
— After having installed the bearings and dust co- set it.
ver, fit fork 20
fork 20 set
set a shim (0.5
(0.5 mm; 0.0196 in 2. By means of lever 1, 1 , move the fork completely up-
thick) underneath lower pin 47 pin 47 (46)
(46) and by wards (as shown in the figure), and read the backlash
means of a hammer insert the pin. Tighten the value on the comparator.
screws. 3. Unscre
Unscrew w screw
screwss 2, an
and d rem
removethe
ovethe shishims
ms fro
fromm pa
pac-
c-
— Insert under the upper pin 18pin 18 a a shim package kage 3
kage 3 so as to remove the backlash without preloa-
greater than that removed. Insert the pin and ding the bearings.
tighten the screws.
— Replace O-rings 44
O-rings 44 (43)
(43) of brake control piston
45 (44)
45 (44) and refit piston into its seat with the oil
slots pointing outwards. CAUTION
— Install counter disk 43
disk 43 (42)
(42) disks 42
disks 42 (41)
(41) and, Gradually reduce the backlash by repeating the
only for 150 - 130), intermediate disk 23 23,, cou- reading with comparator each time, so as not to
pling with the marks made on disassembly. preload the bearings.
— Mount the epicyclic reduction gear 25 (24)
25 (24) hol-
ding axle shaft as shown in the following figure,
levering outwards with cross journal 1 to prevent 4. Once the backlash has been removed, remove the
axle shaft moving inwards. shim package 0.10 to 0.15 mm (0.0039 to 0.0059)
thickness, so that the correct bearing preload can be
obtained.
5. Tighten screws 2
screws 2 and
and 4
4 to
Tightening torque
Screw securing fork pin
Refer to: GENERAL

Instructions for tightening
1 - Constant velocity joint cross journal
175


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
1 - Lever
2
3 -- Screws
Shim package
4 - Screws
5 - 0.5 mm (0.0196 in) shim
6. After having correctly performed the adjustment,

check that the tapered bearings of shaft rotate freely
into their seats although a slight preload can be sen-
sed.
EPICYCLIC REDUCTION GEAR
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION
Always use a light alloy hammer or punch when
1. Rem
Remove
ove the ep
epicy
icycli
clic
c red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gear
ar fro
from
m fro
front
nt axl
axle
e
(refer to: Hub - Disassembly).
2. Referring to Diagrams on pages 173 and 174, uns-
crew
cre w thenine scr
screws
ews sec
securi
uring
ng the fla
flang
nge
e 24 (2
(23)
3) of th
the
e
reduction
reduct ion ge
gear,
ar, anandd rem
remove
ove the fla flange
nge its
itself
elf,, an
andd
shims undernea
underneath. th.
3. Rest epic
epicyclic
yclic reduction
reduction gea gear
r 1 on two wooden
blocks as shown in the diagram and by means of a
pres
pr esss an
and
d a pu
puncnch h ac
actt on th
the
e ce
cent
ntre
re of sp spid
ider
er by po poin
in--
ting outwards until withdrawing spider spider 2, bearing 3,
and seal ring 4
ring 4 downwards.
NOTE
Shoul
Sh ould
d lea
leaks
ks occ
occur
ur thr
throu
ough
gh sea
seall rin
ring
g 4, th
this
is canbe re
re--
moved by withdrawing it from its seat, without extrac-
ting spider. Replace seal ring 4
ring 4 each time it is remo-
ved, since this operation damages it seriously.
4. If
required, replace bearings
bearings 3 and
and 5, and tap on
them with a hammer and punch until they are remo-
ved.
1 - Epic
Epicyclic
yclic reductio
reduction
n gear 4 - Seal ring
2 - Spider 5 - Bearing
3 - Bearing
176


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
5. Withdrawpins 1 securing side pinions

pins pinions 2; remove 2. Examine the conditions of ring surfaces and rolling
side pinions and needle bearings 3.
bearings 3. elements
eleme nts che
checki
cking
ng for scra
scratch
tches,
es, pri
prints
nts,, gri
grind
nding
ing
signs due to scoring generated by foreign matter. Re- Re-
3. Use a very fine abrasive paper to smooth the outer
surfac
sur face
e of the int
intern
ernal
al ge
gear
ar on whi
which
ch the O-r
O-ring
ing ma
mates
tes;;
clean with compressed air.
REASSEMBLY
1 - Pins
2 - Side pinions
3 - Needle bearings

Before examining the components, thoroughly wash
them with appropriate solvents, and dry them imme-
diately after with compressed air.
PINS AND GEARS

1. Ch
Chec
eck
k fo
forr da
dama
mage
ges
s of sp
spid
ider
er pi
pin
n su
surfa
rface
ces
s an
and
d th
thei
eir
r
seats on epicyclic reduction gears. If slightly dama-
ged, smooth the surfaces using a very fine abrasive
paper. In presence of serious damage, replace the
1 - Inter
Internal
nal ball bearing
pins.
2 - Side pinion
2. Verify that all teeth are not worn or damaged, and
3 - Needles
that all teeth work along the whole surface; if not so, 4 - Epicyclic reduction gear casing
replace the worn components. 5 - Outer ball bearing
3. In the event of gears with splintered teeth, replace 6 - Seal ring
them
them,, an
andd ch
chec
eckk th
that
at th
the
e ge
gear
ars
s th
they
ey me
mesh
sh wi
with
th ar
are
e no
nott 7 - Pin securing side pinions
damaged. 8 - Flange
9 - Screws securing flange
10 - Shims
11 - Spider
BEARINGS
1. Examine the bearings carefully by letting them ro- Refer to the cross section and reassemble the epicy-
epicy -
tate
tate slo
slowly
wly;; che
check
ck for vib
vibrat
ration
ion,, no
noiseor
iseor sli
sligh
ghtt sei
seizin
zing.
g. clic
clic red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gear
ar by rev
revers
ersingthe
ingthe ord
order
er of dis
disass
assem
em--
bly, complying with the following.
177


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
— If previously removed, install bearing 4

bearing 4 on
on spider
11,, taking care to position it in the correct moun-
11
ting direction.
— Install side pinions 2
pinions 2 complete with bearings 3
bearings 3
into spider, directing the cylindrical part of pins 7
towards hub centre.
— Let the side pinion and internal gear teeth coin-
cide without damaging them when inserting spi-
der into epicyclic reduction gear casing 4
casing 4..
—
If previously removed, install bearing 1
bearing 1 using
using a
hammer and a punch by tapping slightly and uni-
formly on outer race.
— Fit a new seal ring 6
ring 6 using
using tool N. 5.9030.638.0,
as shown in the following figure.
— Ensure that hub rotates without sticking, al-
though a slight preload can be sensed. If hub ro-
tates too loose, remove flange 8
flange 8 and a few shims
10..
10
178


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
COUPLE CONIQUE
1 - Flange 21 - Spacer 41 - Spacer

2 - Adjusting shims 22 - Adjusting shim 42 - Seeger ring
3 - Tapered roller bearing 23 - Tapered roller bearing 43 - Shoulder ring
4 - Crown wheel 24 - Shoulder ring 44 - Adjusting shims
5 - Pinion** 25 - Crown wheel 4 5 - Ro d
6 - Pinion* 26 - Shoulder ring 4 6 - Cu p
7 - Dowel pin 27 - Side pinion 47 - Thrust spring
8 - Gasket 28 - Crown wheel 48 - Return spring
9 - Flange supporting differential 29 - Threaded pin 49 - Transmission lever
10 - Tapered roller bearing 30 - Differential lock control lever 50 - Pin
11 - Spacer 31 - O-ring 51 - Fork
12 - Seal ring 32 - Pushrod 52 - Dowel
13 - Flange connecting propeller shaft* 33 - Seeger ring 53 - Differential lock control fork
14 - Shim* 34 - Differential casing flange 54 - Pad
15 - Shim** 35 - Bearing 55 - Spider pin
16 - Flange connectin ing
g propell
lle
er shaft** 36 - Adju
jus
s tin
ting
g shim ims
s 56 - Differentia
iall half
lf--casin
ing
g
17 - Spacer 37 - Differential flange
18 - Fron
Frontt diff
differe
erenti
ntial
al loc
lock
k cont
control
rol tie rod 38 - Diff
Differe
erentia
ntiall lock
lock slee
sleeve
ve
19 - Pin 39 - Contrate coupling * Only for 130, 150
20 - Adjusting shims 40 - Balls ** Only for 110
179


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
DISASSEMBLY 5. Release spring 6

spring 6 from lever 4 and
4 and remove.
6. Withdraw split pin and extract pin 7
pin 7..
7. Extract dowel 3
dowel 3 securing
securing lever 4 to
4 to fork 1
fork 1;; withdraw
CAUTION lever 4, and remove the fork together with the two
Always use a light alloy hammer or punch when pads.
tapping n cast iron components. 8. Extract Seeger ring 2, recover the shims under-
neath, and remove the complete differential unit.
1. Remove the front axle (refer to: Front Driving Axle CAUTION
Take care, not to drop the balls located inside the
Removal and Installation). differential lock control sleeve.
2. 2 Rotate the axle body 90
body 90 so so as to bring the flange
supporting rear differential in vertical position.
3. Unscrew the nuts securing flange supporting diffe- 9. Withdraw rod 5
rod 5..
rential 1
rential 1 to axle body 2
body 2,, and move the flange by tap- 10. Uns
Unscre
crew
w the fou
fourr scr
screws
ews sec
securi
uring
ng fla
flang
nge
e 8,andre-
ping with a hammer. move it tog
move togeth
ether
er wit
with
h the shi
shims
ms un
under
derne
neath
ath by sli
sligh
ghtly
tly
4. Screw two eyebolts 3
eyebolts 3 on
on flange 4
flange 4,, and lift the com- tapping with a hammer.
plete assembly; to facilitate the operation, use of a le-
ver to withdraw the assembly from studs studs 6 and
6 and dowel
pins; remove gasket 7
gasket 7..
1 - Differential lock control fork

1 - Flange supporting differential 2 - Seeger ring
2 - Axle body 3 - Dowel
3 - Eyebolts 4 - Transmission lever
4 - Flange connecting propeller shaft
5 - Differential 5
6 -- Rod
Return spring
6 - Studs 7 - Pin
7 - Gasket 8 - Flange
180


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
11. Repea
Repeatt the op
opera
eratio
tion
n of the pre
previo
vious
us ste
step
p for — Only for 110
flange 1
flange 1,, and remove shims 2
shims 2..
12. Using a suitable puller, extract tapered roller bea- Secure flange 4
flange 4 on
on a vice; remove split pin, and uns-
ring 3
ring 3,, then extract differential casing 4
casing 4.. crew
cre w nu
nutt 12 with shou
shoulder
lder ring 13
13,, th
thencarr
encarryy ou
outt di
disa
sas-
s-
sembly as described for the models 150-130 taking
into
into ac
acco
coununtt th
that
at in th
the
e mo
modedels
ls 11
110 0 a sp
spac
acer
er 15
15 is alalso
so
present.
1 - Flange
2 - Shims
13. Remove the flange connecting the propeller shaft

1 - Pinion
— Only for 150-130 2 - Flange supporting differential
(1) Secure flange 8
flange 8 on
on a vice, unscrew screw 11
screw 11,, and 4 - Spacer
withdraw washer 10 and 10 and shoulder ring 9
ring 9.. 5 - Tapered roller bearing
6 - Spacer
(2) Remove the flange from the vice, and withdraw it
7 - Seal ring
from tang of pinion 1
pinion 1 by
by tapping with a hammer. 8 - Flange connecting propeller shaft
(3)) Us
(3 Usee a wowood oden
en ma
mallllet
et to ta
tap
p on ta
tang
ng of pi
pini
nion
on 1, an
andd 9 - Shoulder ring
extrac
ext ractt thepinio
thepinion n tog
togeth
ether
er wit
with
h inn
inner
er rac
racee of be
beari
aring
ng 3, 10 - Washer
spacer 4, 4 , and shim rings. 11 - Screw
(4) Remove seal ring 7, 7, spacer
spacer 6 and inner rage of 12 - Castle nut
bearing 5
bearing 5 from flange supporting differential 2
differential 2.. 13 - Shoul
Shoulder
der ring
(5) If required, remove the outer races of bearings 3 14 - Flange connecting propeller shaft
and 5 by tap tappin
ping
g on rac
races
es the
themse
mselve
lvess wit
withh a lig
light
ht all
alloy
oy 15 - Spacer
16 - Pinion tang
hammer and punch.
14. Secure the differential casing on a vice fitted with

protective jaws, unscrew the twelve screws securing
NOTE crown whee
wheell 1 to diffe
differenti
rential
al casin
casing
g 3, an
and
d re
remo
moveve th
the
e
Behind the outer race of bearing 3, are located the
shims for adjusting the pinion-crown wheel position. crown wheel.
181


FRONT DRIVING AXLE
15. Unscrew the twelve screws securing flange 2 to

half-casing 4; remremoveove fla
flang
nge
e 2 wit
with
h cro
crown
wn whe
wheelel 3 and
shoulder ring 1
ring 1..
16. Use a hammer and a punch to remove lock pin 4
securing pin 3
pin 3 of
of the side pinions; tap on pin and with-
draw
dra w it, the
thenn rem
removeside
oveside pipinio
nions
ns 2, andshou
andshoulde
lderr rin
rings
gs
1.
17. With
Withdraw
draw crown wheewheell 5, an
andd th
the
e sh
shou
ould
lder
er ri
ring
ng un
un--
derneath.
1 - Crown wheel
1 - Shoulder ring
2 - Side pinions
3 - Spider pin
4 - Lock pin

Before examining the components, provide to wash
them thoroughly with the appropriate solvents, and
dry them immediately after with compressed air. In
particular, remove any traces of sealant or previous
gaskets; then visually check for any damage to the
surface.
FLANGE SUPPORTING DIFFERENTIAL
1. Verify that the support flange is free from cracks or

splinters.
2. In pa
parti
rticul
cular,
ar, che
check
ck for go
good
od con
condi
ditio
tion
n of out
outer
er rin
rings
gs
of both pinion shaft and differential casing tapered
1 - Shoulder ring bearings.
2 - Differential casing flange 3. Che
Check
ck tha
thatt the thr
threa
eads
ds of sec
securi
uring
ng ho
holes
les are no
nott da
da--
3 - Crown wheel maged.
4 - Half-casing
182
Tractor Manuals Scotland Please Do Not Copy

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
CROWN WHEEL AND PINION

1. Check for noise or seizing signs in the pinion shaft bearings by letting them rotate freely. If in order there should
be no noise.
2. Verify that both teeth are free from dents, seizing, or excessive wear. In presence of broken teeth, replace the
crown wheel and pinion.
3. Verify that the teeth of bevel pinion works uniformly on the whole surface.
NOTE
Since the spare crown wheel and pinion assembly is supplied in pairs, replacement of one component only is not
possible. Check that the crown wheel and pinion assembly to be installed has the same coupling reference desi-
gnations marked on crown wheel and pinion respectively.
DIFFERENTIAL CASING
1. Check for noise or seizing signs of bearings by letting them rotate slowly.
2. Vis
Visua
ually
lly che
check
ck tha
thatt the tee
teeth
th of ge
gears
ars,, sid
side
e pi
pinio
nions,
ns, andcrown whe
wheels
els are fre
free
e fro
from
m sig
signs
ns of sei
seizin
zing,
g, an
and
d tha
thatt the
they
y
work un
work unifo
iforml
rmly,
y, no
noise
iseles
lessly
sly an
and
d wit
witho
hout
ut exc
excess
essive
ive ba
backl
cklash
ash on the who
whole
le sur
surfac
face.
e. If req
requir
uired
ed,, rep
replac
lacee the dif
differ
feren
en--
tial casing taking care, in this case, to replace also the tapered bearings.
3. Che
Check
ck for goo
goodd con
condit
ditionof
ionof bot
both
h rin
rings
gs an
and
d rol
rollin
ling
g ele
eleme
ment
nt sur
surfac
faces
es ma
makin
king
g sur
sure
e tha
thatt the
theyy arefree fro
from
m sig
signs
ns of ir-
regular wear, grinding, due to scoring, seizing, or overheating. Replace the damaged components taking into ac-
count that the bearings must be replaced in pairs.
REASSEMBLY
1 - Flange 9 - Shoulder ring 17 - Flange

2 - Shims 10 - Shims 18 - Ball bearing
3 - Fl
Flan
ange
ge su
supp
ppor
orti
ting
ng di
diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al 11 - Di
Diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al lo
lock
ck co
cont
ntro
roll sl
slee
eeve
ve 19 - Di
Diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al ca
casi
sing
ng fl
flan
ange
ge
4 - Tapered roller bearing 12 - Ball 20 - Crown wheel
5 - Crown wheel 13 - Differential lock coupling sleeve 21 - Side pinion
6 - Differential half-casing 14 - Seeger ring 22 - Shoulder ring
7 - Dowel 15 - Adjusting shims
8 - Spider pin 16 - Spacer
183

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
Reassemble the differential casing by reversing the (4) Remove shims accordingly, from one side or the
order of disassembly, complying with the following. other
oth er of the fla
flang
ngee sup
suppor
portin
ting
g be
beari
aring
ngs,s, un
until
til ob
obtai
tainin
ning
g
a bac
backla
klash
sh val
value
ue of 0.03
0.03 to 0.0.04
04 mm (0.0011
(0.0011 to
0.0015 in). Repeat the measurement until the correct
value is obtained.
— Before reassembling the components, lubricate — Remove the differential casing from the flange
them with the grease prescribed. supporting differential, and mount the pinion as-
— Replace all gaskets, seal rings, and O-rings. sembly complete, with all components, taking
— Tighten the following screws to the prescribed care to position the same shim package 12
package 12 rere-
torque. moved on disassembly. Verify manually that the
pinion rotates freely without backlash. If required,
change the number of shims 12
shims 12;; if pinion rotates
too loose, remove shims, add shims in the oppo-
Tightening torque site case.
Screws
Scre ws sec
securin
uring
g flang
flange
e to diffe
different
rential
ial half-
half-casi
casing
ng
118 Nm
(12 Kgm; 86.76 ft lb)
Screws securing crown wheel to differential ca-

sing
11,3 ÷ 11,8 Nm
(11,5 ÷ 12 Kgm; 83.15 to 86.76 ft lb)
—
Refer to the cross section, and carry out reas-
sembly taking care, when reassembling the diffe-
rential casing on support flange 3
flange 3,, to house roller
bearing 4
bearing 4 on
on the side of crown wheel 5 5,, and ball
bearing 18
bearing 18 on
on the opposite side.
— Proceed to adjust the differential casing bearings
(1) Together with flanges 1 and 17, position a number

of shi
shims
ms gre
greate
aterr tha
thann tha
thatt me
measu
asured
red on dis
disass
assemb
embly.ly.
(2) Ref
Refer
er to thefollo
thefollowinwing g dia
diagra
gramm an
andd po
posit
sitionmagn
ionmagne- e-
tic bas
basee No. 5.9
5.903
030.2
0.267.
67.00 on theflang
theflangee sup
suppoportin
rting
g the
diff
differ
eren
enti
tial
al wiwith
th th thee pr prob
obee of th the
e co comp
mpararat
ator
or
5.903
5.9 030.2
0.272.
72.00 on theoute
theouterr sur
surfac
face
e of thecrown whewheel.el.
(3) Reset the comparator, and with the aid of a lever,
move the diffe
different
rential
ial casi
casing
ng meas
measurin
uringg the back
backlash
lash..
1 - Pinion
3 - Flange supporting differential
4 - Spacer
5 - Tapered bearing
6 - Spacer
7 - Seal ring
9 - Shoulder ring
10 - Washer
11 - Screw
12 - Adjusting shims
13 - Spacer
15 - Shoul
Shoulder
der ring
16 - Castle nut
— Proceed to adjust the pinion-crown wheel position

(refer to: Pinion-Crown Wheel Position Adjust-
ment).
184

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
PINION-CROWN WHEEL POSITION 2. According to the sign, add or subtract the value
ADJUSTMENT marked on the contour of pinion tooth, up to the value
given in the table “Pin-ion - Crown Wheel” (refer to:
Technical Data Specifications - Checks and Adjust-
CAUTION ments).
Adju
Ad just
stme
ment
nt is to be pe
perf
rfor
orme
med
d on
only
ly if th
the
e pi
pini
nion
on or
the bearings have been replaced, by operating as
per the following procedure. On the contrary, use
the same
sam
nents aree being
shim
shim reassembled.
packa
package,
ge, if the ori
origin
ginal
al com
compo-
po- Example
Value read in the table 5 mm

1. Use feeler gauge 1
gauge 1 to
to measure the distance D bet-
ween pinion head 2
head 2 and
and spider pin on differential ca- Value read on contour of pinion tooth 0,10 mm
sing 3
sing 3..
Correct adjustment value 4,9 mm
3. Compare the value thus calculated with those cal-

culated with feeler gauge: if the measured value is
greater, increase shim package 4
package 4 and
and viceversa. Re-
peat
peat the memeasu
asurem
remen
entt unt
untilil ob
obtai
tainin
ning
g the cor
correc
rectt
value.
4. Mount the magnetic base support N. 5.9030267.0
with centesimal comparator N. 5.9030.272.0 onto dif-
ferential casing, and place the probe perpendicularly
with respect to one tooth of crown wheel.
1 - Feeler gauge
2 - Pinion head
3 - Spider pin
4 - Shims
185

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
5. Block pin
Block pinionrotat
ionrotation
ion,, an
and
d rot
rotate
ate thecrown whe
wheel
el rea
readin
dingg on com
compar
parato
atorr thebackl
thebacklashvaluebetwe
ashvaluebetween en pin
pinionteeth
ionteeth
and those of crown wheel
6. Verify that the measure value is within the values given in the table “Pinion-Crown Wheel” (refer to: Technical
Data and Specifications" - Checks and Adjustments") for the model of tractor in Question.
7. If thebackl
thebacklashis
ashis gre
greate
ater,
r, mov
movee theshimsfrom pa
packa
ckagge 1 to pack
package
age 2, and vicev
viceversa.
ersa.Repe
Repeat
at the mea
measurem
surement
ent
until the correct value is obtained.
1 - Shim package
2 - Shim package
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM
GENERAL FEATURES
The di
The diff
ffer
erenenti
tial
al lo
lock
ck sy
syststem
em is cocomp
mpos osed
ed of a sl
slid
idin
ing
g sl
slee
eeve
ve,, op
oper
erat
ated
ed ththro
roug
ugh h a fo
fork
rk th
that
at is co
contntro
roll
lled
ed by le
leve
vers
rs on
the
the ax
axle
le.. Th
Thee sl
slee
eeve
ve,, du
duee to a fr
fron
ontt cl
claw
aw co
coup
upli
ling
ng,, ma
make
kes s th
the
e tw
twoo ax
axle
le sh
shaf
afts
ts in
into
to a si
sing
nglele un
unitit wh
whic
ich
h di
disc
scha
harg
rges
es th
thee
power on the wheel that grips, thus facilitating tractor motion on mud or friable terrains.
This
Th is sy
syst
stemem is ve
very
ry si
simp
mple le,, an
and
d ca
cann be ad
adju
just
sted
ed ththro
roug
ughh tw
twoo sh
shim
im pa
packckag
ages
es.. It is ma
madede in
into
to a si
sing
ngle
le un
unit
it wi
with
th th
the
e di
dif-
f-
ferential assembly through a splined sleeve and a Seeger ring. The control to the outer levers is given by a tie rod
thatt can be op
tha opera
erated
ted fro
from
m the cabcab,, whi
which
ch pe
permi
rmitsts bot
bothh fro
front
nt an
andd rea
rearr dri
drive
ve dif
differ
ferent
ential
ials
s to be blo
blocke
cked d sim
simult
ultan
aneo
eous-
us-
ly.
186

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
DISASSEMBLY 6. Withdraw rod 10

rod 10,, and if required, disassemble the
unit, by unscrewing fork 12
fork 12 and
and locknut 11
locknut 11,, then reco-
1. Remove the differential assembly from the axle ver cups 8
cups 8 and
and spring.
body (refer to: Crown Wheel and Pinion - steps 1 1.. to 7. Remove Seeger ring 7, and withdraw pushrod 5
4.). outwards, recovering O-ring 6
O-ring 6..
2. Release spring 13
spring 13 from
from lever 4
4 and remove it.
3. Withdraw the split pin and extract pin 14 pin 14..
4. Extract dowel 3
dowel 3 securing
securing lever 4 to
4 to fork 1
fork 1;; withdraw
lever 4, and remove the fork together with the two
pads. CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS
5. Extract Seeger ring 2
ring 2 recovering
recovering the shims under- Thoroughly clean the components using the appro-
neath,
nea th, an
andd rem
remove
ove the dif
differ
feren
entia
tiall loc
lockk sys
systemassem
temassem-- priate
priate sol
solven
vent,
t, an
and
d che
check
ck the rol
rollin
ling
g sur
surfac
faces
es an
and
d spl
spli-
i-
bly. ned section toothing. Should cracks, deformation
deformations,
s, or
excessive
exce ssive wear be pres present,
ent, replace the dama
damaged
ged
CAUTION components.
Take care not to drop the balls located inside the Verify also that all control system components, and in
differential lock control sleeve. particular the spring and rod, are in good condition.
REASSEMBLY AND ADJUSTMENT

1. If previously disassembled, assemble the differen-
tial lock unit, positioning balls 3
balls 3 between
between sleeve 2
sleeve 2 and
and
coupling 1
coupling 1..
NOTE
The number of balls, changes according to the mo-
dels, as shown in the following table.
Model 150 110, 130
Ball number 19 18
2. Position shoulderr ring

shoulde ring 8, and fit spacer
spacer 4, then
mount all shims 7
shims 7,, and shoulder ring 6 ring 6 on
on Seeger ring
5 side; refit this last.
3. By means of a feeler gauge, verify that, the bac-
klash of spacer 4 is
4 is within 0
within 0 to 0.05 mm (0mm (0 to 0.0019
in).
4. Move slee
sleeveve 2 an
andd vis
visuaually
lly ver
verifyify tha
thatt the sle
sleeveflat
eveflat
surface 9
surface 9 is
is in contact with balls 3
balls 3..
5. If not remove Seeger ring 5 5,, shoulder ring
ring 6, and
move the 0.02
the 0.02 mm (0.0007
mm (0.0007 in) shim package from its
initial position and place them in front of spacer 4. spacer 4.
6. Reinstall the components, and repeat the verifica-
tion described at step 4step 4.. Repeat operation of step 5 step 5..
until obtaining the correct position of sleeve 2 sleeve 2..
1 - Differen
Differential
tial lock
lock cont.
cont. fork
fork 9 - Thrust
Thrust spring
spring
2 - Seeger ring 10 - Rod
3 - Dowel 11 - Locknut CAUTION
4 - Tr
Tran
ansm
smis
iss
sio
ionn le
lev
ver 12 - For
orkk Sleeve 2 must always slide freely both in the cou-
5 - Pushrod 13 - Return spring pling and decoupling phases.
6 - O-ring 14 - Pin
7 - Seeger ring
8 - Cup
187

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
1 - Fork
2 - Locknut
3 - Thrust spring
4 - Cup
5 - Rod
6 - O-ring
7 - Pushrod
1 - Contrate coupling
2 - Sleeve
3 - Balls
4 - Spacer
5 - Seeger ring 10. Co
Compl
mplete
ete rea
reasse
ssemb
mbly
ly by rev
revers
ersing
ing the ord
order
er of di-
6 - Shoulder ring sassembly.
7 - Adjusting shims 11. After having reconnected the front axle to vehicle,
8 - Shoulder ring procee
pro ceed d to ad
adjus
justt the dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial loc
lock
k con
contro
troll by op
opera
era--
9 - Flat mating surface ting as follows.
(1) Ensure that the rear differential lock control is cor-
rectly adjusted (refer to: Gears - P.T.O. and Differen-
tial Unit - Differential Lock System).
7. If previously disassembled, reassemble rod 5 with
rod 5 with (2) Withdraw the split pin and remove pin 4 4..
cups 4 and spring 3
cups 4 spring 3 then screw locknut 2
locknut 2 and fork 1
fork 1,, (3) Bring lever 6 in 6 in contact with pushrod 7
pushrod 7..
until
un til obtaini
obtaining
ng dim
dimen
ensio
sion
n L = 96 mm (3. (3.78
78 in) as (4) Centre the hole of fork 2 fork 2 onto lever 1, 1 , eliminating
shown in the figure. the backlash between tie rod 3 rod 3 and lever 6, 6 , and bet-
8. Ve
Verirify
fy th
that
at th
the
e di
dist
stan
ance
ce “L
“L1"
1" be
betw
twee
een n th
the
e ax
axis
is of th
the
e ween fork 2
fork 2 and
and hole of lever 1. 1 .
pin on fork 1
fork 1 and
and the resting plane of spring 3
spring 3 is
is 128 ± (5) Onc
Once e the
thesese op opera
eratio
tions
ns hahaveve bebeen
en carcarrie
riedd ou
outt
0.5 mm (5.04 ± 0.0196 in). screw
scr ew fur
furthe
therr for
forkk 2 by on
one e tu
turn
rn so asto pr prel
eloa
oad d th
the
e in
in--
9. Refit push
pushrod
rod 7 wi
with
th a ne
new
w O-
O-ri
ring
ng 6, th
then
en in
inse
sertrt pu
pus-
s- nerr spr
ne spring
ing of the dev device
ice;; the
thenn tig
tighte
hten n loc
locknu
knutt 5, anandd re
re--
hrod 5
hrod 5.. fit pin 4
pin 4..
1 - Transmission lever
2 - Fork
3
4 -- Tie
Pin rod
5 - Locknut
6 - Lever
7 - Pushrod
188

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
TOE-IN CHECK
1. Placethe vehicle on a level surface with the stee- (2) Re

(2) Repe
peat
at th
the
e sa
same
me op
opererat
atio
ions
ns on th
the
e ot
othe
herr si
side
de of ti
tie
e
ring whe
ring wheel
el in cen
centra
trall pos
positi
ition
on,, an
and
d usi
using
ng a sui
suitab
table
le cal
cali-
i- rod, and remove tie rod 5
rod 5..
per, measure the distances A and B on a horizontal (3) Loosen locknuts 4
locknuts 4 and
and screw or unscrew both ball
plane
point ofpassing through the wheel axes in the same
wheel rim. joints
joints 3
ten or 3 by
by the same
lengthen number of
the distance turns, inthe
between order to shor-
centres of
pins and ball joints by such a quantity to restore the
correct toe-in value.
(4) Tigh
Tighten
ten lock
locknuts
nuts 4 an
andd in
inst
stal
alll ti
tie
e ro
rod
d 5 by rever
reversing
sing
the order of removal.
1 - Split pin
2 - Castle nut
2. 2. Rotate the wheel by a half turn and repeat the 3 - Ball joint
previo
pre vious
us op
opera
eratio
tionsns to enensur
sure
e tha
thatt whe
wheel
el rim is no nott de- 4 - Locknut
formed. 5 - Tie rod
3. If the difference A-B between the two measures is
not within the values given in the table “Driving Axle
Assembly” (refer to: Technical Data and Specifica-
tions
tio ns Che
Checks
cks an
and d Adj
Adjust
ustme
ments
nts)) for the mo
mode
dell of tra
tracto
ctor
r
in question, carry out the adjustment by operating as
follows.
(5) Repeat the operations described until obtaining
(1)) Re
(1 Remomove
ve sp
splilitt pi
pin
n 1
1,, un
unsc
scre
rew
w nunutt 2 an
and
d by me
mean anss of
the correct toe-in value.
the app
approp
ropria
riate
te pul
pullerler,, dis
discon
connec
nectt the pinof baballll joi
joint
nt 3.
189

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
1. Pl
Plac
ace
e th
the
e ve
vehi
hicl
cle
e on a le
leve
vell su
surfa
rface
ce wi
with
th th
the
e wh
whee
eels
ls
straight,
straigh t, the
thenn swi
switch
tch on the en engin
gine
e andturn thewheel
thewheels s
to th
the
e ri
righ
ghtt or to th
the
e le
left
ft un
unti
till th
the
e re
rear
ar pr
proj
ojec
ecti
tion
on of in
inne
ner
r
for
fork,
k,th
with
with with
wit
theehax
respec
res
lepect
axle t to
or,, fo
or for the
r th
the steeri
ste
e mo ering
mode ng15
dels
ls direct
dir
150-ection
0-13 ion,
130- , is0in
0-11
110 contac
con
with
wi tact
th sp a-t
spa-
cer 2 (where
2 (where present according with the wheel types),
on the rear side of axle.
1 - Locknut
2 - Adjusting screw
3 - Front projection clamping fork
1 - Rear projection clampling fork

2 - Spacer 3. Steerthe wheels to the opposite direction, and re-
peat the operations described at steps 1. and 2.
2. Acting on the outer wheel with respect to steering

direction
direc tion,, loos
loosen
en lockn
locknut
ut 1, and posi
position
tion adju
adjusting
sting NOTE
screw 2 in contact with fork front projection 3; tighten Forr the mo
Fo mode
dels
ls 15
150-1
0-130-
30-11
110,a
0,a few spa
spacer
cerss hav
havingdif-
ingdif-
the locknut. ferent thickness (in relation to the tyre dimensional
can be mo moun
unted
ted in ord
order
er to pre
preven
ventt tyr
tyre
e col
collid
liding
ing
against the engine side lids when the axle oscillates
when the whe
when wheels
els are com
comple
pletel
tely
y ste
steere
ered.
d. Fo
Forr the spa
spa--
cer thickness, refer to “Technical Data and Specifica-
tions - Steering Convergence and Range”.
190

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
TECHNICAL DATA
Model
Features
110 130 150
25 km/h
35/50=1/1,4286 34/51=1/1,5000
115.53 mi/h)
Reduc
Red ucti
tion
on gear
gear -
front drive
30 km/h
39/46=1/1,790 37/47=1/1,2703
118.63 mi/h)
Side epicyclic reduction gear (12/12+ 69) = 1/6,7500
25 km/h
Front axle 115.53 mi/h)
Bevel gear 13/34=1/2,6154 13/35=1/2,6927
30 km/h
118.63 mi/h)
25 km/h
1/25,2204 1/27,2595
115.53 mi/h)
Total reduction
30 km/h
1/20,8228 1/23,0852
118.63 mi/h)
25 km/h
1,2824 1,2738 1,2375
115.53 mi/h)
Mec
echa
hani
nic
cal rat
atio
io (No
No.. fron
frontt whe
heel
el
turns/back wheel turns)
30 km/h
1,2887 1,2725 1,2255
118.63 mi/h)
No. of ball bearing mounted on the control sleeve 18 19
Degree of axle swing 10°

Inside wheel 50°
Steering angle
Outside wheel 37° 30’
Radial clearance angle 7°
Angle of tilt 1°
191

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
Complete axle
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
a) Axle play between the shoulder ring and differential

box 0.1 to 0.4 (0.003
(0.0039
9 to 0.0157
0.01571
1
b) Fo
Forkbear
rkbearin
ing
g th
thru
rust
st sh
shim
ims
s “s
“s”” to be re
remo
move
ved
d wh
when
en pl
play
ay
0.10 to 0.15 (0.003
(0.0039
9 to 0.0059
0.00591
1
on gauge is nil
Floating bearings
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
Amount of work tolerance See Fig. a) and b)
192

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
Pinion - Crown gear
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
a) Pin
Pinion
ion pos
positi
ition
on adj
adjust
ustme
ment
nt - cro
crown
wn gea
gear:
r: - dis
distan
tance
ce “D”
5 (0.20)
between pinion head and differential box
b)Coupling
b)Coupling pl
playbetw
aybetwee
een
n te
teet
eth
h of th
thee cr
crow
own
n ge
gear
ar an
and
d th
the
e
0,18 ÷ 0,24 0,17 ÷ 0,23 0,18 ÷ 0,24
pinion
Differential
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
a) Play “G’ between differential box & relative support

0.03 to 0.04 (0.00
(0.0011
11 to 0.001
0.0015)
5)
flange
b) Differential lock device - axle play “g” of spacer 0 to 0.05 (0 to 0.00191
c) Steering rod device of differential lock:

96 (3.781
- “L” distance between faces of spring
- “L1” distance between face of spring and pin axis on

128 ÷ 0,5 (5.04 to 0.019
0.0196)
6)
fork
193
193

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
Toe in and steering angle
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
Toe in check:
0±3
Difference ”A-B”
14.9/13-28 12 -
14.9/13-30 7 7
Steering limit spacer thickness Tyres
16.9/13-30 - 7
16.9/14-24 5 -
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Unit: Nm (Kgm)
Model
Particulars
110 130 150
Differential - bevel gear clamping screws 113÷118 (11,5 ÷ 12)
Bevel pinion clamping nut 225 (23)
Flange screw stock fixing screws 29 (3)

Flange clamping screws for fork 88 (9) 88 (9) 68 ÷ 78 (7 ÷ 8)
- front pin 89 (9,1)

Pin clamp screws floating axle
- rear pin 142 (14,5)
Front engine bearing clamp screws 275 (28)
Hydraulic jack clamp pin 157 (16)
Ball bearing crown nuts 132 (13,5)
Flange propeller shaft clamp screws (1) 49 (5)
Differential half casing clamping screws 113 ÷ 118 (11,5 ÷ 12)
NOTE: before tightening all screws must be cleaned and greased

(1) Add a small amount of Loctite 242 to the nut
194

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
GENERAL PRESCRIPTIONS
Application Type Make Model Q.ty
Fro
ront
nt ep
epic
icy
ycli
lic
c re
redu
duc
cti
tion
on ge
gear
ar Oil AGIP ROTR
TRA
A THT (A
(API
PI - GL
GL3)
3) -
Front differential Oil AGIP ROTRA THT (API - GL3) -

110 - 130 - 150
Bearings and vario
Bearings various
us greas
grease
e
Grease AGIP Grease 30 -
points
Sealants and fixatives
Transm
Transmis
issi
sion
on shaf
shaftt clam
clamp
p
Fixative LOCTITE 242 110 - 130 - 150 -
screws
195

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Number Name Page No.
5.90
5.9030
30.2
.267
67.0
.0 Magn
Magnet
etic
ic ba
base
se
5.90
5.9030
30.2
.270
70.0
.0 Thic
Thickn
knes
ess
s ga
gaug
uge
e
5.90
5.9030
30.2
.272
72.0
.0 Com
Compa
para
rato
tor
r
5.9030
5.9030.61
.618.4
8.4/10
/10 Puller
Puller
5.90
5.9030
30.6
.648
48.0
.0 Seal
Seal ri
ring
ng ru
rubb
bber
er
196

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
Excess
Excessive
ive wea
wearr of uni
univer
versal
sal joi
joints
nts Replac
Replace
e wor
worn
n uni
univer
versal
sal joi
joints
nts
Only use origin

original
al front loads ballas
ballasting
ting
Front axle overloaded
rear of vehicle as well
Too
Too li
litt
ttle
le oi
oill in th
the
e di
diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al un
unit
it Top
Top up an
and
d ch
chec
eck
k th
ther
ere
e ar
are
e no le
leak
aks
s
Noisy running
Change the bevel gear and overhaul the
Pinion - crown - coupling incorrect
differential unit
Change the bevel gear and overhaul the

Bevel gear teeth damaged
differential unit
Diff
Differ
eren
enti
tial
al be
bear
arin
ing
g ho
hous
usin
ing
g wo
worn
rn Chan
Change
ge be
bear
arin
ings
gs
Over pla
Over play
y bet
betwee
ween
n sid
side
e pin
pinion
ion and cro
crown
wn Change sho
Change should
ulder
er rin
rings,
gs, if nec
necess
essary
ary
Noisy pick up
wheel change complete differential box
Seal ring worn Replace worn seal ring

Loss of oil
Oil valve blocked Clean oil valve
Tyres excessively worn Change if necessary

Wheel swing
Stee
Steeri
ring
ng ro
rod
d ba
ball
ll be
bear
arin
ings
gs wo
worn
rn Repl
Replac
ace
e if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y
197

FRONT DRIVING AXLE
PAGE INTENTIONALLY EN BLANC

LEFT BLANC
198
BACK AXLE
CONTENTS
GENERAL
GENERAL FEA
FEATURTURES ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Adjustment of the axle shaft ball
REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 beari
bearing
ng pos
positi
ition
ons
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
DISMOUNTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Track
Track var
variat
iation.
ion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CHECKS
CHECKS AND VER
VERIFI
IFICAT
CATION
IONS.
S. . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Gearr tee
Gea teeth
th an
and
d gro
groove
oves
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
205
5 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Bear
Bearin
ings
gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
205
5 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Bell
Bell ax
axle
le sh
shaf
aftt su
supp
ppor
ortt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
205
5 Gene
General
ral pre
prescr
script
iption
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND
Spring load adjustment of tapered CORRECTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
roll
roller
er be
bear
arin
ing
g 13
130
0 - 15
150
0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
199

BACK AXLE
GENERAL FEATURES
Fixed carriage version
Variable carriage version

For 130 - 150
1 - Reduction gear crown wheel 14 - Air breather valve 29 - Timing case protection
2 - Final reduction gear shaft 15 - Bush 30 - O-ring
3 - Reduction gear and axle shaft 16 - Grease nipple 31 - Axle shafts
clamping screws 17 - Tapered roller bearing 32 - Wheel fixing column
4 - Flange 18 - Spacer 33 - Spacer ring
5 - Shoulder ring 19 - Ball clamp screw 34 - Continual cycle axle shaft
6 - Spider pin 20 - Studs 35 - Spanner
7 - Pin 21 - Washer 36 - Tapered sleeve
8 - Side pinion 22 - Bell supporting axle shaft 37 - Wheel fixing column
9 - Retainer 23 - Dust cover gasket 38 - Wheel hub boss
10 - Fi
Fina
nall re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n ge
gea
ar an
and
d sp
spid
ide
er 24 - In
Inte
tern
rnal
al ta
tap
per
ered
ed ro
roll
ller
er be
bea
ari
ring
ng 39 - Sp
Span
ann
ner
pin housing 25 - O-ring 40 - Clamp screw for tapered sleeve
1
112 -- C
Sialebnint bhloolcdkinhgoaldrm
ing arm 2
26
7 -- F
Slhain
mgse 41 - o
Sfew
ehge
ee
r lrihnugb boss
13 - Nut 28 - Screw lock spacer 42 - Spanner lock pin
200

BACK AXLE
For 110
1 - Final reduction gear 10 - Spider pin clamp pin 19 - Bell fixing screw to brake housing
2 - Reduction crown nut 11 - Spider pin 20 - Support link
3 - Axle shaft reduction clamp screw 12 - Retainer 21 - Protection timing case
4 - Screw lock spanner 13 - Inside ball bearings 22 - Outside ball bearing
5 - Flange 14 - Wheel column fastening 23 - Spacer
6 - Shim 15 - Column substitution cap 24 - Axle shaft
7 - Fin
Final
al re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n si
side
de pi
pini
nion
on ho
hous
usin
ing
g 16 - Ca
Capp fi
fixin
xing
g scr
screw
ew
8 - Shoulder ring 17 - Axle shaft support bell
9 - Side pinion 18 - Washer
The back axle has been designed with particular attention to strength, in order to stand up to the toughest condi-
tions.
Two epicycle reduction gears have been mounted on the inside of the axle shaft bell supports which allow the en-
gine
gine to br
bril
illi
lian
antl
tly
y pe
perf
rfor
orm
m th
the
e pi
pick
ck up ph
phas
ase.
e. Th
The
e pr
pres
esen
ence
ce of th
the
e re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n ge
gear
ars
s al
also
so al
allo
lows
ws a no
nota
tabl
ble
e re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n of
stress on the transmission.
For specific jobs models 150 and 130 are available, on request, with a continual axle shaft track.
These axle shafts allow the back track to be constantly changed quickly and accurately within the field.
201

BACK AXLE
REMOVAL
8. Position a safety gantry under the tank and loosen
the
the th
thir
irte
teen
en nu
nuts
ts an
and
d th
the
e tw
two
o bo
boltlts
s fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e ax
axle
le sh
shaf
aftt
support bells to the differential.
1. Park the vehicle on the flat and disengage gears. 9. Use an adequate means to keep the bell lifted du-
2. Remove the back wheel as follows. ring the removal of the brake housing.
WARNING WARNING
To remove the wheels you need two people. Accurately control that the tractor and the bell
are bal
balan
ance
ced
d in or
order
der to av
avoid
oid os
oscil
cillat
lation
ion dur
during
ing
the removal operation.
(1) Loosen the eight clamp screws of the wheel. 10. Remove the bell taking care to sling it properly.
(2) Position a lever jack under the back axle, and with 11. If necessary, use light taps with a hammer to re-
a wedge of wood lift the tractor. move the crown wheel 1
wheel 1 from
from the brake housing 2.
housing 2.
(3) Remove the wheel from the hub with caution.
(4) Place the safety gentry under the brake housing
and lower the tractor.
3. Put a bowl under the brake housing, unscrew the
cap and drain the brake lubricating oil.
4. Loosen silent block 1
block 1 cabin
cabin fixing nuts.
5. Loos
Loosenen scr
screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the cab
cabinin sup
suppo
port
rt bra
bracke
ckett 2 to
the bell 3
bell 3..
6. Lift the cabin in a sling sufficiently to be able to re-
move the support.
7. Remove the split pin and slip off the pin 4pin 4 fixing
fixing the
stabilizer 5 to
5 to the bell 3.
bell 3.
1 - Crown wheel
2 - Brake housing
1 - Silent block
2 - Cabin support brake
3 - Axle shaft bell support
4 - Pin
5 - Stabilizer
202

BACK AXLE
DISMOUNTING
CAUTION 3. Rem
Remove
ove the epi
epicyc
cycle
le red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gear
ar an
and
d tak
take
e ap
apart
art
Always use a soft metal hammer and punch when as follows:
it is necessary to tap iron parts. (1)) Us
(1 Usin
ing
g a ha
hamm
mmerer an
and
d a pu
punc
nch
h re
remo
move
ve th
the
e fi
fixi
xing
ng pi
pin
n
pivot 1
pivot 1 of
of the side pinion 2.
pinion 2.
1. Screw extractor 5.9030.618.4/10 onto the locking

spacer 1 wit
spacer 1 with
h thehelp of a red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gear
ar if ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y,
and remove the spacer.
1 - Pivot
2 - Side pinion
(2) Slip off the pin and remove the side pinion com-
plete with the retainer and the two shoulder rings.
(3) Remove the tapered bearing for model 150 and
130 and the ball bearing for model 110,using the cor-
rect extractor.
1 - Locking spacer
2. Loosen the screws fixing the spider pin casing 2

2 to
to
the axle shaft. Remove the flange 1
flange 1 and take out the
shim package under it.
1 - Flange 1 - Bearing
2 - Reductor spider pin case 2 - Carriage loader
203

BACK AXLE
4. Using a hoist, lift the bell 1 and remove the axle

shaft 2
shaft 2..
1 - Spacer
2 - O-ring
3 - Axle shaft
4 - External tapered roller bearing
Only for model 110
If necessary, remove the bearing 1

bearing 1 and
and the axle shaft
3 and spacer 2.
2 .
1 - Outside ball bearing

2 - Spacer
3 - Axle shaft
6. Onlyfor models 130 - 150

If necessary remove the outside tracks of the tapered
bearings and the dust cover washers mounted on the
1 - Axle shaft support bell bell.
2 - Axle shaft
Only for model 110

5. Using the correct extractor, remove the axle shaft If ne
neces
cessar
sary y rem
remove
ove the sup
suppo
port
rt lin
link
k 1 fo
foun
und
d on th
the
e ti
tip
p
bearings 4, an
and d if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary,
y, th
the
e sp
spac
acer
er 1 wit
with
h its rel
rela-
a- of the bell.
tive O-ring 2
O-ring 2..
204

BACK AXLE
7. Only for models 130 - 150

If pre
presen
sentt dis
disass
assememble
ble the ste
steep
eples
les cha
changnge
e axl
axle e sha
shaft
ft
from the track working as follows.
(1) Remove the Seeger ring 1.
(2)) Lo
(2 Loos
osen
en th
thee fo
four
ur sc
scre
rews
ws fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e hu
hub
b 2t
2to
o th
the e ta
tape
pe--
red sleeve 3.
(3)) Un
(3 Unsc
scre
rew
w th
the
e tw
two
o sc
scre
rews
ws in th
the
e ho
hole
les
s 4 un
unti
till th
the
e hu
hub
b
comes away from the tapered sleeve.
(4) Remove the hub and the axle shaft jack 5.
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Wheel hub
3 - Tapered sleeve
4 - Holes
5 - Axle shaft
1 - Support link
2. Examine the condition of the surface of all turning

NOTE rings and see that they are not scratched, marked or
Accurately clean all componen
components
ts and visually check have rubbed by foreign bodies. Change all parts that
for worn or damaged parts. are worn.
CAUTION
Only for models 130 and 150
GEAR TEETH AND GROOVES If the tap
taper
ered
ed rol
roller
ler be
beari
aring
ng ca
can
n no lon
longer
ger be us
used,
ed,
change both of them.
1. Check that the gear teeth and serrated shaft teeth
on all edges are in order. If the teeth are irregular or
broken they must be changed. The same check must
be made for both parts. BELL AXLE SHAFT SUPPORT
2. Verify that all the teeth are without cracks, chips or
excess
exc essive
ive wea
wear.r. Cha
Chang
nge
e an
anyy pa
parts
rts tha
thatt aredama
aredamage
ged.
d. 1. Check that the bell is free from cracks and that the
seats of the bearings are not worn or damaged.
2. Verify that the mating surface of the brake housing
is not damaged because of insufficient fixative.
3. Having eliminated these faults, remove any even-
BEARINGS tual
tual de
dent
nts
s wi
with
th a fi
file
le.. If th
ther
ere
e is ex
exce
cess
ssiv
ive
e we
wear
ar re
repl
plac
ace
e
the damaged parts.
1. Exa
Examin
mine
e be
beari
aring
ngs
s car
carefu
efull tur
turnin
ning
g the
them
m slo
slowly
wly.. If the
bearings
bearings are in go
good
od con
condit
dition
ion the
they
y sho
should
uld run smo
smoot-
ot-
hly and not make noise or vibrate.
205

BACK AXLE
REASSEMBLY
For 130 - 150
1 - Wheel attachment flange 19 - Spider pin fixing pin 37 - Differential tapered roller bearing
2 - Dust cover washer 20 - Locating pin 38 - Shims
3 - Spacer 21 - O-ring 39 - Brake disc
4 - Grease nipple 22 - Brake fluid bleeding valve 40 - Middle disc
5 - O-ring 23 - Flange 41 - Brake disc
6 - Outside tapered roller bearing 24 - O-ring 42 - Brake piston
7 - Axle shaft 25 - Differential block rod seat cap 43 - O-ring
8 - Axle shaft support bell 26 - Differential block rod 44 - Oil drain plug
9 - Air breather valve 27 - Differential block fork 45 - Brake drum
10 - Support link 28 - Spacer 46 - Lock washer
11 - In
Insid
side
e ta
tape
pere
red
d ro
rolle
llerr be
bear
arin
ing
g 29 - Di
Diff
ffer
eren
entia
tiall bl
bloc
ock
k fo
fork
rk pi
pin
n ti
tigh
ghte
teni
ning
ng nu
nutt 47 - Fla
Flang
nge
e
12 - Final reduction spider pin casing 30 - Differential box 48 - O-ring
13 - Spider pin 31 - Spider pin fixing pin 49 - Shim
14 - Retainer 32 - Spider pin 50 - Spacer
15
16 -- Nu
Nut
Stutdfi
fixi
sxing
ng be
bell
ll to br
brak
ake
e hou
ousi
sing
ng 3
33
4 -- Po
Port
Finrtab
aable
l rele
ducr
crow
cown
tionn swh
whe
haeftel 51
52 -- Ax
Axle
Fiftle
h sh
shaf
whaft
t lre
ee redu
duct
ctio
ion
n cl
clam
amp
p sc
scre
rew
ws
17 - Side pinion 35 - Side pinion
18 - Crown wheel 36 - Differential block crown wheel
206

BACK AXLE
For 110
1 - O-ring 15 - Spider pin 29 - Final reduction shaft

2 - Flange 16 - Side pinion 30 - Locating pin
3 - O-ring 17 - Final reduction spider pin housing 31 - Shim
4 - Studs 18 - Internal ball bearing 32 - Brake disc
5 - Sc
Scre
rew
w fi
fixi
xing
ng bra
rake
ke ho
hou
usi
sing
ng to ge
gear
arbo
box
x 19 - Ex
Exte
tern
rnal
al ba
ball
ll be
bear
arin
ing
g 33 - Br
Braake ho
hous
usin
ing
g
6 - O-ring 20 - Spacer 34 - Shims
7 - Brake piston 21 - Support link 35 - Differential tapered roller bearing
8 - Brake union 22 - Protection sump 36 - Fifth wheel
9 - O-ring 23 - Wheel bar 37 - Lock pin
10 - Crown wheel 24 - Axle shaft 38 - Rear gearbox
11 - Screw 25 - Reduction fixing screw
1
123 -- A
Rxelteaisnhear ft support bell 2
26
7 -- S
Flhain
mgse
14 - Fifth wheel 28 - Spacer lock
207

BACK AXLE
NOTE
— Accurately wash the bell with solvant and dry with compressed air.
— On reassembly, replace all support links, the washers and O-ring lubricating with prescribed grease.
— Lubricate with a thin laver of prescribed grease, all parts before assembling.
— To make re-assembly easier, it is advisable to apply a thin layer of prescribed grease to the parts in order to
hold them in place.
— Refer to the diagram in question for the correct reassembly order.
Reassemble the axle shaft working in the reverse order to the disassembly as follows:
If necessary, change the felt seal 2

seal 2 mounted
mounted on the bell.
Only for model 110
If necessary change the support link 21

link 21..
— If previously removed reassemble the external bearing on the axle shaft.
CAUTION
To make reassembly of internal and external rings and tapered roller bearings easier on models and, it is
advisable to heat them to a temperature of not more than 100°C (212°F).
— Reassemble the epicyclic controls on the axle shaft taking care that the holes on the shaft are placed pro-
perly to enable the three fixing screws to enter.
— Only for models 130 and 150
Proceed with the adjustment of the tapered bearings 6 6 and
and 11
11..
— Only for model 110
Proceed with the adjustment of the ball bearings 18
bearings 18 and
and 19
19..
Mount a new O-ring 48
O-ring 48 on
on the spacer 50 then
50 then spread the part of the spacer 50
spacer 50 which
which comes in contact with
the axle shaft 7
shaft 7 with
with prescribed sealer.
— Tighten to the prescribed torque the screws fixing the epicyclic reduction gear to the axle shaft.
Tightening torque
— Screws fixing epicyclic reduction gear to axle shaft
96 ÷ 106
106 Nm (9,8 ÷ 10,8 kgm; 70.85
70.85 to 78.08
78.08 ft lb)
59 ÷ 63
63 Nm
Nm (6 ÷ 6,5
6,5 kg
kgm;
m; 43
43.3
.38
8 to
to 47
47 ft
ft lb)
lb)
INSTALLATION
Remountt the sup
Remoun suppor
portt be
bellll on the tra
tracto
ctorr wo
worki
rking
ng in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order
er to tha
thatt of dis
dismou
mounti
nting
ng kee
keepin
ping
g in min
mind
d the fol
follo
lo--
wing.
— Spread the two faces on the crown wheel with prescribed sealer and mount.
— Tighten to the prescribed torque the screws fixing the bell to the brake housing.
Tightening torque
Screw fixing axle shaft support bell to the brake housing
130 Nm (13 kgm;
kgm; 93.99
93.99 ft-lb)
88 Nm (9 kgkgm;
m; 65
65.07
.07 ft-
ft-lb)
lb)
Top up the differential oil to the correct level using the prescribed oil.
208

BACK AXLE
SPRING LOAD ADJUSTMENT OF 3. Remove the screws and the flange 1 underneath
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING and measure with an internal gauge, the existing dis-
For 130 - 150 tance “X” between the flat of the spacer 2
spacer 2 and
and that of
Before final mounting of the spacers with the sealant the flange 1
flange 1..
carry out the loading of the bearings scrupulously fol-
lowing the instructions given below:
NOTE
Forr 13
Fo 130
0 an
andd 15
1500 of th
the
e su
supp
ppor
ortt be
bear
arin
ing
g ar
are
e of th
the
e ta
tape
pe--
red roller type.
It is al
alwa
ways
ys be
bett
tter
er to us
use
e a la
larg
rger
er sh
shimim pa
pack
ckag
agee a sm
smal
al--
ler one for the adjustment. E.G. One shim of 0.2
of 0.2 mm
(0.0078 in) is better than two of 0.1
0.1 mm (0.0039
mm (0.0039 in).
1. Fixthe axle shaft 6

shaft 6 in
in a vertical position and block
the ro
the rota
tatition
on wi
with
th th
the
e co
corre
rrect
ct to
tool
ol.. Fi
Fix
x th
the
e su
supp
ppor
ortt 5, th
the
e
reduction group 1 and the spacer
spacer 4 complete with
O-ring on the axle shaft 6. Apply Hylomar or similar
6. Apply
sealan
sea lantt be
betwe
tween
en the axl
axle
e sha
shaftft an
and d the spa
spaces
ces.. Mou
Mountnt
the
clic flange 3
flange 3 and
reduction and tighten
gear to thethe screws
screws 2
axle shaft 2 fixing
to fixing the epicy-
the torque of 5
Nm (0.5 kgm; 3.615 ft lb). 1 - Flange
2 - Spacer
2. Tur
Turnn the sup
suppoport
rt ab
abou
outt ten tur
turns
ns the
then n che
check
ck tha
thatt the
tigh
tighteteni
ning
ng to
torq
rque
ue is st
stil
illl 5 Nm
Nm.. Sh
Shou
ould
ld th
the e sc
scre
rews
ws ha
haveve
loosened re-tighten.
4. Positiona shim package to the same value as “X”

previously spread with prescribed sealant on the side
that comes into contact with the axle shaft, then re-
mount the flange and the three screws tightening to
the prescribed torque.
Tightening torque
Screws fixing epicyclic reduction gear to the axle
shaft (The screws must be greased with engine
oil)
For 130 - 150
(96 ÷ 106 Nm)
(9,8 ÷ 10,8 Kgm; 70.85 to 78.08 ft-lb)
5. After having done the adjustment check that the

bearings of the axle shaft turn freely in their seats.
6. If nec
necess
essary
ary,, rep
repea
eatt the ad
adjus
justme
tment
nt un
until
til you ob
obtai
tain
n
the correct registration.
1 - Reduction group
2 - Screws fixing epicycle reduction gear to axle shaft
3 - Flange
4 - Spacer
5 - Support
6 - Axle shaft
209

BACK AXLE
ADJUST
ADJUSTME
MENT
NT OF TH
THEE AX
AXLE
LE SH
SHAF
AFT
T 2. Loosen the four screws 1
screws 1 fixing
fixing the wheel hub 2
hub 2 to
to
BALL BEARING POSITIONS the
the ta
tape
pere
red
d sl
slee
eeve
ve un
unde
derr it
it,, th
then
en ununbl
bloc
ockk th
the
e hu
hubb fr
from
om
the
the sl
slee
eeve
ve wo
work
rkin
ing
g onthe whwhee eell so as to mo
moveve th
the
e hu
hub b
Follow the same procedure as laid down in “Preload to the ne
neces
cessar
sary
y po
posit
sition
ion.. Fu
Fully lly tig
tighte
hten
n the scr
screws
ews 1 in
adjustment for tapered roller bearings 130 and 150. a crosswise order.
The
Th e ad
adju
just
stme
ment
nt se
serv
rves
es,, in th
this
is ca
case
se,, to ca
canc
ncel
el th
the
e ax
axle
le 3. Repeat the operation on the other side of the trac-
play on the shaft and guarantees the better working tor.
conditions and the correct positioning of the ball bea-
rings which support
tion, tighten it. On
all screws completion
of the of spider
axle shaft the registra-
pin to
the prescribed torque.
Tightening torque for screws fixing spider pin to

axle shaft
58 ÷ 63Nm
(6 ÷ 6,5 Kgm; 43.38 to 47 ft-lb)
TRACK VARIATION
Models
Mode ls 13
130
0 an
and
d 15
150
0 ca
can
n be eq
equi
uipp
pped
ed wi
with
th a fi
fina
nall ax
axle
le
shaft with step less change tracks which permit the
back track to be quickly and precisly adapted for va-
riou
rious s jo
jobs
bs.. Ca
Carry
rry ou
outt th
the
e va
vari
riat
atio
ion
n wi
with
th th
the
e he
help
lp of an
ano-
o-
ther operator working as follows:
1. Park the tractor on the flat. Engage the hand brake
to th
the
e ma
maxi
ximu
mum.
m. Li
Lift
ft on
onee of th
the
e wh
whee
eels
ls wi
with
th a ja
jack
ck an
and
d
use a stand to keep the vehicle steady.
1 - Scre
Screws
ws fixing tapered sleeve
sleeve to the hub
2 - Wheel hub
210

BACK AXLE
TECHNICAL DETAILS
Model
Details
110 130 150
12 1 12 1 10 1
Final epicycle reduction gear reading = = =
12+57 5,75 12+63 6,25 10+59 6,9
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Unit: Nm (Kgm)
Model
Details
110 130 150
59 ÷ 63 96 ÷ 106
Screws fixing spider pin to back axle shaft
(6 ÷ 6,5) (9,8 ÷ 10,8)
Screws fixing axle shaft support to the brake hou- 88 130

sing (9) (13)
Differential group Oil AGIP ROTRA THT (API - GL3) 110 -
Bearing grease nipples Grease AGIP GREASE 30 (Grease 30) 130 - 150
211

BACK AXLE
Fixatives
Application Type Model
Mating surfaces between axle shaft bell and brake

HYLOMAR
housing
Mating surfaces between brake housing and diffe- 110 - 130 - 150
rential box HYLOMAR
Crown wheel surfaces HYLOMAR
Mating surfaces axle shaft - spacers HYLOMAR 130 - 150
SPECIAL TOOLS
5.9
.903
030.
0.61
618.
8.4/
4/10
10 Extr
trac
acto
tor
r
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE ACTION
Lack
Lack of
of grea
grease
se in bear
bearing
ings
s 130
130 - 150
150 Grease
Grease the bea
bearin
rings
gs
Pulls and banging if sudden change in
torque loading
Bearin
Bearing
g lub
lubric
ricati
ation
on ins
insuff
uffici
icient
ent 110 Top up oil lev
level
el
Gearbox
Gearbo x oil vap
vapour
our bre
breath
ather
er val
valve
ve blo
bloc-
c-
Clean or change valve
ked 130 - 150
Axle shaft losing oil
Support link worn 110 Change the support link
Axle play on bearings excessive 110 Adjust bearings
Loss of oil from the joint with the brake

Insufficient sealant Re-apply sealant
housing
212
BRAKES
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATU
TURES
RES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 HYDRAU
HYDRAULICSYSTE
LICSYSTEM
M BL
BLEED
EEDING
ING . . . . . . . . . . . 230
SERV
SERVIC
ICE
E BR
BRAK
AKES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
216 PARK
PARKIN
ING
G BR
BRAK
AKE
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
231
Pedal
Pedal ass
assemb
embly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Cont
Contro
roll le
leve
verr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
231
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Check
Check an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
BRAKE
BRAKE MAS
MASTER
TER CYL
CYLIND
INDER
ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
219
9 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
233
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
220
0 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Brak
Brake
e un
unit
it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Check
Check an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
221 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
234
BRAKES HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DISTRIBUTOR FOR TRAILER
PIPI
PIPING
NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
222
2 HYDRAU
HYDRAULICBRAKI
LICBRAKING.
NG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
235
5
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Remova
Removals
ls an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
FRONT
FRONT BRA
BRAKES
KES.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Techn
Technica
icall fea
featur
tures
es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
225 Check
Check andadju
andadjustm
stmen
ents
ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
REAR
REAR BR
BRAK
AKES.
ES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
226 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Gene
General
ral spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 TROUBLES
TROUBLESHOOT
HOOTING
ING AND CORRE
CORRECTIO
CTIONS.
NS. . . 240
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
229
213

BRAKES
GENERAL FEATURES
Thebraking sys
Thebraking systemis
temis of hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic typ
type;e; it is com
compos posed
ed
of tw
twoo ci
circ
rcuiuits
ts wh
whic ich
h ar
are
e eq
equauall an
andd se
sepapararatete:: on
onee ac
acts
ts
on the front and rear right-hand wheels, and the other
on th
the
e le
left
ft on
ones
es.. Th
Thee fro
front
nt br
brak
akes
es araree pr
prov
ovid ided
ed on only
ly fo
for
r
the models of tractor fitted with front wheel drive.
This system permits the brakes to be used indepen-
dently so as to reduce the turning radius and, conse-
quently, the possible overheating of brakes discs.
The rear service brakes 20
brakes 20,, are located between the
differential casing and the final reduction gears; the 1 - O-ring
front service brakes 16
brakes 16 are
are located between differen- 2 - Rear brake piston
tial and epicyclic reduction gear. This arrangement 3 - Rear brake disk
4 - Intermediate disk
guarantees an accurate and safe braking.
The pedal control, independent for each circuit, acts 5 -- Parking
6 Plug far brake
trailer hydraulic braking
on master cylinder which sends oil under pressure to 7 - Rear brake control pipe
the two pistons, one for the front brake, and the other 8 - Auxiliary distributor braking
for the rear one, which pack the brake discs together. 9 - Braking distribution
When the two pedals, previously connected with the 10 - Hydraulic brake oil tank
special latch, are operated at the same time, a duct 11 - Master cylinder brake
opens 12
opens 12,, this connects the two hydraulic circuits to 12 - Master cylinder brake coupling fitting
balance the braking pressure on both circuits. 13 - Front brake control pipes
14 - Front brake disk
The clutch and brake oil tank 10 10 is
is subdivided into
15 - Shoul
Shoulder
der ring
three separate sections so as to prevent a leak in one 16 - Intermediate disk
of the two circuits from affecting the other two. 17 - Parking brake operation lever
The discs of front 14
front 14 and rear 3 3 brakes are made of 18 - Parking brake pad
sintered material, and operate in oil; their wear is ex- 19 - Parking brake disks
tremely limited. 20 - Rear brake
Parki
Pa rking
ng bra
brake
ke is of memecha
chanic
nical
al typ
typee and act acts,s, thr
throug
ough h
a lev
lever
er 6
6 co
contntro
roll ho
hous
used
ed in th
the
e ca
cab,b, on a leleveverr th
that
at ca
cau-
u-
ses
se s a se
seri
ries
es of papadsds 18 to be papackcked
ed totoge
geth ther
er on didisc
scss
19 fitted on the front drive direct drive shaft. Further-
19 fitted
more,, an hydra
more hydraulic
ulic 8 sy
syst
stem
em fo
forr th
the
e br
brak
akin
ing
g of tr
trai
aile
lerr is
also supplied as, an optional, or standard, according
with each Market.
214

BRAKES
215

BRAKES
SERVICE BRAKES
PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1 - Manual accelerator lever 9 - Pedal connection latch 17 - Oil delivery pipe

2 - Bracket 10 - Spring 18 - Securing plate
3 - Split pin 11 - Washer 19 - Master cylinder supply pipe
4 - Manual accelerator transmission rod 12 - Pedal support 20 - Clamp
5 - Seeger ring 13 - Pin 2 1 - Ta n k
6 - Washer 14 - Rubber anti-slip protection 22 - Support
7 - Brake pedal 15 - Brake master cylinder 23 - Pipe connecting master cylinder
8 - Pin 16 - Plate
216

BRAKES
REMOVAL 5. Operating from the passenger compartment, re-

move spl
move split
it pin
pins
s 4, andwithd
andwithdraw
raw pin
pins
s 2 secu
securing
ring maste
master r
1. Remove the tractor side engine lids, and unscrew cylinder forks 3
forks 3 to
to pedals 1
pedals 1.. Withdraw latch 6
latch 6..
thetwo bo
bolts
lts sec
securi
uring
ng he
heat
at shi
shield
eld 1 to rear bulk
bulkhea
head
d 2. 6. Uns
Unscre
creww thefour scrscrew
ews s 5 secu
securing
ring mast
master
er cylin
cylinder
der
to da
dashb
shboar
oard d she
sheetet pa
panel
nel.. Rem
Remove
ove the two ma
mastesterr cy-
linders from the engine compartment.
1 - Heat shield
2 - Rear bulkhead
2. Use a screwdriver to extract unions 1 of master cy-

linders 3
linders 3 supply
supply piping, plugging them suitably. 1 - Brake pedals 4 - Split pins
2 - Pins 5 - Screws
3. Unscrew unions 2
unions 2 and disconnect the delivery pi-
3 - Forks 6 - Latch
ping from master cylinders.
4. Unscrew the unions securing pipe 4 connecting
7. Unscr
Unscrew
ew the two screw
screws
s secu
securing
ring man
manual
ual accel
accelera-
era-
master cylinders, and remove it.
tor level 1
level 1.. Remove the lever.
8. Remove lid 2lid 2 which
which has been pushed into place.
1 - Unions for master cylinder supply piping

2 - Unions for delivery piping from master cylinders
3 - Brake master cylinders 1 - Manual accelerator lever
4 - Pipe connecting master cylinders 2 - Engine lid
217

BRAKES
9. Operating from the engine compartment, unscrew 15. Release return springs 4

springs 4 of
of pedals 3
pedals 3..
the two nu
nutsts sec
securi
uringng the bra
brake-
ke-clu
clutch
tch liq
liquid
uid tan
tankk sup
sup-- 16. Remo
Remove
ve seeg
seeger
er ring 1, wit
withdr
hdraw
aw was
washeher
r 2
2, an
and
d re
re--
port bracket. move pedals 3
pedals 3 with
with interposed washer 5.
5 .
10. Withdraw split pin 1pin 1 and the washer underneath.
Disconnect rod rod 2 from accelerator control transmis-
sion lever 4.
4 .
11. Unscr
Unscrew
ew screw 3 secu securing
ring the manu
manual al acce
accelerat
lerator
or
support bracket.
1 - Seeger ring 4 - Springs

2 - Washer 5 - Washer
3 - Pedals
1 - Split pin
2 - Manual accelerator transmission rod
3 - Screw
4 - Manual accelerator transmission lever CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS
Visually
Visually insp
inspect
ect all the disa
disassem
ssembled
bled comp
componeonents;
nts; re-
place
place tho
those
se tha
thatt are wo
worn
rn or da
dama
maged
ged,, ver
verify
ifyingin
ingin par
par--
12. Operating from the passenger compartment, particular thethat

1. Verify following.
pedals and the related pads are not de-
tially extract the brake-clutch oil tank from the dash-
board. formed or damaged.
13. Withd
Withdraw
raw split
splitpin
pin 3, was
washe
her
r 2
2, an
and
d re
remo
moverod
verod 4. 2. Check that pins and related seats are not too worn
14. Unscrew the two screws securing bracket 1 to or seized.
dashboard and remove it from below. 3. Verify that springs are not damaged or strained.
4. Che
Check
ck tha
thatt the rub
rubbe
berr pro
protec
tectio
tions
ns of pe
peda
dall pa
pads
ds are
not worn.
INSTALLATION
Install the brake pedals by reversing the order of re-
— Refer to the enlarged view and lubricate the bus-
hes 13
hes 13 of
of pedals, pins 12
pins 12,, and latch 9
latch 9 with
with the
prescribed grease.
— Replace all split pins.
— After having reassembled the pedals and master
cylinders, proceed to adjust them by operating as
1 - Manual accelerator support bracket follows.
2 - Washer (1) Lift the pedals completely.
3 - Split pin
4 - Manual accelerator transmission rod
218

BRAKES
(2) Pu
(2) Pullll th
the
e ma
mast ster
er cy
cyli
lind
nder
er fo
forks
rks co
comp
mplelete
tely
ly,, ke
keep
epin
ing
g th
them
em tataut
ut to ta
take
ke up th
the
e ba
back
ckla
lash
sh,, an
and
d ve
veri
rify
fy th
that
at th
the
e fo
fork
rk ho
ho--
les are perfectly aligned with those in the pedals.
(3)) If re
(3 requ
quirired
ed,, lo
loos
osen
en th
the
e lo
lock
cknu
nutt an
and
d un
unsc
scre
reww or sc
scre
rew
w th
the
e ma
mast
ster
er cy
cyli
lind
nder
er ro
rod
d ac
acco
cord
rdin
ingl
gly
y un
unti
till th
the
e ho
hole
les
s ar
are
e pe
per-
r-
fectly aligned.
(4) Block the rod with the locknut, and secure the forks to pedals by means of pins and new split pins.
— Proceed to adjust the accelerator control (refer to: Fuel Supply - Accelerator Control Adjustment).
— Proceed to bleed the braking system (refer to: Hydraulic System Bleeding).
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
For 150
219

BRAKES
REMOVAL 3. Re
Refe
ferr to th
the
e en
enla
larg
rgedview
edview an
and
d un
unsc
scre
rew
w th
the
e tw
two
o pi
pis
s-
tons; separate them recovering spring 11
spring 11..
Disconnect the brake master cylinder (refer to: Pedal 4. Remove retaining rings 12
rings 12 and
and 15
15 and washer 13
13
Assembly - Removal - steps 1. to 6.). from piston 14
piston 14..
5. Remove Seeger ring ring 7, and withdraw spacers
spacers 8,
and seal rings 9
rings 9 from
from piston 10.
piston 10.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Withdraw boot 1, remove

boot 1, remove Seeger ring 3,
ring 3, and
and with- CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS
draw rod 2
rod 2 together
together with collar 4.
4 .
CAUTION
To clean and wash the master cylinder compo-
nents use only the brake fluid prescribed. Do not
use petrol, kerosene or other mineral oils to pre-
vent damaging the rubber components.
1. Chec
Check k fo
forr sc
scra
ratc
tche
hes
s an
and
d ru
rust
st in
insi
side
de cy
cyli
lind
nder
er an
and
d on
pistons. Replace them if required.
2. Check the wear degree of cylinder and pistons. In
the event of excessive backlash, replace the cylinder
assembly or piston assembly.
3. Verify the conditions of retaining rings and dust co-
1
2 -- Boot
Rod ver, replace the faulty components.
4. Che
Checkck all com
compa
partm
rtmen
ents,
ts, op
openi
enings
ngs,, an
and d ma
maste
sterr cy-
3 - Seeger ring
linde
lin derr in
inter
terna
nall pas
passag
sages,
es, and ver
verify
ify tha
thatt the
they
y are cle
clean
an
4 - Collar
5 - Master cylinder and free from foreign matters.
5. Verify that springs are not strained or deformed.
2. Place the master cylinder on a vice fitted with pro- Replace them if required.
tective jaws then, parti
tective partially
ally pushing
pushing the pistons to-
wards master cylinder inside as shown in the figure,
unscrew the screw securing the pistons and remove
them together with the spring underneath.
220

BRAKES
REASSEMBLY
For 110 - 130
1 - Spring 9 - Piston 17 - Gasket

2 - Master cylinder 10 - Seal ring 18 - Setscrew
3 - Intermediate piston 11 - Disk support 19 - Seal ring
4 - Spring 12 - Boot 20 - Seal ring
5 - Fitting 13 - Rod 21 - Spacer
6 - Gasket 14 - Nut 22 - Seeger ring
7 - Seal ring 15 - Fork
8 - Washer 16 - Seeger ring
Reassemble the master cylinder by reversing the order of disassembly, complying with the following.
— Lubricate the relative motion sliding surfaces with the prescribed grease.
— Tighten thoroughly the two pistons 3
pistons 3 and
and 9
9 so
so that a certain backlash is present between them.
— When inserting the pistons into cylinder verify that the slot present on the external piston 9
piston 9,, is correctly ali-
gned with the setscrew seat 18
seat 18..
— Verify the master cylinder correct functioning, making sure that the pistons perform the whole travel freely.
INSTALLATION
Install the master cylinder on tractor (refer to: Pedal Assembly - Installation).
221

BRAKES
BRAKES HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PIPING

1. Che
Check
ck the bra
brakin
king
g sys
system
tem pip
piping
ing (pi
(pipe
pes
s an
and
d ho
hoses
ses)) an
and
d ver
verify
ify tha
thatt the
they
y are fre
free
e fro
from
m def
deform
ormati
ations
ons,, scr
scratc
atche
hes
s or
evident signs of external oxidation. Replace the faulty components.
2. In the eve
event
nt of hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic flu
fluid
id lea
leaks,
ks, res
restor
tore
e the tig
tighte
htenin
ning
g if the
they
y are cau
caused
sed by loo
loosen
sening
ing;; if req
requir
uired,
ed, rep
replac
lace
e the
faulty components.
REMOVALS AND INSTALLATIONS
If replacement or installation of brake piping is required, comply with the following.
— Remove the plug of brake and clutch hydraulic system supply tank and, by means of a syringe, suck the oil
from the tank.
— Each time the piping is disassembled, plug the ends to prevent foreign matter from entering.
— To remove the pipes, unscrew the unions from both ends.
— To remove the hoses, unscrew the unions connecting pipes to hoses, then remove them. Subsequently, dis-
connect the hose from the other side.
— Unscrew all clamps securing piping to tractor.
— When reassembling piping on tractor take care not to twist them.
— At the end of reassembly, restore the oil level in the tank, and carry out bleeding (refer to: Hydraulic System
Bleeding).
FRONT BRAKES
1 - Flange 3 - Intermediate disc 5 - Seal ring

2 - Brake disc 4 - Piston 6 - Fork
222

BRAKES
DISASSEMBLY
1. Le
Leav
ave
e th
the
e ve
vehi
hicl
cle
e on a le
leve
vell su
surfa
rface
ce wi
with
th sp
spee
eeds
ds di
di--
sengaged.
2. Operate the parking brake.
3. Remove the front wheel.
CAUTION
Two operators are needed to remove the wheels.
(1) Loosen the eight nuts securing the wheel.

(2)) Pl
(2 Plac
ace
e a li
lift
ftin
ing
g ja
jack
ck un
unde
derr th
the
e fr
fron
ontt ax
axle
le,, in
inte
terp
rpos
osin
ing
g
a wooden wedge; lift the tractor.
(3) Carefully withdraw the wheel from hub.
4. Place a container under the fork, unscrew the plug
placed under the fork, and drain the oil.
CAUTION
Always use a light alloy hammer or punch when 1 - Cover
tapping on cast iron components. 2 - Seeger ring
3 - Plug with threaded hole
4 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
5. Unscr
Un screw
ew thesecur
thesecuringscrew
ingscrew an
and
d rem
remove
ove pro
protec
tectio
tion
n 5 - Bearing
6 Seal ring
1 of oil drain valve.
6. Unscrew union 2
union 2,, and remove brake piping 3
piping 3..
10. Unscrew the ten nuts securing epicyclic reduction
gear 1 to
1 to fork 2
fork 2..
11. Screw the two longest screws 3
screws 3 into
into the holes not
used for the fixing and remove the epicyclic reduction
gear
gear an
and d the O-rO-ring
ing by tig
tighte
htenin
ning
g the scr
screws
ews ful
fully
ly
home on the fork.
1 - Valve protection
2 - Union
3 - Braking system pipe
7. Unscrew cover 1
1 placed at the center of hub, and
remove it.
8. Extract
ExtractSeeg
Seeger
er ring 2, pl
plac
acedin
edin fro
front
nt of th
the
e pl
plugwith
ugwith
threaded hole 3. Remove the cover, by screwing a
screw on the grease nipple and pulling outwards. 1 - Epicyclic reduction gear
9. Remove retaining ring 3
ring 3,, and Seeger ring 4
ring 4.. 2 - Fork
3 - Screws
223

BRAKES
CAUTION 13. Extract

brake discs 1, and intermediate disc 2,
When removing the epicyclic reduction gear, use then let compressed air into the brake oil union, and
lever 1 as shown in the figure, and act on cross remove the brake control piston 3
piston 3..
journal 2 in order to prevent the axle shaft from
moving unintentionally with consequent damage
of the seal rings housed inside the fork.
1 - Brake discs
2 - Intermediate discs
3 - Brakes control piston
1 - Lever
2 - Cross journal
12. Unscrew the twelve self locking screws securing
the brake assembly flange
flange 1 and remove it together Wash all brake components with suitable liquid, and
with oil deflector plate 2
plate 2.. dry them with compressed air.
Perfo
Pe rform
rm an accaccura
urate
te vis
visuauall ins
inspe
pecti
ction
on ver
verify
ifying
ing in pa par-
r-
ticular the following.
1. Ch
Chec
eck k fo
forr sc
scra
ratc
tche
hess on bobothth in
inne
nerr an
and d ou
outeterr sl
slid
idin
ing
g
surfaces of piston. Replace it if required.
2. Ver
Verif
ify
y th
thatat th
the
e se
seal
al ri
ring
ng seseatats
s ar
aree cl
clea
ean. n. If re
requ
quirired
ed,,
blow compressed air into the seats.
3. Ver
Verify
ify theseal rinring
g con
condit dition
ions;
s; rep
replac
lacee the
them m if req
requi-
ui-
red.
4. Verify that the ground surfaces surfaces matimating ng with the
brake discs are free from excessive scratches.
If not, replace the damaged components.
5. Check the discs by operating as follows.
(1) Verify that the sliding surfaces of discs are not
worn, splintered or scratched. Replace the damaged
discs.
(2) Check that discs can slide freely into their seats.
(3) Use a gauge to check that the thickness of disc
package is not lower than the value given in “Techni-
cal DatDataa anand d Spe
Specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns - CheCheckscks an and d Adj
Adjust
ust--
ment
me nts”
s” fo
forr th
the
e mo
mode
dell of
of,, tra
tract
ctor
or in ob
objeject
ct.. Re
Replplac
acee if re
re--
quired.
1 - Brake assembly flange

2 - Oil deflector
deflector plate
224

BRAKES
(4) Exa
Examin
mine
e the dis
disc
c bro
broach
aching
ings,
s, che
checki
cking
ng for we
wear
ar or
damage signs.
— Tighten the screws securing the brake assembly
flange, and the nuts securing the epicyclic reduc-
REASSEMBLY tion gear to the prescribed torque.
Carry out reassembly by reversing the order of disas-

Tightening torques
sembly,
— complying
Lubricate with sliding
the piston the following.
surfaces with the - Nuts securing epicyclic reduction gear
grease prescribed, and fit it in place keeping the - Screws securing brake flange
slots present on piston itself pointing outwards.
Then fit the intermediate piston and the flange; See: GENERALITY
screw a few of the screws securing the flange so Rules for tightening of nuts bolts
as to push the piston into its seat uniformly until
fitting it onto the inner retaining rings.
— When reassembling the brake discs, verify that — Carry out bleeding (refer to: Braking System
the intermediate discs are correctly housed into Bleeding).
their seats.
— Install the epicyclic reduction gear taking care to
hold the axle shaft by levering on the cross jour-
nal, to prevent the axle shaft from with drawing
from brake discs when moving backwards.
225

BRAKES
REAR BRAKES
DISASSEMBLY
1 - Flange 4 - Seal ring 7 - Bleeder

2 - Brake disc 5 - Piston 8 - Brake housing
3 - Intermediate disc 6 - Protective cap
1 - Cap 7 - Nut 13 - Disc

2 - Bleeder 8 - Stud 14 - Seal ring
3 - Oil dipstick 9 - Pin 15 - Flange
4 - Gasket 10 - Housing 16 - Shim
5 - Stud 11 - Piston seal ring 17 - Shim
6 - Washer 12 - Piston
226

BRAKES
1. Operate the parking brake and leave the tractor on a level surface with speeds disengaged.
2. Remove the rear wheel.
CAUTION
Two operators are needed to remove the wheels.
(1) Loosen the eight nuts securing the wheel.
(2) Place a jack under the rear axle, interposing a wooden wedge; lift the tractor.
(3) Carefully remove the wheel from hub.
(4) Place a safety stand under the differential casing.
3. Place a container under the brake housing, unscrew the related cap, and drain the brake lubrication oil.
4. Remove split pin 8
pin 8,, and withdraw pin 7
pin 7 securing
securing stabilizer 6 to
6 to bell housing 1
housing 1..
5. Remove split pin 10
pin 10,, and unscrew the nut securing lifting arm 5 5.. Detach the arm from the related pin.
6. If mounted, unscrew the screw securing pin 9 pin 9,, withdraw it, and disconnect cylinder 4 4 from brake housing 11
housing 11..
7. Unscrew the bolt securing the cab to rubber bushing 3 3..
8. Unscrew the four screws securing cab support bracket 2bracket 2 to bell housing 1
housing 1..
9. Sling the cab suitably and lift it enough to remove cab support.
10. Unscr
Unscrew
ew the unio
unions
ns secu
securing
ring brak
brake
e pipi
piping
ng 12 to bra
brake
ke ho
housi
using
ng anandd dis
discon
conne
nectct the
them.
m. Plu
Plug g thepipin
thepiping
g sui
suitab
tably.
ly.
1 - Drive shaft bell housing

2 - Cab support bracket
3 - Rubber bushing
4 - Lifting cylinder (optional)
5 - Lifting arm
6 - Stabilizer
7 - Pin
8 - Split pin
9
10- -Pin
Split pin
11 - Brake housing
12 - Braking system piping
227

BRAKES
11. Place a safety stand under the tank and unscrew (2) Remove the drive shaft by withdrawing it from the
the thirteen nuts and the two bolts securing the drive brake discs; recover the brake disc.
shaft bell housing to brake housing. (3) Let compressed air into one of the brake oil inlets
12. Use a suitable lifting device to support the drive on the housing to facilitate the brake piston removal.
shaft bell housing when removing it from the brake Recover
Reco ver the wash
washers
ers of pisto
piston
n dowe
dowell pins without
without
housing. mixing them.

WARNING
Carefully check that both tractor and bell hou- Wash all brake components using a suitable liquid,
sing
sin g are we
well
ll ba
balan
lance
ced
d to pre
preve
vent
nt da
dange
ngerou
rous
s os
os-- and dry them with compressed air. Perform an accu-
cillations during the removal operation. rate visual inspection taking special care for the follo-
wing.
13. Car
Carefu
efully
lly rem
remove
ove the be
bellll ho
housi
using
ng fro
from
m bra
brake
ke ho
hou-
u- 1. Check for scratches or rust inside the cylinder and
sing. on piston. Replace them if required.
14. Only for 150-130 2. Ch
Chec
eck k th
the
e we
wearar de
degr
gree
ee of bo
bothth cy
cyli
lind
nder
er an
andd pi
pist
ston
on..
(1) Remove crown gear 1 from brake housing
housing 4, by If excessive backlash is present, replace cylinder or
slightly tapping with a hammer. piston.
(2) Remove drive shaft 2 by withdrawing it from brake 3. Veri
Verify
fy con
condit
dition
ionss of the sea
seall rin
rings
gs mo
moun unted
ted on cyl
cylin-
in-
discs 3
discs 3.. der. Replace them if required.
(3) Uns
Unscre
crew
w the thi
thirte
rteen
en inn
inner
er nu
nutsts 6 an
and
d th
the
e ou
oute
terr nu
nutt 4. Che
Checkck tha
thatt the gro
ground
und sur
surfac
faces
es ma
matinting
g wit
with
h a bra
brake
ke
securing brake housing 4
housing 4 to differential casing 5
casing 5.. disc are free from evident scratches. If not, grind the
(4) Carefully remove the brake housing recovering fricti
friction
on sur
surfac
faces
es tak
taking
ing int
into
o acc
accouount
nt tha
thatt the thi
thickn
ckness
ess
brake discs 3
discs 3 which
which are not secured. of the material removed shall not exceed 2 exceed 2 mm mm (0.08
(0.08
in).
5. Check
single the
disc forbrake
modeldiscs
110)for
bymodels 130as
operating - 150 (or the
follows.
(1) Verify that the disc friction surfaces are not worn,
splintere
splin tered,
d, or scrat
scratched
ched.. Repl
Replace
ace the dama
damagedged discs
discs..
(2) Check that discs slide freely into their seat.
(3)) Us
(3 Use
e a ga
gaug
uge
e to ch
chec
eck
k th
that
at th
thic
ickn
knes
ess
s of ea
each
ch di
disc
sc is
not lower than the value given in “Technical Data and
Specif
Spe cifica
icatio
tions
ns - Che
Checks
cks an
andd Ad
Adjus
justme
tments
nts”,
”, for the mo
mo--
del of tractor in object. Replace if required.
1 - Crown gear 4 - Brake housing

2 - In
Inne
nerr dr
driv
ive
e sh
sha
aft 5 - Diff
Differ
eren
enti
tia
al ca
casi
sing
ng
3 - Brake disc 6 - Nut
(5) Let compressed air into one of the brake oil inlets
on the housing to facilitate the brake piston removal.
Recover the washers of piston dowel pins taking care
not to mix them.
15. Only for 110

(1) Unscrew the thirteen nuts of the flange securing
(4) Examine the disc broaching making sure that they
bra
brake
singketaking
housi
housing
ng to not
care differ
different
toential
ial cas
drop casing
theing;
; wit
withdr
brake hdraw
awsince
disc, the hou
hou-
it is- are not worn or damaged.
not axially secured.
228

BRAKES
REASSEMBLY 6. Us
Use
e a fe
feel
eler
er ga
gaug
uge,
e, as sh
show
own
n in th
the
e fi
figu
gure
re,, to me
mea-
a-
sure the distance between brake disc 1 and surface 2
1. Check that shim washers 1, removed during disas- mating with the differential casing.
sembly, are present inside the reference pins.
1 - Brake disc
2 - Mating surface with differential casing
7. Ver
Verify
ify tha
thatt the val
value
ue me
measu
asured
red is eq
equa
uall to tha
thatt giv
given
en
in “Technical Data and Specifications - Checks and
Adjustments” for the model of tractor in object. If not
so, add or remove the shim washers located under-
neath the piston. Repeat the measurement until the
correct value is obtained.
1 - Reference pins 8. Refer to the enlarged view, and reassemble brake
2 - Brake housing housing 8 an andd the dri
drive
ve sha
shaft
ft be
bellll ho
housi
using
ng by rev
revers
ersing
ing
the orde
orderr of disa
disassem
ssembly
bly comp
complying
lying with the follo
following
wing..
2. Ma
Mark
rk a re
refe
fere
renc
nce
e on bo
both
th pi
pist
ston
on an
and
d br
brak
ake
e ho
hous
usin
ing
g — Apply the sealant prescribed on the inner surface
in cor
corres
respon
ponde
dencewith
ncewith a ref
refere
erencepin
ncepin in ord
order
er to fac
faci-
i- of brake housings 8
housings 8 and
and the two surfces of the
litate reassembly. epicyclic reduction gear crown wheel.
3. Apply the prescribed grease on the surface of pis- — For models 130 and 150 verify that, when reas-
ton 1
ton 1 mating
mating with the brake housing seal rings. sembling the brake housing, intermediate disc 3 disc 3
is correctly housed into its seat.
— Tighten the nuts securing the brake housings
and the drive shaft bell housings to the prescri-
bed torque.
Tightening torques
Nuts sec
securin
uringg brak
brake
e hous
housinging to diffe
different
rential
ial casi
casing
ng
150 127 Nm 11 110 See: GENERAL
130
130 (1(13
3 - Kgm
Kgm;; 94
94 ft
ft lb)
lb) Nu
Nuts
ts bo
bolt
lts
s
Nuts securing drive shaft bell housing to brake

housing
150 127 Nm 110 88 Nm
130
130 (1(13
3 Kg
Kgm;
m; 94 ft lb
lb)) (9 - Kgm
Kgm;; 66f
66ftt lb)
lb)
— Carry out bleeding (refer to: Hydraulic System

Bleeding).
1 - Piston
4. Carefully fit the piston into the brake housing.

5. Fit the brake discs into brake housing, and for mo-
dels 130-150 the intermediate disc.
229

BRAKES
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEEDING

Bleedi
Blee ding
ng of br
brak
akee an
and
d cl
clut
utch
ch hy
hydr
drau
auli
lic
c sy
syst
stem
em is to be 3. Fit a hose on the bleeder screws of both front and
carrie
car ried
d out ea
each
ch tim
time
e thesyste
thesystemm is con
connenecte
cted
d or whe
whenn rear brakes, and submerge its end into a transparent
air enters it. container filled with the same oil of the system.
4. Operate one of the pedals several times then, kee-
ping it fully pressed, slightly unscrew the related blee-
der screws and tighten them immediately after.
CAUTION 5. Repeat this operation several times until oil comes
— Do not reu
reuse
se the hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic flu
fluid
id dra
draine
ined
d dur
during
ing out of bleeder screw without air bubbles.
bleeding. 6. Fu
Fully
lly pre
press
ss the pe
peda
dall an
and
d che
check
ck whe
whethe
therr aft
after
er its ini
ini--
— Opera
Operate
te car
carefu
efully
lly to pre
preve
vent
nt the oil co
comin
ming
g int
into
o tial idle stroke, a direct and non-spongy action can be
contact with the paint, since this could be da- felt. If not, repeat bleeding.
maged. 7. Restore the oil level in the tank using the brake oil
— During the bleeding operation, keep the oil le- prescribed; refit the related plug.
vel in the tank above the min. mark.
1. Remove the plug of the hydraulic system supply

tank
tank;; if re
requ
quire
ired,
d, re
rest
stor
oree th
the
e le
leve
vell us
usin
ing
g th
the
e oi
oill pr
pres
escr
cri-
i-
bed.
2. Disconnect the two brake pedals by removing the
latch. Operate first on the brake of one side, then re-
peatt thesame op
pea opera
eratio
tions
ns for tho
those
se on theother sid side.
e.
230

BRAKES
PARKING BRAKE
CONTROL LEVER
1 - Pushbutton
2 - Spring
3 - Pin
4 - Lever
5 - Rubber pad
6 - Scroll gear
7 - Pin
8 - Cable
9 - Support bracket
10 - Pin
11 - Seeger ring
12 - Pin
13 - Bracket
14 - Boot
15 - Nut
16 - Split pin
17 - Washe
Washer r
18 - Fork
19 - Switc
Switchh
20 - Rod
21 - Interlock plunger
REMOVAL
1. Op
Opera
eratin
ting
g fro
from
m un
unde
derr the tra
tracto
ctor,
r, rem
remove
ove spl
split
it pin 2 and wash
washer
er 3
3, th
then
en wi
with
thdr
draw
aw pi
pin
n 5 and disco
disconne
nnect
ct tran
transmis-
smis-
sion fork 4
fork 4 from
from parking brake control lever 1.
1 .
231

BRAKES
DISASSEMBLY
1. Place control lever support bracket 2

bracket 2 on
on a vice, re-
move See
move Seege
gerr rin
ring
g 3, an
and
d wit
withd
hdraw
raw stu
stud
d 4. Re
Remo
move
ve pi
pin
n
5 using a hammer and a punch.
1 - Pa
Park
rkin
ing
g br
brak
ake
e co
cont
ntro
roll 3 - Sp
Spli
litt pi
pin
n
lever 4 - Fork
2 - Washer 5 - Pin
2. Operating from inside the cab, lift trim 1 placed un- 1 - Lever 4 - Stud
der the seat, and unscrew the four screws securing 2 - Support bracket 5 - Pin
bracket 3
bracket 3 to floor. 3 - Seeger ring 6 - Scroll gear
3. Remove lever
lever 2 together with bracket 3, control
cable, and rubber pad
4. If required, operating from under the cab, discon- 2. Overturnlever 8, withdraw pin 3,
lever 3, remove
remove control
nect wiring of the brake warning lamp, unscrew the cable 10 scroll
cable 10 scroll gear 2
2 and the lever
two screws 4 securing the switch, and remove this 3. Remo
Remove
ve spl
split
it pin 7, was
washe
her
r 5
5 und
underne
erneath,
ath, and with-
last. draw pin 6. Remove interlock plunger 4 and,
4 and, from the
handgrip, pushbutton 9
pushbutton 9,, together with the spring and
rod underneath
underneath..
1 - Support bracket 6 - Pin

2 - Scroll gear 7 - Split pin
3 - Pin 8 - Lever
1 - Cab floor trim 3 - Lever support bracket 4 - Interlock plunger 9 - Pushbutton
2 - Pa
Parrkin
ing
g br
brak
akee le
lev
ver 4 - Scre
rew
ws 5 - Washer 10 - Control cable
232

BRAKES
CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS — Install the first cable 8

cable 8 on lever 4 trough
4 trough pin 7.
pin 7.
— Install the ratchet gear replacing split pin 16
pin 16..
1. Visually inspect that each component is not exces-
sively worn or damaged. In particular, check the pin
surfaces and the wear degree of the teeth of interlock
plunger and scroll gear. INSTALLATION
2. Check for interruptions in the electric cables and
that the switch signalling that parking brake is in ope- Install the control lever on tractor by reversing the or-
der of removal, complying with the following.
rates correctly.
3. Check that spring is not strained or deformed. — Refer to the exploded view and lubricate pin 3
pin 3
4. Replace the faulty or worn components. with the prescribed grease; replace split pin 16
pin 16..
— Verify that tractor starts being braked when lifting
the parking brake control lever by 3 to 4 notches;
REASSEMBLY whilst, when the lever is completely released ,
the tractor must be free.
Reasse
Reas semb
mble
le th
the
e le
leve
verr by re reve
vers
rsin
ing
g th
thee or
orde
derr of di
disa
sas-
s-
sembly, complying with the following. If no
nott so, Ioo
Ioosen
sen loc
locknu
knutt 15, an
andd un
unscr
screw
ew or scr
screw
ew for
fork
k
— - Lubricate pins 3
pins 3,, 7
7 and
and 10
10,, scrol
scrolll gear 6
6 and in- 18 acco
accordin
rdingly
gly unti
untill obta
obtainin
ining
g a corre
correct
ct brak
braking
ing actio
action.
n.
terlock Plunger 21 with
21 with the grease prescribed.
BRAKE UNIT
1 - Shoe 8 - Engagement lever

2 - Single pad 9 - Screws
3 - Discs 10 - Parking brake support
4 - Splined bush 11 - Control lever
5 - Gear 12 - Gasket
6 - Double pad 13 - O-ring
7 - Seeger ring 14 - Gear
233

BRAKES
DISASSEMBLY REASSEMBLY
1. Detach the parking brake support (refer to: Speed Reassemb

Reasse mblele the bra
brake
ke by rev
revers
ersingthe
ingthe ord
order
er of dis
disas-
as-
gear - Front Drive P.T.O. - Disassembly - steps 1. to sembly, complying with the following.
12). — Replace the O-ring, and lubricate it with the
2. Unscrew one of the two screws securing pads 2
pads 2 to
to grease prescribed.
support 1
support 1.. Withdraw pads and shoe 3
shoe 3.. — Carefully install the pads interposing them bet-
3. Rem
Remove
ove Seeg
Seeger
er ring 5, withd
withdraw
raw enga
engagem
gement
ent leve
lever
r ween brake discs.
—
4 and,
and, ope
vering operat
the rating
ing fro
O-ring.from
m the ou
outsi
tside
de,, con
contro
troll lev
lever
er 6
6 reco- Once reassembly
that tractor has been
starts being carried
braked afterout,
the verify
parking
brake control lever, in the cab, has been lifted by
3 to 4 notches, whilst with control lever released,
the tractor must be perfectly free.
— If not, loosen locknut 1
locknut 1 and
and unscrew or screw
fork 2
fork 2 accordingly,
accordingly, until obtaining a correct bra-
king action.
1 - Support
2 - Pads
3 - Shoe
4 - Engagement lever
5 - Seeger ring
6 - Control lever
1. Thoroughly
Thoroughly wash all compcomponen
onentsts and care
carefully
fully
check for superficial defects.
2. Measure the pad thickness and check for irregular
wear. If pad thickness is lower than the limit value gi-
ven in “Technical Data and Specifications - Checks
and
an d Ad
Adju
just
stme
ment
nts”
s” fo
forr th
the
e mo
mode
dell of tra
tract
ctor
or in ob
obje
ject
ct,, re
re--
place all of them.
1 - Locknut
2 - Control cable fork
234

BRAKES
DISTRIBUTOR FOR TRAILER HYDRAULIC BRAKING
1 - Connector
2 - Support
3 - Pipe
4 - Notched washer
5 - Screw
6 - Pipe
7 - Fitting
8 - Gasket
9 - Nut
10 - Notched washer
11 - Screw
12 - Nut
13 - Union
14 - Fitting
15 - Bleeder valve
16 - Distribution valve
17 - Reduction
18 - Rear brake connection pipe
19 - Fitting
20 - Fitting
22 - Pipe
23 - Pipe
24 - Screw
25 - Notched washer
235

BRAKES
REMOVAL
1. Withoutdisconnecting the piping, remove the hy-
drostatic
drostatic stee
steering
ring tank 1 loos
loosenin
ening
g the clam
clamp
p screw 2.
1 - Fitting
2 - Clamping screw
3 - Screwed union
4 - Fitting
5 - Fitting
6 - Rear brake connection pipe
INSTALLATION
1 - Hydro steering oil tank Procee
Proc eedd wi
with
th th
the
e in
inst
stal
alla
lati
tion
on in re
reve
vers
rse
e or
orde
derr to th
that
at of
2 - Tank fastening band
the removal, taking care to replace all the fitting gas-
kets, then on completion of work, remove the air from
the system by joining a pipe in a container partially fil-
2. Lower the tank left of the fuel in order to have suffi-
led with hydraulic oil, to the bleeder valve, present on
cient space to work, loosen fittings 1
fittings 1,,4 and
and 5
5 and
and the the dis
distri
tribut
bution
ion val
valve,
ve, an
andd fol
follow
low the pro
proced
cedure
ure dedescr
scri-
i-
threaded union 3, the
then
n un
unloo
loosen
sen the screscrew
w 2, the bed in “Hydraulic System Bleeding”.
connection pipe 6
pipe 6 and
and remove the distribution valve.
236

BRAKES
TECHNICAL DATA AND CORRECTIONS

TECHNICAL FEATURES
Service Brakes
Model
Particulars
110 130 150
Constructor
Type Plates in oil bath
Front 1 2
Number of disks per brake
Rear 1 2
Front 223,4
Disk outside diameter
Rear 302
Front 4,80
Originai disk thickness
Rear 10
Front 3,80
Minimum permissible disk thickness
Rear 9
Pump type BENDITALIA 81”
Parking brake
Model
Particulars
110 130 150
Type Plates in oil bath
Number of single surface braking plates 2
Number of double surface braking plates 2 3
double
doub le brak
brakee
mm 5
surface
Original plate thickness
sin
ingl
gle
e brak
brakee
mm 3,5
surface
double mm 4,2
Plate minimum permissible thickness
single mm 3,1
Number of brake disks 3 4
Traverse of the parking brake lever 120

237

BRAKES
CHECK AND ADJSTMENTS
Unit: mm
Model
Dimension quota
110 - 130 - 150
3,80 (0.14)
Front plate minimum thickness
Rear plate minimum thickness 9 (0.35)
Brake plate distance from connection surface 0,3 (0.01)
double brake surface 4,2 (0.16)

Minimum thickness parking brake plate
single brake surface 3,1 (0.12)
238

BRAKES
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Measuring unit: Nm (kgm)
Model
Parts
110 130 150
See: GENERALlTY
Fixing nuts - brake holder box to rear gear box Tightening torques 127 (13)
nuts and bolts
Fixing nuts - axle shaft support to brake holder box 88 (9) 127 (13)
Rear axle and differential oil refill Oil AGIP Rotra I HT (API GL-3)
Hydraulic AGIP ATF DEXRON (GM Type à

Hydraulic circuit drive refill
oil Suffix A)
- Brak
Brakee opera
operation
tion piston surfa
surface
ce lubri-
cation
- Lubrication for:
110 - 130 - 150
Bearing
Front axle
Grea
Grease
se AGIP
AGIP GR
GREA
EASE
SE 30 (G
(Gre
reas
ase
e 30
30))
Lubrication
a) bush, pins and pedal latch
b) pump piston
c) brake inside surfaces
sliding surfaces
in contact with
brake holder box support links
d) par
parkin
king
g bra
brake
ke com
compon
ponent
entss andpins
239

BRAKES
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND CORRECTIONS
The following are indispensable in any search for defects in the brake system:
—
— Check wear of of
Check pressure tyres
tyres
— Check brake fluid and anyway verify that it is within the maintenance programmed
Fault Probable cause Corrective action
Loss
Loss of flu
fluid
id fro
from
m bra
brake
ke pla
plant
nt uni
unions
ons Tighte
Tighten
n uni
unions
ons
Loss
Loss of fl
flui
uid
d fr
from
om br
brak
ake
e pu
pump
mp Over
Overha
haul
ul br
brak
ake
e pu
pump
mp
The pedal goes the full run (oil in the
float lowers) Inte
Intern
rnal
al dr
draw
aw-b
-by
y in br
brak
ake
e un
unit
it Over
Overha
haul
ul br
brak
ake
e un
unit
it
Piston holding gasket or sliding surface

Change gaskets or sliding surfaces
worn
Air in the unit Bleed the unit
Holding
Holdin g gas
gasket
ket of com
comman
mand
d pum
pump
p ine
inef-
f-
The pedal goes the full run (oil in float Overhaul the brake pump
ficient
does not lower)
Flexible pipe swollen a therefore ineffi- Change fle
Change flexib
xible
le pip
pipes
es and ble
bleed
ed the
cient or pipes used of poor quality unit
Air in the brake system Bleed the unit
Breath
Breather
er hol
hole
e on
on tank
tank cov
cover
er bla
black
cked
ed Clean
Clean a blee
bleed
d the
the uni
unitt
Pedal resilient
Work of br
Work brak
ake
e fl
flui
uid
d wi
with
th bo
boil
ilin
ing
g po
poin
intt to
too
o
Changethe
Changethe bra
brake
ke flu
fluid
id a ble
bleed
ed the uni
unitt
low
Chec
Checkk br
brak
ake
e pu
pump
mp a wh
whee
eell cy
cyli
lind
nder
ers
s to
Loss of fluid from the brake unit pipes
fend eventual loss a repair
Air in brake unit Bleed the brake unit
Brake action poor Friction unit worn Change discs
Overhaul control piston a change if ne-

Control piston worn or seized
cessary
Brak
Brake
e pu
pump
mp no
nott wo
work
rkin
ing
g co
corr
rrec
ectl
tly
y Repa
Repair
ir or ch
chan
ange
ge
240

BRAKES
Brake action poor Mechanical obstacles in pedal fun Free as necessary
Tyre pressure in
inc
correct Pump to correct pressure
Pump piston loose Overhaul brake pump
Connection
Connection pipe dama
damaged
ged or blocke
blocked
d Change
Change pump
pump conne
connection
ction pipe
Con
ontr
trol
ol pi
pis
sto
ton
n se
seal
al rin
ing
g wor
orn
n Cha
hang
nge
e sea
eall rin
ings
gs
Brakes uneven
Clea
Cleari
ring
ng pi
pipe
pe bl
bloc
ocke
ked
d or bi
bick
cken
en Repa
Repair
ir or ch
chan
ange
ge
Deli
Delive
very
ry pi
pipe
pe bl
bloc
ocke
ked
d or bi
bick
cken
en Chan
Change
ge pi
pipi
ping
ng
Brake disc gasket worn on one side of

Change brake discs
vehicle
Unev
Uneven
enly
ly wo
worn
rn or ch
chipp
ipped
ed br
brak
ake
e Chan
Change
ge da
dama
mage
ged
d di
disc
scs
s
Brake vibrating
Oil polluted with water Change oil in unit
Grease the connection check the wear

Movement of pedal obstructed
of return spring
Bra
rak
ke pu
pum
mp pi
pis
sto
ton
n sei
eize
zed
d Over
erha
haul
ul pu
pum
mp a bl
blee
eed
d th
the
e un
unit
it
Discs very worn Repair of or change disc

Brake does not move forward
Hand brake does not return Check a repair
Brak
Brake
e pu
pum
mp cy
cyli
lind
nder
er bl
bloc
ocke
ked
d Over
Overha
haul
ul pu
pump
mp a bl
blee
eed
d th
the
e un
unit
it
Piping blocked Check a dean
Adjustment incorrect Adjust

Parking brake doesn’t
Plates worn Change plates
Cable return blocked Unblock a change cables

On removing parking brake the tractor
The unl
unlock
ock lev
lever
er butt
button
on does
doesn’t
n’t ret
return
urn Dismou
Dismount
nt a unb
unbloc
lock
k or cha
changethe
ngethe lev
lever
er
remains braked
Plates sticking to discs Unblock or change the defective part
241

BRAKES
Elec
Electr
tric
ical
al co
conn
nnec
ecti
tion
on br
brok
oken
en Repa
Repair
ir th
the
e co
conn
nnec
ecti
tion
on
Brake
Brake light does not light up Switch faulty Change
Light faulty Change
Trai
Traile
lerr hy
hydr
drau
aulic
lic br
brak
ake
e di
dist
stri
ribu
buto
torr Repa
Repair
ir or ch
chan
ange
ge
Trailer brake inefficient
Rear brake distributor connection pipe
Change the piping
damaged
242
WHEELS AND TYRES
CONTENTS
CHECK
CHECK OF TYR
TYRE
E CON
CONDIT
DITION.
ION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
244
4 DISMOUNTING AND REMOUNTING
Excess
Excessivewear
ivewear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 OFWHEELS
OFWHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
245
243

WHEELS AND TYRES
CHECK OF TYRE CONDITION
1. Check the condition of the tread. If it is deformed or too worn, change the tyre.
2. Removes bits, stones or any other foreign matter which is trapped between the lugs of the treads.
3. Check that the tread and the sides of the tyres are not cracked; split of otherwise damaged.
4.
Verify that there is no loss of air or, in the case of ballasting, no loss of water from the valve.
EXCESSIVE WEAR
In case of excessive wear of tyres work in conformity with the following table:
Insuffici
Insufficient
ent inf
inflat
lation
ion pre
press
ssure
ure (ra
(rapid
pid
Measure and regulate the pressure
wear of treads threads)
Shoulders worn
Tyre too old Increase inflat

Increase inflation
ion pres
pressure
sure (with
(within
in gi-
ven limits)
Ballast within the load limits allowed for

Too slippery when ploughing tyres
Irregular wear
Circumference slits of the front bars
Too much inflation Measure & regulate the pressure
Tread threads worn in the middle

244

WHEELS AND TYRES
DISMOUNTING AND REMOUNTING OF WHEELS

WARNING 5. Place a safety tripod 2
tripod 2 with a block of wood placed
To carry out the following operations it is advi- betwee
between n it an
and
d th
the
e wh
whee
eel,l, un
unde
derr th
the
e ba
back
ck su
supp
ppor
ortt 1 or
sable to have two operators, necessary in any unde
underr th
the
e fr
fron
ontt su
supp
ppor
ortt an
andd th
than
an ta
take
ke th
the
e wh
whee
eell of
offf th
the
e
case when working on the back wheels. hub and lower the hoist.
1. Pa
Park
rk thevehic
thevehicle
le on theflat wit
with
h thehand
thehandbra
brake
ke on
on..
2. Using a spanner with a long handle, loosen the
eight nuts fixing the wheel 1
wheel 1..
1 - Back support
2 - Safety tripod
1 - Wheel CAUTION
When working on the back wheel keep the chain
pull
pu lled
ed ti
tigh
ghtt du
duri
ring
ng th
the
e re
remo
mova
vall of th
the
e wh
whee
eell so as
3. Working on the back wheel, lift the wheel with the
to avoid it falling. When working on front wheels,
help of a chain to the necessary height.
even though they are smaller, be extremely care-
4. Po
Posit
sition
ion a wh
wheel
eel jac
jack
k 2 wi
with
th a bl
bloc
ock
k of wo
wood
od pl
plac
aced
ed
ful during their removal especially if you are not
between it and the wheel, under the front support if
using any hoisting.
you
yo u ar
are
e wo
work
rkin
ing
g on th
thee fro
front
nt pa
pane
nel,
l, an
and
d ja
jack
ck up th
the
e ve
ve--
hicle.
6. Proceed with the remounting of the wheel working
in the reverse order taking care to tighten the eight
fixing nuts properly.
1 - Rear support
2 - Wheel jack
245

WHEELS AND TYRES
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANC
246
COMPLETE CABINE
CONTENTS
COM
COMPLE
PLETE
DismountingTE CABCABINE
. . . INE
. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 284
284
284 SE
SEAT
ATSS . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 311
Sableseat 311
Prelim
Pre limina
inaryry op
opera
eratio
tion n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Remova
Rem ovall andinsta
andinstalla llatiotion n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Gear
Ge ar eng
engag agemementlever.
entlever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 286
6 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Locking
Lock ing leve
leverage
rage diffe
different rential ial and P.T.O . . . . . 286 Checks
Checks anand d con
contro trols ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Double traction engagement leverage Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
and
an d pa
park
rkining
g br
brak
ake e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 286
6 Gram
Gramme
merr se
seat at . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Auxiliary distributor tie rod and Removal
Remo val and inst installaallation tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 316
hydrau
hyd raulic
lic ho
hoist
ister
er tie rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Electr
Ele ctrica
icall con
conne necti
ction
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Checks
Checks anand d con
contro trols ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Hydros
Hyd rostat
tatic
ic ste
steeri
ering
ng circircuicuitt pip pipe e . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Cab
Ca b re
remo
mova vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Bostomseat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Remova
Rem ovall andinsta
andinstalla llatiotion n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CAB ROO
ROOF F ANDINSID
ANDINSIDE E RO ROOF OF TRI TRIM. M. . . . . . . . . 290 290 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Cab
Ca b ro
roof.
of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Checks an
Checks and d con
controtrols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Remova
Rem ovall an
and d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29291
1 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Sun
Su n ro
roof.
of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 INSI
INSIDE
DE TR TRIM.IM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32322
2
Remova
Rem ovall an
and d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29291
1 Remo
Re mova vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Insi
Insideroo
derooff trtrim
im . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
293 Post
Po st,, si
sill
ll an
andd cr
cros
oss s tr
trim.
im. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Remova
Rem ovall an
and d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29293
3 Left
Le ft whe
wheelh elhououse
se tri
trim
m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Right
Rig ht whe
wheelh elhous
ouse e tri
trimm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Comp
Co mplelete
te do
door.
or. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Floo
Fl oorr tr
trim
im . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Remova
Rem ovall an
and d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29295
5 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Lock
Lo ck an
and d ha
handndle
le.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 FINISHING PROFILE AND
Remova
Rem ovall an
and d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29295
5 EXTERN
EXT ERNAL AL ACC ACCESSESSORI ORIES.ES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Glas
Gl asss an
and d ga
gasksketet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Finish
Finishingprofi
ingprofile le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Remo
Re movavall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
297 Remova
Rem ovall andinsta
andinstalla llatio
tionn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Extern
Externalal acc
access essoriories
es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
WIND
WI NDOW OWS S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Remova
Rem ovall andinsta
andinstalla llatio
tionn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Side
Sid e win
windodows.
ws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 HOODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Remova
Rem ovall an
and d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30300
0 Uppe
Up perr ho
hoodod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Rear
Re ar wi
wind
ndow
ow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Remov
Re moval al andinsta
andinstalla llatio
tionn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
328
8
Remova
Rem ovall an
and d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30301
1 Hood
Hoo d po
posit
sitionadju
ionadjustm stmen entt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
FIXED
FIX ED GLA
GLASS SS AND GA GASKESKET T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Uppe
Up perr ho
hood od . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fron
Fr ontt gl
glas
ass.
s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Dashb
Da shboaoard rd fra
frame.
me. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 330
0
Remo
Re movavall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
303 Sidehoo
Si dehoods ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33330
0
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 MUDGUARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Rearglass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Rearr mu
Rea mudg dgua uardrd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Remo
Re movavall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
305 Remov
andinstalla llatio
tionn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
331
1
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Front
Fro nt mud
mudgu guardards s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
DASHBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Remov
andinstalla llatio
tionn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
332
2
Instru
Instrume
mentnt pan
panel
el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 TECHNICAL DATA AND SPECI
TECHNICAL SPECIFICAT FICATIONS.IONS. . . . 333
Remova
Rem ovall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30307
7 Gene
General
ral spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
333
3
Instru
Instructi
ction
on pa
panenell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Remova
Rem ovall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30308
8
283

COMPLETE CABINE
COMPLETE CABINE
DISMOUNTING
PRELIMINARY OPERATION
Operating from the right side, proceed with the dis-
mounting as follows:
1. Unloosen the three fastening nuts from the guide
vane of the engine side hoods and remove.
2. Separate the battery terminals.
3. Uns
Unscre
creww the fou
fourr fas
fasten
tening
ing nu
nuts
ts of the spo
spoile r 1 pla-
iler
ced
ce d on th
the
e ri
righ
ghtt si
side
de anand
d re
remo
move
ve to
toge
gethther
er wi
with
th th
thee ex
ex--
haust manifold guard 2 .
1 - Speedometer cable
2 - Pilot engine
3 - Stop engine cable
4 - Accelerator
5 - Brake circuit pipe fittings
6 - Panel
8. Disconnect, on both sides, the fastening clamps 1

of the conditioner-heater unit of the cab.
9. Trig the air conveyor union 2 of the cab.
1 - Spoiler
2 - Exhaust manifold
4. Un
Unscre
screw
w the fas
fasten
tening
ing nu
nuts
ts of the pil
pilot
ot en
engine 2, th
gine the
e
fastening nut of the stop engine cable 3 and the nut of
the cable 1 of the speedometer and remove them.
5. Unscrew the fittings of the two brake circuit flexible
tubes 5 .
6. Unloosen the two fastening screws (on both sides)
of the panel 6 placed between the engine and cabin.
7. Dis
Discon
conne
nect
ct fro
from
m therear the acc
accele
elerat
rator
or con
contro
troll rod
4 from the relative control lever, extracting the faste-
ning split pin.
1 - Clamp
2 - Air conveyor union
284

COMPLETE CABINE
10. Rem
Remove
ove fro
from
m the alt
altern
ernato
atorr of the hea
heatin
ting
g sys
system
tem,, 5. Disco
Disconne
nnect
ct the two conn
connectors 2 and Unl
ectors Unloos
oosen
en the
the multiple plug 1 and the cable 2 . fixing screw from the resistance and remove together
with the electric cables 1 .
1 - Multiple plug
2 - Cable
1 - Resistance
Working on the left side, proceed with the dismoun- 2 - Connectors
tings as follows:
1. 6.
Unloosen
vane the three
of the engine sidefastening
hoods and nuts from the guide
remove. Cut
bles the the
from cable fastening clamps and take off the ca-
alternator.
2. Unloo
Unloosen
sen the fiv
five
e fas
fasten
tening
ing scr
screws
ews an
and
d rem
remove
ove the 7. Proceed with the removal of the upper hood (see:
thermoprotective panel 1 of the heater. Hoods - Upper Hood - Dismounting and Installation).
3. Disconnect the connectors 4 of the electric circuit, 8. Dra
Drain
in the oil fro
fromm the ste
steeri
ering
ng sys
system
tem (se
(see:
e: Hyd
Hydros
ros--
unscrew the nut 3 and remove the earth cables 2. tatic Steering - Complete Hydraulic Circuit - Oil Drai-
ning).
NOTE 9. Uns
Unscre
crew
w the fit
fittin
tings
gs of the fou
fourr hyd
hydro
ro ste
steeri
ering
ng pip
pipes
es
Disengage the cables from the fastening clamp. 1 (o
(off wh
whicich
h on
only
ly tw
two o ar
are
e vi
visi
sibl
ble
e in th
the
e di
diag
agra
ram)
m) po
posi
siti
tio-
o-
ned at the centre of the front cab bulkhead.
4. Disconnect all the electric contacts of the starter
motor.
1 - Thermoprotective panel 1 - Hydro steering pipes

2 - Earth cables
3 - Nut
4 - Connectors
285

COMPLETE CABINE
10. Unscrew the fitting 1 and remove the pipe 2 from 1. Remove the fastening split pin of the pivot4 slip off
the clutch pump 3 . the pivot and disconnect the differential lock lever 3
3 .
2. Open and extract the safety fastener 1 and discon-
nect the engagement lever.
1 - Fitting
2 - Clutch control circuit pipe 1 - Safety fastener
3 - Clutch pump 2 - P.T.O. control lever
3 - Differential lock control lever
4 - Pivot
GEAR ENGAGEMENT LEVER
DOUBLE TRACTION ENGAGEMENT LEVERAGE
1. Remove the bellows 3 from the gear engagement
AND PARKING BRAKE
lever,
lev er, tak
takingoff
ingoff fro
from
m the
their
ir sea
seats
ts an
and
d un
unscre
screw
w thefixin
thefixing
g
screw of the lever to the gear sector 1 1 .
1. Tak
Take
e of
offf th
the
e sp
spli
litt pi
pin,
n, ex
extra
tract
ct th
the
e pivott 4 and disco
pivo discon-
n-
2. Remove the two sound proofing panels 2 placed
nect from the left side the parking brake control lever
under the gear level.
3.
2. Tak
Take
e of
offf th
the
e sp
spli
litt pi
pin,
n, ex
extra
tract
ct th
the
e pivott 1 and disco
pivo discon-
n-
nect the double traction control lever 2. 2.
1 - Gear selector
2 - Sound proofing
proofing panels
3 - Rubber bellows
LOCKIN
LOCK ING
G LELEVE
VERA
RAGE
GE DIFF
DIFFER
EREN
ENTI
TIAL
AL
AND P.T.O.
CAUTION
To be avoided, during the remounting, the leve- 1 - Pivot
tou -
rage adjustment, disconnect these without tou- 2 - Double traction control lever
ching the adjustm
adjustment
ent nuts. 3 - Parking brake control lever
4 Pivot
286

COMPLETE CABINE
AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTOR
AUXILIARY DISTRIBUTOR TIE ROD AND
HYDRAULIC HOISTER TIE ROD
1. Op
Open
en an
and
d ext
extrac
ractt the thr
three
ee fas
fasteners 3 and disc
teners discon
on--
nect th
nect thee th
thre
ree
e ti
tie
e rods 1 fro
rods from
m the lever 2, toth
lever tothe
e ri
righ
ghtt of
the lifting housing.
2. Extract the two clips 6 and disconnect the two lifter
control rods 7 from the shafts 4 and 5 .
1 - Parking brake warning light connector

2 - Double traction warning light connector
3 - Rear connector
HVDROSTAT
HVDROSTATIC
IC STEE
STEERING
RING CIRCU
CIRCUIT
IT PIPE
1. Disconnect on the left side, unscrewing the fitting,
the delivery pipe 1 of the hydrostatic steerage.
2.
Unloosen
steerage the clamp
oil return pipe 2.and extract the hydrostatic
1 - Auxiliary distributor tie rod

2 - Lever
3 - Safety fastener
4 - Outside shaft
5 - Inside shaft
6 - Metal clip
7 - Lifter control rod
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1 - Oil delivery pipe

2 - Oil return pipe
the connects 1 and 2 from the parking
1. Disconnect
brake warning light and the double traction warning
light. CAB REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the two big connectors 3 from the rear
end of the vehicle. 1. Unscrew and remove the fastening bolts 1 of the
four silent blocks that support the cab.
287

COMPLETE CABINE
1 - Fuel supply pipe

2 - Fuel recovery pipe
1 - Silent block fastening bolt
5. Removewith caution the cab, checking that no

2. Remove the tour fastening screws ( Ø12 mm; 0.47 component hinders the removal.
in) of the root, and screw in their place tour eyebolts
then using a spring equalizing rocker arm and a hois-
ter, lift with precaution the cab about 10 cm (3.9 in). CAUTION
Do no
nott ca
carr
rry
y out an
any
y re
repa
pair
irs
s on th
the
e com
compon
ponent
ents s il
il--
lustr
lustrat
ated
ed in th
the
e di
diag
agra
ram,
m, as the
they
y ar
aree su
subje
bject
ct to ho-
mologation.
3. Disconnect on the right side, the electric cables of 1 - Cab front structure
the fuel level indicator, the fuel reserve warning light 2 - Cab frame
and the stop light.
4. Loosen the clip and remove the fuel supply pipe 1 ,
the fuel recovery pipe 2 from the injectors and the
pump injector, and the fuel air vapor pipe.
288

COMPLETE CABINE
INSTALLATION — Clutch control circuit pipe.

— Hydrostatic gear circuit pipes.
1. Positi
Posi tion
on th
the
e ca
cab
b ab
abov
ove
e th
the
e ve
vehi
hicl
cle
e ab
abou
outt 10 cm (3
(3.9
.9 — Starter motor electric cable.
in), so that the fastening points of the silent-block are — Connector on the cab front side.
aligned. — Earth cables.
2. Recover, working in reverse order to that of the re-
re - — Heater resistance and relative cables.
moval, the following components: — Heather alternator electric cable
— Fuel supply pipes — Thermo protective side panels.
— Fuel recovery pipe of the injectors and the pump — Air conveyor union
injector — Accelerator control leverage.
— Fuel air vapor pipe — Bulkhead between engine and cab.
— Electric cables of the fuel level indicator, fuel re- — Brake circuit pipes.
serve indicator and the stop indication light. — Engine stop cable.
— Speedometer cable.
3. Leave the cab on the silent-block, screw the faste- — Air deflector.
ning bolt of the silent block and working in reverse or- — Battery terminals.
derr to th
de that
at of th
the
e re
remo
mova
val,
l, fa
fast
sten
en th
the
e fo
foll
llow
owin
ing
g co
comp
mpo-
o- — Hood sides.
nents:
— Hydrostatic steering circuit oil return and oil reco- 4. Remo
Remove
ve the sprin
spring
g equ
equalizi
alizing
ng rocke
rocker-arm
r-arm,, unsc
unscrew
rew
very pipes. the eyebolt and rescrew the screws on the cab roof,
— Parking brake warning light and double traction and seal with a suitable silicone product to avoid pos-
electric cables. sible infiltration to the under structure.
— Connections on the rear end of the vehicle. 5. Proc
Proceed
eed wit
with
h the air ble
bleed
eding
ing of the clu
clutch
tch hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic
— Hydraulic lifting control leverage. system (see: Clutch - Gear Clutch - Hydraulic System
— Auxiliary hydraulic distributor leverage Bleeding) of the hydraulic brake system (see: Brakes
Double traction engagement leverage Hydraulic System Air Bleeding) and of the hydrostatic
— Parking brake leverage.
— steering
steering system (see: Hydrostatic
Hydrostatic Stee
Steering
ring - Com-
— P.T.O. control leverage. plete hydraulic Circuit - Deareation).
— Differential blockage control leverage.
— Gear engagement lever.
289

COMPLETE CABINE
CAB ROOF AND INSIDE ROOF TRIM
1 - Sun roof 14 - Sun shade

2 - Fork 15 - Radio socket bracket
3 - Pivot 16 - Consol
4 - Retaining ring 17 - Screw anchor
5 - Shock absorber 18 - Ceiling cab trim
6 - Bracket 19 - Retainer block
7 - Clinch 20 - Connecting link
8 - Shoulder ring 21 - Sunroof trim
9 - Plug 22 - Split pin
10 - Sunroof lock handle 23 - Washer
11 - Sunroof canopy gasket 24 - Pivot
12 - Cab roof 25 - Hinge
13 - Cab roof gasket
290

COMPLETE CABINE
CAB ROOF 5. Remove the gasket 1 from the cab roof 2

2 inserted
by pressure, being careful to not deform the metal in-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION sert in case of reuse.
1. Ifthe cab has a sunroof, with reference to the pre-

vious diag
vious diagram,
ram, remove the retairetainer
ner bloc
blockk 19, th
the
e
connectin
conn g link 20, and the sun
ecting sunroo
rooff gaskett 11 inserted
gaske
by pressure.
2. Wit
With
h ref
refere
erenceto
nceto the fol
follow
lowingdiagr
ingdiagram am,, rem
removethe
ovethe
compartme
comp artmentnt glas
glass
s ceil ing bowl 1, (see: Electrical
ceiling Electrical
System – Internal lighting - Ceiling bowl).
3. Unloosen the screws as shown in the diagram and
remove the cab roof from the sunroof trim (unloosen
the screws 2 only when the cab is fitted with a sunro-
of).
1 - Cab roof gasket

2 - Cab roof
6. Remount the cab roof working in reverse order to

that of the removal, taking care to apply a suitable si-
lico
licon
n pr
prod
oduc
uctt to th
the
e fa
fast
sten
enin
ing
g sc
scre
rews
ws of th
the
e ca
cab
b ro
roof
of to
avoid infiltration to the understructure.
1 - Compartment ceiling bowl SUNROOF

2 - Screw
4. Unloosen the screws shown in the diagram and re-
move the cab roof. 1. Unhook the shock absorbers 3 from the fork 2 pus-
hing upwards the sunroof 1
1 .
1 - Cab roof
1 - Sunroof
2 - Fork
3 - Shock absorbers
291

COMPLETE CABINE
2. Unloosenthe screws indicated in the diagram and

remove the sunroof 1 1 from the cab roof 2 2 .
3. Remove the split pin 4 , slip off the pivot 5 together
with the washer 6
6 and remove the hinge 3 .
1 - Sunroof
2 - Cab roof
1 - Screws
3 - Hinge
2 - Fork
4 - Split pin
3 - Sunroof trim
5 - Pivot
6 - Washer
6. Remove the clinch 2 and unhook the shock absor-

4. Extra
Extract
ct the plug 3 andremov
plug andremove
e thehandle 1 together
thehandle bers 1 from the bracket 3 .
7. Unloosen the screw shown in the diagram and re-
with the shoulder ring 2.
move the bracket.
1 - Sunroof lock handle

1 - Shock absorber
2 - Plastic shoulder ring
2 - Clinch
3 - Plug
3 - Bracket
5. Unl
Unloo
oosen
sen the screws 1, re
screws remo
move
ve th
the
e fork 2, th
fork then
en un
un--
loosen the scr
loosen screws
ews sho
shown
wn in the dia
diagra
gram
m fas
fasten
tening
ing the 8. Unloosen the fastening screws 1 of the connecting
link of the retaining block 3 and remove.
trim 3 to the canopy and remove. 9. Remove the gasket 2 , paying attention not to de-
form the metal insert in case of reuse.
292

COMPLETE CABINE
2. Remove the trim from the post (see: Inside Trim

Dismounting).
move the consol 1, and if present, the digital clock
connector 3 .
4. Remove the bowl 2 (see: Electric System - Inside
Lighting - Compartment Ceiling Bowl).
1 - Connecting link
2 - Gasket
3 - Retaining block
10. Refit the sunroof, working in reverse order to that

of the dis
dismo
moununtin
ting
g and acc
accord
ording
ing to the fol
follow
lowing
ing spe
spe--
cifications:
— Lubricate with the specific grease the hinge, the
pivot of the lock handle and shock absorber at-
tachment points.
—
Do notroof
of the tighten
trim,excessively the fastening
of the connecting screws
link and the 1 - Consol
2 - Bowl
fastening block. 3 - Digital clock
5. If th
the
e ca
cab
b is fi
fitt
tted
ed wi
with
th a su
sun
n ro
roof
of,, re
remo
move
ve th
the
e ga
gask
sket
et
INSIDE ROOF TRIM of the sun roof and the retaining block (see: Sun Roof
Dismounting and Installation).
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 6. Unloosen the screws of the screw anchor shown in
the diagram and remove the inside roof trim 1, paying
NOTE attention not to deform it.
If removed, replace always the screw anchors.
1. Unloosenthe screws shown in the diagram, fixing

the sun shade 1 on both sides of the cab, and remove
the shade.
1 - Inside cab roof trim
7. When
Wheneve
everr the tra
tracto
ctorr is pre
predis
dispo
posed
sed for the fit
fittin
ting
g of
a radio,
and unloosen
remove the rack
the radio screws shown
bracket 1 . in the diagram
1 - Sun shade
293

COMPLETE CABINE
8. Remount the internal trim working in reverse order

to that of the dismounting, taking care not to tighten
too much the screws.
1 - Radio rack bracket
DOOR
1 - Pin
2 - Pivot
3 - Upper hinge
4 - Plastic bush
5 - Plastic cap
6 - Shock absorber
7 - Pivot
8 - Clinch
9 - Outside gasket
10 - Frame
11 - Knob
12 - Gasket
13 - Door lock handle
14 - Pivot
15 - Lower hing
16 - Spring
17 - Door lock mechanism
18 - Plastic cover
19 - Adjusting screw
20 - Handle
21 - Spring
22 - Lock
23 - Window weather strip
24 - Glass window
294

COMPLETE CABINE
COMPLETE DOOR
4. Remove the rear view mirror (see: Profile of Finis-
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION hing and Exter
External
nal Acce
Accessori
ssories
es - Outs
Outside
ide Acce
Accesso-
sso-
ries).
1. Usinga screwdriver, remove the plastic clinch 3 5. If necessary, strip the hinge working as follows:
and take off the shock absorbers 2 from the pivot 1 . (1) Extract the pin 2 and take off the pivot 4.
(2) Remove the hinge 1 and take off the bush 3 .
1 - Pivot
2 - Shock absorbers
3 - Plastic clinch
2. Remove the rubber plugs 1 .

3. Hold the doo
door,
r, un
unloo
loosen
sening
ing the screws 2 th
screws that
at fi
fix
x it to
the hin
hinge
ge an
and
d rem
removethem,
ovethem, pre
prefer
ferab
ably
ly wit
with
h the he
help
lp of
a second person.
1 - Hinge
2 - Pin
CAUTION 3 - Plas
Plastic
tic bush
Take
Take ca
carre no
nott to le
lett th
the
e sc
scre
rews
ws fa
fall
ll on th
the
e in
insi
side
de of 4 - Pivot
the door frame
frame..
6. Install
the door working in reverse order to that of
the removal, taking note of the following:
— Lubricate with the specified grease the pivot and
bush of the hinge.
—
Orientate with
hinge so as to a screw driver
coincide the
the pin pivots
holes of theon
present
the pivots and the hinge.
LOCK AND HANDLE

1. Loosen the screws 1 and remove the plastic cover

2.
2. Unhook the spring 3 and unscrew the threaded pi-
vot 4.
3. Extract upwards the lever 5.
5.
1 - Rubber plugs
2 - Screws
295

COMPLETE CABINE
1 - Screws
2 - Plastic cover
3 - Spring
4 - Threaded pivot
necessary, remove the lock block 1 working as
6. If
5 - Door lock lever
follows:
Loosen the lock nut 4, unlo
(1) Loosen unloosen
osen the adju
adjusting
sting
screw 5 and remove together with the washer and
shoulder ring 3 .
4. Unloosenthe fastening screws of the lock mecha-
(2)) Ta
(2 Take
ke of
offf th
the
e lo
lock
ck bl
block 1 toge
ock together
ther with the spring 2.
spring
nism 1 and remove.
1 - Lock mechanism
1 - Lock block
2 - Spring
3 - Shoulder ring
5. Unscrewthe nuts indicated in the diagram and re- 4 - Lock nut
move the handle together with the lock block. 5 - Adjusting screw
6 - Handle
296

COMPLETE CABINE
7. Re
Refit
fit the ha
handl
ndle
e an
and
d do
door
or lo
lock
ck mec
mechan
hanism
ism,, wor
workin
king
g
in reverse order to that of the dismounting taking note
of the following.
— Lubricate with the specified grease the door lock
mechanism.
— If necessary, adjust the run of the lock clamp by
way of the adjusting screw and the lock nut.
8. Remounting completed, control the functioning of
the doo
doorr loc
lock
k me
mecha
chanis
nism
m an
and d if ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, loo
loosen
sen the
two fastener adjusting screws 1 and orientate until a
perfect closing of the door is made.
1 - Glass weather strip

2 - Door frame
1 - Lock fastener 5. R
Remo
emove
ve the we
weath
ather
er stri
strip
p fix
fixed
ed en
end
d mo
moun
unted
ted on the
window taking it off towards the outside.
6. Re
Remo
moveve th
the
e ou
outs
tsid
ide
e we
weat
athe
herr st
stri
rip
p fr
from
om th
the
e do
door
or ta
ta--
king it off towards the outside. If necessary, reuse the
GLASS AND GASKET weathe
wea therr str
strip,
ip, tak
taking
ing car
care
e no
nott to str
stretc
etchh themetal lip in-
sert where the door sheet frame is fixed.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door (see: Complete Door - Removal INSTALLATION

and Installation).
2. Posi
Position
tion the door hori
horizonta
zontally,
lly, lean
leaning
ing the outsi
outside
de of 1. Insert the weather strip on the glass.
the frame on a wooden block. 2. Lean the glass complete with weather strip on a le-
3. Usi
Using
ng a scr
screwd
ewdriv
river,
er, mo
move
ve the wea
weathe
therr strip 1 from
strip vel, keeping it lifted with some wooden blocks.
the edge of the glass unsticking it from the frame 2 in 3. Spread the weather strip with non oil y lubricant li-
theplaces
theplace s whe
where
re it ma
may
y ha
have
ve be
been
en glu
glued
ed (1s
(1stt ph
phase
ase).
). quid (e.g. neutral soap and water solution) so as to
4. Push the glass downwards (external side of the make
ma ke the ha
hand
ndlin
lingg of the wea
weathe
therr stri
strip
p eas
easier
ier whe
when
n in-
door) and at the same time take off the weather strip serted on the frame.
from the metal border of the frame (2nd phase). 4. Place around all the perimeter the weather strip 1 ,
and in the slot seat of the border of the sheet frame,
sheather
shea ther cable 3, fl
cable flex
exib
ible
le an
and
d qu
quit
ite
e st
stro
rong
ng (i
(in
n he
hemp
mp or
nylon with a diameter of 3 mm; 0.12 in).
CAUTION
Carry out the operation the full perimeter paying
atte
attenti
ntion
on not to dam
damage
age the gla
glass
ss es
espe
pecia
ciall
lly
y at the
corn
co rner
ers.
s. Re
Remo
move
ve the
then
n the gl
glass
ass,, to
toget
gethe
herr wi
with
th the
weatherr strip from the frame
weathe frame..
297

COMPLETE CABINE
6. Pul
Pulll sl
slow
owly
ly on
one
e en
end
d of th
the
e ca
cabl
ble
e in or
orde
derr to tr
trig
ig th
the
e li
lip
p
of th
the
e we
weat
athe
herr st
strip 2 on th
rip the
e bo
bord
rder
er of th
the
e sh
shee
eett fr
fram
ame e
3. Taking care, especially to the glass corners, with
the help of a screwdriver, position the weather strip in
theposition
theposit ions
s wh
where
ere it, hasnot be
been
en ins
insert
erted
ed cor
correc
rectly
tly..
1 - Weather strip
2 - Glass
3 - Cable
1 - Sheather cable
2 - Weather strip
5. Place on top of the glass, the door frame with the 3 - Frame
extern
external
al sid
side
e do
downw
wnwardards,
s, tak
takingcare
ingcare to kee
keep
p tog
togeth
ether
er
and facing upwards the two ends of the sheathed
cable 1 .
7. Insertthe outside weather strip to the door frame,
closin
closing
g th
thee li
lip
p wi
with
th th
the
e me
meta
tall in
inse
sert
rt on th
the
e bo
bord
rder
er of th
the
e
sheet.
298

COMPLETE CABINE
WINDOWS
SIDE WINDOWS
1 - Window glass
2 - Movable part of the hinge
3 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
4 - Pivot
5 - Fixed part of the hinge
6 - Rubber small block
7 - Spacer
8 - Washer
9 - Nut
10 - Cap
11 - Frame
12 - Fork
13 - Pivot
14 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
15 - Window blockage handle
16 - Threaded pivot
17 - Washe
Washer r
299

COMPLETE CABINE
1. Remove the two caps 4 of the window fastening

nuts from the rear hinges 1 .
2. Hold
Holding
ing the win
windo
dow,
w, un
unscr
screw
ew the two nu ts 2 and re-
nuts
move
mo ve the was
washe r 3. Fr
her Free
ee th
the
e lo
lock
ck ha
hand le 5 fro
ndle from
m th
the
e pi
pi--
vot and remove the window.
1 - Pivot
2 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
3 - Hinge
4 - Rear post trim
7. Wi
With
th re
refe
fere
renc
nce
e to th
the
e di
diag
agra
ram
m on pa
page
ge 29
299,
9, ta
take
ke of
off
f
the spac ers 7 pr
spacers pres
esen
entt on al
alll fo
four
ur to
touc
uchi
hing
ng po
poin
ints
ts of th
the
e
1 - Rear hing window glass, and remove the rubber small block.
2 - Nut 8. Rem
Remove
ove the wea
weathe
therr strip 11 mo
strip moununted
ted on the gla
glass.
ss.
3 - Washer In case of reuse of the strip, attention must be paide
4 - Cap not to deform the metal insert lip where the glass is
5 - Window lock handle placed.
9. Pro
Procee
ceedd wit
with
h the ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion of the win
windodoww wor
workin
king
g
in re
reve
vers
rse
e or
orde
derr to th
that
at of th
thee re
remo
mova val,
l, lu
lubr
bric
icat
atin
ingg wi
with
th
3. Wit
With
h ref
refere
erence
nce to the dia
diagra
gram
m on pa
page
ge 29
299,
9, rem
remove
ove the specified grease the hinge pivots and the lock
the ca
the capp 10 tha
thatt cov
covers
ers the fas
fasten
tening
ing nu ts 9 of th
nuts the
e wa
was-
s- handle pivots.
her 2 to ththe
e gl
glas
ass,
s, re
remo
moveve th
thee nu
nuts
ts an
andd th
the
e wa
wash
sherer an
and
d
the lock handle 15 .
4. Remove the retaining ring 14 , the pivot 13 and se-
parate the handle 15 from the fork 12 .
5. Wit
With
h ref
refere
erenceto
nceto thefollo
thefollowin
wingg dia
diagra
gram,
m, rem
removethe
ovethe
trim of the rear post 4, unloosen the fastening screws
of the hinge 3 and remove.
6. Rem
Remove
ove ononee of the ret
retain
aining
ing rings 2, ta
rings take
ke off th
the
e pi-
vot 1 and separate the two parts of the hinge.
300

COMPLETE CABINE
REAR WINDOW
1 - Glass shutter 7 - Pivot 13 - Block catch

2 - Rubber small block 8 - Retaining ring 14 - Nut
3 - Spacer 9 - Weather strip 15 - Window lock handle
4 - Spacer 10 - Frame 16 - Plastic clinch
5 - Fixed part of the hinge 11 - Cap 17 - Threaded pivot
6 - Mobile part of the hinge 12 - Washer 18 - Shock absorber
2. Holding the window, unloosen the two screws that

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION fix the glass to the hinge and remove the complete
window.
1. Remove the clinch 2 that keeps the shock absor-
bers 1 in position on the pivots 3 and disconnect the
rods
rods of theshock ab
absor
sorbe
bers
rs tak
takingthem
ingthem off sid
sidew
eways
ays..
1 - Shock absorbers
2 - Clinch
3 - Pivot
301

COMPLETE CABINE
3. Remove the shock absorbers 1 from the frame 3 .

Remove the cap 8 that cover the contact points of the
frame 3 to the glass 2 , then unloosen the two screws
andthe nu nuts
ts sho
shownwn in thefollo
thefollowin
wing g dia
diagra
gramm an
andd sep
sepa
a-
rate the glass from the frame 3 recovering the washer
7.
4. Take
Take off the spa
spacer s 6 an
cers andd rem
removeove the sma
smallll rub
rubber
ber
blocks 5.
5. Rem
Removeove the weweath
ather
er stri p 4 fi
strip fixe
xedd by pr
pres
essu
sure
re on al
alll
the peperim
rimete
eterr of theglass
theglass.. In the ne need
ed tha
thatt the we
weath
ather
er
stri
stripp ha
hass to be re
reus
used
ed,, ta
take
ke ca
care
re no
nott to st
stre
retc
tch
h th
thee me
me--
tal insert of the lip where the glass fits.
1 - Spacer
2 - Hinge
3 - Screw
4 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
5 - Pivot
8. With reference to the diagram on page 301, uns-

crew the nut 14 and remove the handle 15 from the
frame 10 .
9. If necessary, with reference to the following dia-
gram,, unlo
gram unloosen
osen the two screwscrews s 1 that fix the lock
clamp 2 to the cab and remove them.
10. Fo
Forr the ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion wo
work
rk in the rev
revers
erse e ord
order
er to tha
thatt
of the dis
dismo
mount
unting
ing,, tak
taking
ing no
note
te of the fol
follow
lowing
ing spe
specif
cifi-
i-
cations:
— Lubricate the hinge pivot and the blockage
handle with the recommended grease.
— Check the correct closing of the window and if
necessary regulate the position of the lock clamp
2 blocking it with the screws 1 .
1 - Shock absorbers
2 - Glass
3 - Window frame
4 - Weather strip
5 - Small rubber block
6 - Spacer
7 - Washer
8 - Cap
6. Unloosen the two screws 3 that hold the hinge 2 to

the cab and remove the hinge and the spacer 1 1 .
7. Re
Remo
move
ve on
onee of th
the
e tw
two
o re
reta
tain
inin
ing
g ri
rings 4, sl
ngs sliip off th
the
e
pivot 5 and separate the two parts of the hinge. 1 - Screws
2 - Lock clamp
302

COMPLETE CABINE
FIXED GLASS AND GASKET
1 - Front work floodlight

2 - Bolt
3. Unscrew the fastening nut of the windscreen wiper

arm 2 and move it sideways so as not to obstruct the
removal of the glass.
1 - Glass windscreen
2 - Gasket
3 - Intermediate structure
4 - Side glass
5 - Gasket
6 - Rubber insert
7 - Rear glass
FRONT GLASS
REMOVAL
1 - Nut
CAUTION 2 - Windscreen wiper principle arm
— It is ad
advis
visab
able
le to ta
take
ke of
offf theglas
theglass,
s, in onepiec
onepiece,e,
only
onl y if nece
necessa
ssary
ry con
conside
siderin
ring
g how it is fra
fragil
gile.
e.
— To remove the glass from the cab, two opera- 4. Remove the sun screen (see: Cab Roof and Roof
tors are needed. Internal Trim - Roof Internal Trim).
5. Working from the inside of the cab, slip off the lip of
the gask
gasketet 1 wi
with
th tw
twoo sc
scre
rewd
wdri
rive
vers
rs,, so as to br
brin
ing
g it be
be--
1. Remove the inside trim of the cab roof (see: Cab low
low th
the
e bo
bord
rder
er of th
the
e fra
frame
me sh
shee 2
eett as shshow
own n in th
the
e fo
fol-
l-
Roof and Inside Roof Trim - Inside Roof Trim). lowing diagram, carry out this operation along all the
2. Un
Unscr
screw
ew the fas
fasten
tening
ing bolt 2 of the wo
bolt work
rk flo
flood
odlight 1
light perimeter of the windscreen glass.
on the cab and remove it without disconnecting the
electric cables (if necessary leave it on the cab roof);
recovering the nuts on the inside of the cab frame.
303

COMPLETE CABINE
CAUTION
— During the operation support the glass from
the outside of the cab.
— Avoi
Avoidd cre
creati
ating
ng dan
danger
gerous
ous fle
flexion
xion of the glas
glass.
s.
6. Free the glass windscreen from the gasket.

7. Remove the intermediate structure 3 .
8. Fo
Forr th
thee di
dism
smou
ount
ntin
ing
g of th
the
e si
side
de wi
wind
ndows 4 proceed
ows
as for the windscreen windows.
NOTE
It is possible to remove the side glass without first ha-
ving removed the windscreen glass.
1 - Windscreen glass
2 - Gasket
4. Working from the inside ofeet,

the cab, trig the
lip on th
lip the
e bo
bord
rder
er of the
the ca
cabb sh
shee t, wo
work
rkin
ingg wi th gasket
with a po
poin
in--
ted instrument.
NOTE
Start
Start the op
opera
eratio
tion
n on the pos
posts
ts pro
procee
ceedin
ding
g pa
paral
ralle
lell so
as not to create dangerous flexions in the glass, then
work on the upper side.
1 - Front glass gasket

2 - Cab frame
4 - Side glass
5 - Windscreen glass
9. Remove the gasket of the front glass.
INSTALLATION
1. Trig the gasket on the glass windscreen 1 then co-

ver the gasket with a non greasy lubricating liquid (for
examp
exa mple:
le: ne
neutr
utral
al soa
soap
p an
and
d wat
water
er sol
soluti
ution
on)) to eas
ease
e the
sliding.
2. Lean the lower end of the windscreen glass on its
cab frame seat, fixing the border of the sheet in the 5.Fix in pos
positi
ition
on the int
interm
ermed
ediat
iate
e str
structure 1, ap
ucture appl
ply
y on
seat of the gasket. the zone indicated in the diagram the sealer Loctite
3. Pre
Press
ss lig
lightl
htly
y thewind
thewindscr
screenglassagai
eenglassagainstnst thecab. 495, then mount the side glass 2 in the same way as
the windscreen glass was mounted.

304

COMPLETE CABINE
INSTALLATION
1. Place the seal 3 in the cabin seat then spread the
seal wi
seal with
th no
nonn oi
oill li
liqu
quid
id lu
lubr
bric
ican
antt (e
(e.g
.g.. ne
neut
utra
rall so
soap
ap an
and d
water solution).
2. Posi
Position
tion the glas
glass s 1 an
andd tr
trig
ig th
thee li
lip
p of th
the
e se
sealon
alon th
the e
glass with a pointed implement.
3. Using the impl
implemeementnt 4 sh
showown n in th
the
e di
diag
agra
ram,m, pu
putt in
the rubber insert 2 into the seal.
2 - Side glass
6. Install
the windscreen wiper arm, the lights, the
sunscreen and the cab ceiling trim.
REAR GLASS 1 - Rear glass

2 - Rubber insert
REMOVAL 3 - Seal
4 - Special tools
1. Tak
Take
e ou
outt the rub
rubbe
berr insertt 2 fr
inser fromits
omits se
seat
at in th
the
e ga
gas-
s-
ket 3 and remove.
2. Push the rear glass 1 towards the outside and re-
move.
3. Remove the gasket from the seat in the cab.
1 - Rear glass
2 - Rubber insert
3 - Gasket
305

COMPLETE CABINE
DASHBOARD
1 - Ring nut 11 - Jogging unit 21 - Fuse carrier

2 - Bracket 12 - Pallet opening 22 - Instruction panel
3 - Speedometer 13 - Nut 23 - Diffuser
4 - Group of warning light signals 14 - Stop engine 24 - Current plug
5 - Ring nut 15 - Push button 25 - Ventilation regulation lever
6 - Bracket 17 - Knob 26 - Cover
7 - Indicator 16 - Switch 27 - Frame
8 - Ventilation ducts 19 - Plate 28 - Ring nut
9 - Clamp 18 - Nuts 29 - Speedometer cable
10 - Instrument panel 20 - Ventilation control unit 30 - Return
306

COMPLETE CABINE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION
— Always mark the cables before disconnecting
them to facili
facilitate
tate the install
installation.
ation.
— Discon
Disconnect
nect the earth cable from the battery.
1. Rem
Remove
ove the ste
steeri
ering
ng whe
wheel
el (se
(see:
e: Hyd
Hydros
rostat
tatic
ic Ste
Stee-
e-
ring - Steering Wheel and Column).
2. Unloosen the six screws as shown in the diagram
and remove with care the instrument panel 1 from the
dashboard 2 .
1 - Speedometer
2 - Speedometer cable
3 - Ring nut
4. Disconnectthe five connectors 2 and remove the

instrument panel 1 .
1 - Instrument panel
1 - Instrument panel
2 - Connector
2 - Dashboard
5. Uns
Unscre
crew
w the rin
ring nutt 10 andremo
g nu andremove
ve thebracket 11.
thebracket
the cable 2 of the speedometer 1 by
3. Disconnect
6. Detach the lamp 2 from the speedometer and ex-
unscrewing the ring nut 3.
tract it towards the outside of the instrument panel.
7. Disconnect the connector faston 8 and detach the
lamp 3 from the indicator instrument 4 .
8. Unscrew the ring nut 6 , remove the bracket 5 and
extract the instrument towards the outside of the ins-
trument panel.
9. Comp
Compress
ress the spring 7 and ext
spring extrac
ractt tow
toward
ards
s the ou
out-
t-
side of the warning signal unit 9.
307

COMPLETE CABINE
1 - Speedometer bulb 1 - Hand accelerator control lever

2 - Bayonet bulb 2 - Jogging unit
3 - Bayonet bulb 3 - Connector
4 - Indicator instrument 4 - Screw
5
6 - Ring
Bracket
nut 5 - Connector
7 - Bodkin
8 - Faston connector 7. Disconn
Disconnect
ect the cab
cables
les of the ememerg
ergen
ency
cy lig
light
ht
9 - Warni
Warning
ng signal unit
switch 3, unscrew the ring nut 4 and extract the emer-
10 - Ring nut
11 - Bracket
gency light switch.
8. Disc
Disconn
onnect
ect the cab
cables
les of the wor
work
k flo
flood
odlight 5 press
light
the plastic springs of the switch and remove.
10. Install the instrument panel working in reverse or-
der to that of the removal.
INSTRUCTION PANEL
CAUTION
— Always mark the cables before disconnecting
them to facili
facilitate
tate the install
installation.
ation.
— Detach the earth cable from the battery.
1. Det
Detachthe
achthe cab(see: Co
Compl
mplete
ete cab- Dis
Dismo
moun
untin
ting).
g).
2. Remove the instrument panel (see: Instrument Pa- 1 - Engin
Engine
e stop contr
control
ol cable
nel - Removal and Installation). 2 - Nut
3. Remove the protection from the devioguide unit 3 - Emergency light switch
and the col
colum
umn,
n, rem
remove
ove the col
colum
umn n (se
(see:
e: Hyd
Hydros
rostat
tatic
ic 4 - Ring nut
Steering - Steering Wheel and Column). 5 - Floodlight switch
move the lever 1.
1.
5. Disconnect the connectors 3 and 5 , unloosen the 9. Remove the cover 1
1 forcing it towards the outside
two screws 4 and remove the jogging unit 2 . with a screwdriver.
6. Un
Unscr
screw nutt 2 an
ew the nu and
d ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e en
engi
gine
ne st
stop
op co
con-
n- 10. Uns
Unscre
crew
w the nuts 4 an
nuts andd re
remo
moveve th
the
e fu
fuse
se ho
hold
lder
er un
unit
it
trol cable 1. holder 3
cover 3cables
then unscrew the nuts 2 , disconnect the fuse
5 and remove.
11. Unl
Unloos
oosenen the scr
screws
ews sho
shown
wn in the dia
diagra
gramm ext
extrac
ractt
toward
tow ardss the out
outsid
side
e the cur
curren
rentt plu
plugg 6 and disco
disconne
nnect
ct
the cables.
308

COMPLETE CABINE
1 - Ventilation flow regulation lever

2 - Threa
Threaded
ded dowel
14. Dis
Discon
connec
nectt thecable
thecabless of theair con
condit
dition
ioningunit.
ingunit.
15. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e do
dowe
wels
ls sh
show
own n in th
the
e di
diag
agra
ramm an
and
d ta
take
ke
off the knob 4 unscrew the nuts 2 and take off the air
conditioning control unit 1 .
16. Unloosen the screw 5 and remove the plate 3 .
1 - Cover
2 - Nut
3
4 - Fuse
Nut holder unit cover
5 - Fuse holder
6 - Current plug
7 - Dashboard
12. Re
Remo
move
ve,, on bo
both
th si
side
des
s of th
the
e da
dash
shbo
boar
ard,
d, th
the
e op
ope-
e-
ning 1 and the diffuser 2
2 unhooking the springs 3.
1 - Air conditioning control unit

2 - Nut
3 - Plate
4 - Knob
5 - Screw
17. Disconnect the cables 1 on the tank 2.
1 - Opening
2 - Diffuser
3 - Spring
13. Loo
Loosen
sen the thre
threaded dowell 2 an
aded dowe and
d ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e le
leve
ver
r 1 - Cables
1. 2 - Clutch and brake circuit oil tank
309

COMPLETE CABINE
18. Unscrew the four fastening bolts 2 of the frame 1 23. Remount the dashboard working in reverse order
and remove. to that of the removal, taking care to adequately lubri-
19. Cu
Cutt andremo
andremoveve thefour cla
clamps 3, th
mps thentakeoff
entakeoff th
thee cate the seal.
air conditioning conveyor 4
4 .
1 - Frame
2 - Bolts
3 - Clamp
4 - Air conditioning conveyor
20. Unscrew the instrument panel fastening bolts to

the cab.
21. Spr
Sprea
eadd wit
with
h a no
non
n oil lub
lubric
ricati
ation
on liq
liquid
uid (e.
(e.g.
g. ne
neutr
utral
al
soap and water solution) the seal 1.
22. Making a lever with an appropriate implement,
take off the dashboard 2 from the cab seat.
CAUTION
Do not excessively flex the cabin frame to avoid
breaking
breaking the glass windscreen.
1 - Dashboard seal
2 - Dashboard
310

COMPLETE CABINE
SEATS
SABLE SEAT
1 - Safety belt 11 - Mobile frame 21 - Lever unit

2 - Bush 12 - Spring 22 - Grooved roller
3 - Right armrest 13 - Swinging slide 23 - Bush
4 - Back rest 14 - Fixed frame 24 - Lock block
5 - Bush 15 - Bellow 25 - Bush
6 - Back rest reclining regulation knob 16 - Plastic nail 26 - Seat heig
igh
ht regulating knob
7 - Pivots 17 - Shock absorber regulating knob 27 - Right seat drive
8 - Left armrest 18 - Spring unit 28 - Seat
9 - Safety belt clamp 19 - Plastic roller
10 - Left seat drive 20 - Block
311

COMPLETE CABINE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (2) Working on the mover control lever, bring comple-
tely backwards the seat and then unloosen the rear
1. Unl
Unloo
oosen
sen thefour screws 1 fas
screws fasten
teningthe
ingthe sea
seatt to the screws 3 .
cab 2 and remove the seat complete with the shock
absorber mechanism
mechanism..
3 - Rear seat fastening screws
3. In
Inst
stal
alll th
the
e se
seat
at wo
work
rkin
ing
g in re
reve
vers
rse
e or
orde
derr to th
that
at of th
the
e
re
remo
mova
cific vall ta
taki
grease. king
ng no
note
te to lu
lubr
bric
icat
ate
e th
the
e dr
driv
ive
e wi
with
th th
the
e sp
spe-
e-
DISMOUNTING
1. Remo
Remove
ve the plas
plastic
tic nails 1 an
nails and
d tak
take
e off thebellow 2.
thebellow
1 - Complete seat
2 - Cab floor
2. If
necessary
necess ary,, rem
remove
ove on
only
ly the seat witwitho
hout
ut the
shock abso
absorber
rber mech
mechanis
anism,
m, ope
operatin
rating
g in the follo
following
wing
way.
(1) Working on the mover control lever 2, 2, bring com-
pletely forward the seat and then unloosen the front
screws 1 .
1 - Plastic nail
2 - Bellow
2. Move backwards completely the mobile part of the

drive 1 then unscrew the rear bolts 2 .
3. Move forwards completely the mobile part of the
drive, then unscrew the front bolts 4 and remove the
drive 1 from the mobile frame 3 .
4. Co
Comp
mpreress
ss th
thee sh
shoc
ock
k ab
abso
sorbrber
er me
mech
chan
anis
ism
m so as to
1 - Seat fastener screw bring
bri ng themobi
themobile le fra
frame
me to tha
thatt of thefixed on
one.
e. Kee
Keepin
pingg
2 - Seat mover control lever the memecha
chanis
nism m com
compre
presse
ssed,d, un
unloo
loosen
sen the scre
screw
w
shown in the diagram and remove the lock block 5 .
312

COMPLETE CABINE
1 - Seat drive
2 - Rear bolt
3 - Mobile frame
4 - Front bolt
5 - Lock block 1 - Spring
2 - Rocking slide
5. Unloosen the screws fastening the block 6 to the 3 - Fixed frame
mobile frame 7 . 4 - Shock absorber regulating knob
6. Take off the fixed frame 1 complete with the lever
rear 8side.
unit from the mobile frame 7 taking it out from the 11. Close the lever unit arms 1 and take off the fixed
7. Unloosen the lock nut 2 and the nut 3, unscrew the frame 2.
knob 5 and take off the bush 4 . 12. Unhook the spring unit 3 from the fixed frame slit
and remove.
CAUTION
Avoi
Av oid
d un
unsc
scre
rewi
wing
ng th
the
e nu
nutt 4 un
unti
till th
the
e sp
spri
ring
ng un
unit
it is
dismou
dismounted
nted:: the rem
remount
ounting
ing wil
willl othe
otherwi
rwise
se be
particularity difficult.
1 - Fixed frame
2 - Locknut
3 - Nut
4 - Bush
5 - Knob
6 - Block
7 - Mobile frame 1 - Lever unit
8 - Lever unit 2 - Fixed frame
3 - Spring unit
4 - Nut
8. Unhook the spring 1

from the fixed frame 2 and re-
move it. 13. Take off the pivots of the lever unit 2 the blocks 1,
9. Remove the rocking slide 2 .
the plas
plastic
tic rollers 5 and the chan
rollers channell
nelled
ed roller 3 wit
roller with
h the
10. Remove the shock absorber regulating knob 4. plastic bush 4 .
313

COMPLETE CABINE
17. Separate the seat back 2 from the seat 4 and ta-
keoff the pivot 5.
1 - Blocks
2 - Lever unit
3 - Channelled roller
4 - Plastic bush
5 - Plastic roller
14. Unscrew screw 3 then remove the arm 1 together

with the safety belt 2 and bush 4 .
15. Unscrew the bolt 5 fastening the seat back to the
seat.
1 - Nut
2 - Seat back
3 - Seat inclination regulating knob
4 - Seat
5 - Pivot
CHECKS AND CONTROLS
— Check that the plastic rollers the bush and the

channelled roller that will be used in the spring
unit are whole.
— Check that the shock absorbers of the spring unit
are still efficient and have no oil leaks.
— Check that the shock absorber mechanism bel-
low has no holes or lacerations; if so replace.
1 - Arm REMOUNTING
2 - Safety belt
3 - Screw
Proceed
Procee d wit
withh the rem
remouounti
nting
ng of theseat, wor
workin
king
g in re-
4 - Bush
5 - Bolt
verse order to that of the removal, lubricating with the
recom
rec ommen
mende dedd gre
grease
ase the rol
roller
lers,
s, the pi pivot
vots,
s, the
thre
thread
ads
s of th
thee re
regu
gula
lati
tion
on kn
knob
ob an
and d th
thee dr
driv
ive
e of th
the
e mo
mo--
16. Hol
Holdin
ding
g blo
blocke
cked nutt 1 un
d the nu unscr
screw
ew the knob 3 and
knob bile and fixed frames.
remove it.
314

COMPLETE CABINE
GRAMMER SEAT
1 - Seat 13 - Fixed frame 25 - Ball bearing

2 - Mobile part of the right drive 14 - Bracket 26 - Shoulder ring
3 - Mobile part of the left drive 15 - Bezel 27 - Rubber ring
4 - Roller unit 16 - Shock absorber regulating puller 28 - Spring
5 - Fork 17 - Knob 29 - Plastic roller
6 - Spring 18 - Pin 30 - Lever unit
7 - Pivot 19 - Plastic nail 31 - Bellow
8 - Antifriction bush 20 - Roller 32 - Plastic nail
9 - Shock absorber 21 - Graduated strip 33 - Mobile nail
1
10
1 -- S
Pp
ivroint g 2
22
3 -- Brare
Th ck
aedted bush 3
34
5 -- F
Liisxteedl part of the drive
12 - Retaining ring 24 - Spacer
315

COMPLETE CABINE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 2. Un

Unloo
loosenthe
senthe scr
screws
ews tha
thatt fas
fasten
ten thefixed par
partt of the
drive 1 to the mobile frame 2 and remove, together
1. Unloosen the four screws fastening the shock ab- with the listel 3 .
sorber mech
sorber mechanis
anismm 2 to th
the
e ca
cab
b fl
floor 3 an
oor and
d rem
remove
ove the 3. Remove the plastic nails 5 that fasten the bellow 4
seat and complete shock absorber mechanism. to the shock absorber mechanism.
2. It nec
necess
essary
ary,, rem
remove
ove ononly
ly the seat witwitho
hout
ut the
shock absorber mechanism, working on the seat mo-
ver lever 1
1 of the shock absorber mechanism 2 .
1 - Fixed part of the movable seat drive

2 - Mobile frame
3 - Listel
4 - Bellow
5 - Plastic nail
1 - Complete seat
2 - Shock absorber mechanism 4. Unscrew the nuts that fasten the bracket 1 to the
3 - Cab floor fixed frame 2 .
3. T
To
o re
repl
plac
ace
e th
the
e se
seat
at wo
work
rk in th
the
e re
reve
vers
rse
e or
orde
derr to th
that
at
of the removal, taking care to lubricate the drive with
the specified grease.
DISMOUNTING
1. Unloosen the screws that fasten the mobile part of

the drive 2 to the seat 1 and remove.
1 - Bracket
2 - Fixed frame
5. Fold with a lever the tab of the upper pivot 2 that

joins the mobile frame 1 to the lever unit 4 .
6. Using a hammer and punch in soft metal, hit on the
pivot 2 en
endd bush
antifriction with
withou
out
3t. a ta
tab,
b, an
and
d ta
take
ke of
offf to
toge
geth
ther
er wi
with
th th
the
e
1 - Seat
2 - Mobile part of the drive
316

COMPLETE CABINE
1 - Mobile frame
2 - Upper pivot
3 - Antifriction bush 1 - Lower pivot
4 - Lever unit 2 - Antifriction bush
7. Remo
Remove
ve the ret
retain
aining
ing ring 3 ta
ring take
ke of
offf th
the
e pivott 2 and
pivo 11. Unhook the spring 6 and remove the lever unit 4
rem
remove
bile ove
framethe
1sho
shock
. ck ab
absor
sorbe r 4 fr
ber fromthe
omthe se
seat
at onthemo- from the fixed frame.
12. Remove the retaining ring 2 , take off the pivot 3
8. Take off the mobile frame of the lever unit 5 extrac- and remove the shock absorber 1 from its seat on the
ting it forwards. fixed frame.
1 - Mobile frame
2 - Pivot
3 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
4 - Shock absorber
5 - Lever unit 1 - Shock absorber
2 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
3 - Pivot
9. Bend with a lever the pivot tab 1 . 4 - Lever unit
10. Us
Usin
ing
g a pu
punc
nchh an
and
d ha
hamm
mmer
er in so
softft me
meta
tall kn
knoc
ock
k on 5 - Lower pivot
the en
the endd of th
the
e pi
pivo
vott wi
with
th a tab 1 an
tab and
d rem
remove
ove it tog
togeth
ether
er 6 - Spring
with the antifriction bush 1.
13. Remove the bush 3 from the seat of the lever unit
1.
14. Unh
Unhook
ook the spr ing 2 an
spring andd re
remo
move
ve,, th
then
en ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e
rollers 4 from the pivots of the lever unit.
317

COMPLETE CABINE
1 - Lever unit
2 - Spring
1 - Shock absorber adjustment stay bolt
3 - Bush in antifriction material
2 - Knob
4 - Plastic roller
3 - Bracket
4 - Threaded bush
5 - Spacer
6 - Ball bearing
7 - Shoulder ring
15. Remove the pin 10 and take off the fork 9 . 8 - Small rubber
16. Unhook, with a lever, the central pivot of the roller 9 - Fork
unit 11 from the fork 9 . 10 - Pin
17. Remove the nails 13 and the graduated strip 14. 11 - Roller unit
12 - Spring
18. Unscrew and remove the stay bolt 1 and remove
13 - Plastic nail
the knob 2.
14 - Graduated strip
19. Using a robust spring puller unhook the spring 12
15 - Roller
of the fixed frame and remove, then remove the brac- 16 - Frame
ket 3, the thre aded bush 4, the spa
threaded spacer s 5, th
cers thee ba
ball
ll be
bea-
a-
ring 6 the shoulder ring 7 and the rubber 8
8 .
CHECKS AND CONTROLS
— Check the wear of the antifriction bush, of the rol-

lers and ball bearings, and if necessary replace
them.
— Replace the shock absorber if inefficient or if
there is an oil leak.
— Check that the shock absorber mechanism bel-
low has no holes or lacerations, if necessary re-
place.
REMOUNTING
Remount
Remou nt theseat andthe shoshock
ck ab
absor
sorbe
berr mec
mechahanis
nism
m
working in reverse order to that of the removal, res-
pecting the following specifications.
— Do not knock on the roller ball bearing.
— With reference to the diagram on page 315, lubri-
cate with the recommended grease the rollers,
pivots, anti-friction bush, roller unit, fork, threa-
ded bush, shock absorber adjustment tie rod and
seat drive.
318

COMPLETE CABINE
BOSTROM SEAT
1 - Seat 10 - Rubber tampon 19 - Split pin

2 - Mobile part of the right drive 11 - Plastic nail 20 - Screw
3 - Mobile part of the left drive 12 - Bellow 21 - Spring
4 - Screw 13 - Bracket 22 - Seat height adjustment knob
5 - Adjustment knob of the springs 14 - Rubber tampon 23 - Suspension mechanism
6 - Dented disk 15 - Lock block 24 - Fixed part of the right drive
7 - Plate 16 - Shock absorber 25 - Fixed part of the left drive
8 - Tap 17 - Pivot
9 - Index 18 - Retaining ring
319

COMPLETE CABINE
1. Unl
Unloos
oosen
en the fou
fourr scr
screws
ews fas
fasten
tening
ing the sus
suspen
pensio
sion
n
mechanism 1 to the cab floor and remove the seat
complete with the suspension mechanism.
2. If necessary, remove only the seat 2 without the
suspensi
susp ension
on mech
mechanis
anism
m worki
working
ng the seat trave
traverse
rse
block lever and take off the seat from its drive.
1 - Fixed part of the right drive

2 - Suspension mechanism
3 - Fixed part of the left drive
3. Unscrew the fastening screws of the bracket 1 and

remove.
4. Unho
Unhook
ok the clinch 3, re
clinch remo
move
ve th
the
e pl
plas
asti
tic
c na
nail
ils
s th
that
at fi
fix
x
the bellow 2 and remove.
1 - Suspension mechanism
2 - Seat
3. Toinstall the seat, work in reverse order to that of

the removal taking care to lubricate the drive with the
recommended
recommende d grease.
1 - Bracket
DISMOUNTING 2 - Bellow
3 - Clinch
1. Unloosen the fastening screws of the mobile part
left drive 1 and of the mobile part right drive 3 and re-
move the seat 2 . 5. Unloosen the screw 2 and remove the spring ad-
justment knob 1 and the dented disk.
6. Remove the plate 3 , take off the tap 5 and remove
the index.
1 - Mobile part left drive

2 - Seat
3 - Mobile part right drive
1 - Spring adjustment knob

2. Un
Unsc
scre
rew
w th
the
e fa
fast
sten
enin
ing
g sc
scre
rew
w of th
the
e fi
fixe
xed
d pa
part
rt of th
the
e 2 - Screw
right drive 1 and of the fixed part left drive 3 and of the 3 - PIate
suspension mechanism 2 . 4 - Index
5 - Tap
320

COMPLETE CABINE
7. Un
Unloosen the screw 4 remo
loosen remove
ve the spring 3, th
spring the
e kn
knob
ob
2, and the lock block 1 .
8. Remove the rubber tampon 5 .
1 - Shock absorber
2 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
3 - Pivot
4 - Mobile frame
1 - Lock block
2 - Seat height adjustment knob
3 - Spring CHECKS AND CONTROLS
4 - Screw
5 - Rubber tampon — Replace the shock absorber if it is inefficient or
has oil leaks or scratched rod.
9. Remove the rubber tampon 2.
— Check that the suspension mechanism bellows
10. Remove the retainer ring 4 extract the pivot3 and have no holes or lacerations, replace if necessa-
separate the shock absorber 1
1 from the fixed frame. ry.
REMOUNTING
Remount the seat working in reverse order to that of

the dismounting, taking care to lubricate with the re-
commended grease -the toothed disk the seat drive
and the shock absorber pivots.
1 - Shock absorber
2 - Rubber tampon
3 - Pivot
4 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
11. Remo
Remove
ve the reta
retaining ring 2, ext
ining extrac
ractt the pivot 3 and
pivot
the shock absorber 1
1 from the mobile frame 4 .
321

COMPLETE CABINE
INSIDE TRIM
1 - Front post trim 8 - Right wheelhouse corner trim 15 - Double rubber bellow
2 - Ashtray 9 - Left wheelhouse trim 11 - Right wheelhouse corner trim
3 - Rear post trim 10 - Template 17 - Rear mat
4 - Sill trim 11 - Grill 18 - Front mat
5 -- S
6 Rceraerwcraonscshtorirm 13
12 -- S
Sionugnled rpurboboef rpb
aenlelol w 19 - Border
7 - Gear protection lever 14 - Left wheelhouse trim
322

COMPLETE CABINE
REMOVAL
NOTE
To remove the screw anchor that fixes the inside trim,
the plastic screws must be unscrewed and then ex-
tract the anchor from its seat, when remounting re-
place the anchor screw previously removed.
POST, SILL AND CROSS TRIM
1. Unhook the lock handle 1 from the fastener pivot 2

of the side window.
2. Rem
Remove
ove the scr
screw
ew an
ancho
chorr ind
indica
icated
ted in the dia
diagra
gram
m
that fixes the central post trim 3 to the cab. 1 - Shock absorber
2 - Rear post trim
3 - Centre post trim
4 - Centre sill trim
5 - Clinch
6 - Pivot
7. Re
Remo
move
ve th
the
e fo
four
ur an
anch
chor
or sc
scre
rews
ws th
that
at fi
fix
x th
the
e re
rear
ar tr
tra-
a-
verse 1 and remove from the cab.
1 - Rear traverse trim
LEFT WHEELHOUSE TRIM
1. Unl
Unloo
oosen
sen the scr
screws
ews of the whe
wheelh
elhou
ouse
se cor
corne
nerr tri
trim
m
3 and remove.
2. Remove the anchor 1 1 that fastens the left wheel-
house trim 2 , then disconnect from the cab.
1 - Window lock handle

2 - Pivot fastener
3 - Centre post
3. Remove the screw anchor that fastens the centre

post trim 3 on the door side and remove the trim.
4. Remove the anchor that fixed the centre sill trim 4
and remove it.
5. Remove with a screwdriver the clinch 5 then dis-
connect the shock absorbers 1 from the pivot 6 .
6. Remove the screw anchor that fixes the rear post 1 - Anchor
trim 2 to the cab and remove the trim.
2 - Left wheelhouse trim
3 Left wheelhouse corner trim
323

COMPLETE CABINE
RIGHT WHEELHOUSE TRIM
1. Uns
Unscre
crew
w the scr
screw
ew tha
thatt fas
fasten
tens
s the knob 2 tothe le
knob le--
ver 4
4 and remove from the knob.
2. Un
Unloloos
osen
en th
the
e sc
scre
rews
ws an
and
d th
the
e bo
bolt
lt sh
show
own
n in th
thee di
dia-
a-
3
gram and remove the template and the grill . 1
3. Remove the anchor that fixes the trim to the corner
right wheelhouse and remove.
1 - Doubl
Doublee rubber bellow
2 - Gear lever
3 - Singl
Single
e rubber bellow
4 - Screws
5 - Gear lever protection
7. Withreference to sthe
thescrew thatt fas
tha fasten
tens theprevious
protec
protectiodiagram,
n 5 an
tion and unloosen
d rem
remove
ove,, to-
gether with the sound proofing panels.
1 - Lifter control lever grill

2 - Knob FLOOR TRIM
3 - Template
4 - Lever 1. Remove the seat 1 (see: Seats) unscrew the two
5 - Right wheelhouse corner trim screws shown in the diagram and remove the bracket
2 if present.
4. Remove the seat (see: Seats).

5. Lift the mats, remove the anchor 2 and the four
screws fix
screws fixingthe
ingthe rig
right
ht whe
wheelh
elhous e trim 1, the
ouse then
n rem
remove
ove
the trim together with the inside padding.
1 - Seat
2 - Bracket
1 - Right wheelhouse trim 2. Remove the retaining ring shown in the diagram
2 - Anchor and remove the engagement-disengagement double
traction handle 1 .
3. Remove the rear mat 2 .
6. Li
Lift
ft the rub
rubbe
berr be
bellow 1 and 3, loos
llow loosenin
ening
g the screw
screws
s
4 and take off the lever 2
2 together with the bellows.
324

COMPLETE CABINE
FINISH
FINISHIN
ING
G PR
PROF
OFIL
ILE
E AN
ANDD
EXTERNA
EXT ERNALL ACCE
ACCESSO
SSORIES
RIES
FINISHING PROFILE
1. Unloosen the screw of the anchor screw shown in

the diagram, removing the anchor and the two finis-
hing profiles.
2. Remount the profile 1 working in reverse order to
1 - Engagement-disengagement double traction
that of the removal taking care to replace the anchor
handle
2 - Rear mat screws previously removed.
4. Unloosen the screw 3, unscrew the nut 2 and uns-

crew from the inside of the cab the differential lock
control pedal rod 1.
1 - Differential lock pedal rod

2 - Nut 1 - Finishing profile
3 - Screw
5. With
reference to the diagram shown on page 323
unloosen the fastening screws of the two borders 19
and remove them.
6. Remove the front mat 18 .
INSTALLATION
Reassemble the inside trim working in reverse order
to tha
thatt of the dis
dismou
mounti
nting
ng,, not
noting
ing the fol
follow
lowing
ing spe
specif
cifi-
i-
cations.
— Do not tighten excessively the anchor screw
— To replace the glued trim and padding, eliminate
the residual traces of the glue, then put the spe-
cified glue on both surfaces and join with light
pressure.
— In the case of the removal of the floor trim pro-
ceed with the adjustment of the differential lock
pedal (see: Gear - Rear Gearbox - Differential
Lock System).
325

COMPLETE CABINE
EXTERNAL ACCESSORIES Plate holder
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Unscrew the bolts 2 and remove the plate 1 .
2. Unscrew the bolts 4 and remove the plate holder
Rear view mirror bracket 3 .
1. Unloosen the screw shown in the diagram and re-
move the rear view mirror 1.

1.
1 - Rear view mirror 1 - Plate

2 - Bolt
2. Install the rear view mirror working in reverse order 3 - Bolts

4 Bracket plate holder
to that of the removal.
3. Install
the plate holder working in reverse order to
Handle that of the removal.
1. Remove the side view unit (see: Electric System Ramp

Side View Unit - Removal and Installation).
2. Unscrew the nut 1 and the screws 4 . 1. Unloosen the two screws and the bolt 1 fastening
3. Extra
Extract
ct the cables 2 an
cables and
d rem
remove
ove the ha
handl e 4 toge-
ndle the ramp to the cab.
ther with the gaskets. 2. Unloosen the bolts fastening the bracket 3 to the
ramp and remove the ramp.
3. Unsc
Unscrew
rew the thr
three
ee bo
bolts
lts fas
fasten
tening
ing the pro
protector 2 to
tector
the ramp and remove the protection.
1 - Ramp
1 - Nut 2 - Protection
2 - Cables 3 - Bracket
3 - Handle
4 - Screw 4. Install
the ramp working in reverse order to that of
the removal.
4. In
Inst
stal
alll th
the
e ha
hand
ndle
le wo
work
rkin
ing
g in re
reve
vers
rse
e or
orde
derr to th
that
at of
the removal.
326

COMPLETE CABINE
HOODS
UPPER HOOD
1
2 -- R
Hu
eb
abteerr clip 7
8 -- H
Sieleanticnegr feeder cables 1
13
4 -- R
Freoanrt bbuullkkhheeaadd
3 - Air prefilter adaptor pipe 9 - Bracket (only for 150) 15 - Front template
4 - Clip 10 - Resistance cables 16 - Upper hood
5 - Win
Windsc
dscree
reen
n was
washer
her liq
liquid
uid tan
tank
k 11 - Ele
Electr
ctric
ic ven
ventil
tilato
atorr cab
cable
le
6 - Thermosoundproof panel 12 - Earth cable
327

COMPLETE CABINE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 8. Unscrew the earth cable fastening bolt 12 coming
from the cab and disconnect.
9. Only for 150, unscrew the bolts of the fastening
With reference to the previous diagram, remove the bracket 9 of the silencer 8 and remove the silencer
upper hood as follows: from above.
1. Unscrew the guide vane nuts and remove the side
hood.
2. Unl
Unloo
oosenthe
senthe fas
fasten
tenin
ing
g screw of theclamp 4 an
screw andd re- Only fo
Only forr 13
130
0 - 11
110.
0. Wi
With
th re
refe
fere
renc
nce e to th
the
e fo
foll
llow
owin
ing
g di
dia-
a-
move upwards the air prefilter adaptor pipe 3 . gram, unloosen the screws and the fastening nuts
3. Unloosen the five fastening screws of the right and from the antiheat protector 1
1 and recuperate the pro-
left thermo-soun dproofing panels 6 and remove.
thermo-soundproofing tector and the rubber spacer 2 2 .
4. Disconnect
Disconnect the wind
window
ow wipe
wiperr liquid tank pipe 5
liquid
blocking the electric pump feeder.
5. Unsc
Unscrew
rew the two fas
fasten
tening
ing nu
nuts
ts of the he
heate
aterr fee
feede
der
r NOTE
cables, on both sides of the heater 2. 2. The bolts of the silencer fastening bracket fasten also
6. When the conditioner is assembled, carry out the the protector 3, the
protector theref
refore
ore rec
recup
upera
erate
te the pro
protec
tector
tor be
be--
following procedure. fore proceeding with other operations.
— Discharge the system by the valves shown in the
diagram.
— Disconnect the two fittings shown in the diagram

using a contrast spanner.
1 - Exhaust pipe antiheat protector

2 - Rubber spacer
3 - Silencer antiheat protector
10. Withreference to the diagram on page 327, dis-

connect the cables 11 and 10 .
11. Unlo
Unloosen
osen the seve
seven
n screw
screws s 16 faste
fastening
ning the uppe
upper
r
hood
hood to th
the
e fro
front
nt te
temp
mpla te 15, to th
late the
e fr
fron
ontt bu
bulk
lkhead 14
head
and to the rear bulkhead 13. Remove with care the
hood.
7. With reference to the diagram on page 327 discon- CAUTION

nect the rubber clip 1 connecting the heater 2
2 to the Two operators are needed to remove the upper
cab on both sides. hood.
328

COMPLETE CABINE
12. Install
the upper hood working in reverse order to that of the removal, noting the following specifications.
— Check and eventually top-up the level of the windscreen wiper liquid.
— Proceed with the recharging of the conditioner if present.
— Proceed with the eventual adjustment of the hood position (see: Hood Position Adjustment).
HOOD POSITION ADJUSTMENT

The correct procedure is hereby given and the quotas to be respected for assembly of the fastening link and the
frame to -obtain the alignment of the hoods and their correct spacing.
ENGINE AXLE
1 - Side hood fastening link

4 - Rear small window frame
5 - Dashboard rim
6 - Front support
support
7 - Side hood
8 - Front frame
9 - Upper hood
329

COMPLETE CABINE
UPPER HOOD
Adjust at assembly the upper hood position by the rear frame 4, un unti
till th
thee qu
quota of 73
ota 7355 mm (28
(28.94
.94 in) is rea
reache
chedd be
bet-
t-
ween
we en th
the
e en
engi
gine
ne ax
axis
is an
and
d th
the
e lo
lowe
werr bo
bord
rder
er of th
the
e up
uppe
perr ho
hood
od.. Ad
Adju
just
st th the
e po
posi
siti
tion
on of th
the
e fr
fron
ontt fr
fram
amee 8 un
until
til the qu
quota
ota
50,5
50,5 mm (1.99 in) is reached between the centre of the frame and the front profile of the hood, then fix the hood to
the front support.
DASHBOARD FRAME
Adjust the position of the dashboard frame 5 un

unti
till in al
alig
ignm
nmen
entt to th
the
e up
uppe
perr bo
bord
rder
er of th
the
e up
uppe
perr ho
hood
od,, an
and
d is at a qu
quo-
o-
ta of 17
17 mm (0.67 in) between the upper hood and the rim 5.
SIDE HOODS
By us
usin
ing
g a sp
spec
ecia
iall te
temp
mpla
late
te an
and
d by wo
work
rkin
ing
g on th
the
e pl
plates 1, 2 and 3 in a su
ates suit
itab
able
le wa
way,
y, ad
adju
just
st th
the
e po
posi
siti
tion
on of th
the
e si
side
de
hoods so as to reach the following quotas:
1) a space of 5 mm (0.20 in) between the side hoods 7 and the upper hood 9 .
2) a space of 5 mm (0.20 in) between the side hoods and the front support 6 .
3) Alignment between the side hood and the front profile of the upper hood.
MUDGUARDS
REAR MUDGUARD
1 - Splash guard
2 - Supplementary splash guard
3 - Strap
4 - Frame
5 - Gasket
6 - Rear mudguard
7 - Gasket
330

COMPLETE CABINE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 8. Unscrew the bolts indicated in the diagram and re-
move the mudguard 1 with the gasket 2 .
1. Remove the rear wheel (see: Wheel and Pneuma-
tics - Disassembly - Assembly).
2. Wit
With
h ref
refere
erence
nce to the pre
previo
vious
us dia
diagra
gram,m, rem
remove
ove the
supplementary
supplemen tary splashguard 2 (if fitte
fitted)
d) unsc
unscrewin
rewing g
the bolts and recuperating the strap 3 and the gasket
5.
3. With reference to the previous diagram, unscrew
the ring nut 5 and disconnect the container 2 from the
rear optic unit.
4. Detach the cable terminal 3 of the connector 2 2 un-
hook
ho okin
ing
g th
the
e lo
lock
ck sp
spri
ring
ng of th
the
e ca
cabl
blee wi
with
th a th
thin
in po
poin
inte
ted
d
tool.
5. Ta
Take
ke off theconn
theconnect or, thecap 4 an
ector, and d th
the
e ri ngnut 5.
ringnut
1 - Mudguard
2 - Seal
9. Uns
Unscre
crew
w the bo
bolt
lt sho
shown
wn in the dia
diagra
gram
m an
and
d rem
remove
ove
the frame 1 .
10. Remove the seal 3 mounted on the front border of
the mudguard 2 .
1 - Rear optic unit 4 - Cap

2 - Connector 5 - Ring nut
3 - Cable terminal
6. Disconnect the connectors from the plate light 2.

7. Unscrew the bolts shown in the diagram and re-
move the splashguard 1 .
1 - Frame
2 - Mudguard
3 - Seal
11.
Install
to that theremoval.
of the mudguard working in the reverse order
1 - Splashguard
2 - Plate light connector
331

COMPLETE CABINE
FRONT MUDGUARDS
1. With reference to the diagram, unscrew the four
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION screws 5, remremove
ove the frame 3 com
frame comple
plete
te wit
with
h the mu
mud-
d-
guard 2 and spacers 4 .
2. Unscrew the eight bolts 1 and separate the mud-
mud-
guard 2 from the frame 3 .
3. Install the front mudguard working in reverse order
to that of the removal.
1 - Bolt
2 - Mudguard
3 - Frame
4 - Spacer
5 - Screw
332

COMPLETE CABINE

Sealers
Application Type Denomination Model
Places to put the

Places
sealer
Fixing LOCTITE 495 110 - 130 - 150
Corners
Corners of pro
profil
file
e hel
held
d bet
betwee
ween
n fro
front
nt
and dashboard
Roof fastener screw
Cable passage hole in the front floo-

Fixing BOSTIK 122 110 - 130 - 150
dlight shell
Covering wheelhouse
333

COMPLETE CABINE
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANC
334
LIFTING GROUP
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 SENSIT
SENSITIVEMACHI
IVEMACHINE
NE ME
MEMBE
MBERS
RS . . . . . . . . . . . 35
358
8
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor fun
functi
ction
onal
al dia
diagra
gram
m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
336
6 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Lift
Liftin
ing
g ph
phas
ase
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
360
Neut
Neutra
rall ph
phas
ase
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Loweringphase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
360
OIL
OIL FI
FILT
LTER
ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
339 SECONDAR
SECONDARY
Y HYDR
HYDRAULIC
AULICCYLIN
CYLINDER
DER . . . . . . . 361
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
OIL
OIL PU
PUMP
MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
RESO
RESOUN
UNDE
DER
R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
339
9 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
362
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
LIFTIN
LIFTING
G HO
HOUS USE. E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Reasse
Reas semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
363
Remo
Re mova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
343
3 LIFTING
LIFTING CONT
CONTROLROL LEVELEVER R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Cove
Coverr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Leve
Levers
rs in
insi
sideof
deof th
the
e ca
cabi
bin.
n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Liftin
Lifting
g con
contro
troll arm
arms
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Supp
Suppor
ortt le
leve
vers
rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Co-a
Co-axi
xialshaf
alshaftt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Cylind
Cylinder
er an
and
d pis
piston
ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
366
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor con
contro
troll lev
lever
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 PIPI
PIPING
NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Secon
Seconda
dary
ry dis
distri
tribut
butor
or rem
remova
ovall . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
347
7 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
366
Checks
Checks an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
347
7 Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 CHECKSAND
CHECKSAND ADJ
ADJUST
USTMEN
MENTS
TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
348 Adjustment of the position control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Extern
External
al con
contro
trols
ls of theliftin
thelifting
g ho
housi
using
ng . . . . . . 367
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
350
0 Liftin
Lifting
g ho
housi
using
ng ins
insidecontr
idecontrols
ols . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Assembled distributor checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Checki
Checking
ng of thestrai
thestrain
n com
comman
mand
d . . . . . . . . . . 368
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Checki
Checking
ng of theliftin
thelifting
g sen
sensit
sitivi
ivity.
ty. . . . . . . . . . . 369
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor con
contro
troll lev
lever
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Contro
Controll of theworki
theworking
ng pre
pressu
ssure
re . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor bod
body
y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Rear
Rear bo
body
dy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Fron
Frontt bo
body
dy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
352
2 Tech
Techni
nica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
371
1
Checks
Checks an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
353
3 Contro
Controll an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
353 Gene
General
ral pre
prescr
script
iption
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
LIFTIN
LIFTING
G ME
MECHA
CHANIS
NISM
M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
356
6 TROUBLE
TROUBLE SHOO
SHOOTING
TING AND CORR
CORRECTIO
ECTIONS
NS . . 378
Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
357
7
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
357
335
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
CONTENTS
HEAD
HEADLI
LIGH
GHTS
TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
412
2 REAR
REAR LIG
LIGHTI
HTING
NG GR
GROUP.
OUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
417
7
Front
Front he
headl
adligh
ights.
ts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
412
2 Remova
Removall andinsta
andinstalla
llatio
tion
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Remova
Removall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
412
2 Bulb
Bulb rep
replac
lacing
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
417
7
Bulb
Bulb rep
replac
lacing
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
413
3 NUMBER
NUMBER PLA
PLATE
TE LIG
LIGHT
HT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Rearr hea
Rea headla
dlamp
mps
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Removal,
Removal, bulbreplacin
bulbreplacing,
g, insta
installati
llation
on . . . . . . . . . . 418
Remova
Removall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
413
3 INTERN
INTERNAL
AL LIG
LIGHTI
HTING.
NG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
419
9
Bulb
Bulb rep
replac
lacing
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
414
4 Cabi
Cabin
n ro
roof
of li
ligh
ght.
t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
419
SIDE
SIDE LI
LIGH
GHT
T GR
GROU
OUP.
P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Remov
Removal
al andinsta
andinstalla
llatio
tion
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
419
9
Remova
Removall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Bulb
Bulb rep
replac
lacing
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
419
9
Bulb
Bulb rep
replac
lacing
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
415
5 WINDSC
WINDSCREE
REEN
N WIP
WIPERS.
ERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
419
9
FRONT
FRONT HEA
HEADLI
DLIGHT
GHTS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Remova
Removall andinsta
andinstalla
llatio
tion
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Remova
Removall an
and
d ins
instal
tallat
lation
ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 WINDSC
WINDSCREE
REEN
N WAS
WASHER
HER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Disassem
Disass embly
bly an
and
d rea
reasse
ssemb mbly ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
416
6 Remova
Removall andinsta
andinstalla
llatio
tion
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Bulb
Bulb rep
replac
lacing
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
416
6
411

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
HEADLIGHTS
FRONT HEADLIGHTS
1 - Rim
2 - Optical centre
3 - Bulb
4 - Headlamp
5 - Rubber wiring holder
6 - Clip
7 - Wiring harness
harness
1. Loosen the screws 4

screws 4 fixing the rim 2
rim 2 and remove.
2. Referring the enlarged diagram, remove the faston connectors 7
connectors 7 and
and remove the optical centre 2
centre 2..
3. Remove the rubber wiring holder 5 and
5 and slip the electrical wiring from the headlamp shell 4
shell 4..
4. Refer to the following diagram and loosen the nut 5 5 and
and remove the headlamp shell from the harness 1 1..
1 - Harness
2 - Rim
3 - Optical centre
4 - Screws
5 - Automatic lock nut
412

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
5. Reas
Reassem
semble
ble the fro
front
nt he
headl
adlam
amps
ps wor
workin
king
g in the re-
verse order taking care to close the wiring passage
hole with silicone sealer.
BULB REPLACING
1. Remove the headlamp rim, disconnect the optical

centre 5
centre 5 and
and keep suspended.
2. Unfasten the clip 6
clip 6..
3. Disconnect the faston connector 1
connector 1 and remove the
bulb 7
bulb 7..
CAUTION
Don’t
Don’t tou
touch
ch the bulb 7 wit
with
h yo
your
ur ba
bare
re ha
hands
nds..
Should you do so clean it with alcohol.
4. Rep
Replac
lace
e the bu
bulb
lb andreass
andreassem
emblein
blein rev
revers
erse
e ord
order.
er.
1 - Faston connector
2 - Headlamp
4 - Faston connector
5 - Optical housing
6 - Clip
7 - Bulb
REAR HEADLAMPS
1 - Rim
2 - Optical housing
3 - Bulb
4 - Headlamp shell
6 - Wiring harness
harness
1. Loosen the screws 1

screws 1and
and remove the rim 4
rim 4.. 3. Loosen the nut 3
nut 3 and
and remove headlamp shell from
2. Dis
Discon
conne
nect
ct the int
intern
ernal
al wir
wiring
ing and rem
remove
ove the opt
opti-
i- the clamp on the cabin.
cal hou
housing
sing worki
working
ng as descr
described
ibed for fron
frontt head
headlamp
lamps.
s.
413

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
4. Reassemble the headlamp working in the reverse

orderr ta
orde taki
king
ng ca
care
re to se
seal
al th
the
e wi
wiri
ring
ng ho
hole
le wi
with
th a si
sili
lico
cone
ne
sealer.
BULB REPLACING
Refer to: Front Headlight - Bulb Replacing.
1 - Screws
2 - Optical housing
3 - Nuts
4 - Rim
SIDE LIGHT GROUP
1 - Optical centre shell

2 - Cover
3 - Shield
4 - Lamp holder
5 - Position light bulb
6 - Indic
Indicator
ator light bulb
7 - Glass cover

1. Loosen the screw 3
screw 3 which fixes the cover 2
2 to the
handle 1
handle 1 and remove the cover.
414

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
1 - Handle
2 - Cover
3 - Screw
2. Referring to the following diagram of the bumper,

loosenthe
loo senthe two scr
screws
ews8 8 an
and d rem
removethe
ovethe gla
glass
ss cov
cover
er 7
7.
3. Remove the frame 9
frame 9 and the shield 5
shield 5 and discon- 1 - Handle
nect the wiring 10
wiring 10.. 2 - Nuts
4. Unsc
Unscrew
rew the nut
nuts s 2 an
andd rem
remove
ove the she
shelll 3 fro
from
m the 3 - Headl
Headlamp
amp shell
handle. 4 - Direction indicator bayonet bulb
5. Rea
5 - Shield
Reasse
ssemb
mble le the opt
optica
icall gro
group
up usi
using
ng the rev
revers
erse
e or-
6 - Park
Parking
ing light bayonet bulb
der. 7 - Glass cover
8 - Screws
9 - Frame
BULB REPLACING 10 - Wiring
1. Loosen the two screws 8

screws 8 that
that fix the glass cover 7
7 3. Ch
Chan
ange
ge th
the
e bu
bulb
lb an
and
d re
reas
asse
semb
mble
le wo
work
rkin
ing
g in th
the
e re
re--
and remove. verse order.
2. Remove the direction indicator bayonet bulb 4 and
the parking light bayonet bulb 6.
bulb 6.
FRONT HEADLIGHTS
1 - Rim 6 - Shield
1 Rim
2 - Glass 7 - Bulb
3 - Trimming 8 - Internal wiring
4 - Frame 9 - Headl
Headlamp
amp shell
5 - Spring 10 - External wiring
415

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 3. Loo

Loosen
sen the fra
frame
me fix
fixing
ing scr
screws
ews 1 rem
remove
ove the fra
frame
me
itself, the glass 2
glass 2 the
the rim 4
rim 4 and the trimming 3
trimming 3..
1. Unscrew the winged nuts and remove the engine
side hood.
2. Disconnect the connectors 1
connectors 1..
3. Pre
Press
ss the fix
fixing
ing cli
clip
p as ind
indica
icatedin
tedin thediag
thediagram
ram,, an
and
d
remove the complete front headlight.
1 - Frame
2 - Glass
3 - Trimming
4 - Rim
1 - External wiring connector
2 - Front headlight
headlight
4. Remount the front headlight working in the reverse
order.
4. Toremount the front headlight work in the reverse
order.
BULB REPLACING
1. Wi
Witho
thout
ut rem
removi
oving
ng the hea
headli
dlight
ght fro
from
m the tra
tracto
ctor,
r, re-
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
move the opt
move optica
icall gro
group
up (re
(refer
fer to: Dis
Dismo
moununtin
ting
g an
andd Re-
1. 1.Loosen the four screws 1 and remove the optical mounting).
2. Un
Unho
hook
ok th
the
e cl
clip
ips
s (3
(3)) by li
lifti
fting
ng th
them
em,, an
and
d sl
slip
ip ou
outt th
the
e
group 2
group 2 from
from the headlamp shell 4.
shell 4.
2. Loosen the two screws 7
screws 7 and remove the shield 6
shield 6 bulb (1).
and remove the spring 5
spring 5..
1 - Bulb
2 - Clips
3. Change the bulb and remount the headlight wor -

1 - Screws
2 - Optic
Optical
al group king in the reverse order.
3 - Internal wiring connector
4 - Light shell
5 - Spring
6 - Shield
7 - Screws
416

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
REAR LIGHTING GROUP
1 - Glass 3 - Parking light bulb 5 - Light shell

2 - Stop light bulb 4 - Indicator light bulb 6 - Wiring
BULB REPLACING
1. Loosen the screws fixing the glass 2
glass 2 to
to the shell of
1. Unscrew the ring nut 2
nut 2 and
and remove the wiring 1.
wiring 1. the light 1 and remove the glass.
2. Loosen the nut 3
nut 3 fixing
fixing the light, and remove.
1 - Light shell
2 - Glass
1 - Wiring 2. Remove the defective bulb and change it.

2 - Ring nut
3 - Back light
3. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, loo
loosen
sen the scr
screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the gla
glass
ss an
and
d
take out the light.
4. Remount the back light working in the reverse or-
der.
417

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
3. Re-
Re-ins
instal
talll the ba
back
ck lig
light
ht par
parts
ts wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e
order.
1 - Indic
Indicator
ator light bulb
2 - Parking light bulb
3 - Stop light bulb
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT
1 - Glass 1 - Wiring connection

2 - Trimming 2 - Bulb holder
3 - Bulb
4 - Bulb holder
5 - Wiring connection 2. Referring to the diagram remove the glass 1, the
trim 2
trim 2 and the bulb 3
bulb 3..
REMOVAL, BULB REPLACING,

INSTALLATION NOTE
To change the bulb it is not necessary to remove the
1. Disconnect the connection 1
connection 1,, loosen the two nuts bulb holder from the tractor.
fixing the bulb holder 2 and
2 and remove.
3. Remount the number plate light working in the re-
verse order.
418

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
INTERNAL LIGHTING WINDSCREEN WIPERS
CABIN ROOF LIGHT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

1. With the help of a screwdriver slip out the glass 1
(complete with bulb) from the relative holder 2.
2 .
1 - Roof light glass

2 - Roof light holder
2. Loo
Loosenthe
senthe two scr
screws
ews ind
indica
icatedin
tedin thediag
thediagram
ram an
and
d
discon
disconnec
nectt thewirin
thewiring.
g. Rem
Removethe
ovethe roo
rooff lig
light
ht ho
holde
lder
r 1.
1. 1 - Thr ea
eaded pin 6 - Tr an
ansmi
mis
s si
sion mechanis
ism
m
2 - Gasket 7 - Motor
3 - Cap 8 - Arms
4 - Nut 9 - Brushes
5 - Gasket
1. Rol
Rolll th
the
e ca
caps
ps 1 prot
protectin
ecting
g the arms 3 and 4 towards
the outside.
2. Unscrew the nut 2
nut 2 and
and unhook the left arm 3
arm 3..
1 - Roof light holder
BULB REPLACING
Remove the glass from the roof light and change the
bulb which is pressure inserted the two contacts.
1 - Cap
2 - Nut
3 - Left arm
4 - Right harm
3. Unscrew the lock nut 3
nut 3 and nut 2
nut 2 and remove the
arm 7 the
arm 7 the threaded pin 8
pin 8 and
and the gasket 1
gasket 1..
4. Slip off the cap 6
cap 6 unscrew
unscrew the nut 5
nut 5 and
and slip off the
gasket 4
gasket 4..
419

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
8. Loosen the three screws indicated in the diagram

and
and th
the
e nu
nutt 3 an
and
d sep
separa
arate
te the mo
motor
tor 1
1 fro
from
m the tra
trans-
ns-
mission mechanism 2
mechanism 2..
1 - Gasket
2 - Nut
3 - Locknut 1 - Motor
4 - Gasket 2 - Transmission mechanism
5 - Nut 3 - Nut
6 - Cap
7 - Left arm
8 - Threaded pin
9. Loosen the nut 1
nut 1 and remove the brushes 3
brushes 3 from
the arms 2
arms 2..
5. Remove
Root Internalthe bracket
Root (refer to: Cabin and Cabin
Covering).
6. Disconnect the connection 2
connection 2..
7. Lo
Loose
osen
n the scr
screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the mo
motor
tor 1
1 an
and
d the tra
trans-
ns-
mission remove the motor complete with mechanism
3.
1 - Nut
2 - Arms
3 - Brushes
10. Re
Remou
mount
nt the win
windsc
dscree
reen
n wip
wipers
ers wo
worki
rking
ng in the re-
verse order being careful to lubricate the arm attach-
1 - Motor ments
me nts and the tra
transm
nsmiss
issio
ion
n me
mecha
chanis
nism
m wit
with
h the pre
pres-
s-
2 - Connection cribed lubricant.
3 - Transmission connection
420

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
WINDSCREEN WASHER
1 - Sprayer
2 - Lateral tube
3 - Tank
4 - Main tube
5 - Bracket

5. Disco
Disconne
nnect
ct the ma
main
in tub
tube
e 4 an
and
d th
the
e si
side
de tu
tube
be 3 and
1. Loosen the winged nuts and remove the engine remove the T union
side hood. 6. Slip off the sprayers 1
sprayers 1 and remove them from the
2. Disconnect the connections 6
connections 6 and
and the tube 5
tube 5 from upper hood 5
hood 5..
the pump 4 taking care to plug the tube and unions so
that they don’t leak.
3. Unhook the band 2
band 2 and
and remove the tank 3
tank 3..
4.
It ne
gram nece
cess
andssar
ary,
y, un
remove unsc
scre
rew
the w th
the
e nu
bracketnuts
bracket 1 ts
1.. in
indi
dica
cate
ted
d in th
the
e Di
Dia-
a-
1 - Sprayers
2 - T Union
3 - Side tube
4 - Main tube
5 - Upper hood
1 - Sprayer
2 Lateral tube
3 - Tank
7. Reassemble the windscreen washing circuit wor -
4 - Windscreen washer pump king in the reverse order, then top up the windscreen
5 - Main tube washing liquid.
6 - Connections
421

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANC
422
Der Nachdruck des Textes und der Abbildungen ist, auch auszugsweise, verboten.
La reproduction du présent ouvrage, du texte et des ìllustratìons, mème partìelle est interdite.
Text and illustrations herewith

herewith enclosed may not be reproduced,
reproduced, not even in part and by any means.
E’ vietata la riproduzione, anche parziale, del testo e delle illustrazioni.
Se prohibe la reproducciòn total o parcial del texto y de las ilustraciones.
A proibida a reprodu
reproduçào,
çào, até mesmo parcial, do texto e das ilustracòes.
Der zeitl
zeitliche
iche Unte
Untersch
rschied
ied zwisc
zwischen
hen der Aktua
Aktualisie
lisierun
rung
g der Druc
Druckschr
kschriften
iften und der Durc
Durchfüh
hführun
rungg tech
technisch
nischer
er Verä
Verände
nde--
rung
rungen
en (d
(die
ie stä
ständi
ndigg vor
vorge
genom
nommemenn wer
werden
den,, um im
immer
mer ho
hochw
chwert
ertige
igere
re Erz
Erzeu
eugni
gnisse
sse au
auff de
den
n Ma
Markt
rkt zu bri
bring
ngen
en)) er
erfor
forde
dern
rn
aus
au s Gr
Grün
ünden
den dederr Kor
Korre
rekth
ktheit
eit de
des
s Hin
Hinwei
weises
ses,, da
dass
ss die in die
dieser
ser Aus
Ausga
gabe
be en
entha
thalte
ltenen
nen Dat
Datenen jed
jeder
erzei
zeitt geä
geänd
nder
ertt wer
werde
den
n
können und deshalb unverbindlich sind.
Le tem
temps
ps qu
quii s’é
s’écou
coule
le en
entre
tre la mi
mise
se à jou
jourr en imp
impre
ressi
ssion
on et les mo
modif
difica
icatio
tions
ns tec
techni
hnique
ques
s (ce
(ces
s de
dern
rnièr
ières
es cha
change
ngean
antt con
con--
tinuellement afin d’offrir aux utilisateurs des produits toujours plus qualifiés) nous oblige a vous signaler que les
donnée
don néess de la prés
présente
ente publ
publicati
ication
on pou
pourrai
rraient
ent être susce
susceptibl
ptibles
es de vari
variatio
ations.
ns. Elle
Elles
s sont donn
données
ées sans enga
engagem
gement
ent de
notre part.
Because of the possible time lag between the introduction of technical modifications (an on-going process the aim of
which
wh ich is to off
offer
er pro
produ
ducts
cts whi
which
ch are be
being
ing con
contin
tinua
ually
lly imp
impro
roved
ved)) an
and
d the lat
latest
est up
updat
date
e of the ma
manu
nual,
al, we mu
must
st po
point
int ou
out,
t,
for the sake of correctness,that the data contained in this edition are liable to change at any time and are therefore not
binding.
La differenza tra i tempi di aggiornamento in stampa e i tempi delle modifiche tecniche (variando queste ultime conti-
nuamente, ciò al fine di offrire prodotti sempre più qualificati) impongono di dichiarare, per correttezza, che i dati con-
tenuti
tenuti nell
nella
a pres
presente
ente ediz
edizione
ione sono susce
suscettibi
ttibilili di vari
variazio
azione
ne in qual
qualsias
siasii mom
momento
ento e che quin
quindi
di non sono impe
impegnat
gnativi.
ivi.
La di
difer
feren
encia
cia en
entre
tre los tie
tiemp
mpos
os ne
neces
cesari
arios
os par
para
a po
pone
nerr al dia la imp
impres
resiòn
iòn y los tie
tiemp
mpos
os de las mod
modifi
ificac
cacion
iones
es tèc
tècni
nicas
cas
(las que se verifican continuamente, con el objeto de ofrecer productos cada vez màs calificados) nos imponen
decla
de clara
rar,
r, po
porr cor
corre
recci
cción
ón,, qu
que
e los dat
datos
os con
conten
tenido
idoss en la pre
presen
sentete ed
edici
iciòn
òn est
estàn
àn suj
sujeto
etos
s a var
variac
iacion
iones
es en cua
cualqu
lquier
ier mo
mo--
mento y que portanto no son obligativos.
A diferença entre os tempos necessãrr

necessãrrios
ios para actualizar a impressão e os tempos das modificacõe
modificacõess técnicas (que se
verifi
verificam
cam con
contin
tinua
uamen
mente,
te, a fim de ofe
ofere
recer
cer um pr
prod
oduto
uto cad
cada
a vez ma
mais
is qu
quali
alific
ficad
ado)
o),, obr
obriga
igam-
m-nos
nos a de
decla
clara
rar,
r, qu
que
e os da
da--
dos
dos con
contid
tidos
os nes
neste
te man
manue
uell sãosusce
sãosuscepti
ptivei
veis
s de var
variac
iacão
ão em qu
qualq
alquermome
uermomentoentoe qu
que e po
porta
rtantonão
ntonão sãovincu
sãovinculat
latór
órios
ios..
NOTES
07 - 2004 cod. 307.1110.3.0
By Personal computing Technical Publications Dep.



307. 1110. 3. 0
GEARBOX CLUTCH
CONTENTS
GENE
GENERA
RAL
L FE
FEAT
ATUR
URES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CLUT
CLUTCH
CH PE
PEDA
DAL
L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remova
Removals
ls andinsta
andinstalla
llatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 HYDRAU
HYDRAULICSYSTE
LICSYSTEM
M BL
BLEED
EEDING
ING . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s ..... ..... ...... ..... 4 CLUT
CLUTCH
CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Inst
Instal
alla
lati
tion.
on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CLUTCHMASTE
CLUTCHMASTER
R CYL
CYLIND
INDER
ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Flyw
Flywhe
heel
el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Pres
Pressu
sure
re pl
plat
ate
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Clut
Clutch
ch di
disk
sk.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s ..... ..... ...... ..... 7 Fork, sliding sleeve, and thrust
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 bear
bearin
ing
g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Inst
Instal
alla
lati
tion.
on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CLUTCHOPERA
CLUTCHOPERATIN
TING
G CYL
CYLIND
INDER.
ER. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SPECIF
SPECIFICA
ICATIO
TIONS
NS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Techn
Technica
icall fea
featur
tures
es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Checks an
Checks and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions s ..... ..... ...... ..... 9 Checks an
Checks andd ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Reas
Reasse
semb
mblyly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Gene
General
ral spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Inst
Instal
alla
lati
tion.
on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
HYDRAU
HYDRAULIC
LIC SYS
SYSTEMPIPIN
TEMPIPING
G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 TROUBLES
TROUBLESHOOT
HOOTING
ING AND CORR
CORRECTIO
ECTIONS.
NS. . . . 17
1

GEARBOX CLUTCH
GENERAL
GENERAL FEATUR
FEATURES
ES
1 - Clutch and brakes hydraulic system supply tank 6 - Pressure plate

2 - Clutch pedal 7 - Thrust bearing
3 - Clutch master cylinder 8 - Sliding sleeve
4 - Engine flywheel 9 - Fork
5 - Diaphragm spring 10 - Clutch operating cylinder
The cl
The clut
utch
ch is of si
sing
ngle
le dr
dry
y pl
plat
atee ty
type
pe;; it is co
comp
mpososed
ed of The pressure exerted by diaphragm spring 5, drives
a clutch disk, pressure plate 6 , fitted with a diaphram the driven plate.
spring 5 , and a thrust bearing 7 . The clutch disengagement is realized through master
The thrust bearing is kept in constant contact with the cylinder 2 whiwhich,
ch, op
opera
erated
ted by ped
pedal
al 3, tra
trans
nsmi
mits
ts th
the
e li
li--
diaphragm spring through a spring inside jack 10 . quid
qu id pre
pressu
ssurere inc
increa
rease
se to the pis
piston
ton of ope
operat
rating
ing cyl
cylin-
in-
The clutch
clutch pla
plate
te is cir
circul
cular
ar for the mod modelsels 110 or der 10
10 . This last, acts on clutch disengagement con-
star-shaped for the models 130-150, it is made of a trol fork 9 throug a pushrod, and moves sleeve 8 and
high friction coefficient material with extremely limited thrust
thru st bea
bearing
ring 7 which over
overcome
comes s the diap
diaphrag
hragm m
wear. spring action.
The
Th e cl
clut
utch
ch ca
casi
sing
ng is fi
fitt
tted
ed wi
with
th ai
airr in
inta
take
kes s to pe
perm
rmit
it th
the
e Through the seal rings that exert friction on operating
heavily stressed components to be effectively cooled cylinder, the piston takes up the possible backlash,
down. thus automatically recovering the clutch plate wear.
2

GEARBOX CLUTCH
CLUTCH PEDAL
1 - Split pin
2 - Return spring
3 - Pin
4 - Washer
5 - Seeger ring
6 - Adjuster
7 - Pedal support
8 - Screw
9 - Clutch pedal
10 - Washer
11 - Lever
12 - Eccentric pin
13 - Bracket
14 - Bolt
15 - Washer
16 - Pin
17 - Bracket
18 - Frame
19 - Spring retainer
REMOVAL
1. Remove the tractor engine side lids, and unscrew
thetwo bo
bolts
lts sec
securi
uring
ng he
heat
at shi
shield
eld 1 to rear bulk
bulkhea
head
d 2.
1 - Heat shield
2 - Rear bulkhead
3

GEARBOX CLUTCH
2. Operating from the inside of the cabin, remove the

split
split pin 3 an
and
d tak
take
e off theretai
theretainin
ning
g pin 2 fro
from
m the for
fork
k4
the pedal 6 recovering the washer.
CAUTION
Take
fitted care
withnot to press
a return the clutch
spring pedal the
that moves since it is
pedal
abruptly to the end of travel.
3. Unl
Unloos
oosen
en the two ret
retain
aining
ing scr
screws
ews 5 fro
from
m the pum
pump
p
to th
the
e br
brac
acke
kett 7. Ta
Take
ke of
offf wi
with
th ca
caut
utio
ion
n fro
from
m th
the
e en
engi
gine
ne
bay the pump without removing the entrance and exit
piping.
1 - Pedal retaining screw

2 - Washer
3 - Seeger ring
4 - Clutch pedal
5 - Bracket
1 - Lever
2 - Pin
3 - Split pin
4 - Master cylinder fork
5 - Screw CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS
6 - Pedal
7 - Lever support bracket and pedal return spring
Visually insp
Visually inspect
ect all the disa
disassem
ssembled
bled comp
compone
onents,
nts,
and
an d rep
replac
lacee tho
those
se tha
thatt are wor
wornn or da
dama
mage
ged,
d, ver
verify
ifying
ing
in particular the following:
1. Ver
Verify
ify tha
thatt bo
both
th pe
pedal
dal an
andd rel
relate
atedd pa
pad
d are no
nott de
defor
for--
4. Unloosen the two retaining screws of the bracket 5
med or strained.
displaced in the engine bay and beneath the instruc- 2. Check that pins and related seats are not too worn
tion
pedalpanel, then
4 to the unloosen
support, the retaining
remove screw
the Seeger 1 of
ring the
3 and or seized.
3. Verify that spring is not damaged or strained.
the wash
washer
er 2 th
then
en ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e pe
peda
dall 4 fro
from
m the sup
suppo
port
rt 4. Che
Check
ck tha
thatt bea
bearin
ring
g rot
rotate
ates
s fre
freely
ely an
and
d tha
thatt no exc
exces-
es-
integral with the instruction panel removing contem- sive backlash is present.
porarily the leverage of the pedal.
4

GEARBOX CLUTCH
INSTALLATION
Instal
Installl th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch pe
peda
dall by re
reve
vers
rsin
ing
g th
the
e or
orde
derr of re
remo
mo--
val, complying with the following.
— Refer to the enlarged view, and lubricate the
bush of pedal 9 , pins 16 and 12 of lever 11
11 , and
retaining pin of the pump fork, using the prescri-
bed grease.
— Replace the split pins.
— Adjust the clutch pedal (refer to: Adjustment).
ADJUSTMENT
After having installed the various componen
components, ts, per-
form the adju
adjustmen
stmentsts requ
required
ired foll
followin
owing
g the proc
procedu
edure
re
below:
1. Positioning
of lever 1
1 and clutch pedal 6 .
(1) Keep pedal 6 against end-of-travel 1
(2) Loosen locknut 2, tighten screw 3 until lever 1
1 is at
the end of travel; tighten locknut 2 .
2. Adjustment of master cylinder control fork.

1 - Lever
(1) With pedal 6 against lever 1
1 loosen locknut 9 , and
2 - Locknut
act on rod 10 (screwing or unscrewing it) until taking 3 - Adjusting screw
up the backlash between master cylinder piston and 4 - Master cylinder fork
pedal 6 . 5 - Lock
(2) Act again on rod 10 to restore 0.5 to 1 mm (0.02 6 - Clutch pedal
to 0.4 in) backlash between master cylinder and pe- 7 - Bolt
dal 6 corresponding to pedal idle travel “C”. 8 - Eccentric pin
9 - Locknut
C = 4 to 8 mm (0.16 to 0.31 in) 10 - Control rod
(3) At the end of adjustment, tighten locknut 9 .
3. Adjustment of pedal return device.

(1) Press pedal 6 fully, then release it, and verify that
return takes place gradually.
(2) If not, loosen bolt 7 and rotate the eccentric 8; lock
bolt 7, anandd re
repe
peatat th
the
e ch
chec
eck.
k. Re
Repe
peat
at th
the
e op
oper
erat
atio
ion
n un
un--
til pedal returns gradually.
(3) Sho
Shoulduld the ad
adjus
justme
tment
nt wit
with
h ecc
eccen
entri
tric
c 8 no
nott be suf
suffi-
fi- CLUTCH MASTER
cient,
cien t, loos
loosen
en lock
tion of lever 1
locknut
nut 2, an
andd gra
gradua
dually
lly cha
changethe
ngethe po
1 by unscrewing screw 3 , until the pedal
posi-
si-
CYLINDER
optimal return is obtained; tighten locknut 2 .
REMOVAL
1. Rem
Remove
ove the clu
clutch
tch ma
maste
sterr cyl
cylind
inder
er (re
(refer
fer to: Clu
Clutch
tch
Pedal - Removal - Steps 1. to 3.).
2. Referringto the following exploded view, discon-

CAUTION
nect the entry and exit piping unscrewing the pipe
The adjustment
out only through
when strictly screw 3 must
necessary, sincebe
it carried
increa- union 2 and extract the union 5 .
ses the load or pedal 6.
5

GEARBOX CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY
1 - Master cylinder 12 - Piston

2 - Delivery piping union 13 - Seal ring
3 - Supply piping 14 - Rod
4 - Clamp
5 - Union 15 - Seeger
16 Supportring
disk
6 - Spring 17- Boo
Boott
7 - Clamp disk 18 - Fork
8 - Spring 19 - Nut
9 - Spring shoulder 20 - Setscrew
10 - Seal ring 21 - Plug
11 - Intermediate ring 22 - Gasket
1. Withdraw boot 5, remove Seeger ring 2 and with-

draw rod 4 together with support disk 3 .
1 - Master cylinder 4 - Rod
2 - Seeger ring 5 - Boot
3 - Support disk
6

GEARBOX CLUTCH
2. Place the master cylinder on a vice fitted with pro- CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS
tective
tective jaw
jaws,s, the
then,
n, pa
parti
rtiall
ally
y pu
pushi
shing
ng the pis
piston
ton tow
toward
ards
s
master
mas ter cyl
cylind
inderer ins
inside
ide as sho
shown
wn in the fig
figure
ure,, un
unscr
screw
ew
the screw securing the piston and remove it together CAUTION
with the spring underneath. To clean and wash the master cylinder compo-
nents use only the oil prescribed for the brakes
and clutch. Do not use petrol, kerosene, or other
mineral
ponents.oils to prevent damaging the rubber com-
1. Ch
Chec
eck
k fo
forr sc
scra
ratc
tche
hes
s on bo
both
th in
inne
nerr an
and
d ou
oute
terr sl
slid
idin
ing
g
2. Ver
Verif
ify
y th
that
at th
the
e se
seal
al ri
ring
ng se
seat
ats
s ar
aree cl
clea
ean.
n. If re
requ
quir
ired
ed,,
blow compressed air into the seats.
3. Che
Checkck con
condit
dition
ions
s of sea
seall rin
rings
gs an
andd bo
boot;
ot; rep
replac
lace
e the
damaged components.
4. Che
Check
ck all com
componponen
ents,
ts, op
open
ening
ings,
s, an
and
d mas
master ter cyl
cylin-
in-
der internal passages, and verify that they are dean
3. Ref
Refer
er to the en
enlar
largedview
gedview an
and,
d, wor
workin
king
g wit
with
h theap- and free from foreign matter.
propriate
propriate too
tool,
l, rem
remove
ove the bo
bowl
wl an
and
d the sec
secon
ond
d spr
spring
ing 5. Ver
Verify
ify tha
thatt spr
spring
ings
s are not stra
straine
ined
d or de
defor
formed
med,, re-
from the inside of the cylinder pump taking care not to place them if required.
damage the inside surface.
REASSEMBLY
1 - Spring
2 - Pump
3 - Piston
4 - Spring
5 - Bowl
6 - Shoulder ring
7 - Union
8 - Seal ring
9 - Intermediate ring
10 - Seal ring
11 - Support place
12 - Seeger ring
13 - Boot
14 - Nut
15 - Fork
16 - Rod
17 - Set screw
18 - Cap
Reassemble the master cylinder by reversing the or-

der of removal, complying with the following: — If fork 15 has been disassembled, verify that,
— Lubricate the relative motion sliding surfaces with with the rod 16 kept completely outwards, dis-
the grease prescribed. tance “X” between the master cylinder body res-
— When inserting the piston 3 into cylinder 2
2 verify ting plane and the centre of fork hole is that pres-
that the slot present on the piston is correctly ali- cribed for the model of tractor in object (refer to:
gned with the set screw 17 . Technical Data and Specifications - Checks and
— Verify the master cylinder correct functioning, Adjustments).
making sure that the piston performs the whole If not so, remove the boot, loosen locknut 1 and
travel freely. screw or unscrew fork 2 accordingly, until the
locknut is blocked; refit the boot .
7

GEARBOX CLUTCH
INSTALLATION
Install the master cylinder on tractor by reversing the
order of removal; then proceed to bleed the hydraulic
system (refer to: Hydraulic System Bleeding).
1 - Locknut
2 - Fork
CLUTCH OPERATING
CYLINDER
1 - Operating cylinder body

2 - Bleeder plug
3 - Supply pipe union
4 - Spring
5 - Piston
6 - Seal ring
7 - Clamp
8 - Dust cover
9 - Clamp
10 - Pushrod
REMOVAL
1. Cut clamp 5 securing boot 4 to fork 6 .
CAUTION
2. Unscrew union 3 and disconnect supply pipe 2 of Keep
Keep for
fork
k 6 in co
conta
ntact
ct wit
with
h the clutch
clutch sli
slidin
ding
g
operating cylinder 1
1 plugging it suitably.
sleeve, to prevent it unhooking.
3. Unscrew the two screws securing clutch operating
cylinder, and remove it recovering the pushrod.
8

GEARBOX CLUTCH
1. Ch
Chec
eck
k fo
forr sc
scra
ratc
tche
hes
s on bo
both
th in
inne
nerr an
and
d ou
oute
terr sl
slid
idin
ing
g
2. Ve
Veri
rify
fy th
that
at th
the
e se
seal
al ri
ring
ng se
seat
ats
s ar
are
e cl
clea
ean,
n, if ne
nece
cess
ssa
a-
ry, blow compressed air into the seats.
3. Ver
Verify
ify con
condit
dition
ions
s of sea
seall rin
rings,
gs, du
dust
st cov
cover,
er, an
and
d
spring efficiency; replace the damaged components.
4. Verify that bleeder ho le is free from impurities.
REASSEMBLY
1 - Control lever
2 - Dust cover
3 - Pushrod
1 - Clutc
Clutch
h opera
operatin
ting
g cylin
cylinder
der 4 - Boot
Boot 4 - Piston
2 - Supply pipe 5 - Clamp 5 - Seal ring
3 - Union 6 - Fork 6 - Jack cylinder
7 - Spring
8 - Union
DISASSEMBLY Reassemble the clutch operating cylinder on tractor

by reversing the order of removal, complying with the
Refer to the exploded view and proceed as follows. following:
— Lubricate with the prescribed grease the relative
1. Loosen clam
clamp
p 7, an
and
d rem
removeit
oveit tog
togeth
ether
er wit
with
h bo
boot
ot 8. sliding surfaces.
2. Supplying with low pressure compressed air, care- — Control the correct functioning of the operating
fully withdraw piston from cylinder. cylinder. being sure that the piston 4 makes the
3. Extract spring 4 from operating cylinder, and uns-
full traverse freely.
crew bleeder screw 2 . Withdraw seal ring 6 from pis-
ton 5 .
INSTALLATION
Reassemble the clutch operating cylinder on tractor
CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS by reversing the order of removal, complying with the
following.
— Verify that fork is correctly secured to the clutch
CAUTION sliding sleeve.
To clean and wash the operating cylinder components
— Before connecting the operating cylinder, fill it
use
use on
only
ly th
the
e oi
oill pr
pres
escr
crib
ibed
ed fo
forr th
the
e br
brak
akes
es an
and
d cl
clut
utch
ch.. Do
with the prescribed oil to facilitate the bleeding
not use petrol, kerosene, or other mineral oils to pre- operation.
vent damaging the rubber components.
— Bleed the hydraulic system (refer to: Hydraulic
System Bleeding).
9

GEARBOX CLUTCH
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PIPING

1. Visu
Visuall
ally
y ins
inspe
pect
ct tha
thatt all pip
pipingand
ingand un
union
ions
s of thesys-
tem are in go
good
od con
condit
dition
ions.
s. Re
Repla
place
ce the da
dama
mage
ge com
com--
ponents.
2. In th
thee ev
even
entt of oi
oill le
leak
aks s fr
from
om un
unio
ions
ns,, if du
due
e to lo
loos
ose-e-
ning,
ning, resrestor
tore
e the cor
correcrectt tig
tighte
htenin
ning
g an
and,
d, if req
requir
uired
ed,, re-
REMOVALS AND INSTALLATIONS

1. Re
Remo
move
ve th
the
e pl
plug
ug of br
brak
ake
e an
and
d cl
clut
utch
ch hy
hydr
drau
auli
lic
c sy
sys-
s-
tem su
tem supp
pply
ly ta
tank
nk an
and,
d, by me
mean
anss of sy
syri
ring
nge,
e, su
suck
ck th
the
e oi
oill
from the tank.
2. Loosen the clamps securing the hose connecting
tank to master cylinder, and remove it.
3. Unscrew the unions of the pipe connecting master
cylinder to clutch operating cylinder and remove it.
4. Install the piping by reversing the order of removal,
provid
pro viding
ing for sys
system
tem ble
bleedi
eding
ng (re
(refer
fer to: Hyd
Hydrau
raulic
lic Sys
Sys--
tem Bleeding).
3. Loo
Loosen
sen the blee
bleeder
der screw and, at the same time,
fully press the clutch pedal; then tighten the bleeder
screw, and slowly release the pedal.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEEDING Repea
Rep eatt the ope
operat
ration
ion unt
untilil the air bu
bubbl
bbles
es are eli
elimin
mina-
a-
ted.
4. With the pedal fully pressed, tighten the bleeder
Bleedi
Blee ding
ng of br
brak
akee an
and
d cl
clut
utch
ch hy
hydr
drau
auli
lic
c sy
syst
stem
em is to be
carrie
car ried
d out ea
each
ch tim
time
e thesyste
thesystemm is con
connenecte
cted
d or whe
whenn screw and remove the hose.
air enters it.
CAUTION NOTE
— Do no
nott re
reus
use
e th
the
e oi
oill dr
drai
aine
ned
d du
duri
ring
ng th
the
e bl
blee
eedi
ding
ng To facilitate the bleeding operation, it is possible to
operation. disconnect the supply pipe from the clutch operating
— Duri
During
ng the bleed
bleeding
ing operation,
operation, keep the oil level in
cylinder, and push the pushrod into the operating cy-
the tank above the min. mark . linder so that the air is eliminated from the supply pi-
ping. This operation is required in the event that the
pedal
ped al beco
becomes
mes spon
spongy gy when carrying out norm
normalal
bleeding.
1. Remove the top-up plug from the hydraulic system
5. Res
Resto
tore
re th
the
e oi
oill le
leve
vell in th
the
e ta
tank
nk us
usin
ing
g th
the
e oi
oill pr
pres
escr
cri-
i-
supply tank and, if necessary restore the level using
the oil prescribed. bed; refit the relative plug.
6. Ve
Verif
rify
y the cor
correc
rectt fun
functi
ction
oning
ing of the sys
system
tem,, an
and
d ad
ad--
2. Fit a hose on the bleeder screw of clutch operating
cylind
cyl inder,
er, an
and
d sub
submer
mergege its end int
intoo a tra
transp
nspare
arent
nt just the clutch disengage
disengagement
ment and speed engage-
container filled with the same oil of the system. ment.
10

GEARBOX CLUTCH
CLUTCH
1 - Engine flywheel
2 - Clutch disk
3 - Pressure plate
4 - Dowel pin
5 - Sliding sleeve
6 - Splines
7 - Fork
8 - Lever
9
10- Split pin bearing
- Thrust
DISASSEMBLY
3. Carefully
remove both pressure plate and clutch
1. Disco
Disconnec
nnectt the engi
engine
ne (refe
(referr to: Engi
Engine
ne Remo
Removal).
val). disk.
2. Insert cent
centering
ering tool 5.90
5.9030.2
30.256.0
56.0/10
/10 with bush 4. Remove sliding sleeve 1 by withdrawing it from the
5.9030.541.0 on the flywheel, and unscrew the nine support of mini reduction gear main shaft.
screws securing pressure plate.
CAUTION
Should
Sho uld wa
wash
shing
ing of the ins
inside
ide ge
gearb
arbox
ox be re
requi
quired
red,,
protec
protectt the se
self-l
lf-lub
ubric
ricate
ated
d thr
thrust
ust bea
bearin
ringg tha
thatt
must not be washed in any case .
1 Sliding sleeve
11

GEARBOX CLUTCH
5. Operating on the gearbox, cut the clamp securing

the clutch operating cylinder boot to control lever.
6. Remove split pin 1 , and withdraw outer lever 2 2 to
the lef
left,
t, kee
keepin
ping
g for
fork
k 3 sti
still.
ll. Dur
During
ing the op
opera
eratio
tion,
n, rec
reco o-
ver the two splines 4 .
1 - Split pin
2 - Fork control lever
3 - Fork
4 - Spline

Before carrying out the checks and verifications, use
the appropriate solvent to wash all components, ex-
cept the thrust bearing, to eliminate any traces of dirt
and grease.
1 Flywheel
2 Flywheel working surface
FLYWHEEL 3 Pressure plate resting plane
Verify that the flywheel working surface 2 is free form

signs of overheat, irregular wear, scratches or mate-
rial removal.
1. If requ
required
ired,, disa
disassem
ssemble
ble the flywh
flywheel
eel (refer to: PRESSURE PLATE
Engine - Disassembly - Preliminary Operations) and
grind
gri nd bo
both
th wor
workin
kingg sur
surfac
face
e an
and
d res
restin
tingg pla
plane
ne 3 of pre
pres-
s- Check for sig
Check signs
ns of ove
overhe
rheat,
at, irr
irregu
egular
lar wea
wear.
r. scr
scratc
atches
hes,,
sure plate. material removal on pressure plane working surface
2. The same quantity of material removed when grin- 2; ch
chec
eck
k al
also
so fo
forr si
sign
gns
s of ex
exce
cess ssiv
ive
e we
wear
ar on th
the
e th
thru
rust
st
ding
din g the wor
workin
kingg sur
surfac
face
e 2 sha
shallll be rem
remove
ovedd als
also
o fro
from
m bearing resting plane. If required, replace the pres-
pressure plate resting plane 3 , so as not to modify di- sure plate.
mension “A".
12

GEARBOX CLUTCH
4. Check that the clutch hub is in good conditions and

that it slides without excessive backlash or seizing on
direct drive shaft. If required, replace the clutch disk.
FORK, SLIDING SLEEVE, AND THRUST

BEARING
1. Verify that the clutch control fork is free from defor-
mations, cracks, or exce
mations, excessive
ssive wear in the working
areas. Replace it if required.
2. Visu
Visuall
ally
y in
inspe
spectct tha
thatt bo
both
th sle
sleeve
eve anandd thr
thrust
ust be
beari
aring
ng
are fre
free
e fro
fromm def
deform
ormati
ations
ons or sig
signs
ns of exc
excess
essive
ive wea
wear r
in theworki
theworking ng are
areas.
as. In the eve
event
nt of be
beari
aring
ng ha
harde
rdenin
ning
g
or sei
seizin
zing,
g, rep
replac
lace
e it. Che
Checkck als
also
o tha
thatt the sli
slidin
ding
g sur
surfa-
fa-
ces of both bearing and sleeve are free from signs of
seizing or excessive backlash. Replace the damaged
components.
1 - Pressure plate REASSEMBLY

2 - Pressure plate working surface
3 - Diaphragm spring NOTE
Clutches are marked with a point having different co-

CLUTCH DISK lourr in rel
lou relati
ation
on to the mo
model
dels,
s, as sho
shown
wn in the fol
follow
lowing
ing
table.
1. Checkthat all gaskets of clutch disk are free from
burns and gre
burns grease
ase,, the sec
securi
uring
ng riv
rivets
ets cor
correc
rectly
tly riv
rivete
eted
d
and
an d fo
forr Mo
Mode
dels
ls 10
1000 th
that
at th
the
e sp
spri
ring
ngss ar
are
e in go
good
od cocond
ndi-
i- Colour Model
tion.
2. In the event of clutch malfunctions due to oil leaks Green 150
from engine or gearbox, replace the seal rings where
the leaks occurred. Wash the clutch disk, or replace it Red 130
if required.
3. Use a gau
gauge
ge to chec
checkk that the gask
gasketet wear is uni- White 110
form and that the thickness of clutch disk is not near
the limit value for the model of tractor in object (refer
to: Technical Data and Specifications - Checks and Install the clutch by reversing the order of removal,
Adjustments). complying with the following.
— Refer to the exploded view and lubricate the fol-
lowing components with the grease prescribed:
lever 8
8 on gearbox, through the side grease nip-
ples, and the inner sliding surface of sliding
sleeve 5 through the appropriate grease nipple.
— Once the fork has been reassembled, insert the
split pin by bending one end only.
— Mount the clutch disk and pressure plate, by cen-
tering them on the engine flywheel by means of
tool 5.9030.256.0/10 with bush 5.9030.541.0
NOTE
The protruding part of clutch disk must face the gear-
box. An arrow is marked on clutch disk indicating the
rotation direction (clockwise, seen from the gearbox
side).
— Install the engine (refer to: Engine - Installation).
13

GEARBOX CLUTCH
1 - Engine flywheel 12 - Clutch main shaft 23 - Seal ring

2 - Rivet 13 - P.T.O. shaft 24 - Piston
3 - Clutch plate 14 - Flanged sleeve 25 - Spring
4 - Shoulder ring 15 - Coupling fork 26 - Union
5 - Flat spring 16 - Pin 27 - Screw
6 - Clutch plate 17 - Clutch secondary shaft cover 28 - Rivet
7 - Clutch plate hub 18 - Nut 29 - Safety button
8 - Thrust bearing cover 19 - Pin 30 - Screw
9 - Thrust bearing 20 - Operating cylinder shaft 31 - Toothed bush connecting flywheel
10 - Thrust bearing inside ring 21 - Boot P.T.O. shaft
11 - Sliding sleeve 22 - Operating cylinder body
14

GEARBOX CLUTCH
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Gearbox clutch
Model
Particular
110 130 150
Constructor VALEO
Circular single disk

Clutch type with diaphram 7 poi
point
nt sta
starr sin
singledisk
gledisk wit
with
h dia
diaphr
phram
am spr
spring
ing
spring
Control type Hydrostatic
Sleeve coupling traverse mm 110+1
Disk diameter mm 348
Clutch disk thickness mm 7,5 (max use) 9,7 + 10,2 - under thrust 1260 - of N
Organic
Friction material type Cerametallik
(FERODO IF 324)
Pump type Benditalia Ø 1
Oil type AGIP ATF DEXRON
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Dimension quota
110 130 150
Clutch plate minimum thickness 7,5 (0.295) 9,7 (0.381)
Distance ”X” between face and fork hole
162 ± 3 (6.377 ± 0.188)

15

GEARBOX CLUTCH
Fluids and lubricants
Lever work bushes and sleeve

Grease AGIP GREASE 30 110 -
and fork contact surface
Inside sleeve surface Grease AGIP GREASE 30 130 -
Topping up hydraulic oil tank

Hydraulic oil AGIP ATF DEXRON 150
clutch operating control
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool no. Denomination Page ref.
5.9030.256.0/10 Centering pin 11, 13
5.9030.541.0 Centering pin bush 11, 13
5.9030.48S.4 Clutch disassembly bench

Cl -
16

GEARBOX CLUTCH
Condition Probable cause Corrective action
Replace the front gear box and rear en-

en -
gine retaining ring
Traces of lubricant in clutch housing
Clean with petrol the gasket contact sur-
The clutch slides face and verify the functioning efficiency
Worn clutch plate Replace disk
Thrust
Thrust bea
bearin
ring
g har
harden
dened
ed on the sea
seatt Replac
Replace
e and cle
clean
an the sea
seatt
Dirty plate surface Clean the friction surface
Deformed plate surface Replace disk

The clutch jerks
Worn plate Replace disk
Loose plate gasket Replace disk
Worn clutch plate Replace disk
Check the trave

traverse
rse of the pisto
piston
n and re-
Inefficient hydraulic pump
place the worn part
Clean wit
Clean withh me
meta
ta I bru
brush
sh and pet
petrol
rol the
Clutch plate stuck to the flywheel
The cl
The clut
utch
ch do
does
es no
nott di
disc
scon
onne
nect
ct contact surface
(with engine on the gears engage
with difficulty) Incorrect oil Replace oil
Inefficient jack drive Overhaul and/or replace
Pipi
Piping
ng clo
logg
gged
ed or da
dam
mag
aged
ed Over
erha
haul
ul an
and
d if ne
nec
ces
ess
sar
ary
y re
rep
pla
lac
ce
Air present in the system Release the air
The clutch
clutch is noi
noisy
sy whe
when
n dis
discon
con--
Worn
Worn pa
part
rts
s in th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch me
mech
chan
anis
ism
m Repl
Replac
ace
e th
the
e pa
part
rts
s
necting
17

GEARBOX CLUTCH
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANC

18
GEARBOX
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Checks
Checks an
and
d adj
adjust
ustmen
ments
ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PRELIM
PRELIMINA
INARY
RY OP
OPERA
ERATIO
TIONS
NS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Play adjustment of the gearbox main and
Rearr gea
Rea gearbo
rbox
x pu
pump
mp cov
cover
er rem
remova
ovall . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 counte
counterr sha
shaft
ft be
beari
aring
ngs
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Remova
Removall of axl
axle
e sha
shaft
ft sid
side
e sup
suppor
portt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Play
Play ad
adjus
justme
tment
nt of clu
clutch
tch sha
shaft.
ft. . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Enginegearb
Enginegearbox
ox sep
separa
aratio
tion
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Epicyclic reduction gear withsuper
Removal and reattachment of back and reduct
reductionplay
ionplay ad
adjus
justme
tment
nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
front
front ge
gear
arbo
box
x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 REAR
REAR GE
GEAR
ARBO
BOX
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
EXTERN
EXTERNAL
AL GEA
GEARS
RS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Epicy
Epicycli
clic
c red
reduct
uctiongear.
iongear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Dismo
Dismoun
untin
ting
g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Dismo
Dismount
unting
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Checks
Checks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rolsls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Checks
Checks an
and
d con
contro
trolsls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
FRONT
FRONT GEA
GEARBO
RBOX
X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Test
Testin
ing
g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rods
Rods an
and
d fo
fork
rks.
s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Clut
Clutch
ch P.
P.T.
T.O..
O.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Test
Testin
ing
g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Shafts
Shafts an
and
d ge
geari
aring.
ng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Shaft
Shaft P.T
P.T.O.
.O. for fro
front
nt tra
tracti
ction
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Prelim
Prelimina
inary
ry op
opera
eratio
tions.
ns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Checks
Checks an
and
d con
contro
trols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Gearbox with mini reduction gear and Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
reve
revers
rsal
al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Crow
Crown
n ge
gear
ar an
and
d pi
pini
nion.
on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Gearbox with super reduction gear and Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
reve
revers
rsal
al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Checks
Checks an
and
d con
contro
trols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Stand
Standard
ard ge
gearb
arbox
ox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Remo
Remoun
unti
ting
ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Differ
Differen
entia
tiall blo
blocki
cking
ng sys
system
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Prelim
Prelimina
inary
ry op
opera
eratio
tions.
ns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 TECHNICAL
SPECIFICA
FICATION
TIONS.
S. . . . 100
Gearbox with mini reduction gear and Tech
Techni
nica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
100
reve
revers
rsal
al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Check
Checks
s an
and
d con
contro
trols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Gearb
Gearbox
ox cou
counte
nterr sha
shaft
ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
107
7
Super
Super red
reduct
uctionand
ionand rev
revers
ersal
al ge
gearb
arbox
ox . . . . . . . 58 Gene
General
ral pre
prescr
script
iption
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Revers
Reversal
al sha
shaft
ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE
Stand
Standard
ard ge
gearb
arbox
ox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fina
inall op
opera
eratio
tions.
ns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 SPECIA
SPECIAL
L TOO
TOOLS
LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
19

GEARBOX
GENERAL FEATURES
1 - Valve
2 - Oil union
3 - Gasket
4 - Seeger ring
The transmission has been designed to stand up to
5 - Spacer
the most rigorous conditions of use of the whole trac- 6 - O-ring
tion guarantees a more complete manouverability. 7 - Cap
8 - Gear shaft registration screw
9 - Nut
It is constructed with two fundamental parts: 10 - Gasket
— the gearbox completely synchronized 11 - Gearbox cover fixing screw
— the epicyclic reduction gear with movable sleeve. 12 - Washer
13 - Gearbox oil introduction cap
14 - Gasket
15 - Front gearbox lever cover
On mo
model
delss 11
110
0 the gea
gearbo
rbox
x com
comes
es com
comple
plete
te wit
with
h fou
four
r 16 - Lever cover gasket
gears and the reverse, which coupled with 3 speed 17 - Pump support cover gasket
epicyclic reduction gear (switch range) puts twelve 18 - Rear gearbox pump cover
forward
tion gears
of the and three reverse gears at the disposi-
driver. 19 -- Hydraulic
20 Hydraulic lifting
lifting box
housing
fixing screw
On req
reques
uestt for mod
modelsels 11
110, 0, mo
modedels
ls 13
1300 an
and d 150come 21 - Gasket
alrea
alreadydy momoun unted
ted wit
withh a sup supple
pleme
menta
ntaryry red
reduct
uction
ion 22 - Lifting group oil sump collector
(mini
(mi ni red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gear)
ar) on the ma mainin ge
gearb
arbox,
ox, neneces
cessar
sari-
i- 23 - Spring
24 - Oil sump
ly accompained by the reversal, which increases the
25 - Hydraulic lifting Box gasket
range of gears to twenty forward and twelve reverse, 26 - Gasket
this solution is necessary in order to use the tractor in 27 - PTO back shaft cover
particularly difficult jobs or transport. On request, it is 28 - PTO protection
always possible to alternate the assembly for a sup- 29 - Washer
plementary reducer with a particularly high reduction 30 - PTO protection fixing screw
(super reduction gear) always accompained by a re- 31 - PTO flange support fixing screw
versal, on models in the range. The gearbox on mo- 32 - Gasket
dels
del s 13
130 0 and150 is equequipp ipped
ed wit
withh epi
epicyc
cyclic
lic ge
gears
ars,, an
andd 33 - PTO flange support
34 - Flange gasket
is guaranteed a notably silent working and high me-
35 - Back support
chanical
chan ical efficiency;
efficiency; the lubrilubricatio
cationn of the presspressure
ure 36 - Differential block shaft plug
type, is obtained through an independent pump. 37 - Grease nipple
The
Th e cr
crow
own n wh
whee
eelsls of al
alll mo
modedels
ls ar
are
e mo
moun untetedd on ta
tape
per r
rollered bearings, the mounting doesn’t require spe- 38
39 -- Rear
Transmission
geabox oil relief
cial tools. 40 - Oil relief plug
Two fin
final
al ep
epicy
icycle
cle typ
typee red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gears
ars,, sit
situa
uated
ted in the 41 - Lower gasket cover
rearr sup
rea suppoports
rts of the bra
brakes
kes,, per
permit
mit a no
notab
tablele red
reduct
uction
ion 42 - Lower cover
in the transmission stress. 43 - 4 Wheel drive PTO oil filter
44 - Plug
45 - Washer
46 - Plug
47 - Clutch spare cover
48 - Gear oil relief plug
49 - Gasket
50 - Holding washer
51 - Shaft reversallock screw
52 - Oiling
53 - Secondary mini reduction gear/super reduction gear
54 - Nut
55 - Holding washer
56 - Flanged sleeve
57
58 - Support linkox
Front gearbox
gearb
20

GEARBOX
21

GEARBOX
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
The prel
prelimin
iminary
ary ope
operatio
rations,
ns, give
given
n belo
below,
w, incl
include,
ude, REMOVAL OF AXLE SHAFT SIDE
where necessary, specific instructions before each SUPPORT
single dismounting
dismounting..
130 - 150
Follow the procedure given in Brakes - Rear Brakes -
Dismounting - Steps from 1. to 14 until step (4).
REAR GEARBOX PUMP COVER

REMOVAL 110
1. Fol
Follow
low theproce
theprocedu dure
re in: Bra
Brakes
kes - Rea
Rearr Bra
Brakes
kes . Dis
Dis--
mounting - Steps from 1. to 10 .
2. Lo
Loose
osenn the thi
thirte
rteen
en nu
nuts
ts fix
fixing
ing the fla
flang
ngee an
and
d tho
those
se
fixing the brake housing to the t he bell using an adequate
1. Loos
Loosen
en thethree soc
socket
ket he
head
ad scr
screws
ews fix
fixingthe
ingthe de
deli-
li- method to hold the bell during the removal of the rear
very pipes 2 and 12 . gearbox.
2. Lo
Loose
osen
n the fou
fourr soc
socket
ket he
head
ad scr
screw
ews
s fix
fixing
ing the oil in-
take pipes 5 and 9 .
3. Collect the O-rings found under the unions of the
pump pipes.
4. Disconnect the pipes 4 loosening the two unions
positi
posi tion
oned
ed on th
the
e pu
pump
mp su
supp ppor ortt an
and
d on th
the
e li
lift
ftin
ing
g ho
hou-
u-
sing.
5. Loosen the twelve screws 6 fixing the cover 8 8 and
remove.
WARNING
Accurately
Accurate ly chec
checkk the bala
balancin
ncing
g of the tractor
and the bell to prevent them clashing during the
removal operation.
3. Remove the final reduction gear bracket taking it

from the brake discs.
1 - Screw
2 - Hydrostatic steering oil delivery pipe
ENGINE GEARBOX SEPARATION
3 - O-ring
4 - Lubrication pipe 1. Separate the engine from the gearbox (refer to:
5 - Hydrostatic fixing screw Complete
Comple te Eng
Engine
ine - Re
Remov
movalal - Inc
Inclu
ludin
dingg the rem
remova
ovall of
6 - Pump cover fixing screw the Front Axle).
7 - Screw 2. Cut the clutch piston dust guard band 1 and loosen
8 - Pump cover the
the tw
two
o sc
scre
rews
ws fi
fixi
xing
ng to tw
two
o br
bracacke
kets
ts 2 to the gea
gearbo
rbox.x.
9
10- -Hydraulic
Screw fitting pump intake pipe Remove the brackets.
11 - O-ring
12 - Hydraulic lifter oil delivery pipe
13 - Screw
22

GEARBOX
1 - Band 1 - PTO shaft

2 - Diesel tank holding bracket 2 - PTO pump control shaft
CAUTION 4. Remove the fuel tank (refer to: Feeding - Tank

Always use a soft metal hammer and punch when Removal).
it is necessary to tap on metal parts. 5. Place a container under the back gearbox, loosen
the oil
plugs
(nu of the
(numb ers section
mbers you’re
38, 40, 43 working
and 48 of theon and
enlar
en largebleed
ged
d dia
dia--
gram).
3. Re
Remo
move
ve th
the
e fri
fricti
ction
on clu
clutch
tch sl
slee
eeve
ve an
and
d co
contr
ntrol
ol fo
fork
rk (re
(re-- 6. Loosen the unions 1 and 5 of the two pipes 4 of the
fer to: Gearbox Friction Clutch - Clutch - Removal). oil lev
levell
eller
er andonly for mo
mode
dels
ls 13
130-1
0-150
50,th
,the
e uni
unions
ons 3 of
the oil discharge and remove excess.
Only for
for models
models 130 - 150
150
4. Lo
Loose
osen
n the nu
nutt fix
fixing
ing the val
valve
ve 1 to th
the
e ge
gear
arbo
box
x an
and
d
remove it together with its piping.
1 - Gear oil pressure limit valve
REMOVA
REMOVALL AN
AND
D RE
REAT
ATTA
TACH
CHME
MENT
NT OF
BACK AND FRONT GEARBOX
1. Remove the driving cabin (refer to: Cabin - Com-
plete Cabin - Removal).
2. Rem
Remov
ove
e th
the
e pu
pump
mp co
cove
verr fr
from
om th
the
e re
rear
ar bo
box
x (r
(ref
efer
er to
to:: 1 - Union
Preliminary Operations). With the help of a hammer 2 - Excess oil discharge pipe
and
an d pu
punc
nch h ta
take
ke ou
outt th
the
e pi
pin
n fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt 1 to th
the
e co
con-
n- 3 - Excess oil discharge pipe union
(Only for models 150-130
trol shaft at the pump 2 .
4 - Oil levelling pipe
5 - Union
23

GEARBOX
7. Place a jack under the rear gearbox, being careful 11. Le

Lever
vering
ing be
betwe
tween
en the two bo
boxes
xes,, car
carefu
efully
lly rem
remove
ove
nott to to
no touc
uch
h th
the
e me
meta
tall pa
part
rts
s by pl
plac
acin
ing
g a wo
wood
oden
en bl
blocock
k the front gearbox being careful not to lift it too high so
in between. as no
nott to da
dama
mage
ge th
the
e PT
PTO
O co
cont
ntro
roll sh
shaf
aft,
t, th
then
en pl
plac
acee th
the
e
8. Sling the front gearbox in order to hold it in a lifted gearbox on a stand
position during the removal of the rear gearbox.
CAUTION
Be careful that the epicyclic reduction gear which
is no
nott fix
fixed
ed in thediffe
thedifferen
rentia
tiall box
box,, do
does
es not mov
move.
e.
WARNING
Accurately check the balance of the tractor and
the bel
belll in or
order
der to av
avoid
oid dan
danger
gerous
ous cla
clash
shing
ing du
du--
ring the removal operation.
Remount
Remou nt the gea
gearbo
rbox
x wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order
er ad
ad--
hering to the following instructions:
— Check that the box is not cracked.
— Check that the upper cover surface is not dama-
9. Remove the front gearbox lever cover (refer to: ged, and that it has sufficient holding for the gas-
Extern
Externalal Con
Contro
trols
ls - Dis
Dismou
mounti
nting
ng - Ste
Steps
ps fro
from
m 1. to 3.)
3.).. kets.
10. Place
Place the gegearb
arbox
ox sli
sling
ng in tra
tracti
ction
on loo
loosen
sen the — Eliminate any defect, eliminate them with the
twelve nuts fixing the two boxes. help of a file. Change the very damaged or worn
parts.
— Check that the epicyclic reduction gear is in it’s
correct position in the differential box.
— Spread the mating area of the differential hou-
sing and the gearbox with prescribed sealer.
— Insert the PTO control rod and check the paralle-
lism of the box during the mounting.
— It is advisable to manually engage a gear and
turn the main shaft to help the insertion of the se-
condary gear shaft in the epicyclic reduction
gear.
— Tighten the fixing screws of the two boxes to the
prescribed torque.
Tightening torque
Nuts fixing gearbox to differential housing
Refer to: GENERAL

Nut tightening
— Top up the level of the oil using the prescribed

lubricant.
24

GEARBOX
EXTERNAL GEARS
DISMOUNTING
Version with Super - reduction gear
1 - Bracket 18 - Shoulder washer 33 - Starter switch

2 - Adjusting plate 19 - Spring 34 - Protection cap
3 - Bracket 20 - Lock pin 35 - Plate
4 - Epicyclic reduction gear control rod 21 - Support link 36 - Rubber bellow
5 - Gear control rod 22 - Gearbox cover 37 - External control support
6 - Shims 23 - Screw 38 - Gear control box
7 - Acoustic panel 24 - Spring 39 - Epicyclic reduction control rod
8 - Single bellow 25 - Gear lever control 40 - Bush
9 - Mini reduct
ctiion gear re
reve
vers
rsa
al lever 26 - Tapered screw 41 - Mini reduct
ctiion gear reve
verrsal control bar
10 - Knob 27 - Nut 42 - Ball pin
11 - Cover 28 - Epicyclic reduction control lever 43 - Bracket
12 - Ep
Epic
icyc
ycli
lic
c re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n le
leve
verr 29 - Mi
Mini
ni re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n ge
gear
ar an
and
d re
reve
vers
rsal
al 44 - Mi
Mini
ni re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n ge
gear
ar an
and
d re
reve
vers
rsal
al co
cont
ntro
roll
13 - Gear lever control lever bar
14 - Double bellow 30 - Stop ring 45 - Mini reduction gear and reversal control
15 - Acoustic panel 31 - Rod bar
16 - Leverr 32 - Gasket
17 - Split pin
25

GEARBOX
CAUTION
Always use a soft metal hammer and punch when
working on ferrous metal.
1. Re
Remo
move
ve th
the
e dr
driv
ive
e ca
cabi
bin
n (r
(ref
efer
er to
to:: Ca
Cabi
bin
n - Co
Comp
mple
lete
te
Cabin - Removal).
2. Ta
Take
ke ou
outt the saf
safety
ety cli
clip
p 2and remo
remove
ve disco
disconnec
nnecting
ting
therod 1 fro
fromm thePTO cluclutch
tch cou
coupli
pling
ng con
contro
troll lev
lever
er 2.
1 - Return rod 1 - Bracket

2 - Safety clip 2 - PTO clutch coupling return lever control
3 - PTO clutch coupling control lever
6. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e fo
four
ur sc
scre
rews
ws fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e le
leve
verr su
supportt 8 to
ppor
thecover. Rem
thecover. Removethe
ovethe sup suppo
port
rt com
compleplete
te wit
with
h therod.
7. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,y, rem
removethe
ovethe thr
three
ee rod
rods s of the ge
gear
ar con
con--
3. Loosen the eleven screws fixing the cover to the trol 6 and the reduction gear controls 1 and 5 from the
gearbo
gea rbox.
x. Rem
Remove
ove the cov
cover
er com
comple
plete
te wit
with
h the rel
relati
ative
ve lever support using the following procedure:
gaskets, being careful not to loose the springs which (1) Loosen the two screws fixing the bracket 4 to the
keep the gear lock ball bearings in place. lever support. Remove the brackets and epicyclic re-
4. Loosen the two screws fixing the PTO clutch cou- duction gear control rod 5 recovering the spacers.
pling return 2 to the control lever and remove. (2)) Ta
(2 Take
ke of
offf th
the
e sp
splilitt pi
pin
n 7 an
andd rem
removeove the gegear
ar con
contro
troll
5. Loosen the two screws fixing the bracket 1 to the fromthe
fromthe ba base se of th
the
e rorodd 6 reco
recoverin
vering g the sprin
spring,
g, shou
shoul- l-
control lever and remove it. der ring and ball bearing.
(3) Using a hammer and punch, remove the pin 3
fixing the lever 2 2 to the mini reduction gear and rever-
sorr tothe ro
so rodd 1. Re
Remomove ve th
the
e sp
spriring
ng,, ge
gear
ar an
andd ba
ball
ll be
bea-
a-
ring from the base of the rod.
26

GEARBOX
12. Ca
Caref
refull
ully
y tak
take
e off the ba
bars
rs 3 and 5 tog
togeth
ether
er wit
with
h the
bellow 2 anandd the pla
plate
te 1. Col
Collec
lectt the lev
levers
ers 9 and 6, th
the
e
spring 7 holding ring 10 and the three holding rings
found in the cover.
13. If ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary,
y, ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e tw
twoo ba
bars
rs fr
from
om th
thee re
rela
lati
tive
ve
bellows.
1 - Mini reduction gear and reversal control rod

2 - Lever
3 - Pin
4 - Bracket
5 - Epicyclic reduction gear control rod
6 - Gear control rod
7 - Split pin
8 - Lever support
8. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e st
star
arte
terr mo
moto
torr sw
swit
itch
ch an
and
d re
remo
move
ve it fr
from
om
the
the co
cove
ver,
r, wi
with
th th
the
e he
help
lp of a ma
magn
gnet
et re
remo
movethe
vethe ca
cap.
p.
WARNING
Before
Before bebegin
ginnin
ning
g to dis
dismo
mount
unt the bar levlever
er,,
mark
ma rk th
the
e le
leve
verr po
posi
siti
tion
ons
s on th
the
e ba
barr to he
help
lp yo
you
u in
remounting them.
9. Loosen the screws fixing the lever 7

7 to the bar 4 of
1 - Plate
the epicylic reduction gear control. Take off the bar
2 - Rubbe
Rubberr bellows
and collect the lever.
3 - Mini reduction gear control and reversal control bar
10.
gear Loosen
controlthe
bartapered
5. screw fixing the lever 8
8 to the 4 - Epicyclic reduction gear control rod
5 - Gear control rod
11. Lo
Loose
osen
n the scr
screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the lev
lever
er 9 to th
the
e mi
minini re
re-- 6 - Epicyclic reduction gear control lever
duction gear and reversal control bar 3. Using ham- 7 - Spring
mer and punch remove the pin fixing the holding ring 8 - Gear control lever
10 to the bar 3. 9 - Mini reduction gear control and reversal control lever
10 - Holding ring
27

GEARBOX
CHECKS AND CONTROLS

1. Clean the metal parts of the controls with solvant
and control their good working.
2. Che
Check
ck th
the
e am
amou
ount
nt of we
wear
ar of th
the
e jo
join
ints
ts be
betw
twee
een
n th
the
e
rods and bars.
3. Check the rubber bellows. Change any that are
worn or damaged.
4. Check that the return springs are not deformed or
twisted. Change them if necessary.
REMOUNTING
Remount the external controls working in the reverse
order adhering to the following instructions:
— Mount the new support links being careful that
the larger diameter is turned towards the outside
of the cover.
— Lubricate the lever joints with prescribed
grease.
1. Po
Posit
sition
ion the thr
three
ee lev
levers
ers on the
their
ir res
respe
pecti
ctive
ve rod
rods
s re-
ferring to the signs made on the rods when dismoun-
ting,
tin g, che
checki
cking
ng tha
thatt the no
notch
tches
es pre
presen
sentt on the gro
groove
ovedd
part of the bar are correctly positioned to allow the
fixing of the lever with respective screws.
2. Se careful to exactly position the springs, then ha-
ving positioned the cover on the box, check that the
three levers are correctly positioned in the slots.
1 - Adjustment plate
3. Afte
Afterr mo
moun
untin
ting,
g, adj
adjust
ust the pos
positi
ition
on lim
limit
it of the ep
epicy
icy-- 2 - Bracket
clic reduction gear control rod 3 using the following 3 - Epicyclic reduction gear control rod
procedure:
(1) Loosen the four screws fixing the brackets 2 and
the adjustment plate 1 .
(2) Carefully put the rod into action 3 and connect the
reduced speed.
(3) Position the bracket 2 in such a way that the inter-
nal edge is approximately a millimetre from the rod 3 .
Block the bracket.
(4) Con
Connec
nectt theslow red reduct
uctionand
ionand poposit
sitionthe
ionthe pla
plate
te 1
usin
us ing
g th
thee sa
same
me memeth thod
od as wh
when
en co
conn
nnececti
ting
ng th
the
e br
brac
ac--
ket.
28

GEARBOX
FRONT GEARBOX
RODS AND FORKS
DISMOUNTING
Version with super-reduction gear
1 - Spring 15 - Lock pin 30 - Reversal coupling fork

2 - Ball 16 - Screw (mini reduction gear version)
3 - 1st and 2nd gear coupling rod 17 - Washer 31 - Lock pin
4 - Connecting plate 18 - Cap 3 2 - Ro d
5 - Screws 19 - Spring 33 - Bracket
6 - Washer 20 - Ball 34 - Mini reduction gear coupling fork
7 - Seeger ring 21 - Safety pawl 35 - Lock pin
8 - 1 st and 2nd gear coupling fork 22 - Screw 36 - Pressure pad
9 - 3rd and 4th gear coupling rod 23 - Washer 37 - Gasket
10 - 3rd and 4th gear coupling fork 24 - Screw 38 - Nut
1
112 -- S
Wcarewer
sh 2
25
6 -- W
Caapsher 3
490 -- S
Aadfju
estytinpgaw
scl rew
13 - Mini reduction gear 27 - Spring 41 - Reversal coupling fork
(super reduction gear coupling rod) 28 - Ball (super reduction gear version)
14 - Return lever 29 - Reversal coupling rod
29

GEARBOX
1 - Lock pin
2 - Nut
3 - Washer
4 - 1st and 2nd gear fork adjustment screw
5 - 1st and 2nd gear control rod coupling
6 - Control prong
7 - 3rd and 4th gear fork coupling
8 - Spring
9 - Ball
10 - 3rd and 4th gear control rod coupling
11 - Block rod gear coupling with inserted reversal
12 - Block rod reversal coupling
13 - Control rod reversal coupling
14 - Control area
15 - Bush
16 - Mini reduction gear control rod coupling
17 - Reversal fork coupling
18 - Ball
19 - Spring
20 - Spacer
21 - Reversal lever block coupling with mini reduction gear
22 - Mini reduction gear fork coupling
23 - 1st and 2nd gear fork coupling
30

GEARBOX
Preliminary operations Operations for 130-150
1. Separate the two gearboxes (refer to: Preliminary 1. Remove rod and mini reduction gear fork coupling
Operations). using the following procedure.
2. Remove the lever cover of the front gearbox (refer (1) Using a hammer and punch remove the pin fixing
to: External Controls - Dismounting - Steps from 1. to the fork 1 to the rod 2 and the lever 3
3 to the rod 2 .
3.). (2) Take off the rod, the fork, the lever and collect the
3. Recover the two springs 7 and the balls 6 using a safety pawl 4 .
magnet.
4. Loosen the two cups 5 and take off the spacer 3
spring 2 and the ball 1 with a magnet.
1 - Fork
2 - Mini reduction gear rod coupling
3 - Gear control lever coupling
4 - Safety pawl
2. Remove and reversal fork coupling using the follo-

wing procedure.
(1) Remove the pin fixing the fork 2 to the rod 3 and
take it off.
(2) Loosen the two screws fixing the brackets 3 to the
box. Remove the bracket.
1 - Rod positioning ball

2 - Spring
3 - Spacer
4 - Gasket
5 - Cap 1 - Reversal rod coupling
6 - Ball 2 - Fork and support
7 - Spring 3 - Bracket
31

GEARBOX
3. Remove rod and fork I - II and rod and forks III - IV

using the following procedure:
(1) Rem
Remove
ove thescrew adj adjust
ustingthe
ingthe pospositi ition
on of the for
fork
k
coupling fork I and II.
2) Loo
Loosen
sen thethree scr screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the forforkk cou
coupli
pling
ng 5 III
and
an d IV of fo
fork
rk 3 to th
the
e re
rela
lati
tive
ve rorod.
d. Re
Remo move ve th
the
e pl
plat
ate
e1
take out the rod 2 and relative fork 3 .
(3) Take off rod 4 and remove the fork 5 being careful
that
that th
the
e mo
movavabl
blee pa
padsds donot sl slip
ip of
offf it
it.. Re
Recocove
verr th
the
e sa
sa--
fety
fety pa
pawl
wl fo
foun
und d in th
thee bo
box
x be
betwtweeeenn th
the e twtwoo ro
rod
d se
seat
ats.
s.
1 - Coupl
Coupling
ing plate
2 - I and II gear rod coupling
3 - I and II gear fork coupling
4 - III and IV gear rod coupling Minii red
Min reduct
uction
ion gea
gearr not ins
insert
erted
ed Minii red
Min reduct
uction
ion gea
gearr ins
insert
erted
ed
5 - III and IV gear fork coupling
1 - Bush
2 - Block lever
3 - Mini reduction rod gear coupling fork
4 - Blocking push rod
Interventions for models 110 5 - Reversal rod
6 - Control rod
1. Rem
Remove
ove rod an
and
d min
minii red
reduct
uctiongear
iongear cou
coupli
pling
ng usi
using
ng
the following procedure:
(1)) Wi
(1 With
th a le
leve
verr mo
move
ve th
thee fo
fork
rk 3 tow
toward
ardss theback of the
box
bo x in or
orde
derr to ta
take
ke ou
outt th
the
e lo
lock
ck pi
pin
n of th
the
e bl
bloc
ock
k le
leve
ver r 2
without interfering with the back gear wheels.
(2) Using a hammer and punch extract the pin fixing
the bush 1 the block lever 2 2 and the fork 3 . 2. Remove the rod and the reversal coupling fork
(3) Take out the control rod 4 and recover the fork 3 , using the following procedure:
the leve
lever
r 2 an
andd the bu
bush
sh 1. UsUsining
g a ma
magngnet
et re
reco
cove
verr th
thee
reversal gear blocking pushrod found under the lever (1) Ta
(1) Take
ke th
thee Se
Seeg
eger
er rin
ring
g 1 fo
foun
und
d at th
the
e ex
extr
trem
eme
e en
end
d of
2. the rod 5 off.
(2) Using a hammer and punch extract the pin that
blocks the fork 2 and the control sector.
32

GEARBOX
4. Remove the rod and fork coupling I and II gears

operations as follows:
(1)) Re
(1 Refe
ferr
rrin
ing
g to th
the
e en
enla
larg
rged
ed didiag
agra
ram
m on pa
page
ge 11
11,, lo
loo-
o-
sen the blo
blocki
cking
ng nu
nutt 2 un
unti
till yo
you
u ar
are
e ab
able
le to re
remo
move
ve ththe
e
adjusting screw 4 of the fork coupling I and II and re-
move it together with the gasket 3 .
(2) Remove the final run Seeger ring 2 found on the
control rod 3 .
(3) Using a hammer and punch extract the pin fixing
the fork 1 then take off the rod and recover the fork.
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Reversal coupling fork
3 - Control sector
4 - Reversal coupling rod
(3) Take out the rod 3 and recover the fork 2 and the
control sector.
3. Remove rod and fork coupling III and IV using the
following procedure:
(1) Using a hammer and punch extract the lock pins
that block the prong 1 and the fork 2 .
(2) Take out the rod 3 and recover the fork 2 and the
prong 1 . 1 - Fork coupling I and II gear
(3) Using a magnet, remove the push rod that stops 2 - Final run Seeger ring
3 - Control rod coupling I and II gear
the
the re
reve
vers
rsal
al co
coup
upli
ling
ng wh
when
en a ge
gear
ar is in
inse
sert
rted
ed fr
from
om th
the
e
passage hole in the bulkhead.
(4) Usi
Using
ng a ham
hamme
merr rec
recove
overr the sec
secon
ond
d pu
pushr
shrod
od blo
bloc-
c-
ker working through the passage hole of the rod pre-
sent on the bulkhead.
CHECKS AND CONTROLS

NOTE
Befor
Be fore
e car
carryi
rying
ng ou
outt the fol
follow
lowing
ing op
opera
eratio
tions
ns acc
accura
urate-
te-
ly cl
clea
eann al
alii th
the
e pa
part
rts.
s. Th
This
is is inord
inorder
er tobe ab
able
le toacc
toaccu-
u-
rately check for damage and wear to some of them.
1. Che
Check
ck tha
thatt theforks arenot ove
overr wor
worn
n or de
defor
forme
med.
d.
2. Check that the control rods have not been defor-
med.
3. Check that the cables on the control rods present
no splits. that the rod positioning pawl and the safety
4. Check
coupling pawl are not split or show signs of wear.
1 - Prong
2 - Fork coupling III and IV gears
3 - Rod coupling III and IV gears
33

GEARBOX
REMOUNTING TESTING
Remoun
Remo untt th
the
e ro
rods
ds an
and
d th
the
e fo
fork
rks
s wo
work
rkin
ing
g in re
reve
vers
rse
e or
or-- Check that the spring, pawls, rods all work together
der and adhering to the following procedure: correctly, and that the gear coupling takes place wi-
— Position the two safety pawls before positioning thout forcing and that the sleeve runs smoothly along
the relative rods. the whole course of the coupling.
— After mounting the fork coupling I and II tighten Also check that when the center rod is in position cou-
the adjustment screw 1 until it touches the fork, pling cannot take place on the side rods, if this is pos-
then loosen the screw by one turn and block it sible,
sible, che
check
ck tha
thatt you ha
have
ve cor
correc
rectly
tly mo
moun
unted
ted the saf
safe-
e-
with the nut. ty pawl.

Check that cables that couple the forks III and IV
3 and that of the plate 2 of the fork I and II are
perfectly facing each other.
1 - Adjusting screw
2 - Coupling plate 130 and 150
3 - Fork coupling III and IV gear 130 and 150
34

GEARBOX
SHAFTS AND GEARING

For 130 - 150
DISMOUNTING
1 - Support link
2 - External Seeger ring
3 - Compression ring
4 - External gasket
5 - Shim
6 - Internal gasket
7 - Ball bearing
8 - Shell
9 - Bush
10 - Clutch shaft
11 - Retainer
12 -- Shaft
13 Seeger ring
gear
14 - Shoulder ring
15 - Synchronizer ring
16 - Ball
17 - Spring
18 - Toothed hub
19 - Grooved sleeve
21 - Reduction gear wheel
22 - Bush
23 - Reversal gear
24 - Internal tapered retainer track
25 - External track
26 - Lubrication manifold
27 - Lubrication bush
28 - Bush
29 - Gear conduit III
31 - Pad
32 - Ball pin
33 - Spring
34 - Grooved sleeve
35 - Synchronized ring
36 - Bush
37 - Gear conduit IV
38 - Gear conduit I
39 - Spacer
40 - Gear conduit Il
41 - Shim adjustment ring
42 -- Shim
43 Shim adjustment ring
44 - External track
45 - Internal tapered retainer track
46 - Bush
47 - Ring nut
48 - O-ring
49 - Shoulder
50 - Internal track
51 - External retainer track
52 - Fixed gear
53 - Seeger ring
54 - Seeger ring
55 - Retainer
56 - Grooved sleeve
57 - Shoulder
58 - Spacer
59 - Retainer
60 - Moveable gears
61 - Reversal shaft
62 - Sleeve
63 - Cap
64 - External Seeger ring 76 - Ring nut 89 - Synchronized ring
65 - Shoulder ring 77 - Internal retainer track 90 - Toothed hub
66 - External retainer track 78 - External track 91 - Grooved sleeve
67 - Internal track 79 - Bush 92 - Synchronized ring
68 - External Seeger ring 80 - Shim adjustment 93 - Bush
69 - External Seeger ring 81 - Shims 94 - Gear conduit Il
70 - Reduction gear 82 - Lubrication bush 95 - Spacer
71 - Spacer 83 - Lubrication manifold 96 - External track
72 - Reduction gear 84 - Gear conduit III 97 - Internal retainer track
73 - Reduction gear secondary shaft 85 - Spacer 98 - Secondary gear shaft
74 - Spacer 86 - Gear conduit IV 99 - Roller bearing
75 - Retainer 87 - Bush 100 - Seeger ring
88 - Gear conduit I
35

GEARBOX
For 110
1 - Flanged sleeve
2 - Sleeve fixing screw
3 - Shim adjusting ring
4 - O-ring
5 - Support link
6 - Seeger ring
7 - Bearing
8 - Seeger ring
9 - Support link
10 - Bush
11 - Clutch shaft
12 - Mini reduction gear input
13 - Seeger ring
14 - Crown nut coupling
15 - Synchronized ring
17 - Coupling collar
18 - Toothed hub
19 - Pad
20 - Mini reduction gear outlet
21 - Seeger ring
22 - Spacer ring
23 - Spacer ring
24 - Shoulder ring
25 - External bearing track
26 - Internal bearing track
27
28 -- Gear conduit I
Spacer
29 - Gear conduit II and reversal
30 - Bush
33 - Shovel ring
34 - Bearing
36 - Main gear shaft
37 - Ring nut
38 - Seeger ring
39 - Bearing
40 - Inserted bearing seat
41 - Reversal shaft
42 - Retainer
43 - Gear
44 - Toothed hub
46 - Seeger ring
47 - Bearing
48 - Gear
49 - Seeger ring
50 - Secondary mini reduction gear shaft cover
51 - O-ring
52 - Seeger ring
53 - Bearing
54 - Seeger ring
55 - Seeger ring
56 - Gear
57 - Seeger ring
58 - Gear
59 - Mini reduction gear secondary
60 - Seeger ring
61 - Shims
62 - Bearing
63 - Shoulder ring
64 - Bush
65 - Gear conduit I
66 - Gear conduit II
67 - Secondary gearbox shaft
68 - Flange
70 - Bearing
72 - Spacer
36

GEARBOX
PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS GEARBOX WITH

WITH MINII RED
MIN REDUC
UCTIO
TION
N GEA
GEAR
R AN
AND
D
REVERSAL
FOR 130 - 150
The fo
The follo
llowi
wing
ng pr
proc
oced
edur
ure
e is to be us
used
ed on
only
ly in op
ope-
e- Clutch shaft and countershaft of the mini
rations on the whole of the gearbox.
To work on a single part of the shaft it is possible reduction gear
to us
usee a red
reduce
uced
d dis
dismo
mount
unting
ing wh
whichwill
ichwill be ex
expla
plai-
i-
ned as you go along, telling you what you don’t The dismounting of the clutch shaft and countershaft
need to dismount. of the mini redu
reduction
ction gear are inte
interdep
rdepend
endent
ent beca
because
use
it is impossible to remove the clutch shaft without re-
moving the countershaft, because of the teeth of the
1. Separate the two gearboxes (refer to: Preliminary synchronizer and the lower gear. In order to work the
Operations). mini reduction gear is not necessary to separate the
2. Separate the front gearbox from the engine (refer
two gearboxes and remove the rod and fork.
to: Preliminary Operations).
1. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e fo
four
ur nu
nuts
ts fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e sl
slee
eeve
ve 1 an
and
d th
the
e co
co--
ver 2
2 . Partly take out the cover with the countershaft
until the gearwheels and the spacers fall onto the bot-
CAUTION tom of the gearbox.
Always use a soft metal hammer and punch when
you are working with ferrous metal. During the
dism
dismou
ount
ntin
ing
g of ge
gear
ar wh
whee
eell pa
pack
cks
s ma
mark
rk th
the
e si
side
de to
be mounted first of the non-symmetric parts.
3. Remove the PTO shaft 1 and take out the support

link 2 from the inside of the main shaft 3 .
1 - Clutch shaft flanged sleeve

2 - Mini reduction gear countershaft cover
2. Withthe help of light taps as illustrated in the dia-

gram, take out the shaft and collect the parts.
1 - PTO shaft
2 - Support link
3 - Main shaft
4. Removerods and forks (refer to: Rods and Forks -
Dismounting).
37

GEARBOX
3. Referring to the technical drawing, collect all the 6. If you need to work on the synchronizer or on the
shim
sh ims s an
and
d ga
gask
sketets
s 3 ta
taki
king
ng no
note
te of th
thee to
tota
tall th
thic
ickn
knes
ess,
s, gears mounted on the gearbox main shaft it is neces-
to use as an indication in the remounting. sary to remove the main shaft and separate the two
4. If necessary, remove the bearing 4 using the follo - gearboxes (refer to: Rods and Forks - Dismounting).
wing procedure: 7. Completely take off the cover 15
15 with the counters-
counters-
(1) Block the shaft in a vice with protective teeth and haft 16 and collect from the bottom of the gearwheels
remove the Seeger ring 20 and remove the bearing. 10 and 8 frfrom
om th
thee bo
bott
ttom
om of th
the
e bo
boxx to
toge
geth
ther
er wi
with
th sp
spa-
a-
5. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, rem
removethe
ovethe See
Seege
gerr ring 18 and extra
ring extract
ct cers 9 and 7 .
the retainer 19
19 . 8. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, rem
remove
ove the be
beari
aring
ng 13 usi
using
ng the fol
follo-
lo-
wing procedure:
(1) Remove the Seeger ring 12 and take off the bea-
ring and shaft from the cover 15 .
CAUTION (2) Remove the Seeger ring 14 and take off the bea-
Take care not to move the coupling collar of the ring from the shaft.
synchronizer so as not to free the spring loaded
pad.
1 - Clutch shaft flanged

sleeve support
2 - Suppo
Supportrt link
3 - Shims and gaskets
4 - Ball bearings
bearings
5 - Clutch shaft
6 -- Synchronized
7 Spacer
Space r ring
8 - Gearwheel
9 - Space
Spacer
r
10 - Gearwheel
11 - Seege
Seegerr ring
12 - Seege
Seegerr ring
13 - Roller bearing
bearing
14 - Seege
Seegerr ring
15 - Cover
16 - Mini reduction gear
control shaft
17 - O-ring
18 - Seege
Seegerr ring
19 - Retainer
20 - Seege
Seegerr ring
38

GEARBOX
Gearbox main shaft CAUTION

Alwayskeep
Alw ayskeep the exexter
ternal
nal rin
rings
gs of the be
beari
aringspai-
ngspai-
To dismount the main shaft you must carry out all the red
red wit
with
h the
their
ir res
respe
pecti
ctive
ve cro
crown
wned
ed rol
roller
ler and ins
inside
ide
prelim
prelimina
inary
ry op
opera
eratio
tions,
ns, the rem
remova
ovall of the clu
clutch
tch sha
shaft
ft rings.
and the mini reduction gear control shaft.
Synchronizer
1. Lo
Loose
osen
n the for
force
ce fee
feed
d lub
lubric
ricati
ation
on un
union
ion of the ge
gear-
ar- NOTE
box. It is advi
advisabl
sable
e to dism
dismount
ount the sync
synchron
hronizer
izer group
2. Remove the ring nut fixing the main shaft. working inside a box in order to avoid losing the parts
that are spring loaded.
1. Remove the two synchronized external rings.

2. Work
Working
ing as sho
shown
wn in the dia
diagra
gram,
m, car
carefu
efully
lly rem
remove
ove
the hub 2 from the grooved sleeve 1 being careful not
to lose the three balls and three pads 3 which are
spring loaded.
3. Lig
Lightl
htly
y tap
tappin
ping
g wit
with
h a ham
hamme
mer,
r, tak
take
e off as ind
indica
icated
ted
in the diagram, the main shaft keeping the gearwheel
and the synchronizer with the spacers. 1 - Grooved sleeve
2 - Toothed hub
3 - Pad
Gearbox counter shaft
1. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e te
ten
n sc
scre
rews
ws fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e fl
flan
ange
ge 1 to th
the
e bo
box
x
and remove.
4.
If necessary
pieces (refer to:take the gear synchronizer I and Il to
Synchronizer).
5. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, to rem
remove
ove theexter
theexterna
nall tra
tracks
cks of theta-
pered
per ed be
beari
aring
ngs,
s, usi
using
ng a ha
hamme
mmerr and pun
punchch lig
lightl
htly
y tap
the tracks from the inside of the gearbox towards the
outside. 1 - Epicyclic reduction gear crown wheel fixing flange
39

GEARBOX
2. Extra
Extract
ct the reta
retainer
iner 2 fr
from
om in
insi
side
de th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt th
then
en lo
loo-
o- 2. Takeoff as indi
indicate
cated
d in the diag
diagram,
ram, the reversal
sen the ring nut 1 fixing the main shaft. shaft, holding the gearwheel pack.
FOR 110
Clutch shaft
To remove the clutch shaft you only need to remove
the fork coupling and the mini reduction gear.
1. Lo
Loose
osen
n thefour scr
screwsfixin
ewsfixing
g theflang
theflanged
ed sle
sleeve
eve 1.
1 - Ring nut
2 - Retainer
3. Tak
Take
e off
off,, as sho
shown
wn in the dia
diagra
gram,
m, the cou
counte
ntersh
rshaft
aft
keeping
keepin g the ge
gearw
arwhe
heel
el pa
pack
ck wit
with
h the rel
relati
ative
ve syn
synchr
chro-
o-
nizer and spacers.
4. If necessary, remove the tapered bearing external
ring working as described for the main shaft.
1 - Clutch shaft flanged sleeve
Reversal shaft 2. Using light taps with a hammer, take off the main
shaft from the clutch as shown in the diagram.
The dismounting of the reversal shaft is possible wi-
thout first having to remove the other gear.
1. Loosen the screw fixing the reversal shaft to the

gearbox.
3. Take off the synchronizer ring 1 and the shim ad-
justment rings 2 from the clutch main shaft, measuring
the total thickness to be able to use as an indication
when remounting
remounting..
40

GEARBOX
1 - Synchronizer ring 1 - Seeger ring

2 - Shim adjusting rings 2 - Gear wheel
4. If 2. Remove the Seeger ring 1 that blocks the bearing

(2)
you have to remove the synchronizer complete
with
with the fol
follow
lowing
ing whe
wheel,
el, you will ha
haveve to paparti
rtiall
allyy (3) Tap on the shaft 3 to loosen the bearing 2 of the
move back the gearbox main shaft, which is only pos- flanged sleeve 6 and take off together with the shaft
sible
sible if you sep
separa
arate
te the two ge
gearb
arboxe
oxess (re
(refer
fer to: Pre
Preli-
li- and bearing.
minary Operations). It is now possible to take off the (4) Take off the bearing 2 from the shaft.
synchronizer 1 the seco
second
nd synch
synchroni
ronized
zed ring 2 gearw- (5) Rem
Remove
ove the she
shellll 5 pl
plac
aced
ed on th
the
e in
insi
side
de of th
the
e fl
flan
an--
heel 3 and bush 4 frfromthe
omthe ve
very
ry en
end
d of th
the
e ma
main
in sh
shaf
aft.
t. ged sleeve 6 .
1 - Synchronizer
3 - Mini reduction
reduction gear outlet gear
4 - Bush
5.
fla If
flange nece
ne
nge,,cess
orssar
ary,
y, re
remo
theflange
theflang move ve
e int the
th
intern e be
ernal
al bear
arin
ll,ing
shell,
she g wh
whic
worki
wo ich
nghas
rking is le
left
ftlows
in th
follow
fol the
se 1 - Inter
Internal
nal Seeger ring
(1) Block the flange into a vice with protective teeth 2 - Bearing
and remove the Seeger ring 1 that blocks the gear 2 2 3 - Seeger ring
and remove the gear wheel. 4 - Main shaft
5 - Shell
6 - Flanged sleeve
41

GEARBOX
Synchronizer 3. Remove the Seeger rings 1 and 2 and completely

remove the cover collecting the gear wheel 3 .
If necessary, dismount the synchronizer group using
the following procedure:
(1) Remove the two compression rings 1 .
(2) Take out the hub 2 of the toothed sleeve 3 .
(3) Collect the three pads 4 .
1 - Compression ring 1 - Seeger ring

2 - Toothed hub 2 - Seeger ring
3 - Toothe
Toothed
d sleeve 3 - Gear wheel
4 - Pad 4 - Gear wheel
5 - Seeger ring
Mini reduction gear counter shaft
To dismount the counter shaft of the mini reduction 4. If
necessary, change the bearing found on the in-
gear, it is necessary to remove the shaft from the side of the cover as follows:
clutch but it isn’t necessary to separate the two gear- (1) Remove the Seeger ring 1 inside the cover 2 2 .
boxes. (2) Block the shaft 3 in a vice with protective teeth.
1. Loosen the four screws fixing the cover 1
1 from the
clutch side.
1 - Mini reduction gear secondary shaft cover
1 - Seeger ring
2. Partially take off
the cover, remove the Seeger ring 2 - Cover
5 and take off the gearwheel 4 . 3 - Shaft
42

GEARBOX
(3) Tap on the edge of the cover until you take out the
bearing 2 of the shaft 3 and take out the bearing 2 .
(4) Remove the Seeger ring 1 on the shaft 3 and take
out the bearing 2 .
Spacer section
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Spacer
3 - Outer
4 Shoulder
ringring
and rollers
5 - Inner ring
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Bearing 4. If ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y ta
take
ke th
the
e II
IIII an
and
d IV ge
gear
ar sy
sync
nchr
hron
oniz
izer
er to
3 - Shaft pieces (refer to: Synchronizer - Dismounting).

5. If necessary, collect the roller crown nut inserted in To remove the gearbox counter shaft, you must re-
the gearbox counter shaft. move the clutch shaft and the main shaft and counter
shaft of the mini reduction gear.
1. Lo
Loose
osen
n the ten flange
flange scr
screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the cro
crown
wn
wheel to the epicyclic reduction gear.
2. Tak
Take
e of
offf th
the
e Se
Seeg
eger
er ri
ring
ng 1 mo
moun
unte
ted
d on th
thee ti
tip
p of th
the
e
shaft, protruding into the space of the mini reduction
Gearbox main shaft gear and collect the shim adjustment rings 2 and the
To remove the gearbox main shaft it is necessary to shoulder ring.
carry out all the preliminary operations and the remo- 3. Take off, as indicated in the figure, the counter
val of the clutch shaft. shaft, keeping aside the relative gear wheel pack with
the spacers and synchronizer.
1. Loosen the ring nut fixing the main shaft as explai-

ned for models 130 and 150
2. With the help of light taps with a hammer and wor-
king
king as exexpl
plai
aine
ned d fo
forr mo
mode
dels
ls 13
130
0 an
and
d 15
150,
0, ta
take
ke ofofff th
the
e
main
ma in sh
shaf
aftt to
towa
wardrdss th
thee sp
spac
ace
e of th
the
e ma
main
in sh
shaf
aftt mi
mini
ni re
re--
duction gear keeping hold of the gear pack.
3. If necessary, remove the main shaft front bearing,
still mounted on the shaft working as follows.
(1) Extract the Seeger ring 1 that fixes the bearing on
the shaft.
(2
(2)) Ta
ring Take
ke of
with off
f th
the
e sp
rollers spacacer
ers
4 and 2 thethe
sfinally should
shoulder
er rin
inner ring 3 .the out
g 5 outer
er
1 - Seeger ring
43

GEARBOX
4. Ifnecessary, remove the rear bearing 1 and the

shaft 2 by pushing the flange 4 and taking off the bea-
ring 1 from the shaft 2. Finally remove the compres-
sion ring 3 from the bearing outer ring.
Reversal shaft
It is possible to remove the reversal shaft without the
1 - Rear bearing
other gears and without separating the gearbox from
2 - Gearbox counter shaft
the engine. You only need to separate the gearboxes 3 - Compression ring
(refer to: Preliminary Operations). 4 - Epicyclic reduction gear toothed flange
1 - Seeger ring 6 - Retainer

2 - Gear wheel 7 - Reverse gearshaft
3 - Toothed sleeve 8 - Bearing
4 - Coupling roll
lle
er 9 - Seeger ring
5 - Gearwheel
1. Loosen the ten screws fixing the toothed flange 1

and tu
and turn
rn it so as to br
brin
ing
g th
the
e mi
mill
llin
ing
g in
into
to li
line
ne wi
with
th th
the
e re
re--
versal bearing of the shaft 2 .
1 - Toothed flange
2 - Reversal shaft bearing
44

GEARBOX
2. Ta
Take
ke of
offf th
the
e Se
Seeg
eger
er ri
ring
ng th
that
at bl
bloc
ock
k th
the
e re
reve
vers
rse
e ge
gear
ar
wheel, placed in the area of the mini reduction gear
and take off the gear wheels 1 .
1 - Seeger ring
5. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, rem
remove
ove the See
Seege
gerr ring 1 andtake the
ring
1 - Reverse gear wheel rear bearing to pieces.
3. Pa
Part
rtia
iall
lly
y ta
take
ke ou
outt th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt by ta
tapp
ppin
ing
g on th
the
e fr
fron
ontt ti
tip
p
until it comes out as shown in the diagram.
1 - Seeger ring
6. If
necessary, remove the front bearing outer track
from the internal wall of the gearbox by tapping with a
soft metal hammer and punch.
4. Remove the second Seeger ring 1 and completely
take out the shaft collecting the parts.
45

GEARBOX
GEARBOX
GEARBOX WITH SUPER REDUCTION
REDUCTION GEAR AND REVER
REVERSAL
SAL (For 130 - 150)
1 - Flanged sleeve 12 - Gearbox main shaft 23 - Seeger ring

2 - Seal ring 13 - Spacer 24 - Gear wheel
3 - Seeger ring 14 - Toothed hub 25 - Seeger ring
4 - Seeger ring 15 - Coupling collar 26 - Seeger ring
5 - Shims 16 - Bush 27 - Internal bearing ring
6 - Ball bearing 17 - Gear wheel 28 - Retainer
7 - Support link (Seal ring) 18 - Gear wheel 29 - Shoulder ring
8 - Bush 19 - Retainer 30 - Seeger ring
9 - Clutch shaft 20 - Shoulder ring 31 - O-ring
10 - Retainer 21 - Super reduction gear counter shaft 32 - Counter shaft cover
11 - Seeger ring 22 - Reversal gear coupling sleeve
Clutch shaft
The re
The remo
movavall of th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch sh
shaf
aftt fo
foll
llow
ows
s th
the
e sa
same
me pr
proc
oced
edur
ure
e as gi
give
ven
n in “C
“Clu
lutc
tch
h Sh
Shaf
aft”
t” fo
forr mo
mode
dels
ls 13
130
0 an
and
d 15
150
0 be
bein
ing
g
careful not to remove the counter shaft of the super reduction gear because it is very easy to take out the shaft wi-
thout int
thout interf
erferr
erring
ing wit
withh the ge
gear
ar whe
wheels
els un
under
der it. It is no
nott nec
necess
essary
ary to pro
procee
ceed d wit
with
h the sep
separa
aratio
tion
n of the ge
gearb
arbox
ox and
the removal of the rods and forks.
1. Us
Usin
ing
g a ha
hammmmerer an
andd pu
punc
nchh ta
take
ke ou
outt th
the
e lo
lock
ck pi
pinn fi
fixin
xing
g th
the
e co
coup
upliling
ng fo
forks
rks,, th
the
e su
supe
perr re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n ge
gear
ar an
and
d th
the
e re ve
vers
rsaI
aI..
2. With reference to the enlarged diagram above removethe sleeve 1 together with the clutch shaft 9 as shown in
step
stepss 1. an
and d 2. of th
the
e ge
geararbo
box
x wi
with
th mi
mini
ni re
redu
duct
ctio
ionn ge
gear
ar an
andd re
reve
vers
rsal al fo
forr mo
mode
dels
ls 13
1300 an
and
d 15
150 0 “C
“Clu
lutc
tch
h Sh
Shaf
aftt an
and
d Mi
Mini
ni
Reduction Shaft”.
46

GEARBOX
3. 3.lf necessary, remove the bearing 6 opening the 4. I

Iff necessary, extract the retainer 19
19 from the inside
Seeger ring 3 andtakin
Seeger andtaking g thebeari
thebearing ng fro
from
m theshaft 9. of the gearbox counter shaft.
4. If necessary, remove the retainer 10 opening the
Seeger
Seeg er ring 11 ta
takikingit
ngit ou
outt fr
fromit’sseaton
omit’sseaton th thee sh
shaf
aftt 9.
5. If necessary, extract the holding ring 2 from the in- Gearbox main shaft
side
sid e of thesleev
thesleeve e 1 aft
after
er ha
havin
ving
g tak
taken
en off theshaft 9.
6. If necessary, remove parts 13,14, 16, 17 and 18; in Dismou
Dism ount
nt th
the
e ge
gear
arbo
box
x ma
main
in sh
shaf
aftt wo
work
rkin
ing
g as gi
give
ven
n in
in::
whic
wh ichh ca
case
se it wi
will
ll be ne
nece
cessssar
ary
y to pr
proc
ocee
eedd wi
with
th th
the
e se
se-- Gearbox with mini reduction gear and reversal 130
paration of the gearbox (refer to: Preliminary Opera- and 150. Gearbox main shaft, taking note that it is not
tions). necessary to first remove the super reduction counter
shaft.
Super reduction gear counter shaft Gearbox counter shaft

1. Loo
Loose
sen
n th
the
e fo
four
ur sc
scre
rews
ws fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e li
lid
d 32 to th
the
e ge
gear
ar-- Dismount the gearbox counter shaft working as given
box. in:: Ge
in Gear
arbo
box
x wi
with
th mi
mini
ni re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n ge
gear
ar an
and
d re
reve
vers
rsal
al 13
130
0
2. Op
Open en the See
Seegegerr rin
ring
g 23 an
and
d ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e li
lid
d wi
with
th th
the
e - 150 Gearbox counter shaft.
gearbox
gea rbox shaf
shaftt colle
collecting
cting the shou
shoulder
lder ring 20 the
sleeve 22 and the gear wheel 24 .
3. If necessary, remove the bearing 28 opening the
Reversal shaft
Seeger ring 26 and take out the shaft with bearing Dismount
Dismou nt the rev
revers
ersal
al sha
shaft
ft wor
workin
king
g as giv
given
en in: Ge
Gear-
ar-
from the cover 32 32 then open the Seeger ring 25 and box
box wit
with
h min
minii red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gear
ar an
and
d rev
revers
ersal
al 130 an
andd 15
150
0
take out the bearing.
- Reversal Shaft.
1 - Flanged sleeve
2 - Shims
3 - O-ring
4 - Seal ring
5 - Seeger ring
6 - Bearing
7 - Seeger ring
8 - Seal ring
9 - Bush
10 - Super reduction gear
outlet gear wheel
11 - Seeger ring
entry gear wheel
13 - Clutch shaft
14 - Retainer
control counter shaft
16 - Seeger ring.
conduit gear wheel
conductor gear wheel
19 - Seeger ring
20 - Seeger ring
21 - Bearing
22 - Seeger ring
23 - O-ring
counter shaft cover
47

GEARBOX
Clutch shaft
T o re
remo
move
ve th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch sh
shaf
aftt it is no
nott ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y to ca
carr
rry
y
out the separation of either the gearbox or the dis-
mounting of the rods and forks.
1. Using a hammer and punch remove the lock pin of

the fork 1 .
1 - Cover
2. Open the Seeger ring 1 and 2 and run them to-

wards the centre of shaft 5 then move gearwheel 3
and remove the Seeger ring 4 . Take off gearwheel 3
and the Seeger ring 1 and 2 then extract the shaft 5
collecting the gearwheel 6 .
1 - Super reduction gear coupling fork
2. Remove the super reduction gear main shaft. Use

the fol
follow
lowingproce
ingprocedu dure
re giv
given
en in
in:: Ge
Gearb
arbox
ox wit
with
h mi
mini
ni re-
ductio
duc tion
n 11
110
0 Min
Minii red
reduct
uction
ion ge
gear
ar ma
main
in sha
shaft
ft ste
steps
ps fro
from
m
1. to 3.
3. Referring to the enlarged diagram on page 29 the
Seeger ring 11 and take out the gear wheel 12. Open
the Seeger ring 7 and take out shaft 13 with the bea-
ring 6 mounted in the sleeve 1 .
4. If necessary, remove the bearing 6 of the shaft 13
open
ope n the See
Seege
gerr rin
ring
g 5 an
and
d ta
take
ke ou
outt th
the
e be
bear
arin
ing
g of th
the
e
shaft.
NOTE
To remove gearwheel 10 which bears the coupling
hook it is necessary to remove the super reduction
gear countershaft or the clutch shah. 1 - Seeger ring
2 - Seeger ring
3 - Gear wheel
4 - Seeger ring
5 - Super reduction gear counter shaft
5 Super reduction gear counter shaft
6 - Gear wheel
Super reduction gear counter shaft

3. Ta
Take
ke of
offf th
the
e ma
main
in ge
gear
ar wh
whee
eell 1 wit
with
h it’
it’s
s sle
sleeve
eve,, fro
from
m
1. Loosen the four screws fixing the cover 1 and the the tip of the gearbox main shaft 2 .
clutch side.
48

GEARBOX
Reversal shaft
Dismount
Dismou nt the rev
revers
ersal
al sha
shaft
ft wor
workin
king
g as giv
given
en in: Ge
Gear-
ar-
box with Mini Reduction Gear and Reversal 110 Re-
versal Shaft.
STANDARD GEARBOX
Gearbox main shaft

1. Ref
Referr
erring
ing to the rel
relati
ative
ve dia
diagra
gram,
m, rem
removethe
ovethe fla
flang
nge
e
1 loosening the four screws 2 .
2. Loosen the ring nut 17 and remove it.
3. Ta
Tap
p wi
with
th a so
soft
ft memetatall ha
hamm
mmer er on th
the
e ba
back
ck ti
tip
p of th
the
e
main shaf
shaftt 5 un
unti
till it co
come
mes s of
off.
f. Re
Reco
cove
verr th
the
e ge
gear
ar wh
whee
eell
pack,, the sync
pack synchron
hronizer izer 13 an
and d thespace
thespacers rs 10 and 15.
1 - Gear wheel Gearbox coun

Gearbox countersh
tershaft
aft and reve
reverse
rse gear
2 - Gearbox main shaft shaft
1. Loosen the ring nut 34 until you can remove it and
then take out the gear wheel 33 .
2. Tapping with a soft metal hammer, take off the
WARNING countershaft 21 , and collect the gearwheel pack, the
The proc
procedur
eduree pre
previou
viously
sly desc
describe
ribedd is extr
extreme
eme-- synchronizer 29 29 and the spacers 25 and 31 .
ly diffic
difficult
ult beca
because
use of the rest
restricte
rictedd work
working
ing 3. Loosen the fixing screws 23 of the flange 19, re-
area.
area. It is the
there
refor
fore
e adv
advisa
isable
ble to se
sepa
parat
ratee the two move and turn the flange, then remove the Seeger
gearboxes (refer to: Preliminary Operations) to ring 39 and take off the gear wheel 40 . Then tapping
allow the gearbox main shaft to be moved back- with
wi th a so
softft me
metatall ha
hamm
mmerer on th thee fr
fron
ontt ti
tip
p of th
the
e re
reve
vers
rse
e
wards, if you also need to work on the main gears
ge arshaf
haft,
t, tak
takee it off col
collec
lectin
ting g thegear an and
d col
collar
lar 43
43.
shaft
sh aft,, co
compl
mplete
etely
ly rem
remove
ove it lea
leavin
ving
g the disdis-- 4. If necessary, collect the support link 4 inside the
mounting of the countershaft until last. sleeve 1 .
5. If ne
neces
cessarsary,
y, ext
extrac
ractt fro
from
m the ge gearb
arboxox the be
beari
aring
ng 8
by tatapp
ppin
ingg wi
with
th a so soft
ft me
metatall ha
hamm
mmer er an
and d pu
punc
nchh on th
the
e
outer ring.
4. If necessary, remove the bearing found
found inside the 6. If necessary, extract the outer ring of bearing 32 by
co
covever
reduct
red r as
iongi
uction give
ven
n
arinan
gear
ge step
st
andeprev
d 5. of
revers sect
se ctio
ersal”
al” ion
n “G
110“Gea
-earb
rbox
ox
Mini
Min with
wi
i redth
reductmini
mi ni
uction
ion tapping
7. I
on the outer
Iff necessary, ring. the synchronizer 13
dismount 13 and 29
counter shaft. (refer to: Synchronizers.
5. If
If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, rec
recove
overr the ret
retain
ainer
er tra
track
ck fou
found
nd on the 8. If necessary remove the bearing 18 taking off the
inside of the gearbox counter shaft. flange 19 by unscrewing the ten fixing nuts 23 .
NOTE
The reverse gearshaft can be removed without wor-
Gearbox main shaft king
king on th
the
e ot
othe
herr ge
gear
ars
s an
and
d wi
with
thou
outt se
sepa
para
rati
ting
ng th
the
e en
en--
gine gearbox.
Dismoun
Dismo untt the mai
main
n sha
shaft
ft wor
workin
king
g as giv
given
en in “Ge
“Gearb
arbox
ox
with
with Min
Minii Red
Reduct
uction
ion Ge
Gear
ar an
and
d Rev
Revers
ersal
al 11
110
0 - Ge
Gearb
arbox
ox
Main Shaft.
CHECKS AND CONTROLS NOTE
NOTE
Before carrying out any checks, accurately wash the
parts.
parts. In th
this
is wa
way
y yo
you
u wi
will
ll be ab
able
le to ma
make
ke a cl
clos
oser
er in
ins-
s-
Dismount the gearbox counter shaft working as given pecti
pection
on of thewear an
andd eff
effici
icien
ency
cy of thevario
thevarious
us pa
parts.
rts.
in “Gearbox” with Mini reduction gear and Reversal -
110 Gearbox counter Shaft.
49

GEARBOX
Gearwheels and grooves REMOUNTING

1. Check that the gearwheel teeth and the shaft groo-
gearwheel
ves are working on all sides. If you find gearwheels PRELIMINARY OPERATIONS
that are worn or with clipped teeth they must be chan-
ged.. Als
ged Alsoo che
check
ck tha
thatt the oth
other
er ge
gearw
arwhe
heels
els of ea
each
ch pa
pair
ir NOTE
are not damaged. —
2. Follow the same procedure for the grooved shafts. Accurately
vant and drywash
withthe gearbox with
compressed air. adequate sol-
Also verify that the teeth and grooves on the synchro- — On remounting, change all the support links, the
nize
nizerr ri
ring
ng ar
are
e fr
free
ee fr
from
om sp
spli
lits
ts,, si
sign
gns
s of ru
rubb
bbin
ingg an
and
d ex
ex-- gaskets and the O-rings.
cessive wear. Change all parts that are imperfect. — Lubricate the parts before mounting them on
their respective shafts with a film of grease.
— In order to keep the parts in position during re-
mounting it is advisable to use adequate grease.
— It is advisable to carry out the remounting with
the help of a second operator.
Bearings — Pay particular attention to the method of remoun-
ting the parts, referring to the diagram given in
1. Car
Carefu
efully
lly exa
examin
mine
e all be
beari
arings
ngs tur
turnin
ning
g the
them
m slo
slowly
wly.. the section.
If a bearing is in good working order it should not vi-
brate, make noise or stick.
2. Exa
Examin
minee the sur
surfac
faces
es of the rin
rings
gs and mo
movin
ving
g pa
parts
rts
to see if they are scratched, dented or show signs of
rubbing due to foreign matter. Change any imperfect GEA

GEARBO
parts. ANDRBOXX WIT
WITH
REVERSALH MIN
MINII RED
REDUCT
UCTlON
lON GEA
GEAR
R
For 130 - 150
Referr
Referring
ing to the tec
techn
hnica
icall dra
drawin
wing
g pro
procee
ceed
d wit
with
h the re-
mounting as follows.
Bushes
Check the wear of the main shaft and counter shaft Gearbox counter shaft
bushe
bus hes,
s, to see tha
thatt the sur
surfac
faces
es wor
workin
king
g tog
togeth
ether
er wit
with
h
the gearwheels are not scratched or show signs of 1. If pre
previo
viousl
usly
y dis
dismou
mounte
nted,
d, rem
remou
ount
nt the tap
tapere
ered
d bea
bea--
sticking. Check that the measurements of the bushes ring external rings working in the reverse order.
are within those given in “Technical Data and Pres- 2. If prev
previous
iously
ly dism
dismount
ounted,
ed, remo
remount
unt the synch
synchroni
ronizer
zer
criptions” relative to the tractor in question. (refer to: Synchronizer - Remounting).
3. Open the gearwheel pack on the workbench and
Change any parts that are not in good condition. pay particular attention to the order of remounting of
the spacer 31
31 of the lubrication bush 39 and the lubri-
cation manifold 40 .
NOTE
Syncronization device Prepare the shim pack 41 so that it is thicker than
when it was dismounted. This is in order to make the
Check that all moveable areas are free of indenta- adjustment of the bearing spring load easier.
tions, that the sleeves move freely on their respective
hubs
hub s an
andd tha
thatt the syn
syncro
croniz
nizer
er rin
rings
gs are no
nott exc
excess
essive
ive--
ly worn, by fitting them on their respective gears ma-
king certain that they are in beat and that the internal
surfaces still have the lubrication grooves. Check that
the helical spring for Mode
Models
ls 130-
130-150,
150, and the retai-
ning rings for Model 110 are not twisted. Check the
wear of the pads.
Change any parts which are not integral.
50

GEARBOX
Gearbox standard - 110

1 - Flanged sleeve
2 - Flanged sleeve fixing screw
3 - O-ring 18 - Bearing 34 - Gearbox counter shaft fixing ring nut
4 - Support link 19 - Epicyclic reduction gear toothed flange 35 - Front gearbox oil discharge plug space
5 - Gearbox main shaft 20 - Tapered pinion roller bearing 36 - Cover fixing screw
6 - Seeger ring 21 - Gearbox counter shaft 37 - Cover
7 - Shoulder ring 22 - Compression ring 38 - O-ring
8 - Bearing 23 - Screw 39 - Seeger ring
9 - 1 st gear 24 - Gearbox main shaft ring lock nut 40 - Reverse ring
10 - Spacer 25 - Gearbox main shaft 41 - Retainer
11 - 2nd gear and reverse gear 26 - 3rd gear 42 - External ring
12 - 3rd gear 27 - Rear gearbox oil discharge plug space 43 - Coupling gear with collar
13 - 3rd and 4th synchronizer 28 - 2nd gear 44 - Inserted bearing seat
29 - 1 st and 2nd gear synchronizer 45 - Bearing
14
15 -- 4th gear
Spacer 30 - 1 st gear 46 - Seeger ring
16 - Bearing 31 - Shoulder ring
17 - Main shah fixing ring nut 32 - Bearing
33 - Reverse gear
51

GEARBOX
Gearbox with mini redu

Gearbox reduction
ction and
reversal 130 - 150
1 - Clutch shaft
2 - Flanged sleeve
3 - Support link
4 - Seeger ring
5 - Flanged sleeve fixing nut
6 - Bearing
7 - Retainer
8 - Seeger ring
9 - Synchronizer
10 - Gearbox entry gear
11 - Bush
12 - Reversal gear
14 - Main shaft lubrication manifold
15 - Main shaft lubrication bush
16 - 1 st gear
17 - 1st and 2nd synchronizer
18 - 2nd gear
19 - 3rd gear
20 - Spacer
21 - 4th gear
22 - Spacer
23 - Shim package
24 -- Gearbox
25 Gearbox main
main shaft
shaft ring lock nut
27 - Gearbox countershaft
29 - Toothed flange fixing screw
30 - Epicyclic reduction gear toothed flange
31 - Spacer
32 - 4th gear
33 - 3rd and 4th synchronizer
34 - 3rd gear
35 - Bush
36 - 2nd gear
37 - Spacer
38 - 1 st gear
39 - Countershaft lubrication bush
40 - Countershaft lubrication manifold
41 - Shim package
43 - Retainer
44 - Countershaft ring lock nut
45 - Spacer
46 - Mini reduction gear manifold
47 - Mini reduction countershaft
48 - Gear
49 - Seeger ring
50 - Seeger ring
51 - Mini reduction gear cover fixing nut
52 - Roller bearings
53 - Countershaft mini reduction cover gear
54 - O-ring
55 Seeger ring
56 - Shims and gaskets
57 - Reversal shaft fixing screws
58 - Washer
59 - O-ring
60 - Shoulder ring
61 - Roller bearing
62 - Reversal gear entrance
63 - Reversal gear
65 - Reversal gear outlet
66 - Shoulder ring
67 - Oil sump
68 - Roller bearings
52

GEARBOX
4. Pa
Part
rtia
iall
lly
y fi
fitt th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt in
into
to th
the
e se
seat
at in th
the
e ge
gear
arbo
box
x an
and
d
mount on it the gear wheel parts one by one.
5. Fit the shaft completely into its seat tightening the
ring
rin g fix
fixingnut
ingnut tig
tighte
htenin
ning
g it to the pre
prescr
scribe
ibed
d tor
torqu
que.
e. Lo
Lo--
osen it then tighten it.
Tightening torque
Gearbox
Gear box seco
secondar
ndary
y sha
shaft
ft gear
gearwhee
wheell tigh
tightenin
tening
g
ring nut
46,5 ÷ 51,5 Nm
(4,75 ÷ 5,25 kgm; 34.34 to 37.96 ft lb)
1 - Synchronized rings
6. Proceed with the adjustment of the tapered rollers 2 - Grooved sleeve
(refer to: Chec
(refer Checksks and Controls-Pla
Controls-Playy Adju
Adjustmen
stmentt of 3 - Hub
4 - Spring
Gearbox Main and Counter Shaft).
5 - Ball
7. Caulk the ring nut.
6 - Ball pin
8. Block the epicyclic reduction
reduction gear flange fixing 7 - Pad
crown wheel on the gearbox by means of the ten
screws tightening them to the prescribed torque.
Gearbox main shaft

Tightening torque
1. It previously dismounted, remount the external ta-
Epicyc
Epicyclic
lic red
reduc
uctio
tion
n gea
gearr fla
flang
nge
e fix
fixing
ing cr
crow
own
n
pered bearings rings working in reverse order.
wheel on the gearbox
2. It prev
previous
iously
ly dism
dismount
ounted,
ed, remo
remount
unt the synch
synchroni
ronizer
zer
140 ÷ 154 Nm
(refer to: Synchronizer).
(14,25 ÷ 15,75 kgm; 103.03 to 113.87 ft-lb)
3. It still to be mounted, place the mini reduction gear
pack the inside of the gearbox placing the retainer 43 43
on the inside of the gearbox counter shaft.
4. Put the complete gearwheel pack on the work-
bench
be nch anand d che
check
ck the mo
moun
untin
ting
g ord
order
er of the lub
lubric
ricati
ation
on
Synchronizer bush 15 and the lubrication manifold 14 .
NOTE
It is ad
advis
visab
able
le to rem
remou
ount
nt the syn
synchr
chron
onize
izerr fro
from
m ins
inside
ide
a container in order to avoid losing the spring loaded NOTE
parts. To ma
makeke adj
adjust
ustme
ment
nt of the be
beari
aring
ng spr
sprining
g loa
loadd ea
easie
sier,
r,
prepar
pre paree the shi
shim
m pa
packa
ckage
ge 23 insu
insuee h a wa
way y th
tha
at th
the
e fi
fi--
Referring
Referr ing to the fol
follow
lowing
ing dia
diagra
gramm pro
procee
ceedd to rem
remouount
nt nall shi
na shim
m thi
thickn
ckness
ess is gre
greate
aterr tha
thann tha
thatt whe
when n dis
dismou
moun-n-
using the following procedure: ted.
1. Pos
Positi
ition
on in the spe
specia
ciall hu
hub
b sea
seats
ts the thr
three
ee gro
groups
ups of
springs 4, the ball pin 6 and the pad 7 with the help of
very thick grease to keep them in position.
2. Partly mount the grooved sleeve 2 on the hub, 5. Partially fit the shaft in the gearbox and mount the
checking that the three pads 7 are inserted under the gearwheel pack on it one by one. To help position in
sleeve. the internal bearing track 13 tap lightly with a hammer
3. With the help of a screwdriver, position a spring 4 on the shaft.
with its ball 5 in their seats on the hub, then lower the 6. Fit the shaft completely into its seat, tightening the
sleeve until it blocks the ball in place. ring
rin g fix
fixingnut
ingnut 24 andtight
andtightenen to thepresc
theprescrib
ribed
ed tor
torqu
que.
e.
4. Use the same procedure for the other two balls
being
bei ng car
carefu
efull no
nott to lo
loosethe
osethe balballs
ls alr
alrea
eady
dy in po
posit
sition
ion..
53

GEARBOX
Tightening torque 6. Fi
Find
nd an
and
d if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary,
y, ad
adju
just
st th
the
e pl
play
ay at po
poin
intt A fo
fol-
l-
Gearb
Gea rbox
ox ma
main
in sha
shaft
ft ge
gearw
arwhe
heel
el pac
pack
k rin
ring
g fix
fixingnut
ingnut lowing the procedure given in Checks and Adjust-
Adjust -
46,5 ÷ 51,5 - Nm ments - Clutch Shaft Play Adjustment - Gearbox with
(4,75 ÷ 5,25 - kgm; 34.34 to 37.96 ft lb) Mini reduction Gear and Reversal 130 and 150.
7. Proceed with the adjustment of the roller bearing

(refer to: Checks and Adjustments - Adjustment of
Main and Secondary Shaft Bearings).
Clutch shaft
Place the mini reduction gear gearwheels with the
spacers in the correct sequence, turned the correct
way, into the gearbox, referring to the diagram on 1 - Shims 2 - Flanged sleeve
page 34.
1. If previously dismounted, remount the ball bearing 7. Ver

Verify
ify the eff
effici
icien
ency
cy of the adj
adjust
ustme
ment
nt che
checki
cking
ng tha
thatt
6 on th
thee cl
clut
utch
ch sh
shaf
aft,
t, th
the
e re
reta
tain
iner
er 7 on ththe
e in
insi
side
de of th
the
e theshaft tur
turns
ns ind
indep
epend
enden
ently
tly to tha
thatt of themain sha
shaft.
ft.
clutch shaft and the tapered bearing on the counters-
haft working in the reverse order.
2. Mount the clutch shaft, with the help of light taps Mini reduction gear countershaft
with a hammer to help the bearing Iie correctly.
3. Mount the new support link 3 on the inside of the With re
With refe
fere
renc
nce e to th
the
e fi
figu
gurere on pa
pagege 34 pr proc
ocee
eed
d as fo
fol-
l-
shaft flan
flanged
ged slee
sleeve
ve supp
support
ort 2 and lubr
lubricate
icate with lows:
grease. 1. Mount a new O-ring 55 on the cover 53. 53.
4. Mount the flanged sleeve 2 on the shaft checking 2. Partially fit the mini reduction gear of the counters-
that the hold on it is turned towards the bottom. haft 47 in its seat on the gearbox and mount on it, one
by one, the parts of the gearwheel pack.
3. Mount the new washers with the rubber lip on the
stud
studs s to en
ensu
sure
re a go
good
od oi
oill se
seal
al,, th
then
en fi
fitt th
thee fo
four
ur nu
nuts
ts 51
and tighten them to the prescribed torque.
Tightening torque
Nuts fixing mini reduction gear countershaft co-
ver to gearbox
Refer to: GENERAL

Nut tightening methods
Reversal shaft
1. Place the gearwheel pack in the box without ente-
ring the shouldering 60. Check that the new O-ring 59
is correctly placed.
2. Inse
Insert
rt the shou
shoulder
ldering
ing 60 an
and
d fi
fitt th
the
e sh
shaf aftt 62 int
into
o its
seat.
sea t. Che
Checkck tha
thatt thesump 67 of th
the
e shshaf
aftt is ina ve
vert
rtic
ical
al
5. Position the shim package 56 on the sleeve 2 tur- position.
ning it correctly, referring to the figure on page 46. 3. Fix the shaft 63 to the gearbox with its screws 57
Then
Th en mo
moununtt th
the
e ne
new
w wa
wash
sher
er wi
with
th th
the
e ru
rubb
bber
er li
lip
p on th
the
e and block it to the prescribed torque.
studs so as to ensure a good oil seal, then tighten the
nuts 5 to the prescribed torque. Tightening torque
Screw fixing reversal shaft to the gearbox
Tightening torque Refer to: GENERAL
Screws fixing flanged sleeve to gearbox Nut tightening methods
Refer to: GENERAL 4. Having mounted the reversal shaft, check that it
Nuts screws tightening torque turns freely, without sticking on the bearings.
54

GEARBOX
Gearbox
Gearbo x wit
with
h min
minii red
reduct
uction
ion gea
gearr and
reversal
for 110
1 - Clutch shaft
2 - Flanged sleeve
3 - Support link
4 - Flanged sleeve fixing screw
5 - O-ring
6 - Ball bearing
7 - Seeger ring
8 - Mini reduction entry gear
9 - Seeger ring
10 - Synchronizer
11 - Gearbox entry gear
12 - Bush
30 - Gear IV 48 - Ball bearing
13 - Roller bearing
31 - Spacer 49 - Inserted bearing seat
14 - Gear I
32 - Bush 50 - Reversal shaft
15 - Spacer
33 - Gear III 51 - Roller crown
16 - Gear II and reverse gear
34 - Gear IV 52 - Reversal gear
17 - Gear III
35 - Synchronizer I and II 53 - Toothed hub
18 - Bush
36 - Gear oil drain plug 54 - Reversal coupling collar
19 - Synchronizer III and IV
37 - Gear I 55 - Seeger ring
20 - Gear IV
38 - Shoulder ring 56 - Roller bearing
21 - Shoulder ring
39 - Retainer 57 - Reversal gear
22 - Ball bearing
40 - Shim package 58 - Seeger ring
23 - Gearbox main shaft fixing ring nut
41 - Seeger ring 59 - Cover fixing screw
24 - Gearbox main shaft
42 - Mini reduction gear conduit 60 - Mini reduction gear counter shaft
25 - Epicyclic reduction gear toothed flange
26 - Tapered pinion roller bearing 43 -- Gear
44 Seeger ring 61 -- Bearing
62 Seeger ring
45 - Mini reduction gear oil drain plug 63 - Seeger ring
28 - Ball bearing
46 - Seeger ring 64 - Mini reduction gear countershaft cover
29 - Toothed flange fixing screw
47 - Seeger ring 65 - Shims
55

GEARBOX
Gearbox countershaft 2. Cover

Cover ththe
e ou
outs
tsid
ide
e of ththe
e bubush
sh wi
with
th gr
grea
ease
se
MOLYKOTE Type BR 2.
1. If previously dismounted, reposition the rear bea- 3. If previously dismounted, remount the mini reduc- reduc -
ring on the gearbox shaft. tion gear of the countershaft first.
2. If previ
previousl
ously
y dism
dismoun
ounted,
ted, remo
remount
unt the sync
synchron
hronizer
izer 4. Fit in the shaft and mount the other parts.
(refer to: Synchronizers). 5. Fit in the internal track of the front bearing then the
3. Open the compcomplete
lete gearwheel’
gearwheel’ and checcheck
k their external track with the rollers and drive them into the
exact positions. bulkhead.
4. Cove
Coverr extxter
ern
nal bush fa fac
ces wit ith
h grerea
ase
se,, 6. Fit the sho
should
ulder
er rin
ring
g tak
taking
ing car
caree to mou
mount
nt it cor
correc
rectly
tly
MOLYKOTE Type BR 2 to avoid seizing. (refer to the figure on page 37) and the spacer, then
5. Partially fit the shaft complete with flange, then close with the Seeger ring.
mount the other parts. 7. Fit the ring nut, tighten, loosen and then tighten to
6. Tig
Tighte
hten
n theflang
theflangee scr
screws
ews to thepresc
theprescrib
ribed
ed tor
torqu
que.
e. the given torque.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque Ring nu
Ring nutt fix
fixin
ing
g th
the
e ge
gear
arwh
whee
eels
ls of th
the
e ma
main
in sh
shaf
aftt of
Fixing
Fixing scre
screws
ws bloc
blocking
king the epic
epicycli
yclic
c redu
reduction
ction the gearbox
gear flange 46,5 ÷ 61,5 Nm
140 ÷ 154 Nm (1,75 ÷ 5,25 Kgm; 12.65 to 37.96 ft lb)
(14,25 ÷ 15,75 - Kgm; 103.03 to 113.87 ft lb)
— Insert the front bearing into the mini reduction

gear space and drive it into its seat. Mini reduction gear and countershaft
— Slip in the shoulder ring and the shim package.
— Close with the Seeger ring. 1. If previously removed, re-insert the roller crown 2
— Carry out the play adjustment of the countershaft on the inside of the gearbox counter shaft 1 .
of the gearbox (refer to: Checks and Adjustments 2. If pre
previo
viousl
usly
y dis
dismou
mounte
nted,
d, rem
remoun
ountt the be
beari
aring
ng 9 on
of Main and Counter Shaft Bearings). the mini reduction gear countershaft fixing it with a
Seeger ring 10 then place it in the cover 11
11 and block
with Seeger ring 12 .
3. Fit the Seeger ring 8 on the shaft.
Synchronizer 4. Fi
Fitt th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt in th
the
e bo
box x an
and
d sl
slip
ip onthe ge
gear
arwh eell 7.
whee
5. Block the gearwheel 7 with the Seeger ring 6 .
Proceed with remounting working in reverse order. 6. Inse
Insert rt the See
Seege gerr rin
ring
g 5 an
and
d th
then
en sl
slip
ip on th
the
e ge
gear
arw-
w-
heel 4 and block it with a Seeger ring.
7. Fit the shaft fully into place being careful not to da-
mage the roller bearing retainer 2 2 fitted into the coun-
Gearbox main shaft tershaft.
1. If pre
previo
viousl
usly
y dis
dismou
mounte
nted
d rem
remoun
ountt the be
beari
aring
ng in the
rear bulkhead. This bearing is part of the final moun-
ting of the lock pin mounted on the outside track that
has to be turned towards the back as indicated in the
figure.
1 - Ge
Gear
arbo
boxx co
coun
unte
ters
rsha
haft
ft 7 - Ge
Gear
ar
2 - Roller bearing 8 - Seeger ring
3 - Seeger ring 9 - Bearing
4 - Gear 10 - Seeger ring
5 - Seeger ring 11 - Cover
6 - Seeger ring 12 - Seeger ring
56 Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy

GEARBOX
8. Mount the new rubber lipped washer to avoid oil 6. Read the play at point “G” as indicated, and if the
leaks, then fit the four screws and tighten to the given values
values are not wit
withinthose
hinthose of 0. 4 to0.6mm (0.0
0.4 (0.0157
157 to
torque. 0.0236 in) adjust the play as indicated in: Checks and
Adjustments - Clutch Shaft Play Adjustment - Gear -
Tightening torque box with Mini Reduction Gear and Reversal 110.
Screws fixing mini reduction gear countershaft
cover to gearbox
Refer to: GENERAL

Nut tightening instructions Reversal shaft
As in the dismounting; the remounting of the reversal
shaft is dependent on other remounting. We give be-
Clutch shaft low the instructions for the correct remounting.
1. If the rear bearing 2 has been removed, remount
1. Ifpreviously moved, remount the support link 2 in them on the shaft and fix with a Seeger ring 1 .
the flanged sleeve 9 . 2. If moved, insert the front retainer 3
3 in its shaft.
2. Remount the bearing 4 on the shaft fixing it with a
Seeger ring 3 .
3. Fit the shaft into the flanged sleeve taking care not
to dam
damag age
e thesupp
thesupport ort lin
link
k 2 th
thenfix
enfix wi
with
th a Se
Seeg eger
er ri
ring
ng
5.
4. Mount gear 6 6 and fixed it with Seeger ring 7 .
5. Fit
Fit theshaft wit
with h theflang
theflanged ed sle
sleeveinto
eveinto the gegearb
arboxox
correctly positioning the sleeve hole, and insert the
synchroniz
synch ronizer
er ring 8. Mo
Moun untt thenew rub
rubbe
berr lip
lippe
pedd was
was--
her to avoid oil leaks, then fit the four sleeve fixing
screws and tighten to the given torque.
Tightening torque
Screws fixing flanged sleeve to the gearbox
Refer to: GENERAL

Nut tightening instructions
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Rear bearing
3 - Rolle
Rollerr bearing
1 - Flanged sleeve
2 - Support link 3. Tur
Turn
n the pro
profil
filing
ing on the cou
counte
ntersh
rshaft
aft fla
flange
nge in suc
such
h
3 - Seeger ring a wa
way y as to in
inse
sert
rt th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt in th
thee ho
hole
le onthe re
rear
ar bu
bulk
lk--
4 - Bearing
5 - Seeger ring head of the gearbox.
6 - Gear 4. Insert the shaft being careful not to damage the
7 - Seeger ring gear 1 and the coup
coupling
ling colla
collar r 2 or therolle
therollerr be
beari
aring
ng 3.
9 - Clutch shaft
10 - Shims
Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy 57

GEARBOX
Fit the shaft home and tap on the rear bearing until it
enters its seat.
If moved insert the internal track with the front roller
bearing 1 an and d ta
tap
p wi
with
th a so
soft
ft me
meta
tall ha
hamm
mmer
er an
and
d pu
punc
nch
h
until it lies flat. Fit the gearwheel 2 into the mini reduc-
r educ-
tion gear space and fix with a Seeger ring 3 .
1 - Gear
2 - Coupling collar
3 - Roller bearing
bearing
1 - Roller bearing external track

2 - Gear
5. By way of the Seeger ring, fix the coupling collar. 3 - Seeger ring
5. Pa
Part
rtia
iall
lly
y fi
fitt th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt in
into
to th
the
e ge
gear
arbo
box
x an
and
d sl
slip
ip on th
the
e
gearwhe
gearw heel
el pa
packck on
onee by on
one.
e. To he
help
lp pos
positi
ition
on the int
inter-
er-
nal track of the rear bearing lightly tap with a hammer
on the front tip of the shaft.
SUPER
SUPER RE
REDU
DUCT
CTIO
ION
N ANDR
ANDREV
EVER
ERSA
SAL
L 6. Sl
Slip
ip th
the
e fi
fixi
xing
ng ri
ring
ng nu
nutt an
and
d ti
tigh
ghte
ten,
n, lo
loos
osen
en th
then
en ti
tigh
gh--
GEARBOX ten again to the given torque.
For 130 - 150
Gearbox countershaft
Refer to Min
Refer Minii Red
Reduct
uction
ion an
and
d Rev
Revers
ersal
al Ge
Gearb
arbox
ox - Tightening torque
Countershaft Gearbox. Ring
Rin g nu
nutt fix
fixing
ing the ge
gearw
arwhe
heel
el pa
pack
ck on the ge
gearb
arbox
ox
main shaft
385 ÷ 441 Nm
Gearbox main shaft (40 ÷ 45 - Kgm; 289.2 to 325.35 ft-lb)
1. If
still to be mounted, remount it on the inside of the
countershaft gearbox of the upper reduction, positio-
ning the retainer on the inside of the gearbox coun- 7. Proceed with the adjustment of the tapered bea-
tershaft. ring: refer to Checks and Adjustments - Play Adjust-
2. If previously dismounted, remount the external ta-
ment of Main and Counter Shaft.
pered roller bearing working in reverse order. 8. Caulk the ring nut.
3. If pre
previo
viousl
usly
y dis
dismo
mountunteded,, rem
remou
ountnt the cou
coupli
pling
ng col
col--
lar.
4. Fit parts ( 8, 10, 11 , 12 and 13 of the technical dra-
wing on page 41) of the super reduction gear onto the
main shaft, then the internal ring of the tapered roller
bearing and prepare the main shaft gearwheel pac-
kage on the workbench paying attention to the order
you mount 4 and 5 of the technical drawing on page
Enfil
En filer
er com
complè
plètem
temen
entt I’a
I’arbr
rbree et ba
battre
ttre sur le rou
roulem
lement
ent
postérieur jusuq’à I’insérer dans le siège.

GEARBOX
1 - Stud
2 - Flanged sleeve fixing nut
3 - Shims
4 - Bearing
5 - Retainer
6 - Seeger ring
7 - Clutch shaft
8 - Spacer
9 - Coupling collar
10 - Toother hub
11 - Reversal gear
12 - Bush
13 - Gearbox gear entrance
15 - Retainer
16 - Should
Shoulder
er ring
counter shaft
19 - Coupling sleeve
20 - Seeger ring
21 - Gear
22 - Seeger ring
23 - Seeger ring
counter shaft fixing nut
25 - Stud
counter shaft cover
27 - Seeger ring
28 - Bearing
29 - O-ring
30 - Flanged sleeve
31 - Support link
32 - Seeger ring
Tightening torque for nuts fixing super reduction

Super reduction gear counter shaft gear countershaft cover
1. If previously dismounted, remount the bearing 28 Refer to: GENERAL
on
after thehaving
countersh
coun aft 18 aan
tershaft
mounted andd th
new theninse
eninsert rt it.inthe co
O-ring 29 cove r 26
ver Nut tightening information
Working in reverse order.
2. If pre
previo
viousl
usly y mov
moved;
ed; ins
insert
ert the ret
retain
ainer er 15 on th the
e in
in--
Clutch shaft
side of the countershaft 14 .
1. If previously moved, insert the retainer 5 on the
3. Fit the Se
Seegeegerr rin
ring
g 22 on the sha shaft
ft and thethenn paparti
rtiall
ally
y
main shaft then block it with a Seeger ring 6 .
fitt th
fi the
e sh
shaf
aftt an
andd th
thee ge
gear
arwh
wheeeelsls 21 blo
blocki
ckingng the
them m wit
withh
2. If pre
previo
viouslusly y mo
moved
ved,, rem
remounountt the sup
suppo
port
rt lin
link
k 31 on
the SeeSeege
gerr rin
ring
g 21 the
then
n fit the sle
sleeve
eve 19 andthe sho shoul-
ul-
the inside of the flanged sleeve 30 .
der ring 16 .
3. It pre
previo
viousl
usly y dis
dismou
mountented, d, rem
remoun
ountt the be
beari
aring
ng 4 on
4. Fit the cover on its seat and change the rubber lip- lip -
the inside of the sleeve 30 working in the reverse or-
ped
pe d wa
wash
sher
er to enensu
sure
re th
that
at th
therere
e is no le
leakak.. Fi
Fitt th
the
e nu
nutsts
der,
de r, th
then
en ti
titt th
the
e ma
main
in sh
shafaftt 7 on th
thee in
insi
side
de of th
thee sl
slee
eeve
ve
24 on the studs 25 and tig tighte
htenn to the pre prescrscribe
ibed d
30 being careful not to damage the support link 31 .
torque.

GEARBOX
1 - Flanged sleeve fixing

screw
2 - Flanged sleeve
3 - support link
4 - Seeger ring
5 - O-ring
6 - Bearing
7 - Seeger ring
8 - Entry gear
9 - Clutch shaft
10 - Seeger ring
11 - Exit gear
12 - Seeger ring
13 - Should
Shoulder
er ring
14 - Internal ring (I part)
15 - External bearing ring
16 - Internal ring (Il part)
18 Gearbox countershaft
19 - Retainer
20 - Should
Shoulderer ring
21 - Bearing
22 - Shims
23 - Seeger ring
24 - Seeger ring
25 - Conduit and reversal
gear
26 - Seeger ring
27 - Seeger ring
28 - Conduit gear
29 - Seeger ring
countershaft cover
fixing screw
31 - Seeger ring.
32 - Su per reduction gear
countershaft
33 - Seeger ring
34 - Bearing
countershaft cover
36 - O-ring
Tightening torque for nuts fixing flanged screws

4. Insert the sleeve 30 into its seat with the shims 3
Refer to: GENERAL
properly
Checks and alternated and adequately
Adjustments shimed of
- Play Adjustment (refer to:
Clutch Method of fixing nuts
Shaft
Sha ft - Sup
Super
er Red
Reduct
uctionGear
ionGear an
andd Re
Rever
versal
sal - Gea
Gearborboxx
130
130 an
and d 15
150)
0).. Ch
Chan
ange
ge th
the
e ru
rubb
bber
er li
lipp
pped
ed wa
washsherer in or
or-- REVERSAL SHAFT
der to ensure no oil leaks then tighten the nuts to the
prescribed torque. Refer to: Mini reduction Gear and Reversal 130 - 150
Reversal Shaft.
Gearbox countershaft Gearbox main shaft

Pour 110
Refer
Refer to the Min
Minii red
reduct
uction
ion and Rev
Revers
ersal
al Ge
Gearb
arbox
ox 11
110
0 Proceed working in rever
Proceed reverse
se order bein
being
g care
careful
ful to fit
Gearbox Counter Shaft. the super reduction gear 11
11 before mounting the su-
per reduction counter shaft.

GEARBOX
1. If pre
previo
viousl
usly
y mo
moved
ved,, rem
remou
ount
nt the ret
retain
ainer
er 19 on th
the
e STANDARDGEARBOX
inside of the countershaft 18 . For 110
2. If pre
previo
viousl
usly
y mo
moved
ved,, rem
remouount
nt the bea
bearin
ring
g 34 on ththe
e Gearbox countershaft
shaft fixing it with a Seeger ring 33 then fit it in the co- co-
ver 35
35 and fix with a Seeger ring 31 . Remount the gea
Remount gearbox
rbox coun
countersh
tershaft
aft worki
working
ng in rever
reverse
se
3. Mount a new O-ring 36 on the cover 35 35 . order taking care to spread the bushes 5 and 6 with
4. Mount the Seeger ring 29 on the shaft 32 partially MOLYK
MO LYKOTOTEE BR-
BR-2 2 gre
greaseso
aseso tha
thatt it do
doesn
esn’t ’t sei
seize,
ze, the
then
n
fitting the shaft into the gearbox. fitt th
fi the
e ri
ring
ng nu
nutt 1 an
and
d ti
tigh
ghte
ten,
n, lo
loos
osen
en anandd ti
tigh
ghte ten
n ag
agai
ain,
n,
5. Fit the gearwheel 11 on the main shaft of the gear- that caulk it.
box.
6. Fit the ge
gearw
arwhe heel
el 29 on the coun
countersh
tershaft
aft 32, sl
slipon
ipon Tightening torque
the Seeger rings 27; and 26 and gearwheel 25. Fix Gearbox countershaft blocking ring nut
with
wi th a Se
Seeg
eger
er ri
ring
ng 24 the
then n pu
putt See
Seege
gerr rin
rings
gs 27 and 26 46,5 ÷ 51,5 Nm
into their seats. (4,75 ÷ 5,25 Kgm; 34.34 to 37.96 ft-lb)
7. Fi
Fitt the cov
cover
er 35 int
into
o its sea
seat,
t, cha
chang
ngee the wa
washe
sherr an
andd
en
ensu
30sure
tore that
th
the at th
the
e oi
oill do
prescribed does
esn’
n’tt le
torque. leak
ak,, th
then
en ti
tigh
ghte
ten
n th
the
e sc
scre
rew
w
Gearbox main shaft
Remount the gearbox main shaft working in the re-
verse order, taking care to spread the bushes 3 and 4
Tightening torque with MOLYKOTE BR-2 grease to avoid seizing, then
Superr redu
Supe reduction
ction gear coun
counters
tershaft
haft cov
cover
er fixin
fixing
g slip on the ring nut 2 tightening, loosening then tighte-
screw ning again to the prescribed torque, then caulk.
Tightening torque
Refer to: GENERAL Main shaft blocking ring nut
Nut tightening regulations 46,5 ÷ 51,5 Nm
(4,75 ÷ 5,25 kgm; 4.34 to 37.96 ft-lb)
Clutch shaft
1. If pre
previo
viousl
usly
y mo
moved
ved,, ins
insert
ert the sea
seall ring 3 in
ring into
to th
the
e in
in--
side of the flanged sleeve 2 .
2. If pre
previo
viousl
uslyy mo
moved
ved,, rem
remoun
ountt the bea
bearin
ringg 6 on
ontoto the
clutch shaft 9 blocking, it with a Seeger ring 4 .
3. Mount a new O-ring on the sleeve 2 .
4. Slip the shaft 9 into the sleeve 2, insert the bearing
into its seat 6 and block with a Seeger ring 7 .
5. Fit the ge
gearw
arwheheel
el 8 on th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt 9 an
and
d bl
bloc
ockk it wi
with
th a 1 - Gearbox countershaft fixing ring nut
2 - Gear
Gearbox
box main shaft fixing ring nut
Seeger ring 10 .
3 - Bush
6. Fit the sha
shaft
ft int
into
o the ge
gearb
arbox;
ox; cha
chang
ngee the rub
rubbeberr lip
lip-- 4 - Bush
ped washer to ensure that there is no oil leak, then 5 - Bush
tighte
tig hten n the scr
screw
ew 1 int
into
o the sle
sleeve
eve 2 anandd ti
tigh
ghte
tenn to th
thee 6 - Bush
prescribed torque.
Reverse gear shaft
Remoun
Remountt the
thereve
reverse
rse gea
gearr sha
shaft
ft work
working
ingin
in reve
reverse
rse orde
order.
r.
Tightening torque
Flanged sleeve fixing screw FINAL OPERATIONS
Refer to: GENERAL If previously removed - remount:

1. Rods and forks.
Nut tightening regulations
2. Rejoin the two gearboxes.
3. Re-unite the gearbox and engine.
4. Remount the control lever cover.
5. Onl
Only
y for mo
mode
dels
ls 11
110
0 equ
equipp
ipped
ed wit
with
h sup
super
er red
reduct
uction
ion
Reversal shaft gear proceed with the adjustments of the reduction
gear lever run for the series (refer to: Checks and
Refer to: Mini reduction and Reversal Gearbox - Re- Adjustments).
versal Shaft. 6. Remount the rear gearbox pump cover.
7. Remount the hydraulic lifter cover.
8. Remount the drivers cabin.

GEARBOX
9. To
Top
p up th
the
e le
leve
vell of th
the
e ge
gear
arbo
box
x oi
oill po
pout
utin
ing
g th
the
e lu
lubr
bri-
i- 1. Us
Usin
ing
g a ha
hamm
mmer
er li
ligh
ghtl
tly
y ta
tap
p onthe sh
shaf
aftt to se
sett
ttle
le it
it..
cant through the special hole on the half shaft, after, 2. Mount the magnetic base support 5.9030.267.0
having removed the stick 1 . with a cente
centesima
simall comp
comparat
arator
or 5.90
5.9030.2
30.272.0
72.0 and fix the
gauge on the tip of the shaft.
3. Us
Usin
ing
g a le
leve
ver,
r, mo
moveve th
thee sh
shaf
aftt to on
onee si
side
de to st
star
artt th
the
e
CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS comparator.
4. Always using a lever, move the shaft to the other
PLAY ADJUSTMENT OF THE GEARBOX side and wait for the comparator needle to stop mo-
ving.
MAIN
MAIN AND COU
COUNTE
NTER
R SHA
SHAFT
FT BEA
BEARIN
RINGS
GS 5. Find the axial play of the shaft. If it is different from
the prescribed 0.1 mm (0.0039 in) adjust the shim
package 1 th then
en ti
tigh
ghte
ten
n th
the
e ri
ring
ng nunutt 4 to the pre
prescr
scribe
ibed d
Gearbox counter shaft torque and caulk.
For 130 - 150
1. Proceed to find the axial play of the shaft after
mounting the various parts as described below. Tightening torque

Gearbox counter shaft ring nut
395 ÷ 441 Nm
NOTE (40 ÷ 45 - Kgm; 289.2 to 325.35 ft lb)
(40 45 Kgm; 289.2 to 325.35 ft lb)
It is be
bett
tter
er to us
use
e on
one
e sh
shim
im of 0.
0.2
2 mm (0
(0.0
.007
078
8 in
in)) ra
rath
ther
er
than two of 0.1 mm (0.0039 in).
1 - Shim package
4 - Gearbox counter shaft ring nut

GEARBOX
Gearbox countershaft (version with mini-reduction gear reversal and super-reduction

gear reversal for 110)
Check, with a spessimetre inserted between the shoulder ring 2 of the bearing and the closing Seeger ring 1. that
the
the pl
play
ay is le
less
ss th
than
an 0.
0.3
3 mm (0
(0.0
.011
118
8 in
in).
). If no
nott pl
plac
ace
e so
some
me sh
shim
ims
s be
betw
twee
een
n th
the
e Se
Seeg
eger
er ri
ring
ng 1 an
and
d the sho
should
ulder
er rin
ring
g2
so as to correct the value.
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Shoulder ring
Gearbox main shaft (For 130 - 150)

1. Find axle play “G”
“ G” following the same procedure used for the counter shaft for models 130 and 150 then tighten
tighten
the ring nut 3 to the prescribed torque and calk.
Tightening torque
Gearbox main shaft ring nut
395 ÷ 441 Nm
(40 ÷ 45 - Kgm; 289.2 to 325.35 ft-lb)
1 - Shim package
3 - Ring nut

GEARBOX
PLAY
PLAY ADJ
ADJUST
USTMEN
MENT
T OF CLU
CLUTCH
TCH SHA
SHAFT
FT Keep the magnetic gasket in contact with the wall of
the gearbox and the various metal shims interposed
Gearbo
Gear boxx wi
with
th mi
mini
ni re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n an
and
d re
reve
vers
rsal
al with magnetic gaskets.
for 130 - 150 Insert
Ins ert,, aft
after
er ha
havin
ving
g cha
chang
nged
ed the rub
rubber
ber lip
lippe
ped
d was
washe her
r
6 against the sleeve 1, then tighten the nut 7 to the
Using a gauge, find out the distance “A” between the prescribed torque.
grooved hub 4 surface and the mating surface on the
gearbo
gea rbox
x and the dis
distan
tance
ce “B” be
betwe
tween
en the clu
clutch
tch sha
shaft
ft
2 surface and the compression ring 3 mounted on the Tightening torque far nut fixing flanged sleeve
bearing.
Refer to: GENERAL
The difference B - A should give a to13l value bet- Nut tightening method
ween 0.2 mm (0.0078 in) and 0.4 mm (0.0157 in).
If not modify the shim package A accordingly, paying For 110

attention that you correctly alternate the gaskets and 1. Find
the play between the synchronizer 1 and the
shims as indicated in the figure. gearwheel 2 of th
the
e mi
mini
ni re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n ge
gear
ar wi
with
th th
the
e he
help
lp of
a spessimeter, inserted as shown.
1 - Flanged sleeve
2 - Clutch shaft
4 - Toothed hub 1 - Synchronizer ring
5 - Bearing 2 - Entry gears
6 - Washer 3 - Flanged sleeve
7 - Flanged sleeve fixing nut 4 - Shim package

GEARBOX
2. If
the value is not within that of 0.4 to 0.6 mm EPICYC
EPICYCLI
LIC
C RE
REDU
DUCT
CTIO
ION
N GE
GEAR
AR WITH
WITH
(0.0
(0.015
1577 to 0.
0.02
0236
36 in
in)) wo
work
rk on th
the
e sh
shim
imss 4 fo
foun
und
d un
unde
der
r SUPER REDUCTION PLAY
the flanged sleeve 3 until you obtain the correct value ADJUSTMENT
being careful to place them in the same way as given For 110
above. Place the super-reduction gear in neutral and the re-
ducti
du ction
on gegear
ar in the“fast” po
posit
sitionthen
ionthen ad adjus
justt thescrew
Gearbox with super reduction and rever- 1 un
unti
till yo
you
u re
reac
ach h th
the
e qu
quot
ota
a of 0.3
0 .3 to 0.5 mm (0.01
0.5 (0.0118
18 to
sal 0.0196 in) from the fork 2.
For 130 - 150
Fing the “A” play existing between the toothed hub 1
and the entry gear 2 2. If you are unable to find the cor-
rect
rect va
valu
lue
e of 1.
1.3
3 to 1.7 mm ( 0.
1.7 0.05
0511
11 to 0.
0.06
0669
69 in
in)) wo
work
rk
on the shim package 3 as explained in step 2. and in
the following paragraph.
1 - Toothed hub
2 - Entry gear
3 - Shim package 1 - Super reduction gear rod run adjusting screw
2 - Speed range coupling
coupling fork

GEARBOX
REAR GEARBOX
EPICYCLIC REDUCTION GEAR
DISMOUNTING
1 - Reduction gear coupling rod 11 - Screw
2 - Cap 12 - Toothed sleeve
3 - Gasket 13 - Shouldering
4 - Spring 14 - Guide pin
5 - Rod positioning
positioning pin 15 - Crown wheel
6 - Pin 16 - Mill holder with three side pinions
7 - Coupling fork 17 - Shim adjustment
8 - Side pinion 18 - Mill holder with four side pinions
9 - Pin 19 - Shim adjustment
10 - Small roller 20 - Crown wheel flange fixing

GEARBOX
1. Separate the two gearboxes (refer to: Preliminary 4. Usinga hammer and punch remove the pin fixing
Operations). the coupling fork 1 to the rod 2 . Take out the rod, the
2. Tak
Take
e of
offf wi
with
th ca
caut
utio
ion;
n; as sh
show
own
n in th
the
e fi
figu
gure
re,, th
the
e re
re-- fork and extract the sleeve.
duction group collecting the rear shouldering.
1 - Coupling fork
2 - Reduction coupling fork
5. If necessary, remove the side pinion of the mill hol-

3. Loosen the cap 1 and take off the spring 3 and the der taking it off the pin. Recover the rollers.
pawl (or the ball) 4 using a magnet. 6. If necessary, extract the external ring 2 and the rol-
ler crown
inside wheel
of the 1 of the
gearbox front bearing,
counter shaft 3 . housed on the
1 - Roller crown wheel

1 - Cap
2 - External ring
2 - Gasket
3 - Spring
4 - Rod positioning pawl

GEARBOX
CHECKSANDCONTROLS NOTE Rollers

Examine the surface of the rollers checking that they
NOTE are not scratched, dented show signs of rubbing due
Accurately wash the parts and carefully check them to foreign matter. If necessary always change all the
for surface defects. rollers at once.
Rod and fork REMOUNTING

1. Check that the fork is not worn or deformed. Remount the epicyclic reduction gear working in re-
2. Verify that the control rod is not deformed. verse order and adhering to the following:
3. Ch
Chec
eckk th
that
at th
the
e ca
cabl
ble
e onthe co
cont
ntro
roll ro
rod
d is no
nott sp
spli
lit.
t. — Lubricate the parts with a film of prescribed
4. Verify that the rod positioning pawl is not split or grease before mounting on the shafts.
show signs of seizing. — If previously moved, remount the side pinions
maintaining in position the rollers with prescribed
grease.
— On mounting, turn the fixing pin so that the slit fa-
Gears ces the axial so as to limit the deformation of it.
— Pay particular attention to the method of moun-
1. Check that the reduction gear teeth work properly ting the parts referring to the figure on page 48.
on all edges. If you find gearwheels that are irregular
and with chipped teeth you must change them and
also check that the gearwheels with which they are
paired are in good working order. TESTING
2. Check that the teeth and grooves on the solar that
you examining are not split, show signs of seizing or After having moved the back and front gearboxes,
excessive wear. Change any elements that are not check that they work properly with the spring, roller
perfect. and
an d rod
rod,, che
checki
cking
ng tha
thatt the cou
coupli
pling
ng of thereduc
thereductio
tions
ns is
done smoothly and that the sleeves move along the
whole of the coupling run.

GEARBOX
CLUTCH P. T.O. (For 130 - 150)

DISMOUNTING
1 - P.T.O. Shaft 23 - Gear conduit 45 - Gasket
2 - Compression ring 24 - Spacer 4 6 - Ca p
3 - Pump support shaft 25 - P.T.O. main shaft 47 - Ball bearing
4
5 -- B
Sa
plal cbeeraring 2
26
7 -- S
Reee
tagie
nrerring 4
489 -- S
Seee
agl rein
r gring
6 - Positioning screw 28 - Seeger ring 50 - P.T.O. counter shaft
7 - Ball bearing 29 - Union 51 - Studs
8 - Compression ring 30 - Gasket 52 - P.T.O.
9 - P.T.O. pump 31 - Clutch pump pipe joint 53 - Washer
10 - P.T.O. middle pump shaft 32 - Pump filter 5 4 - Nu t
11 - P.T.O. clutch 33 - Breather pipe 55 - P.T.O. protection
12 - Registering bracket 34 - Spring 56 - Pin
13 - Washer 35 - Filter container 57 - Spring
14 - Screw 36 - Ring nut 58 - P.T.O. speed insertion gear control
15 - Retainer 37 - Shoulder ring 59 - Knob
16 - Seeger ring 38 - External track and retainer 60 - Compression ring
17 - Ball bearingv 39 - Internal track 61 - O-ring
18 - Bush 40 - Bush 62 - Spring
19 - Seeger ring 41 - Gear conduit 63 - Tongue
20 - Shoulder ring 42 - Grooved bush 64 - P.T.O. speed coupling lever
21 - Outside track and retainer 43 - Grooved sleeve 65 - Pad
22 - Inside track 44 - Gear conduit

BO1TE DE VITESSES
(For 110)
1 - Compression ring 19 - Seeger ring 37 - Shoulder ring
2 - Connecting shaft 20 - Shim adjustment ring 38 - Bearing
3 - Bearing 21 - Cover gasket 39 - Ring nut
4 - Spacer 22 - Cover 40 - Oil delivery pipe
5 - Blocking screw 23 - P.T.O. protection hood 41 - Union
6 - Bearing 24 - P.T.O. grooved tang 42 - Drag pipe
7 - Compression ring 25 - Reference pin 43 - Gasket
8 - P.T.O. oil pump 26 - Counter shaft 44 - Gasket
9 - P.T.O. clutch 27 - Seal ring 45 - Knob
10 - Registering plate 28 - Seeger ring 46 - Control lever
11 - Screw 29 - Bearing 47 - Key
12 - Seeger ring 30 - Flange bearing holder 48 - Pin
13 - P.T.O. front main shaft bearing 31 - Bush 49 - Seal ring
14 - P.T.O. counter shaft bearing 32 - Gearwheel 50 - Spring
15 - P.T.O. main shaft 33 - Coupling collar 51 - Transmission lever
16 - Gear wheel 34 - Grooved sleeve 52 - Coupling fork
17 - Spacer 35 - Gearwheel
18 - Rear bearing 36 - Bush

GEARBOX
WARNING
— Always use a soft metal hammer and punch
when it is necessary to tap on ferrous parts.
— During the dismounting of the gear package
mark the order of the non symmetric parts.
Preliminary operations
1. Remove the cover that mounts the hydraulic lifter

pump and the hydraulic Iifter (refer to: Lifting Group
Lifting Housing - Removal).
2. Loosen the three screws fixing the rear P.T.O. pro-
tection drive shaft to the gearbox and remove it.
3. If mounted, remove the trailer hook after having ta-
ken out the fixing pins of the gearbox.
4. Remove the P.T.O. protection unscrewing it.
5. Loosen the two screws fixing the oil collector sump
1 of the hydraulic lifter and remove it lifting it up. Re-
movethe
mo vethe sp
spri
ringfou
ngfoundon
ndon ththe
e lo
lowe
werr en
end
d of th
the
e su
sump
mp.. 1 - Rear Seeger ring
2 - Rolle
Rollerr bearing
3. Turn
the shaft 2 until the two wing nuts of the front
Seeger ring 3 do not appear in the bush space.
1 - Hydraulic lifter, hydraulic oil sump
1 - Bush
2 - P.T.O. of main shaft
P.T.O. main shaft (For 130-150) 3 - Front Seeger ring
1. Referringto the previous diagram, loosen the four

screws fixing the cover of the P.T.O. main shaft to the 4. Workingas illustrated, keep the front Seeger ring
gearbox. open with pliers and at the same time move the shaft
2. Remove the rear Seeger ring 1 positioning
positioning the backwards keeping the gearwheel 1 still.
middle bearing 2 .

GEARBOX
For 110
1. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e fo
four
ur sc
scre
rews
ws fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e co
cove
ver
r 1 an
and
d rec
reco-
o-
ver the shim adjustment rings 2 .
1 - P.T.O. gearwheel
5. Remove the shaft from the gearbox collecting the

rear Seeger ring, the internal ring of the middle bea-
ring
rin g con
consis
sistin
ting
g of two pa
parts
rts,, an
and d theP.T.O
theP.T.O.. ge
gearw
arwhe
heel.
el.
6. If necessary, remove the bearing 3 using the follo-
wing procedure. 1 - P.T.O. main shaft cover
(1) Remove the Seeger ring 2 then separate the shaft 2 - Shim adjustment ring
and bearing from the cover 4 4 .
(2) Block the shaft 1 in a vice with protective jaws and 2. Dis
Dismou
mount
nt the dif
differ
feren
entia
tiall con
contro
troll loc
lock
k wor
workin
king
g as fol
fol--
lows.
thehtSeeger
light
lig s onring
taps
tap 5, and
theinside
theinsid using
e be
beari hammer
aring
ng ring
ring untiland
until punchve
youremove
youremo give
it.
Only for model 110
(1) Remove the split pin 1 that blocks the pin 2 .
1 - P.T.O. main shaft

2 - Seeger ring
3 - Roller bearing
bearing
4 - Cover 1 - Split pin
5 - Seeger ring 2 - Control plate pin
7. If
necessary, remove the bearings still mounted in
the gearbox; working on the external rings of the bea-
rings.

BO ITE DE V ITESSES
(2) Remove the compression ring 4 of the shaft 1 .

(3) Ta
Take
ke out the shashaft,
ft, col
collec
lectin
ting
g the bus
bushh 8, th
thee sp
spri
ring
ng
7, the fork 6 , the shoulder ring 5 the spacer 3
3 and the
other spring 2 .
1 - Differential lock shaft
2 - Spring
3 - Spacer
5 - Shoulder ring
6 - Fork
7 - Spring
8 - Bush
Only for models 110
(1) Loosen the two screws fixing the shaft 7 to the 1 - Spring
2 - Fork
gearbox and remove it.
3 - Shouldering
(2)
forkLoosen
2 . the tapered screws fixing the pin 6 to the 4 - Stop pin
5 - Differential control rod lock
(3) Re
Remov
move
e the pin 6 ta
taki
kingit
ngit ou
outt be
befo
fore
re it co
come
mess co
com-
m- 6 - Pin
pletely out of the fork. 7 - Bracket
(4) Remove the pin fixing the stop ring 4 on the rod 5 . 8 - Cover
Collect the pin before it comes completely out of the
ring.
(5) Take off, towards the right; the rod 5 and remove
the sprin
spring
g 1, th
the
e fo
fork
rk 2 (be
(beingcaref
ingcarefulul of the pa
pads
ds wh
which
ich
are loose) the shouldering 3 and the stop spring 4 .
(6) Take off towards the left, the rod 5 and tap lightly 3. Open and take out the front Seeger ring 2 from the
with a hammer until you completely remove the cover middle bearing 3 in order to allow the shaft 1 to move
8. Recover the cover and extract the rod. freely.

GEARBOX
7. If
necessary, change the rear bearing 9 open the
Seeger
Seeg er ring 10 and take out the bearing from the
P.T.O. main shaft 11 .
1 - Front bearing
bearing front Seeger ring
2 - Front bearing
3 - Rear bearing
bearing front Seeger ring
4 - Middle bearing front Seeger ring
5 - Midd
Middle
le bearing
6 - P.T.O. entry gear conduit
1 - P.T.O. main shaft
7 - Spacer
2 - Front Seeger
8 - P.T.O. gear exit
3 - Middl
Middle
e bearing
9 - Rear bearing
10 - Rear bearing Seeger ring
4. Tap on the rear gear wheel teeth 1 to extract the 11 - P.T.O. main shaft
front and rear bearings from their seats.
P.T.O. clutch pump
1. Tu
Turn
rn the saf
safety
ety catch 2 do
catch downw
wnward
ards
s an
and
d un
unho
hook
ok the
clutch coupling rod 1 of the lever 3
3 .
2. Remove the split pin 5 and take out the spring 6
from the differential block coupling levers.
3. Remove the cap 4 containing the positioning pawl
of the clutch coupling lever.
1 - Rear crown wheel
5. Afte
Afterr ha
havin
ving
g pa
parti
rtiall
ally
y rem
remove
oved
d the sha
shaft
ft rem
remove
ove the
Seeger ring 1 of the front bearing 2 , take out the bea- 1 - Clutc
Clutchh coupling rod
ring and completely extract the shaft recovering the 2 - Safety clamp
gear wheel 6 and the spacer 7
7 . 3 - Clutch coupling lever
6. If necessary; work on the middle bearing 5 tapping 4 - Cap
on the outside ring until you extract it from its seat. 5 - Split pin
6 - Reactor spring

GEARBOX
4. Usinga hammer and punch take out the pin fixing 9. As il

illu
lust
stre
red,
d, gi
give
ve li
ligh
ghtt ta
taps
ps on th
the
e P.
P.T
T O. pu
pump
mp un
unti
till
the P.T.O. Shaft 1 of the control shaft 2 of the pump. you push it against the shouldering of rear gearbox.
Unblock the shaft by lightly tapping with a hammer.
1 - P.T.O
P.T.O.. shaft
2 - Pump control shaft
(Diagram VALEO Clutch 130 - 150) (Diagram: VALEO clutch 130 - 150)
10. Mov
Move
e the sha
shaft
ft bac
back
k 1 un
unti
till yo
you
u fr
free
ee th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch,, an
and
d
5. Loo
Loosen
sen the two scr
screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the pla
plate
te 1 to th
the
e ge
gear
ar-- remove it.
box and remove it.
6. ERemove the pin fixing the fork 4 to the lever 5 5 of
the clutch coupling.
7. Lo
Loose
osen
n the scr
screw
ew fix
fixing
ing the un
union
ion 2 of th
the
e oi
oill de
deli
live
ve--
ry pipe to the clutch. Disconnect the pipe from the
clutch.
8. Lo
Loose
osen
n the po
posit
sition
ioning
ing scr
screw
ew 3 of th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt be
bear
arining
g
of the P.T.O. pump.
1 - P.T.O. clutch, pump pinion shaft

(Diagram VALEO models 130 - 150)
11. Ta
Take
ke outthe pu
pump
mp an
and
d if ne
neces
cessar
sary
y rem
removethe
ovethe re-
tainer mounted on the inside of the shaft, breaking it
from the clutch shaft.
1 - Plate 12. If necessary dismount the clutch (refer to: P.T.O.
2 - Union Clutch - Clutch - Dismounting).
3 - Bearing positioning screw 13. Pl
Plac
ace
e a bo
bowl
wl un
unde
derr th
the
e di
diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al bo
box
x an
and
d lo
loos
osen
en
4 - Fork the cap 3. Remove the filter 1 of the P.T.O. pump.
5 - Clutch coupling lever
(Diagram VALEO Clutch 130 - 150)

GEARBOX
15. If necessary, dismount the pump (refer to: P.T.O.

Clutch - Clutch Pump - Dismounting).
16. If necessary remove the pump control shaft and
the bearings 2 and 4 using the following procedure.
(1) Remove the pump control shaft 1 .
(2) Fix the shaft on a vice with protective jaws and re-
move the compression ring 5 .
(3) Using a hammer and punch give light taps on the
bearing
bea ring ring 4 un
until
til you rem
removeit.
oveit. Pro
Procee
ceed
d in the sam
same
e
way for the bearing 2 .
1 - Filter
2 - Gasket
3 - Cap
14. As illustrated, give light taps on the shaft 2 unti

untill you
free the pump1. Remove the pump together with the
filter casing.
1 - P.T.O. pump control shaft
2 - Ball bearing
3 - Spacer
4 - Ball bearing
P.T.O. counter shaft

1. Lo
Loose
osen
n the fix
fixing
ing rin
ring
g nu
nutt of the P.T
P.T.O.
.O. cou
counte
ntersh
rshaft
aft
using a special spanner. Recover the ring nut and the
spacer underneath
underneath..
1 - P.T.O. pump
2 - P.T.O. pump control shaft
2. Loosen the four nuts fixing the rear flange support
of th
the
e sh
shaf
aft.
t. Wi
With
th th
the
e he
help
lp of a le
leve
ver,
r, ex
extr
trac
actt th
the
e fl
flan
ange
ge
complete with the shaft holding up the relative gear
package.

GEARBOX
4. Ifnecessary, dismount the control coupling of the

two P.T.O. speeds using the following procedure:
(1)) Re
(1 Remo
move
ve fro
from
m th the
e bo
bott
ttom
om totowa
wardrds
s th
the
e to
top;
p; th
the
e pi
pin
n7
fixing
fixing the con
contro
troll lev
lever
er 2 to the cou
coupli
pling
ng lev
lever.
er. Rem
Remove
ove
the lever 2
2, the tongue 8 underneath and, from inside
the box, the coupling lever with the relative pad.
(2)) Lo
(2 Loos
osenthe
enthe kn knob obs
s 1 of th
the
e co
cont
ntro
roll le
leve
verr an
and
d re
remo
moveve
them together with the relative spindles 4 and springs
5.
3. If necessary, take the counter shaft support flange
to pieces using the following procedure:
(1) Fix the flange 2 on a vice with protective jaws and
loos
loosen
en th
thee si
six
x fi
fixi
xing
ng sc
scre
rews
ws of th
the
e P.
P.T.
T.O.O. 6 of th
thee sh
shafaftt
1. Remove the P.T.O.
(2)) Wi
(2 With
th th
the
e he
help
lp of a ha
hamm
mmerer ex
extr
trac
actt th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt 1 of th
the
e
flange 2 .
(3) Remove the compression ring 5 with a screwdri-
ver.
(4) Remove the Seeger ring 4 and give light taps on
the external bearing ring 3 until you remove it.
1 - Knob
2 - P.T.O. speed control lever
3 - Spring
4 - Spindles
5 - Spring
6 - O-ring
7 - Pin
8 - Tongue
1 - P.T.O. counter shaft

2 - Shaft support
support flange
CHECKS AND CONTROLS
3 - Ball bearing
4 - Seeger ring Accurately wash the parts and carry out a careful
5 - Compression ring check for eventual surface defects.
6 - P.T.O.

GEARBOX
Gears and grooves

1. Check that the ‘teeth of the gearwheels and of the
groo
grooveved
d sh
shaf
afts
ts wo
work
rk on al
alll si
side
des.
s. If yo
you
u fi
find
nd ge
gear
ars
s th
that
at
are irregularly worn or with chipped teeth you must
change it, and verify that the gears they are coupled
with are not damaged. Proceed in the same way with
the grooved shafts.
2. Also check that the toothing under scrutiny is not
split, does not stick or show signs of excessive wear.
Change any parts that are no longer perfect.
Bushes
Check the wear of the bushes on the P.T.O. counter
shaft, making certain that all the surfaces of the gears
are not scratched nor show signs of sticking. Change
the parts that are no longer perfect.
Bearings
1. Carefully examine the bearings turning them slo-
wly, if a bearing is in good condition it should not vi-
brate, make noise or stick.
2. Exa
Examin
minee allrings an
and
d mov
movingpart
ingpart sur
surfac
faces,
es, mak
making
ing
certain that they are not scratched, dented, or show
signs
sign s of rubb
rubbing
ing from forei
foreign
gn bodies. Change any
parts that are no longer perfect.

GEARBOX
REMOUNTING (For 130 - 150)
3.61
1 - Reduction gear shaft 18 - Seal ring
2 - P.T.O. clutch bell 19 - P.T.O. grooved tang
3 - Distributor 20 - Stud
4 - Seeger ring 21 - P.T.O. protection tang
5 - P.T.O. front main shaft bearing 22 - P.T.O. tang fixing nut
6 - Bush 23 - Flange fixing nut
7 - Seeger ring 24 - Bearing
8 - P.T.O. main shaft 25 - Gear
9 - Seeger ring 26 - Bush
10 - Shoulder ring 27 - Coupling collar
11 - Bearing 28 - Toothed hub
12 - Gear 29 - 1000 rev gear
13 - Spacer 30 - Bearing
14 - Bearing 31 - Shoulder ring
15 - P.T.O. main shaft cover 32 - Ring nut
16 - Flange 33 - P.T.O. counter shaft
17 - Seeger ring 34 - Bush
79

GEARBOX
For 110
1 - Reduction gear shaft 18 - Seal ring

2 - P.T.O. clutch hub 19 - Reference pin
3 - P.T.O. clutch bell 20 - Tang protection
4 - Distributor 21 - Grooved tank
5 - Seeger ring 22 - Stud
6 - P.T.O. front main shaft bearing 23 - P.T.O. tang fixing nut
7 - P.T.O. main shaft 24 - Bearing
8 - Seeger ring 25 - Gearwheel
9 - P.T.O. main shaft middle ring 26 - Coupling collar
10 - Gear 27 - Toothed hub
11 - Spacer 28 - Gearwheel
12 - P.T.O. rear main shaft bearing 29 - Shoulder ring
13 - Shims 30 - Bearing
14 - P.T.O. main shaft cover 31 - P.T.O. counter shaft
15 - Seeger ring 32 - Ring nut
16 - Flange 33 - Bush
17 - Seeger ring
80

GEARBOX
REMOUNTING Tightening torque

P.T.O.. cou
P.T.O counters
ntershaft
haft gea
gearwhe
rwheel
el pack
pack,, fixin
fixing
g ring
Remountt the P.T
Remoun P.T.O.
.O. wor
workin
kingg in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order
er nut
paying
pay ing att
atten
entio
tion
n to the mo
moun
untin
ting
g ord
order
er of the no
non
n sym
sym-- 422 ÷ 441 - Nm
metrical parts referring to the previous figure and ad-ad - (43 ÷ 45 - Kgm; 310.90 to 325.35 ft lb)
hering to the following:
ADJUSTMENTS
CAUTION
— Pay attention when inserting the lock pins that Verify that play “G” between
Verify between the rear shaft of the
you don’t bend them. Use a special tool opera- P.T.O. 1 anandd thefront sha
shaft
ft 2 is wit
withi
hin
n the val
value
ues
s 0.
0.4
4 to
ting as shown in the figure. 0.8 mm (0.0157 to 0.0314 in). If it is greater or less,
add or remove shims from the package placed in “A”
under the rear cover. Adjust the position of the mani-
fold 3 (refer to: P.T.O. Clutch – Adjustments. Play ad-
justment between the manifold and the clutch body).
Check that the reading “Q” is equal to 1.8 to 2.2 mm
(0.0708 to 0.0866 in).
blunting
blunting at 45”
— On remounting, change all the seal rings, the

gaskets and the O-rings, lubricating them with
prescribed
prescribe d grease.
— Apply the prescribed fixative on all the seal
rings with metal on the outside.
— Lubricate the parts with a film of prescribed
grease before mounting them on their respec-
tive shafts.
— To make more simple the remounting use the
prescribed grease to maintain in position the
components.
— mounting
It is ad
It advi
visa
sabl
ble
e to us
use
the shafts.
e tw
two
o op
oper
erat
ator
ors
s wh
when
en
— Pay particular attention to the order when re- 1 - P.T.O. rear shaft
mounting
mount ing the par
parts
ts an
and
d ref
refer
er to the enl
enlarg
arged
ed fi- 2 - P.T.O. front shaft
gure on page 51 and 52 and to the technical 3 - Manifold
drawing.
— If dismounted, remount the coupling lever of
the two P.T.O
P.T.O.. spe
speeds,
eds, before mounting
mounting the
counter shaft.
— Block the two screws fixing the clutch positio-
ning plate with some prescribed fixative.
— Tighten the fixing ring nut of the counter shaft

GEARBOX
SHAFT P.T.O. FOR FRONT TRACTION (For 130 - 150)

DISMOUNTING
1 - Pin 16 - Return control rod 31 - Pin
2 - Return control lever 17 - Single pad 32 - Adjusting nut
3 - Spring 18 - Shoe 33 - Positioning plate
4 - Bracket 19 - Front drive coupling lever 34 - Washer
5 - Front drive control rod 20 - O-ring 35 - Pin
6 - Knob 21 - Front drive control lever 36 - Seal ring
7 - Lock pin 22 - Double pad 37 - Seeger ring
8 - Split pin 23 - Gasket 38 - Shims
9 - Seeger ring 24 - Lever cover 39 - Shaft
10 - Cover 25 - Socket head screw 40 - Sleeve
11 - Tapered roller bearing 26 - O-ring 41 - Pad
12 - Spacer 27 - Gasket 42 - Return control lever
13 - Gear wheel 28 - Parking brake control lever 43 - Gear wheel
14 - Grooved bush 29 - Oil drain plug
15 - Disc 30 - Parking brake coupling lever

GEARBOX
8. Loosen the seven screws and the two nuts fixing

CAUTION the co
the cove
verr to th
thee ge
gear
arbo
box.
x. Re
Remo
move ve ththee co
cove
verr ca
care
refu
full
lly,
y,
Alwa
Always
ys us
use
e a so
soft
ft me
meta
tall ha
hamm
mmer
er wh
when
en wo
work
rkin
ing
g on recove
rec overin
ring
g the P.T
P.T.O.
.O. pu
pump
mp fil
filter
ter,, its pro
protec
tectio
tion
n an
andd its
ferrous metals. spring.
9. Wit
With
h th
the
e he
help
lp of a sc
scre
rewd
wdri
rive
ver,
r, ta
take
ke ou
outt th
thee se
seal
al ri
ring
ng
from the front P.T.O. shaft.
1. Stopthe tractor on the flat with the gear in neutral
and place a suitable container under the differential
box to collect the oil.
2. Remove the transmission shaft (refer to: Engine
Removal
Remo val and Repl
Replacin
acing g - Preli
Prelimina
minary
ry Ope
Operatio
rations
ns
Step 2.).
3. Remove the split pin 2 and take out the pin joining
theparking
theparki ng bra
brake
ke con
contro
troll lev
lever
er 3 an
and
d therelat
therelative
ive rod
rod..
4. Remove the split pin and take out the pin connec-
ting the front

5. Loosen theinjection lever 5
cap 8 placed in
5 to
thethe relative
cover 24 ofrod.
24 the par-
king brake and wait for the oil to drain out.
6. Loosen the screw fixing the combustion by-pass
pipe support 7 to the cover and lower it.
7. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e tw
twoo sc
scre
rews
ws fi
fixi
xing
ng th
the
e P.
P.T.
T.O.
O. pu
pump
mp fi
filt
lter
er
block sensor protection 1 and remove it. Disconnect
the sensor cables.
10. Rem
Removethe
ovethe See
Seege
gerr rin
ring,
g, thespace
thespacerr an
and
d theshims
underneath the seal ring, being careful to accurately
separate the shims for their eventual remounting.
11. Loosen the screws fixing the positioning plate 2 of
the lever 1.
1. Partially extract the lever.
1 - P.T.O. pump filter blocking sensor protection

2 - Split pin 1 - Front drive injection control lever
3 - Parking brake control lever 2 - Positioning plate lever
4 - Split pin
5 - Front drive injection lever 12. Remove the P.T.O. shaft working as follows.
6 - Cover
7 - Combustion by-pass pipe
8 - Oil drain plug
Only for 110
(1) Wi
(1) With
th th
the
e he
help
lp of a le
leve
verr mo
move
ve th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt fo
forw
rwar
ards
ds un
un--
til you free the external ring of the bearing 5.

GEARBOX
(2) Remove the bearing 7 from the shaft then take out 13. If necessary, fix the shaft in a vice with protective
the sha
shaft
ft kee
keepin
ping
g the ge
gear
ar whe
wheel
el 11 the thr
three
ee dis
discs
cs 12 jaws and lightly tap with a hammer and punch on the
the toothed hub 13 and the sleeve 1 , separate. internal ring until you remove the bearing 5 from the
(1) With the help of a lever move it forwards until you shaft 6 .
free the external bearing ring. 14. To remove the external bearing ring 7 it is neces-
(2) Remove the bearing 5 from the shaft 6 then take sary to remove the Seeger ring 9 and the cover 8
out the shaft holding the gear wheel 11 with the res- found on the inside of the differential box (refer to:
pective
pecti ve bush 14 thethree dis
discs
cs 12 an
andd thesleev
thesleeve e13. Rearr Ge
Rea Gear
ar Box - Dif
Differ
feren
entia
tiall P.T
P.T.O
.O - Rem
Remova
oval)l) the
then
n re-
move the external ring.
CAUTION
Take
Take ca
care
re wh
when
en re
remo
moviving
ng th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt no
nott to da
dama
mage
ge
the tracks and the tapered bearing seats.
1
2 -- Seeger
Shell ring
3 - Shoulder ring
4 - Shims
5 - Front tapered bearing
6 - Front drive P.T.O. shaft
7 - Rear tapered bearing
8 - Cover
9 - Seeger ring
10 - Spacer
11 - Gear wheel
12 - Parking brake discs
13 - Toothed hub
14 - Front drive coupling sleeve 15 - Gear
16 - Bush

GEARBOX
15. If yo
you
u ha
have
ve to re
remo
move
ve th
the
e co
coup
upli
ling
ng le
leve
verr of th
the
e fr
fron
ontt REMOUNTING NOTE
drive, refer to the enlarged diagram on page 64 and
take
take ou
outt th
the
e pi
pin
n 31 fixi
fixing
ng the con
contro
troll lev
lever
er 21 to th
thee co
cou-
u-
pling lever 19 the
thenn rem
remove
ove the two lev
levers
ers,, col
collec
lectin
ting
g the
pad 41. NOTE
16. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, cha
chang
ngee the pa
pads
ds of the parparkin
kingg bra
brake
ke — Change the seal rings, gaskets and O-rings on
(refer to: Brakes - Parking Brake - Removal). remounting, and lubricate them with prescribed
grease.
— To make remounting easier, it is advisable to use
CHECKS AND CONTROLS NOTE sufficient grease to keep the parts in place.
— Pay particular attention to the order of mounting
NOTE the parts referring to the enlarged diagram on
Accurately clean the parts and check them for defects. page 64 and the technical drawings on page 66.
1. Referring to the enlarged figure on page 64, if pre-

Gears and grooves
viously dismounted, remount the Seeger ring 9 cover
1. Check that the gear teeth of the grooved shaft and 10 and the external ring of the tapered bearing.
2. Mou
Mount
nt the fro
front
nt dri
drive
ve cou
coupli
pling
ng lev
lever
er 21 an
andd the rel
rela-
a-
the gr
the groo
ooveved d sl
slee
eeveve wo
work
rk on al alll si
side
des.
s. If yo
you u fi
find
nd ir
irre
regu
gu--
lar or chipped teeth you must change the gear and tive control working in reverse order.
3. Rem
Remou
ountnt the sha
shaft
ft wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order
er an
andd
then check that the gear with which it is paired is not
damag
dam ageded.. Car
Carryry out thesame che checkck on theshaft gro groo-
o- adhering to the following instructions.
ves and the sleeve.
2. Ve
Veri
rify
fy th
that
at th
thee te
teet
eth
h ar
are e fr
free
ee frofrom
m sp
spli
lits
ts,, si
sign
gns s of se
sei-
i-
zing
zing or ex
exce
cess
ssivive
e we
wearar.. Ch
Chan
angege an any
y pa
partrts
s th
thatat ar
aree no
nott
perfect. With reference to the technical figure on page 66.
— Turn the grooved sleeve 14 with the blunt teeth

towards the front.
— Place the shim package 4 between the shoulder
Bearings ring 4 and the tapered roller bearing 5 so as to
Examin
Exam ine
e al
alll th
the
e su
surf
rfac
aces
es of th
the
e ri
ring
ngss an
and d ot
othe
herr tu
turn
rnin
ing
g make the Seeger ring mounting easier 2 2 .
— Check that the bearings turn freely in their seats.
part
pa rts
s to ma
make
ke cecert
rtai
ainn th
that
at th
they
ey ar
aree no
nott sc
scra
ratc
tche
hed,d, de
den-
n- — Mount the seal ring 1.
ted,
ted, shshow
ow si sign
gns
s of ru rubb
bbining
g fr
from
om fo fore
reig
ignn mamatt
tter
er..
Change any parts that are imperfect.
With reference to the technical figure on page 64.
Discs 4. Check that, by working on the lever 21 21 you have a

complete
comple te cou
coupli
pling
ng - an
andd dis
disen
engag
gaging ing of the fro
front
nt dri
drive
ve
Check
Chec k ththe
e we
wear
ar of pa
parki
rking
ng br
brak
ake
e di
disc
scss ma
makiking
ng ce
certa
rtain
in using the sleeve 40. If this does not occur, loosen the
that
that al
alll ar
area
eass wo
work
rk wi
with
th th
the
e pa
pads
ds an
andd do
don’
n’tt sh
show
ow si
sign
gnss eccentric
ecce ntric nut 32 re
regu
gula
lati
ting
ng it un
unti
till yo
youu ar
arri
rive
ve at th
the
e co
cor-
r-
of scratching or sticking. Change any that do. rect control working, then block the position using the
relative lock nut.
5. Remount the pad housing cover working in the re-
verse
ver se ord
order
er tak
takingcare
ingcare ununtil
til thediscs 15 andthe ge gears
ars
Pads 13 are alternated with the pads correctly.
Measure the thickness of pads and check that they

have no signs or irregular wear. If the thickness of the
pads
pads is le
less
ss th
than
an th
that
at gi
give
ven
n in Br
Brak
akes
es - Pa
Park
rkin
ingg Br
Brak
ake
e-
Technica
Technicall Data and Presc
Prescripti
riptions,
ons, chan
changege all of them
them..

BOI TE DE VITESSES
CROWN GEAR AND PINION

(For 130 - 150)
DISMOUNTING

BOI TE DE VITESSES
1 - Flange 73 - Shim
2 - Differential shaft adjusting shims 74 - Tapered roller bearing
3 - Tapered roller bearing 75 - Ring nut
4 - Differential half box fixing screw 76 - Roller bearing
5 - Diffe
Differentia
rentiall half box 77 - Seeger
6 - 5th wheel 78 - 5th wheel
7 - Crown wheel 79 - Block able crown wheel
8 - Seeger ring 80 - Side pinion shaft
9 - Half ring shouldering
shouldering
10 - Centering bush
11 - Side pinion
12 - Key CAUTION
13 - Differential lever control block — Always use a soft metal hammer and punch
14 - Bush when you have to tap on ferrous metal parts.
15 - Pin — During the dismounting of the gearwheel pac-
16 - Screw
kage, mark the order of mounting of non sym-
17 - Support
18 - O-ring metrical parts.
19 - Differential rod block — Two operators are necessary to carry out the
20 - Stop ring following operations
operations..
21 - Split pin
22 - Screw
23 - Washer
24 - Screw 1. Separate the two gearboxes (refer to: Preliminary
25 - Washer Operations).
26 - Washer 2. Remove the hydraulic lifting gearbox (refer to: Lif-
27 - Screw
28 - Washer
ting Group - Lifting Housing - Removal).
29 - Bracket 3. Remove the epicycle reduction gear (refer to: Epi-
30 - Nut cyclic Reduction Gear - Removal).
31 - Differential control rod lever 4. Rem
Removethe
ovethe P.T
P.T.O.
.O. (re
(refer
fer to: P.T
P.T.O.
.O. - Dis
Dismou
mounti
nting
ng).
).
32 - Nut 5. Remove the axle shaft bell support (refer to: Preli-
33 - Support minary Operations).
34 - Screw
35 - Shock absorber
36 - Washer
37 - Bush
38 - Spacer
39 - Return rod control WARNING
40 - Fork Duri
Du ring
ng th
the
e re
remo
mova
vall of th
the
e be
bell
lls
s ta
take
ke ca
care
re th
that
at th
the
e
41 - Differential control rod cover different
differential
ial box remains well balabalance
ncedd on the
42 - Crown wheel stands that are holding it up.
43 - Shouldering
44 - Fork
45 - Spring
46 - Cover 6. Remove the rod and differential blocking control
47 - Tapered screw
48 - Pin
using the following procedure.
49 - Pad (1) Loosen the screws fixing the bracket 7 to the box
50 - Differential blocking screw and remove it.
51 - O-ring (2) Lo
Loose
osen
n the tap
tapere
ered
d scr
screw
ew fix
fixingthe
ingthe pin 6 to th
thee fo
fork
rk
52 - Flange 2.
53 - Reduction shaft (3)) Re
(3 Remo
move
ve th
the
e pi
pin
n 6 be
being
ing car
carefu
efull to rem
remove
ove it bef
before
ore
54 - Oil dip stick it is completely out of the fork.
55 - Gasket
56 - Cap (4) Remove
Recover the the pin fixing
pin before the stop
it comes ring 4 to the
completely out rod 5 .
of the
57 - Grease nipple
58 - Pinion
ring.
59 - Barrel roller bearing (5)) Ta
(5 Take
ke ou
outt th
the
e ro
rod
d 5 tow
toward
ards
s the rig
right
ht ha
handnd sid
side,
e, an
andd
60 - Spacer remove
rem ove fro
fromm it the spr
spring
ing 1 an
and
d th
the
e fo
fork
rk 2 bein
being g care
careful
ful
61 - Gearwheel of the pa
pads
ds whi
which
ch are loo
loose,
se, the sho
should
ulderi
ering
ng 3 and the
62 - Seeger stop ring 4 .
63 - Spacer
64 - Key
66 - Shim
67 - Shim
68 - Support flange pinion
69 - Washer
70 - Screw
71 - Spacer
72 - Shim

GEARBOX
(6) Mo
(6) Move
ve th
the
e ro
rod
d 5 tow
toward
ards
s theleft an
and
d taplight
taplightly
ly wit
with
ha 7. Remove the differential using the following proce-
hammer until you remove the cover 8 8 . dure.
Then extract the rod. (1) Punch some marks on the tapered roller bearing
support and on the differential box in order to find the
correct position when remounting.
(2) Rem
Remove
ove the dif differ
feren
entia
tiall tap
tapere
eredd rol
roller
ler bea
bearin
ring
g
flan
flange
ge su
supp
ppor
ort,
t, if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary,
y, wi
with
th th
the
e he
help
lp of li
ligh
ghtt ta
taps
ps
with the hammer on the flange from the inside of the
differential box.
CAUTION
Remove the second flange being careful that you
hold the differential so that parts don’t fall on the
oil sump underneath.
(3) If necessary remove the external bearing rings
using the holes on the flange, and collect the shims
underne
und erneath,
ath, taking care to keep them sepa
separate
rate to
make remounting easier.
(4) Loosen the seventeen screws1 fixing the crown
wheel to the differential.
1 - Screw
1 - Spring
2 - Fork
3 - Shouldering
4 - Stop ring (5) Re
(5) Remo
move
ve th
the
e di
diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al bo
box
x fr
from
om th
the
e si
side
de,, th
then
en ex
ex--
5 - Differential control rod blocking
tract the crown wheel turning it so that it comes from
6 - Pin
7 - Bracket
the special space in the gearbox.
8 - Cover

GEARBOX
1- Seege
Seegerr ring
ring
2 - Half ring shouldering
(6) Extract the oil sump. 3 - Centering bush
8. Dismo
Dismount
unt the diffe
differenti
rential
al ado
adoptin
pting
g the foll
followin
owing
g pro-
cedure. (5) Ti
(5) Tigh
ghte
ten
n th
the
e un
unio
ion
n of th
the
e ex
extra
tract
ctor
or 5.9030.618.4/10
(1) Fix the differential in a vice fitting with protective on the centering bush 1 and extract it. Recover the
jaws and loosen the two screws
scr ews fixing the half box. key.
1 - Centering bush
(2) Wi
(2) With
th th
the
e he
help
lp of li
ligh
ghtt ta
taps
ps wi
with
th a ha
hamm
mmer
er,, di
divi
videthe
dethe
two half boxes then collect the 5th wheel and the
crown wheel.
(3) Punch some marks on the head of the side pinion (6) Proceed in the same way for the Seeger ring, the
shaf
shafts
ts an
andd on th
the
e ha
halflf bo
boxx in or
orde
derr to re
reme
memb
mber er th
the
e co
cor-
r- half rings shouldering and the centering bush moun-
rect order when remounting. ted on the other side of the shaft.
(7) Remove the shaft and the two side pinions.
NOTE: Imm
NOTE: Immedi
ediate
ately
ly rem
remoun
ountt the sid
side
e pin
pinion
ionss wit
with
h the
their
ir (8) If mounted, remove the other two side pinions in
respective 5th wheels on their shafts as soon as you the same way.
have
have dis
dismou
mounte
ntedd the
them m so tha
thatt the
they
y do
don’t
n’t get
getcon
confus
fused.
ed. (9) Remove the crown wheel and the 5th wheel.
(10) If nece
necessary
ssary to remo
remove
ve the tapered
tapered bear
bearings
ings,,
(4) Remove the Seeger ring 1 and the half ring shoul- work as indicated in the diagram.
dering 2 underneath.

GEARBOX
(2) Rem
Remove
ove the Se
Seege
egerr rin
ring
g 1 fro
from
m it
its
s se
seat
at an
and
d le
leav
ave
e it
on the pinion.
1 - Seeger ring
1 - Tapered roller bearings
2 - Differential blocking sleeve
(3) Gi
(3) Give
ve li
ligh
ghtt ta
taps
ps on th
the
e pi
pini
nion
on an
andd re
remo
moveve it fro
from
m ththe
e
9. Remove the pinion using the following procedure. back holding the parts held on it. Recover the key
(1)) Un
(1 Undo
do th
the
e ri
ring
ng nu
nutt 1 fix
fixing
ing the pin
pinion
ion 2 an
and
d lo
loos
osen
en it mounted on the pinion.
using the proper tool. (4) If necessary, remove the barrel roller bearing.
(5) If nec
necess
essary
ary,, rem
remove
ove the fla
flang
nge
e pin
pinion
ion sup
suppoport
rt loo
loo--
seni
se
it ning
ng th
the
e fo
recoveringfour
ur scre
sc
the rews
ws th
shimsthat
at fi
fix
x it to th
underneath the
e being
box
box an
and
d re
remo
move
careful ve
to
group them together, after having accurately measu-
red the thickness, in case they are used when re-
mounting.
1 - Ring nut
2 - Pinion
90

GEARBOX
Only for model 110
1 - External tie rod control 19 - Pin 40 - Flange

2 - Joining fork 20 - Spring 41 - O-ring
3
4 -- P
Win
asher 2
21
2 -- O-rvinegr
Co 4
423 -- R
Frin
ogntnpuin
t ion bearing
5 - Plate 23 - Tapered screw 44 - Bearing seat on pinion front
6 - Washer 24 - Pin 45 - Ring nut
25 - Coupling fork 46 - 4RM transmission gear and/or
26 - Pad parking brake
27 - Coupling fork 47 - Key
7 - Split pin 28 - Bush 48 - Shim adjustment ring
8 - External tie rod 29 - Spring 49 - Rear pinion bearing
9 - Plate 30 - Coupling fork 50 - 5th wheel
10 - Pin 31 - Shoulder ring 51 - Blockable crown nut
11 - Ring 32 - Compression ring 52 - 5th wheel
12 - Pin 33 - Spacer 53 - Side pinion
13 - Screw 34 - Spring 54 - Side pinion pin
14 - Washer 35 - Control shaft 55 - Ring nut
15 - Bracket 36 - Differential box 56 - Grooved crown nut
16 - Control shaft 37 - Differential blocking roller 57 - Pinion
17 - Stop ring 38 - Tapered roller bearing 58 - Compression ring
18 - Shoulder ring 39 - Shim ring
91

GEARBOX
CAUTION
— Always use a soft metal hammer and punch
when it is necessary to tap on ferrous metal
parts.
— Du
Duri
ring
ng th
the
e di
dism
smouountntin
ing
g of th
the
e ge
gear
ar wh
whee
eell pa
pack
ck
mark
ma rk th
the
e or
orde
derr of th
thee pa
part
rts
s to he
help
lp yo
youu wh
when
en re
re--
mounting them.
— Carry
Carry ou
outt the fol
follow
lowing
ing ope
operaratio
tions
ns wit
with
h the
help of a second operator.
1. Separate the two gearboxes (refer to: Preliminary

Operations).
2. Remove the hydraulic lifting box (refer to: Lifting
Group. Lifting Box. Removal).
3. Remove the epicyclic reduction gear (refer to: Epi-
cyclic Reduction Gear - Removal).
4. Remove the main shaft of the P.T.O. (refer to: P.T
.O. Dismounting).
5. Remove the bell support of the axle shaft (refer to:
Preliminary Operations).
WARNING
During the removal of the bell ensure the diffe-
rential box is well balanced on the stand which
holds it up.
6. Only for model 110
Remove the rod and the differential blocking control

fork working as follows:
(1) Loosen the two screws fixing the bracket 7 to the
box and remove it.
1 - Spring
(2) Lo
Loose
osen
n thetaper
thetapereded scr
screw
ew fix
fixingthe
ingthe pin 6 to th
the
e fo
fork
rk 2 - Fork
2. ) Re
(3
(3) Remo
move ve th
the
e pi
pin
n 6 ta
taki
king
ng ca
care
re to re
reco
cove
verr it be
befo
fore
re it 3
4 -- Stop
Shouldering
ring
actually falls out of the fork. 5 - Differential blocking control rod
(4) Remove the fork fixing the stop ring 4 to the rod 5 . 6 - Pin
Recove
Rec overr the pinbefo
pinbeforere it com
comeses com
comple
pletel
tely
y awa
away y fro
from
m 7 - Bracket
the ring. 8 - Cover
(5) Take out from the right hand side of the rod 5 and
removefrom
rem ovefrom it the sprspring
ing 1, th
thee fo
fork
rk 2 (paying attention
to the pa
pads
ds whi
which
ch are loo
loose)
se) the sho
shoul
ulder
dering
ing 3 and the
stop ring 4 .
(6) Move the rod 5 towards the left lightly tapping with Only for model 110
a hammer until you remove the cover 8 8 . Recover the
cover and extract the rod. Remove the differential blocking control rod working
as follows:
92

GEARBOX
(1) Ta
(1) Take
ke ou
outt th
the
e sp
spli litt pi
pin
n 1 th
that
at bl
bloc
ocksks th
the
e pi
pin
n th
that
at co
con-
n-
trols the bevel square 2 .
(2) Remove the blocking compression ring 3 on the
shaft 4.
(3)) Ta
(3 Take
ke th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt ou
outt frfrom
om th
the
e ri
righ
ghtt ha
hand
nd si
side
de an
and
d co
col-
l-
lect the parts.
1 - Flange
8. Extr
Ex trac
actt th
the
e di
diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al bo
box
x tu
turn
rnin
ing
g it so th
that
at it en
ente
ters
rs
the space occupied by the flange.
9. If necessary, remove the external rings complete
with the retainer, using an extractor inserted into the
special grooves of the differential box.
1 - Split pin
2 - Bevel square
4 - Shaft
7. Holding the shaft from above, take out the flange 1

and the op oppos
posite
ite fla
flange
nge by pre
pressi
ssing
ng on the dif
differ
feren
entia
tiall
box.
If the operation means that you have to change parts
that require differential or axle play adjustment, such 10. If necessary, remove the collar 1
1 coupling the dif-
as th
the
e ta
tape
pere
red
d ro
roll
ller
er be
bear
arin
ing
g of th
the
e di
diff
ffer
eren
enti
tial
al bo
box,
x, re
re-- ferential block, extract the internal track 2 of the bea-
move
mo ve fr
from
om th
the
e fl
flan
angege 1, th
the
e ex
exte
tern
rnal
al be
bear
arin
ingg ri
ring
ngs,
s, re
re-- ring then take out the collar.
covering the shims underneath being careful to keep
them grouped ready for their remounting.
93

GEARBOX
12. Remove the pinion working as follows:

(1) Open the fixing ring nut 2 of the pinion 1 found in
the space left free by the epicyclic reduction gear and
unscrew it completely.
1 - Differential block collar

2 Internal tapered roller bearing track
11. Dismount the differential working as follows.
(1) Fix the differential group on a vice with protective
jaws and then loosen the fixing screws 7 of the crown
wheel 6 to the differential box and remove.
(2)) Ex
(2 Extr
trac
actt wi
with
th a ha
hamm
mmerer an
and
d pi
pin n re
remo
move
verr th
the
e lo
lock
ck pi
pin
n
2 that blocks the side pinion pins 1 and remove it.
(3) Turn the crown wheel 3 until you bring the side pi-
nion 4 in line with the opposite opening then recover
the side pinion with the respective bronze 5th wheel.
(4) Ext
Extrac
ractt the cro
crown
wn whe
wheel
el 3 with the resp
respectiv
ective
e
1 - Pinion
bronze 5th wheel 3 . 2 - Ring nut
(2) Lo
Loose
osenn the sec
secon
ondd rin
ring
g nu
nutt 1 fou
found
nd in thespaceleft
free by the P.T.O. Clutch and that blocks the P.T.O.
gear wheel 2 of the four wheel drive tractor.
1 - Ring nut
1 - Dif
iffe
fere
rent
ntia
iall bo
box
x 5 - Bro
ronz
nze
e 5t
5thh wheheel
el 2 - P.T.O. gear wheel of the four wheel drive tractor and
2 - Lock pin 6 - Toothed crown nut of the parking brake
3 - Cr
Crow
ownn wh
wheeeell ge
gear
ar 7 - Cr
Crow
ownn nu
nutt fi
fixi
xing
ng sc
scre
rew
w
4 - Si
Side
de pi
pini
nion
on gegeaar 8 - Sid
ide
e pi
pini
nio
on pipinn
94

GEARBOX
(3) Ta
(3) Tapp ppining
g on th
the
e fr
fron
ontt en
end
d of th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt ta
take
ke ou
outt th
thee pi
pi-- — Only for models 130 and 150
nion collecting the gear wheel and the ring nut. Block the two screws fixing the half box with the
13. If it is necessary to change the external ring of the prescribed fixative after having removed the tra-
front bearing, unblock it, by tapping on the rear end of ces of the old fixative.
the bearing support flange then separate the bearing — Check that the wheels turn freely.
from it.
14. If ne
nececess
ssar
ary
y re
remo
move
ve,, us
usin
ing
g th
the
e co
corre
rrectct to
tool
ol,, th
the
e in
in-- For 130 - 150
ternal ring of the rear bearing. 2. Mount the pinion inserting the shim package found
15. If necessary, remove the external ring of the rear when dismounting and then adjust the bearing spring
bearing left in the gearbox. load
loa d (re
(refer
fer to: Pin
Pinio
ion
n Be
Beari
aring
ng Pla
Playy Adj
Adjust
ustme
ment
nt Mo
Model
delss
130 and 150).
3. Mount the differential without the crown wheel and
adjus
ad justt the pre
preloa
loadd of the dif
differ
feren
entia
tiall bea
bearin
rings
gs (re
(refer
fer to:
CHECKS AND CONTROLS Differential Bearing Preload Adjustment).
4. Adjust the position of the pinion without removing
the differential in that the bearing support flange can
Accurately wash the parts and then work as follows. be taken out in front without moving the pinion (refer
1. Verify that the moving parts of the rotating track do to: Adjustment of the Pinion Position).
not sh
not show
ow si
sign
gnss of irr
irreg
egul
ular
ar we
wear
ar,, cu
cuts
ts,, si
sign
gnss or se
seiz
izin
ing
g 5. Take out the flange and mount it on the differential
or overheating. If so change the parts. the cro
crown
wn whe
wheel
el blo
blocki
cking
ng the scr
screws
ews to the pre
prescr
scribe
ibed
d
2. Check that the tapered pinion teeth work in all si- torque.
des, if you find chipped teeth you must change the pi-
nion and the crown wheel. Also check that both parts
do no
nott ha
have
ve si
sign
gnss of se
seiz
izin
ingg an
and
d sp
spli
lits
ts,, or ar
are
e ex
exce
cess
ssi-
i- Tightening torque
vely worn. Differential crown nut fixing screws 127
127 Nm
(13 Kgm; 93.99 ft lb)
REMOUNTING
6. Adjust
the play between the toothing of the pinion
and the crown wheel (refer to: Play Adjustment Bet-
NOTE ween the Pinion Teeth and the Crown Wheel).
— Accurately wash the differential box with solvent For 110
and dry with compressed air.
2. Mount the crown wheel on the differential to the
— On remounting change all the seal rings, the
gaskets and the O-rings lubricating them with prescribed torque tightening the screws.
prescribed grease.
— Lubricate the parts before remounting with a film
of prescribed grease. Tightening torque
— In order to keep the parts in position during the Differential crown nut fixing screws 107
remounting, it is advisable to use a suitable 107 Nm
grease. (11 Kgm; 79.53 ft lb)
— It is advisable to carry out the remounting with a
second operator.
3. Adju
Adjust
st the pre
preloa
load
d of the dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial be
beari
aring
ngs
s (re
(refer
fer
— Pay particular attention to the order of remoun-
ting of the parts referring to the enlarged diagram to: Differential Bearing Preload Adjustment).
4. Remove the differential and mount the pinion, ad-
on pages 68 and 73.
justing the preload of the bearings and the position of
1. Rem
Remou
ount
nt the dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial bo
box
x wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e the pinion (refer to: Pinion Bearing Preload Adjust-
order using the following instructions: ment 110 and Pinion Position Adjustment.
5. Remount the differential and adjust the play bet-
— Mount the 5th wheel so that the grooved side fa-
ces the half box. ween the toothing of the pinion and the crown wheel
— Remount the side pinion and the relative shafts (refer to: Play Adjustment between the Pinion Teeth
checking the punch marks made during the dis- and the Crown Wheel).
6. Mou
Mountnt the brak
brakee hous
housing
ing 52 an
and
d the sup
suppo
portrt be
bells
lls of
mounting.
the
the axaxle
le sh
shaf
aftt wo
work
rkin
ing
g in th
the
e re
reve
vers
rse
e or
orde
derr to th
thee fo
foll
llo-
o-
— Only for models 130 and 150 wing instructions.
Be careful that you mount the Seeger ring fixing — Spread the internal surfaces of the flange 40 ,
the side pinion shafts so that their openings are mounted on the right side, the internal surfaces
not the same as those between the half shoulde- of the brake housing 52 and the two surfaces of
ring rings 16 . the crown wheel 50 with prescribed grease.
95

GEARBOX
Differential bearing preload adjustment

1. Mo
Mount
unt the dif
differ
feren
entia
tiall bo
box
x in the rea
rearr gea
gearbo
rbox
x ins
inser-
er-
ting the fla
ting flang
nge
e 1, the shi
shim
m pac
packag
kagee fou
found
nd on dis
dismou
moun-
n-
ting if necessary made smaller, then fix the flange
using the found nuts 3 and the respective spacers 2 .
Check that the middle disc of the brake housing
42 is properly in its seat.
— Tighten to the prescribed torque the fixing nuts of
the brake housing and the bell support of the
axle shaft.
Tightening torque
- Nut
Nuts
s fix
fixingbrak
ingbrake
e hou
housin
sing
g to thediffe
thedifferen
rentia
tiall box
130 - 150
130 - Nm (13 - Kgm; 93.99 ft lb)
110
88 - Nm (9 - Kgm; 65.07 ft lb) 1 - Flange
2 - Spacer
3 - Nut
Nuts fi
Nuts fixi
xing
ng th
the
e ax
axle
le sh
shaf
aftt su
supp
ppor
ortt be
bell
ll to th
the
e br
brak
ake
e
2. Usi
Using
ng a ham
hamme
merr tap ge
gentl
ntly
y on the dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial to be
bed
d
housing 130-150
it in.
130 - Nm
3. Mount the magnetic base 5.9030.267.0 with the
(13 - Kgm; 93.99 ft lb)
centesimal comparator 5.9030.272.0 on the differen-
tial box and place the gauge perpendicular on the
crown wheel flat.
7. Mount
the differential block control working in the
4. Using a lever move, as illustrated in the figure, the
reverse order adhering to the following instructions.
differential, totally towards the left then zero the com-
— Mount the pin 37 with the hole for the fixing
parator
screw 36 turned the correct way.
— Spread the cover 51
51 with the prescribed grease
after having mounted it.
— Check that the control works properly, if neces-
sary adjusting the rod run 31 by tightening or loo-
sening the screw 28 .
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE
When using the shim adjustments it is always preferable to
group more shims
shims in one e.g. it is better to use one shim of
0.2 mm (0.0078 in) rather than two of 0.1 mm (0.0039 in).
96

GEARBOX
5. Always using a lever move the differential package

package
to th
the
e ot
othe
herr si
side
de an
and
d wa
wait
it fo
forr th
the
e co
comp
mpar
arat
ator
or ne
need
edle
le to
stop moving.
6. Take the reading of the differential axle play and
then prepare the shim package, the size of which
should be increased by 0.1 mm (0.0039 in) with res-
pect to the value found.
7. Mo
Moun
untt the pre
prepar
pared
ed shi
shim m papacka
ckage
ge un
under
der the ext
exter-
er-
nal ring of one of the bearings inserted in the flange in
one of the positions indicated in the figure.
1 - Shim package
2 - Differential
3 - Shim package
8. Check, after having correctly adjusted, that the dif-

ferential box turns freely even though it has a slight
preload.
Pinion bearing play adjustment

For 130 - 150
1. Mo
Mount
unt the pinion
pinion woworki
rking
ng in the reverse
reverse ordorder.
er.
Mount the shim package 2 removed at the dismoun-
ting
tin g an
andd the
thenn mo
mount
unt the pin
pinion
ion or the tap
tapere
ered d be
beari
aring
ngs
s
and if than that removed.
2. Ti
Tigh
ghte
tenn th
the
e fi
fixi
xing
ng ri
ring
ng nu
nutt of th
the
e pi
pini
nion
on,, th
then
en lo
loos
osen
en 1 - Bearing preload shim adjustment package
and tighten again to the prescribed torque. 2 - Shim adjustment package for pinion position
Tightening torque
Pinion fixing ring nut (130 - 150) Pinion and bear
Pinion bearing
ing prelo
preload
ad adjus
adjustment
tment
290 ÷ 340 Nm
(30 ÷ 35 - kgm; 216.9 to 253.05 ft lb)
110
Tighten the ring nut 1 to the prescribed torque.
3. Usin
Using
g a comp
comparat
arator
or 5.90
5.9030.2
30.272.0
72.0 and the magn
magnetic
etic
base 5.9030.267.0 positioned as in the figure and le-
Tightening torque
vered as shown, take an axle play reading of the pi-
Pinion bearing preload ring nut
nion. If the reading does not enter into the value of
107 Nm
0.03 to 0.05 mm (0.0011 to 0.0020 in); correct the
(11 kgm; 79.53 ft lb)
amount until you bring it within the correct reading by
working on the shim package 1 .
97

GEARBOX
CAUTION
Pay particular attention to the fact that if you in-
crea
crease
se th
the
e sh
shim
imss fo
forr mo
mode
dels
ls 13
1300 an
and
d 15
150
0 yo
you
u al
also
so
increase the given quota, while for model 110 in-
creas
creasing
ing the sh
shims
ims the qu
quota
otass de
decre
creas
ases
es and vic
vice
e
a versa.
6. In
order to avoid repeating the operation you must
take car
take care e to cal
calcol
colate
ate the dif
differ
ferenc
ence
e be
betwe
tween
en the
amount stamped on the pinion which has been remo-
1 - Pinion tightening
tightening ring nut ved and on the new one to be mounted. This amount
adde
added,
d, or de
decre
crease
asedd fro
from
m the shi
shimm pa
packa
ckage
ge wil
willl all
allow
ow
you to find the correct amount.
Adjustment of pinion position
1. Mount the pinion positioning the shim package 1 Example of calculation No.1
— amoun
amountt stamped
stamped on
on removed
removed pinio
pinion
n qv= + 0,20
underr the fla
unde flang
nge e 4 on the bea
bearin
ring
g 3 an
and d pr
proc
ocee
eed d if ne
ne--
— amoun
amountt stam
stamped
ped on the ne
new
w pini
pinion
on qn= - 0,20
cessary, to adjust the preload of the bearings then
— difference between the two
mount the differential.
(qv - qn) = S: + 0,20
2. Take a note of the number stamped on the end of
- (- 0,20)
the pinion teeth in the position indicated in the dia-
=
gram.
+ 0,40
3. Ad
Addd or su
subtbtra
ract
ct th
this
is nu
numb
mberer as sh
show
own n fro
fromm th
thee sp
spe-
e-
S = +0.40 mm10.0157 in = thickness to be added to
cifica
cif icatio
tion
n for the mod
model el or ver
versio
sionn of tra
tracto
ctorr in qu
quest
estion
ion
the present shims
and as given in the table “Pinion” (refer to: Technical
Data and Prescriptions - Checks and Adjustments).
Example of calculation No.2
4. Th
Thee num
numbe berr ob
obtai
tainedround
nedrounded ed to the nea
neares
restt 5 cen-
— amount
amount stamstamped
ped on remo
removed
ved pini
pinion
on qv= - 0,10
tesimal, should be the same as the reading between
— amou
amount nt sta
stamp
mped
ed on the ne
new
w pin
pinion
ion qn=+ 0,30
the pinion and the rectified surface of the differential
— difference between the two
box.
(qv - qn) = S: - 0,10
5. If yo
youu ar
are
e no
nott sa
sati
tisfi
sfied
ed wi
with
th th
thee re
read
adin
ingg ta
take
ke th
thee me
mea-a-
- (+0,30)
surement
kage 1. of the “T” reading working on the shim pac- =
- 0,40
S = - 0.40 mm 10.0157 in = thickness to be removed
from the present shims
Play ad
Play adju
just
stme
ment
nt be
betw
twee
een
n th
the
e pi
pini
nion
on te
teet
eth
h
and the crown wheel
1. Afterhaving carried out the adjustment of the pre-
load of the differential bearings, the preload of the pi-
nion
nion be
beari
aring
ngs
s an
and
d the po
posit
sition
ion of the pin
pinion
ion,, mo
mount
unt the
magneti
mag netic
c base 5.90
5.9030.2
30.267.0
67.0 with the cent
centesim
esimalal com-
parator 5.9030.272.0 on the differential box placing
the test pin in contact with the teeth of the crown
wheel.
1 - Shim adjustment package for pinion position

2 - Pinion
98

GEARBOX
2. Block the pinion rotation and turn the crown wheel Checks, controls and adjustments
taking a comparator reading of the play existing bet-
ween the teeth of the pinion and the crown wheel. Proceed
Procee d to acc
accura
urateltely
y cle
clean
an the pa
parts
rts wit
withh sol
solvan
vantt an
andd
3. Check that the measurement given is between the then
the n che
checkck the mo
movabvable le sur
surfac
faces
es an
andd the too
toothi
thing
ng an
andd
values given on the table “Pinion and Crown Wheel” grooves. If you find chips, cracks, dents or excessive
for the mode in question (refer to: Technical Data and wear
we ar ch
chanange
ge th
thee pa
part rts
s th
then
en pr
proc
ocee
eed d to ad
adju
just
st th
the
e co
con-
n-
Prescriptions - Checks and Adjustments). trol working as follows:
4. If the play is more than that required remove some 1. Position on fork A adjust the position of lever B B so
shims from the pack 1 to pack 2 or vice a versa. Re- that
th at in th
the
e re
remo
movavall po
posi
siti
tion
on th
the
e ho
holele C of th
thee le
leve
ver
r B on
peat the measurement until you reach the given fi- the tie rod is at 140 ± 1 mm (5.51 ± 0.04).
gure. 2. Keeping lever B B still adjust the stop D placing the
rubber at lever B B .
3. Ad
Adjus
justt the po
posit
sitionof
ionof the pe peda
dall P sotha
sothatt ithasa su suf-
f-
ficien
ficientt run to be ab
ablele to con
connenect
ct and dis
discon
connenect
ct the dif
dif--
ferential block and that at the same time it can always
guarantee the hooking or unhooking of pedal P with
the bevel plate S .
High level gearbox
1 - Left shim package

2 - Right shim package
3 - Differential box
DIFFERENTIAL BLOCKING SYSTEM

General character
characteristics
istics
The bl
The bloc
ocki
king
ng sy
syst
stem
em of th
the
e di
diffe
ffere
rentntia
iall is ma
made
de up of a
movable sleeve, controlled by a fork, which by way of
the cou
coupli
pling
ng of its tee
teeth
th to spe
specia
ciall sea
seats
ts on theexter
theexternal
nal
side of the
one with thepinion blocks
two axle the and
shafts differential boxallows
therefore making it toit
useits str
streng
engthth on thewhee
thewheel; l; ma
makin
kingg themove
themovemenmentt of
the tractor on heavy soil easier.
The
Th e ex
exte
tern
rnal
al co
cont
ntro
roll le
leve
vers
rs ar
are e eq
equi
uipp
pped
ed wi
with
th a ti
tie
e ro
rod d
contro
con trolle
lledd fro
fromm the cab
cabin in whi
whichch all
allow
ow you als
also
o to blo
block ck
the front differential.
Dismounting
Dismoun
Dismo untt the int
intern
ernal
al com
comma
mand
nd of the dif
differ
feren
entia
tiall bo
box
x
following the instructions given in: Bevel Gear - Dis-
mounting step 6. (for 130 - 150) - step 7. (for 110).
99

GEARBOX
TECHNICAL DATA
Clutch - Transmission Ratios
Model
Detail 110 130 150

base 12 AV +3 RM -
with min
with minii red
reduct
uction
ion gea
gearr and re-
24 - AV +12 - RM
Number of gears versal
with super reduction gear and

20 - AV +12 - RM
reversal
First gear 21/41 = 1/1,9524 24/41 = 1/1,8636
Second gear 26/36 = 1/1,3846
Gear ratio Third gear 30/32 = 1/1,0667
Fourth gear 35/29 = 1/0,8289
Reverse gear 26/32 =1/1,2308
(24/39) x (36/23) x
Reversal ratio 27/31 = 1/1,1481
(27/26) = 1/0,9997
(36/36 + 72) x (36/36 +

(36/36 (36/36+72) x
Slow
72) = 1/9,00
1/9,000
0 (36/36+72)=1/9000
Reduction gear ratio
Normal (36/36 + 72) = 1/3,000 (36/36 + 72) = 1/3,000
Fast 1/1 = 1/1,000
(24/39)x (36/26) =
Minireduction gear ratio (27/36) x (33/29) = 1/1,1717
1/1,5271
(24/39)x (17/45) =
Superreduction gear ratio (27/36)x (26/53) = 1/2,7179
1/4,3015
25 km/h
8/45 = 1/5,6250
(15.53 mi/h)
Bevel gear 30 km/h
9/42 = 1/4,6667
(18.63 mi/h)
Front axle ratio
25 km/h
1/26,8333
1/ 1/33,8462
(15.53 mi/h)
Total ratio
30 km/h
1/32,4237
1/ 1/28,3846
(18.63 mi/h)
100

GEARBOX
P.T.O.
Unit: r.p.m.
Model
Detail
110 130 150
Minimum engine revs 650 ÷ 700
Minimum 540 179 ÷ 193 168 ÷ 182

P.T.O. revs engine
revs 1000 306 ÷ 330 284 ÷ 307
Maximum engine revs when idling 2340 ÷ 2360 2440 ÷ 2460 2360 ÷ 2380
Minimum 540 645 ÷ 651 632 ÷ 638 611 ÷ 617

P.T.O. revs engine
revs 1000 1101 ÷ 1111 1067 ÷ 1077 1032 ÷ 1042
101

GEARBOX
CHECKS AND CONTROLS

Clutch with mini reduction and reversal gear / Clutch with super reduction and reversal gear
Main and counter shaft 130 - 150 Counter shaft 110

Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
a) Axle play of bearing of the main shaft, adjustable

- 0,1 (0.004)
with shim packs A and B
b) Axle play “G” of bearing of counter shaft adjustable

0 ÷ 0,3 (0 to 0.012) -
with shim pack “S"
102

GEARBOX
Clutch with mini reduction and reversal gear - Clutch shaft
For 130 - 150

For 110
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150

Play “G
Play “G”” of th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch sh
shaf
aftt ad
adju
just
stab
able
le wi
with
th sh
shim
im pa
pack
ck 5 0,4 ÷ 0,6
0,2 ÷ 0,4 (0.008 to 0.015)
(1) (0.015 to 0.023)
(1) Fo
(1) Forr th
the
e co
corr
rrec
ectt pl
plac
acin
ing
g of th
the
e sh
shim
ims
s an
and
d ga
gask
sket
ets
s re
refe
ferr to “C
“Clu
lutc
tch
h wi
with
th su
supe
perr re
redu
duct
ctio
ion
n an
and
d re
reve
vers
rsal
al ge
gear
ar - Ad
Adju
just
st--
ment of clutch shaft play”.
Clutch with super reduction and reversal gear - Clutch shaft
For 130 - 150
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
Play “N
Play “N”” of th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch sh
shaf
aftt ad
adju
just
stab
able
le wi
with
th sh
shim
im pa
pack
ck C
1,3 ÷ 1,7 (0.05
(0.051
1 to 0.067)
(1)
(1) For the correct positioning of the shims and gaskets refer to: “Clutch with super reduction gear” and reversal -
Adjustment of clutch shaft play".
103

GEARBOX
Starter lever - Super reduction gear
Position “speed”
For 130 - 150

Position “Stop”
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check 110 130 150
Coupling run “R” of the lever 0,3 ÷ 0,5 (0.012 to 0.019)
P.T.O. - Rear shaft
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
Axle play “G” of the rear shaft adjustable with shim pack
0,4 ÷ 0,8 (0.01
(0.015
5 to 0.031)
S
104

GEARBOX
Differential
Direction
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
Bearing preload adjustable with shim pack D and E 0,1 (0.004)
Pinion and Crown Wheel
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check Version
110 130 150
a) Pinion axle play adjustable with shim package S 0,03 ÷ 0,05 (0.012 to 0.020)
25 km/h 0,20 ÷ 0,28

0,22: 0,30 (0.08 to 0.011)
With beve
With bevell (15.53 mi/h) (0.008 to 0.010)
b) Pla
Play
y bet
betwee
ween
n pin
pinion
ion tee
teeth
th
gear for
and crown wheel
speed 30 km/h 0,21 ÷ 0,29
0,23 ÷ 0,32 (0.009 to 0.012)
(18.63 mi/h) (0.008 to 0.011)
105

GEARBOX
Pinion
For 130 - 150

For 110
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check Version
110 130 150
25 km/h
16 (0.629)
16 23 (0.905)
With beve
With bevell (15.53 mi/h)
Minimum quota “T” of pinion
gear for
positioning (1) & (2)
speed 30 km/h
16 (0.629) 23,5 (0.925)
(18.63 mi/h)
(1) The nominal value corresponds at random to the amount stamped = to zero.
(2)) Th
(2 The
e am
amou
ount
nt to be va
vari
riedfromthe
edfromthe sh
shim
im pa
pack
ckag
agee F is ac
acco
cord
rdin
ing
g to th
the
e wo
work
rkin
ing
g to
tole
lera
ranc
nce
e of th
the
e pi
pini
nion
on.. Fo
Forr th
the
e co
cor-
r-
rect use of this value refer to “Adjustment of Pinion position”.
106

GEARBOX
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Clutch
Unit: Nm (Kgm)
Model
Details
110 130 150
Fixing screws M14 132 (13,5)
Engine clutch flange M12 88 (9) 147 (15)

46,5 ÷ 51,5 (4,75 ÷
Lower clutch tightening ring nut 385 ÷ 441 (40 ÷ 45)
5,25)
46,5 ÷ 51,5 (4,75 ÷

Main clutch gearwheel fixing ring nut 385 ÷ 441 (40 ÷ 45)
5,25)
Lower clutch shaft fixing ring nut - 385 ÷ 441 (40 ÷ 45)
P.T.O. counter shaft gear wheel fixing ring nut 422 ÷ 441 (43 ÷ 45)
P.T.O. - Differential
Unit: Nm (Kgm)
Model
Details
110 130 150
P.T.O. counter shaft fixing ring nut - 421 ÷ 441 (43 ÷ 451)
Nut fixing brake box to the rear gearbox 88 (9) 127 (13)
Screw fixing crown wheel of differential 127 (13)
Ring nut fixing pinion 107 (11) 290 ÷ 340 (30 ÷ 35)
Screw fixing pinion flange 59 (6)
107

GEARBOX
General specifications
Application Type Details Model Q.ty
Differential gearbox Oil AGIP ROTRA THT 110 76l
Bearings & various parts Grease AGIP GREASE 30 130 -
Gearbox main & counter shaft

Grease MOLYKOTE BR-2 150 -
bushes
Sealants and Fixatives
Application Type Details Model Q.ty
Differential gearbox
Joinin
Joi ning
g sur
surfac
face
e of gea
gearbo
rbox
x - Sealant SILASTICK 738 -
differential
Sea
Seal
d l di
and
an ring
ring etre
diam
ametwith
wit
reh mo
metal
me tal th
more
re outsid
out
anside
than e
10 LOCTITE N 222 -
mm
P.T.O.
Screw fixing P.T.O. clutch po- Fixative -
sitioning plate
LOCTITE N’242
Bevel gear 110 - 130 - 150
Screw
Screw fix
fixing
ing dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial hal
half
f -
box
Different
Differ ential
ial bea
bearin
ring
g sup
suppor
portt
right flange internal surface
Sealant HYLOMAR -
Internal & external surfaces of
the crown wheel of the epicy-
clic rear axle
Cover of the introduction hole

of the differential blocking rod Sealant SILASTICK 738 -
108

GEARBOX
Find th
Find thee or
origi
igin
n of th
the
e no
nois
ise,
e, no
nott ne
nece
cess
ssar
arilyfromthe
ilyfromthe en
engin
gine
e an
and
d wi
with
th th
the
e fo
foll
llow
owin
ing
g pr
pro-
o-
cedure, localize the noisy area:
- take the engine up to the rev; where the noise begins
- keeping the engine at this rev insert various gears.
Determine the cause of the noise and change or repair the defective parts.
Loss
Loss of oil fro
from
m gas
gasket
kets
s & sea
seall rin
rings
gs Change
Change the gas
gasket
kets
s &/o
&/orr sea
seall rin
rings
gs
Noisy transmission in forward gear Pinion shaft bearings (noisy only when
Change the bearings
gear inserted
inserted & in all gears
gears))
Pinion shaft bea

Pinion bearin
rings
gs (in thi
this
s cas
case
e the
Change the bearings
noise
noise sho
shouldoccureven
uldoccureven whe
whenn in neu
neutra
tral)
l)
Insufficient oil level or inadequate lubrifi-

Top up the correct level of prescribed oil
cant characteristics of oil
Bevel pinion bearing noisy Check &/or change
Noisy when vehicle moving even

Noisy Different
Differential
ial sup
suppor
portt bea
bearin
ring
g bro
brokenor
kenor sei
sei--
Change the bearings
when in neutral zing
Counter shaft bearing noisy Change the bearings
Contact surfa
Contact surface
ce of the gearw
gearwheel
heel teeth
A specific gear is noisy Change the gearwheels
worn or slightly sticking
Lack of oil Top up the level

Transmission noisy in neutral (ve-
hicle still)
Irre
Irregu
gula
larr ch
chan
ange
ges
s in th
the
e to
torq
rque
ue Adju
Adjust
st th
the
e mi
mini
nimu
mum
m re
rev
v of th
the
e en
engi
gine
ne
Transmission
Transmiss ion noisy when turnin
turning
g
Gearwheel
Gearwh eel and sid
side
e pin
pinion
ion and cro
crown
wn
both in gear and in neutral (check Change the differential box
wheel teeth worn, damaged or sticking
the axle shaft)
109

GEARBOX
Excess
Excessive
ive pla
play
y of bev
bevel
el gea
gearr whe
wheel
el Check
Check & eve
eventu
ntuall
ally
y cha
change
nge
Excessive play of gear pack Adjust the packs

“Pull & rel
“Pull releas
ease”
e” noi
noisy
sy (ch
(check
eck the
Bev
Bevel ge
gear
ar fi
fixi
xing
ng sc
scrrew lo
loos
ose
e Tigh
Tighte
ten
n th
the
e scre
rew
ws
axle shaft)
Differential
Differential gearw
gearwheel
heel worn
worn or damag
damaged
ed Change
Change the gearw
gearwheel
heel
Block
Blockingring
ingring nutof thepinionshaftloose Check
Check pin
pinion
ion par
parts
ts and tig
tighte
hten
n the
the nut
Firstt of al
Firs alll de
deteterm
rmin
inee th
the
e or
orig
igin
in of th
the
e pr
prob
oble
lem
m & de
decicide
de wh
whet
ethe
herr it is th
the
e sp
spee
eedd ge
gear
ar or
the con
controtroll sys
systemtem.. If the clu
clutchtrans
tchtransmit
mitss cou
coupin
pingg whe
when n the ped
pedalal is low
lowere
ered,
d, it doe
doesn’
sn’tt
discon
disconnec
nect. t. If the clu
clutchcoupl
tchcoupleses whe
when n the ped
pedal
al is lef
left,
t, or dis
discou
couple
ples s whe
when n the ped
pedal
al is
lowere
lowe red,
d, th
the
e en
engi
gine
ne to th
the
e ge
gear
arbo
box
x in th
the
e co
corr
rrec
ectt wa
way.If
y.If th
the
e cl
clut
utchis
chis no
nott fa
faul
ulty
ty,, th
thenit
enit is
the speed clutch or the system of control that is at fault.
Sync
Syncro
ron
niz
izer
er gr
grou
oup
p fa
faul
ulty
ty Refe
Referr to “F
“Fa
aul
ultty Sync
ncro
roni
niz
zer Grou
oup”
p”
Difficulty in inserting & letting out
the gears, mini reduction reversal, External tie rod control not adjusted &/or Check the tie rod and/or control the con-
epicyclic reduction there is a lack of oil in the joints trol joints
Lack
Lack of oil in the dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial gea
gearbo
rbox
x Top up the cor
correc
rectt oil lev
level
el
Insuffici
Insufficientrun
entrun of thetie rodexter
rodexternalparts
nalparts Check
Check th
the
e sy
syst
stem
em anand
d if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y
due to excessive play change the worn parts
Intern
Internal
al con
contro
trols
ls def
deform
ormed
ed or wor
worn
n Repair
Repair and cha
change
nge the def
defect
ective
ive par
parts
ts
Sleeve
Sleeve gea
gearwh
rwheel
eels
s wor
worn
n or dam
damage
aged
d Change
Change the wor
worn
n par
parts
ts
The gears jump out Excessive axle play for gearwheels that
Check the adjustment of the gear pac-
disengage on their own (Pull & release kage
also noisy)
Spring either worn or broken
Milli
Milling
ng of th
the
e ro
rod
d wo
worn
rn or de
defo
form
rmed
ed Chan
Change
ge th
the
e ro
rods
ds
Gear coupling sensibility scarce
Fork
Fork and
and/or
/or lev
lever
er wor
worn
n or dam
damage
aged
d Change
Change the for
fork
k &/o
&/orr the lev
levers
ers
Pawl worn or damaged Change the pawls
110

GEARBOX
Distance between front teeth of the gear

Change the defective parts
wheel & sleeve incorrect
Sleeve
Sleeve and gea
gearwh
rwheel
eel wit
with
h fro
front
nt tee
teeth
th
Syncroni
Syncr onizin
zing
g gro
group
up def
defect
ective
ive or Change the defective parts
worn or damaged
“sticks”
Syncronizer ring worn Change
Slee
Sleeve
ve gr
groo
oove
ves
s wo
worn
rn or da
dam
mag
aged
ed Chan
Change
ge
Change the defective parts & use correct

Shortage of oil or oil incorrect type
oil
Adjustment of bearings & gearwheel in-
Readjust
correct
Seizing, sticking or breaks
Change the defec
Change defective
tive part and retigh
retighten
ten
Fixing screws loose
screws
Adjust the play and change the defective

Insufficient play
parts
Movement on the external control lever

Change the part that need changing
wrong
The con
contro
troll lev
levers
ers of the min
minii red
reduc-
uc-
tion reversal and the epicyclic re-
Refer to noisy gears
duction gears make a noise and vi-
brate
Return spr
Return spring
ing of the lev
lever
er notworki
notworking
ng pro
pro--
Change the spring
perly
Front wheel drive coupling control exter-

Check the levers &/or check the control
nal lev
leversnot
ersnot adj
adjust
usted
ed &/o
&/orr sho
shorta
rtage
ge of oil joints
in the joints
Difficulty in engaging & disengaging Intern

Internal
al con
contro
trols
ls dam
damage
aged
d or wor
worn
n Repair
Repair or cha
change
nge the def
defect
ective
ive par
parts
ts
the front traction
External lever run insufficient due to ex- Check the sy
Check syste
stem
m & if nec
necess
essary
ary rep
repair
air or
cessive play change the worn parts
Shor
Shorta
tageof
geof oi
oill in th
the
e di
diff
ffer
eren
enti
tialgearbox
algearbox Top
Top up
up the
the oi
oill lev
level
el
The rea
rearr dri
drive
ve cou
coupli
pling
ng sig
signal
nal ligh
lightt swi
switch
tch
Change the switch
On inserting the front clutch the si- not working properly
gnal light does not work
Electrical wiring faulty Check the wiring
Internal controls worn or not working

working cor-
The front wheel drive disengages Change the defective parts
rectly
111

GEARBOX
SPECIAL TOOLS
5.90
5.9030
30.2
.267
67.0
.0 Magn
Magnet
etic
ic ba
base
se su
supp
ppor
ortt
5.90
5.9030
30.5
.596
96.0
.0 Pini
Pinion
on ri
ring
ng nu
nutt sp
span
anne
ner
r
Extractor for cente

Extractor centering
ring diffe-
5.9030.618.4/10
rential side pinion bushes
5.90
5.9030
30.6
.627
27.0
.0 Cent
Centes
esim
imal
al co
com
mpa
para
rato
tor
r
112
GEARBOX LUBRICATION SYSTEM
CONTENTS
GEARBOX
GEARBOX LUBR
LUBRICATI
ICATION
ON SYST
SYSTEM
EM . . . . . . . . . 114 Oill ra
Oi radi
diat
ator.
or. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
118
8
Genera
Generall fea
featur
tures
es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
114
4 Remov
Removal
al andinsta
andinstalla
llatio
tion
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
118
8
Oil pu
Oil pump mp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Clea
Cleani
ning
ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Oill fi
Oi filt
lter
ers
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Pressu
Pressure
re rel
reliefvalve
iefvalve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
117
7 Techn
Technica
icall de
detai
tails
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Gene
General
ral spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
SPECIA
SPECIAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
113


GENERAL FEATURES
Only for 13
Only 130-1
0-150,
50, the ge
gearb
arboxox is lub
lubric
ricate
ated
d thr
throu
ough
gh an
independent system. This system, through a forced
lubrication, guarantees a suitable oil delivery to all
gearbox
gear box comp
compone onents
nts at any r.p.m
r.p.m.,
., thus ensuring
ensuring
components long-life, low noise, and lower leaks due
to friction. Ali this results in a reduced maintenance. 1 - Oil filters 25 
The system is composed as follows: 2 - Hydraulic pumps
— One gear pump directly operated by crankshaft 3 - Auxiliary hydraulic valves
through a flange integral with drive pulley 4 - Hydraulic rear lift
— One radiator mounted on the upper side of air 5 - Oil filters 15 
duet, permitting the oil to be kept at such a tem- 6 - Hydraulic pumps
perature so as not to alter its features 7 - Power steering directional control valve
— One pressure relief valve that, in the event of ex- 8 - Radiator
cessive pressure increase, opens, thus causing 9 - By-pass valve
the back gearbox oil to be discharged 10 - Hydraulic circuit of the transmission lubrication
— Two filters located on the left-hand side of ve-
hicle, permitting any oil impurities to be elimina-
ted.
114

115

OIL PUMP
1 - O-ring
2 - Support link
3 - Cap
4 - Gasket
5 - Heart
6 - Gasket
7 - Key
8 - Bearing
9 - Bush
10 - Pinion duct
11 - Pump housing
12 - Base
13 - Pinion conductor
116

OIL FILTERS PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

REPLACEMENT REPLACEMENT
1. Op
Opera
eratin
ting
g fro
from
m und
under
er the veh
vehicl
icle
e an
and
d usi
using
ng wre
wrench
nch 1. Unscrew the two bolts of upper bracket 1 suppor-
5.9030.512.0, ‘unscrew the two filters 1 and remove ting right-hand tank 2 .
them. 2. Uns
Unscre
creww thetwo scr
screws
ews sec
securi
uring
ng bra
bracke
ckett 3 suppor-
ting
ting ri
righ
ght-
t-ha
hand
nd ta
tank
nk lo
lowe
werr si
side
de,, an
and
d ti
tilt
lt th
the
e ta
tank
nk by re
res-
s-
ting it on a suitable support.
1 - Oil filter
2. When reassembling, fill the new filters with the oil

prescribed, lubricate the related gasket, and tighten
them manually on filter support.
3. Runthe engine and check for oil leaks from filter

gaskets.
1 - Upper bracket
2 - Fuel tank
3 - Lower bracket
117

3. Pl
Plac
ace
e a ta
tank
nk to co
coll
llec
ectt th
the
e oi
oill un
unde
derr va
valv
lve
e un
unit
it 1 an
and
d OIL RADIATOR
disconnect piping 2 and 3 from unit itself.
4. Unscrew the valve unit 4 and remove it from gear- REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
box.
1. Un
Unsc
scre
rew
w th
the
e wi
wing
ng nu
nuts
ts,, an
and
d re
remo
move
ve th
the
e si
side
de
left-hand engine lids.
2. Un
Unscr
screw
ew the un
union
ions
s of pip
piping
ing 1 and 2 from radi
radiator,
ator,
then remove radiator 3
3 , handling it with extreme care
to avoid excessive oil leaks during removal.
1
1 - Pressure relief valve unit 3

2 - Oil delivery pipe 2
3 - Excess ail drain pipe
1 - Oil delivery pipe

5. In
Inst
stal
alll a ne
new
w va
valv
lve
e un
unit
it by re
reve
vers
rsin
ing
g th
the
e or
orde
derr of re
re-- 2 - Oil return pipe
moval. At the end of the operation check the gearbox 3 - Gearbox ail radiator
oil level.
3. Install
the radiator by reversing the order of remo-
val, checking good condition of radiator rubber bus-
hes. Check also the gearbox oil level; top up if neces-
sary.
CLEANING
1. Thoroughly clean the radiator honey-comb with a

jet of compressed air and a wooden stick.
2. Us
Use
e a sp
spra
ray
y gu
gun
n to wa
wash
sh wi
with
th so
solv
lven
entt th
the
e ra
radi
diat
ator
or in
in--
side until the solvent comes out clean.
118


TECHNICAL DETAILS
Gear lubrication
Model
Particulars
110 130 150
BOSCH
Type -
HY/ZFS 11/BL201-0510-425-307
Maximum engine speed l/1’ - 17,5
bar
Pressure relief valve setting (p.s.i.) - 1 (14.5)
bar
Lubricating oil pressure (with hot oil) - 1 (14.5)
(p.s.i.)
Total capacity of gear box and hydraulic circuit l 76
Constructor FIAAM
Type FT 4952 IN
Oil filters Quantity 2
Degree of filtration µm
µm 25
Filtering area cm 7550 x 2
Type - In-flow of air not adjustable

Gear oil cooler
Constructor - LANGERER 5 & REICH
119

Gear Oil - Differential
Lubrication gear-differential Oil AGIP ROTRA THT (API - GL3) 110 - 130 - 150 96 l
NOTE:
—
The above quantity refers to the maximum capacity. The good functioning of the group is guaranteed also
with a slightly inferior quantity as long as the level is between the minimum and maximum marking shown on
the dipstick.
— Control oil level every 150 hours.
Sealants and Fixatives
Safety
Safe ty va
valv
lve
e sc
scre
rew
w ththre
read
ad
connector
conn ector of gear lubric
lubrication
ation Fixative LOCTITE 270 130 - 150 -
circuit
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool num be r Denomination Page ref.
5.9030.512.0 Oil filter wrench 5
120
CLUTCH P.T.O.
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Clutchopera
Clutchoperatin
ting-p
g-pres
ressur
sure
e che
check
ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
GENERAL
GENERAL FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Clutchoperatin
Clutchopera ting
g pres
pressur
sure
e che
check
ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
CLUTCHCONTR
CLUTCHCONTROL
OL LE
LEVER.
VER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Adjustment of play between the manifold
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
124
4 and
and th
the
e cl
clut
utchbod
chbody
y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Adjustment of the distributor piston position . . . . . 133
Inst
Instal
alla
lati
tion
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
125 HYDR
HYDRAU
AULI
LIC
C PU
PUMP
MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
134
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
CLUT
CLUTCH
CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
128
8 Checks
Checks andverif
andverifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
134
(Clutc
(Clutch
h VAL
VALEO).
EO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
(Clutc
(Clutch
h SAM
SAME).
E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 TECHNICAL
TECHNICAL DATA AND SPEC
SPECIFICA
IFICATION
TIONS.
S. . . . 136
Checks an
Checks andd ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Techni
Technica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
136
(Clutc
(Clutch
h VAL
VALEO).
EO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Checks
Checks andadju
andadjustm stmen entsts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Gene
General
ral pre
prescr
script
iption
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
(Clutc
(Clutch
h SAM
SAME).
E). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Instal
Installati
lation
on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Play adjustment between the starter
pistonand
pistonand theband bra
brake
ke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
121

CLUTCH P.T.O.
GENERAL FEATURES
engaging phase disengaging phase

Pressurized oil
1 - Clutch control lever 7 - Filter

2 - Starter lever 8 - Spring
3 - Distributor 9 - Disc package
4 - Clutch PTO 10 - Pistons
5 - Brake band 11 - Pistons
6 - Clutch fuel pump 12 - Safety valve
122

CLUTCH P.T.O.
The clu
clutch
tch P.T
P.T.O.
.O. is com
comple
pletel
tely
y ind
indepe
epend
nden
entt of the oth
otherer mec
mechan
hanica
icall par
parts
ts of the tra
tracto
ctor.
r. It is of the mu
multi
lti-di
-disc
sc typ
typee in
an oil bath with hydraulic controls. The control lever 1 1 actions, by way of a series of levers 2, the distributor 3 3, allo-
wing
wing pr
pres
essu
suri
rize
zed
d oi
oill to wo
work
rk on th
the
e pi
pist
ston
on 10; an
andd so al
allo
lowi
wing
ng th
the
e jo
join
inin
ing
g of th
thee dr
driv
ivin
ing
g pl
plat
ates
es wi
with
th th
the
e pr
presessu
sure
re pl
pla-
a-
tes transmitting this to the external drive shaft of the power thrust.
The oil ne
neces
cessar
saryy for the wor
workin
king
g of the clu
clutch
tch is tak
taken
en fro
from
m the dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial ge
gearb
arbox, ox, and fil
filter
tered
ed,, rea
reache
ches s the pu
pump
mp
and gea
gearsrs 6 in di
dire
rect
ct dr
driv
ive
e wi
with
th th
thee en
engi
gine
ne.. Th
The
e pi
pist
ston
onss 11 als
also
o con
contro
trolle
lled
d by the hyd hydrau
raulic
lic dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor 3 at th
the
e sa
same
me
time
time wo
work
rk on th
the
e up
uppe
perr pl
plat
ate
e an
and d th
the
e br
brak
ake
e baband
nd 5 to blo
block
ck the dis
disc
c ho
housi
using
ng be
bellll whe
whenn the clu
clutch
tch is dis
disen
enga
gageged,
d, an
and
d
finally to stop the rotation of the external shaft (disengaging phase).
A safety valve 12 eli

elimin
minate
ates
s an
any
y da
damag
mage
e to the hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic cir
circui
cuitt in the eve
event
nt of an inc
increa
rease
se in oil pre
pressu
ssure
re cau
caused
sed by
bad functioning.
CLUTCH CONTROL LEVER
1 - Control lever 14 - Transmission rod

2 - Split pin 15 - Pin with safety clip
3 - Washer 16 - Transmission lever
4 - Pin 17 - O-ring
5 - Fork 18 - Bush
6 - Transmission rod 19 - Starter lever
7 - Dust cover bellow 20 - Pin
8 - Nut 21 - Plug
9 - Transmission lever 22 - Gasket
10 - Bush 23 - Spring
11 - Switch 24 - Cap
12 - Bracket 25 - Bracket
13 - Fork
123

CLUTCH P.T.O.
REMOVAL 5. Wor
Workin
king
g fro
from
m un
unde
derne
rneath
ath the cab
cabin
in un
unhoo
hook
k the sa-
fety catch 7 an and
d rem
removeunfas
oveunfasten teningthe
ingthe rod 6 fro from
m the
1. Working from inside the cabin loosen the screws lever 8. If necessary remove the transmission rod 6
fixing the knobs 1 present on the right side control pa- pulli
pu lling
ng it fro
from
m ins
insidethe
idethe cab
cabinin tog
togeth
etherer wit
withh theprote
theprotec-
c-
nel. Remove the knobs. tion cover.
2. Unscrew the ten fixing nuts on the control panel 3 6. Loosen the nut 4 fixing the lever 8 8 to the rod catch.
and remove. Remove lever 8 8 with drawing it on the right.
7. Un
Unhohookok the saf
safety
ety cha
chain
in 2 and remo
remove ve unfa
unfasten
stening
ing
the rod 3 from the lever 1 1 .
8. If ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, loo
loosen
sen the two scr screws
ews fixing
fixing the
switch 9 and remove.
1 - Knobs
2 - Clutch control lever
3 - Control panel 1 - Transmission lever
2 - Safety catch and pin
3 - Transmission rod
4 - Nut
5
6 -- Transmission
Pin rod
7 - Safety catch and pin
3. Remove the split pin 4 and slip out the pin 3 joining 8 - Transmission lever
the control lever 1
1 and the transmission rod fork 2 . 9 - Switch
4. Loosen the bracket fixing nut 5 and remove toge-
ther with the control lever 1
1 .
9. Rem
Remove
ove the ho
hoist
isting
ing bo
box
x fro
from
m the ge
gearb
arbox
ox (re
(refer
fer to:
Hoisting Group - Hoisting Box Removal) and the cap
of the support pump.
10. Wi
Withth th
the
e he
help
lp of a ha
hamm
mmer er an
andd pu
punc
nch,
h, re
remo
move
ve th
the
e
pin fix
fixing
ing the cou
coupli
pling
ng lev
lever
er 1 to the tra
transm
nsmiss
ission
ion lev
lever
er
2. Remove both the levers.
1 - Clutch control lever

2 - Transmission rod fork
3 - Pin
4 - Split pin 1 - Clutch coupling lever
5 - Lever support bracket 2 - Transmission lever
124

CLUTCH P.T.O.
CHECKS AND CONTROLS

1. Clean the metal parts of the clutch coupling control
with adequate solvant and visually check their worka-
bility.
2. Control the wear between the levers and rod.
3. Co
Cont
ntro
roll al
alll th
the
e ru
rubb
bber
er be
bell
llow
ows.
s. Ch
Chan
ange
ge an
any
y th
that
at ap
ap--
pear worn or damaged.
INSTALLATION
Reassembly the clutch control levers working in the
reverse order.
— Change the O-ring greasing it with the prescribed
grease.
— Lubricate the linkages with the prescribed
grease.
— Reassembly completed, control the correct func-
tioning of the levers checking that the engaging
and disengaging of the clutch is correct and that
the levers do not slip from the working position.
— Proceed with the adjustment of the clutch control
lever (see: Adjustment).
ADJUSTMENT
Proceed with the nece
Proceed necessary
ssary adjustments
adjustments after the
reasse
rea ssemb
mbly
ly of the var variou
iouss pa
parts
rts as dedescr
scribe
ibed
d in
“Reassembly”, scrupulously adhering to the following
instructions.
1. With rod 2 disconnected, turn the lever 9 9 in the di-
rection indicated by the arrow and check that the dis-
tance
tan ce “X” bet
betwee
ween n the tra
transm
nsmiss
ission
ion lev
lever
er 3 an
and d th
the
e rere--
lative
lative supp
support
ort 4 is th
the
e sa
same
me as th
that
at gi
give
ven
n in “T
“Tecechn
hnicical
al
Data
Da ta and Pre
Prescr
script
iptio
ions
ns - Che
Checks
cks an
andd Ad
Adjus
justme
tmentsnts”” for
the model in question.
2. If unable to obtain the correct distance, either loo-
senor tig tighte
htenn thefork 6 oftherod 5 unt untilil youobta
youobtain
in it.
3. Remount the lever 2 2 , move lever 1
1 to the ON/OFF 1 - Clutch control lever
and
an d che
checkck tha
thatt the dis
distan
tance ce “Y” be
betwe
tween
en the con
contro
troll le- 2 - Transmission rod
ver 1 and the panel 7 is the same as that given in 3 - Transmission lever
“Technical Data and Prescriptions and Checks and 4 - Support
Adjustments” for the tractor in question. 5 - Transmission rod
6 - Fork
4. If unable to obtain the correct value, loosen or tigh-
7 - Control panel
ten the fork 8 of the rod 2 until it is reached. 8 - Fork
9 - Lever
125

CLUTCH P.T.O.
CLUTCH
For 130 - 150
1 - Retaining ring 17 - Main piston 33 - Gasket
2 - Safety ring 18 - Shock absorber piston 34 - Plug
3 - Parcelling ring 19 - O-ring 35 - Seeger ring
4 - Metal discs 20 - Spring 36 - Gasket
5 - Clutch discs 21 - Shoulder disc 37 - Fuel pipe
6 - Toothed wheel 22 - Seeger ring 38 - Gasket
7 - Brake band 23 - O-ring 39 - Union
8 - Secondary pistons 24 - Union block 40 - Washer
9 - O-ring 25 - Gasket 41 - Metal support link
10 - Shims 26 - Pin 42 - Clutch body
11 - Blocking plate 27 - Distributor 43 - Pistons
12 - Plate 28 - Plug 44 - Support link
13 - Main piston band brake fixing screw 29 - Gasket 45 - Support link
14 - Shock absorber cylinder 30 - Spring 46 - Spring
15 - Union 31 - Safety valve 47 - Retainer
16 - Gasket 32 - Distributor body 48 - Compression ring
126

CLUTCH P.T.O.
For 110
1 - Plug 19 - Blocking plate 37 - ShouIder ring
2 - Gasket 20 - Plate 38 - Ring with external teeth
3 - Spring 21 - Shims 39 - Ring with internal teeth
4 - Spacer 22 - Band brake 40 - Spacer
5 - Transmission levers 23 - Piston 41 - Compression ring
6 - Nu t 24 - Drive shaft 42 - Support discs
7 - Notched washer 25 - Spring 43 - Shoulder ring
8 - Coupling lever 26 - Manifold 44 - Compression ring
9 - Pin 27 - Shock absorber fixing nut 45 - Spring
10 - Main piston 28 - Compression ring 4 6 - Ca p
11 - O-ring 29 - Clutch body 47 - Support link
12 - Secondary piston 30 - Headless screw 48 - Shock absorber piston
13 - Screws 31 - Piston 49 - Shock absorber cylinder
14 - Notched washer 32 - Gasket 50 - Gasket
15 - Gaskets 33 - Support link 51 - Distributor
16 - Union 34 - Spring 52 - Distributor body
17 - Rigid union tube 35 - Spring
18 - Band brake fixin
ing
g scr
cre
ew 36 - Compressio ion
n rin
ing
g
127

CLUTCH P.T.O.
REMOVAL
Remove the clutch from the differential box (refer to:
Gearbox - P.T.O. - Disassembly).
DISASSEMBLY
Only far models 130 and 150 (Clutch VALEO)
1. Unscrew the plug 4 fixing the safety valve, and
using a magnet extract the spring 5 and the valve 6 .
2. Lo
Loose
osen
n the scr
screw
ew fix
fixing
ing the sho
shock
ck abs
absorber 1 to th
orber the
e
clutch and remove.
1 - Clutch body
2 - Band brake
3 - Distributor
4 - Distributor body
5 - Washer
6 - Seeger ring
5. Slippiston 3 and piston 4 with the band brake from

the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor bod
body.y. Rem
Remove
ove the pin 5 an
and
d ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e
distributor upwards.
1 - Shock absorber
2 - Distributor
3 - Clutch
4 - Plug
5 - Spring
6 - Spring
3. Refe
Referr to theenla
theenlarge
rged
d dia
diagra
gram
m if nec
necess
essary
ary,, an
and
d dis
dis--
mount the shock absorber. Remove the Seeger ring
22 together with the shoulder disc 21 and extract the
spring 20 and the piston 18 .
4. Ref
Refer
er to the fol
follow
lowingdiagr
ingdiagram
am an
and d rem
remove
ove the Se
See-
e-
gerr rin
ge ring
g 6 an
andd the was
washe
her
r 5 und
under
er it. Carefully
Carefully remo
remove
ve
the distributor body 4 with the band brake 2 from the
clutch body 1. Remove the metal support links from
the clutch body.
2 - Distributor
3 - Piston
4 - Band brake piston
5 - Pin
128

CLUTCH P.T.O.
6. Dis
Dismo
moun
untt the clu
clutch
tch bo
body
dy usi
using
ng the fol
follow
lowing
ing pro
proce-
ce- (5) Hold the retainer 4
4 still, and remove the compres-
dure. sion ring 3 . Remove the retainer 4 4 and the spring 5.
(1)) Bl
(1 Bloc
ock
k th
the
e cl
clut
utch
ch bo
body
dy on a vi
vice
ce wi
with
th pr
prot
otec
ecti
tive
ve ja
jaws
ws (6) Using compressed air remove the piston 2 .
and move the safety ring 1 so that the end of it coinci-
des with one of the slits in the clutch body.
(2) Using pliers, carefully remove the safety band 1 .
(3) Remove the compression ring 2 .
(4) Remove the packaging ring 3 the disc package 5
and the indented wheel 6 .
1 - Clutch body
2 - Piston
4 - Retainer
5 - Spring
Only for model 110
1. Ta
Take
ke of
offf th
the
e su
supp
ppor
ortt 1 an
and
d the sho
shovel
vel rin
ring
g 2 fro
from
m the
clutch.
1 - Safety band
3 - Packaging ring
4 - Clutch body 1 - Disc support
5 - Disc parcel
2 - Shovel ring
6 - Indent
Indented
ed wheel
129

CLUTCH P.T.O.
2. Ref
Referr
erring
ing to the fir
first
st en
enlar
large
ged
d dia
diagra
gram,
m, un
unscr
screw
ew the
nut 27 tak
take
e off the cyl
cylind
inder
er 49 an
andd th
then
en op
openen th
the
e co
com-
m- 6. Rem
Remove
ove the man
manifo
ifold
ld 1 fro
from
m cl
clut
utch
ch bo
body
dy an
and
d ex
extra
tract
ct
pression ring 44 and withdraw the shoulder ring 43, the piston 2 , the spring 3 and the drive shaft 4 .
the spring 45 , the support link 47 and the piston 48 .
3. Flatten the wings of the two screws 1 fixing the
block
blo ck pla
plate
te an
and
d the ban
bandd 3 to th
the
e ma
mainin pi
pist
ston
on 6, loo
loosen
sen
the
the twtwo
o sc
scre
rews
ws an
and
d re
remo
move
ve th
the
e bl
bloc
ockk pl
plat
atee 2 the ba
band
nd
brake 3 and the secondary plate 4 and the shims 5 .
1 - Manifold
2 - Piston
3 - Spring
4 - Drive shaft
7. It
neces
ne cessar
sary,
y, rem
remove
ove the com
compre
pressi
ssion
on ba
band
nd 1 ope-
1 - Sand fixing screws ning the clips.
2 - Block plate
3 - Sand brake
4 - Secondary plate
5 - Shims
6 - Main piston
4. Loosen the two screws 2 fixing the distributor body

4 and remove.
5. If necessary remove the distributor 1
1 and the two
pistons 3 from the distributor body 4.
1 - Compression band
8. It nec
necess
essary
ary,, dis
dismo
mount
unt the dis
discs
cs usi
using
ng the fol
follow
lowing
ing
procedure.
1 - Distributor (1) Open the compression band 1 take off the disc 2
2 - Fixing screws and the spring 3.
3 - Piston
130

CLUTCH P.T.O.
(2) Check the wear and tear of cylinder and pistons. If
there
the re is toomuch pla
playy cha
chang
ngee the com
comple
pletete cyl
cylin
inder
der or
piston.
(3) Check that the piston thrust disc does not show
signs of tempering or marks. If so, change it.
(4) Che
Checkck thecondi
theconditio
tions
ns of the sup
suppo
port
rt lin
links,
ks, cha
changnging
ing
the faulty parts.
(5) Che
Checkck allthe spa
spaces
ces,, op
open
ening
ings
s an
and
d int
intern
ernal
al pa
passa
ssa--
ges of the clutch and distributor bodies are clean and
free from particles.
2. Clutch
disc check
(1) Check that all the sliding areas of the discs are not
wor
worn;
n; chi
chipp
(2) Check pped
ed or
that scratc
scr
the atche
hed.
discs d. Cha
Changeany
move ngeany
freely faulty
faulty
in their discs.
discs.
seats.
3. Check that the teeth of the indented support work

on all sides. If you find broken or faulty teeth must
change the wheel. If you find teeth with bumps, re-
move them with a file.
2 - Disc 4. Control
the fix efficiency of the springs checking
3 - Spring that they are not twisted or deformed. If necessary
change them.
5. Check that the distributor and safety valve are not

(2) Take off the compression band 1 and take out the deformed, scratched or have excessive play in their
spacer 2 and the dis
disc
c pa
packa
ckagege 3 then
then,, usin
using
g comp
compres-
res- seats. If necessary, change the faulty parts.
sed air, extract the piston 4 from the clutch body 5 .
6. Check
the wear of the friction gasket of the brake
band and the relative piston. Change the parts if too
worn.
7. Only for models 130 and150 (Clutch VALEO)

Temporarily position the metal support links 1on the
inside of the distributor body 2.
Usin
Us ing
g a fe
feel
eler
er ga
gaug
uge,
e, ch
chec
eck
k th
that
at th
the
e pl
play
ay be
betw
twee
een
n th
the
e
end of the links is not less than the value given in
“Technical Data and Prescriptions - Checks and Con-
trols”.
2 - Spacer
3 - Disc package
4 - Piston
5 - Clutch body

Wash all parts of the clutch with prescribed solvant
and dry them with compressed air. Proceed to check
each part, particularly the following, carefully for de-
fects.
1. Check the distributor and the clutch body pistons. 1 - Metal support link
(1) Check that the inside of the cylinders and the pis- 2 - Distributor body
tons are not rusty. If necessary change them.
131

CLUTCH P.T.O.
REASSEMBLY
Remountt theclutc
Remoun theclutchh wor
workin
king
g in therever
thereverse
se ord
order
er ad
adhe-
he-
ring to the following instructions.
— On remounting change all the support links, the
gaskets and the O-rings, lubricating them with
prescribed oil.
— Pay particular attention to the- manner in which
the parts are mounted referring to the enlarged
diagram.
— Remount the disc package checking that the first
and last disc are metal.
— After having remounted the disc package check
that they have enough play.
— Block the threaded unions with the prescribed
sealants.
Only for model 110

— Spread the unions between the manifold and the 1 - Shims
distributor body with the prescribed sealant. 2 - Plate
3 - Band brake
INSTALLATION CLUTCH OPERATING - PRESSURE

CHECK
Remountt the clu
Remoun clutch
tch in the dif
differ
ferent
ential
ial ho
housi
using
ng (re
(refer
fer to:
Gearbox - P.T.O. - Remountin
Remounting) g) and carry out the ne- 1. Usin
Using
g the cor
correc
rectt spa
spann
nner,
er, loo
loosen
sen the sho
shock
ck abs
absor-
or-
cessary adjustmen
adjustmentt (refer to: Adjustments). ber and remove it.
2. Scr
Screw
ew a fle
flexib
xible
le pip
pipe
e 5.9
5.903
030.5
0.517.
17.0
0 an
and
d ma
mano
nomet
meter
er
5.9030.510.0 onto the union block.
ADJUSTMENTS
Proceed with the necessary adjustments after moun-
ting the various parts as described in “Remounting
and Reassembly”, carefully adhering to the following
procedure:
PLAY AD
PLAY ADJU
JUST
STME
MENT
NT BE
BETW
TWEE
EEN
N TH
THE
E
STARTER PISTON AND THE BAND
BRAKE
1. Pre
Press
ss wi
with
th th
the
e fi
fing
nger
er on th
the
e ma
main
in pi
pist
ston
on as sh
show
own
n in
the diagram, and at the same time lift the band brake
with
2. a screwdriver.
Sensitivity check that the play is around 1 to 2 mm
(0.0393 to 0.0787 in).
3. If the play is not that given, increase or reduce the
shims 1 until you obtain the correct value.
CAUTION
So tha
thatt the band brake
brake dodoes
es no
nott bre
break
ak under
under
strain
strain,, co
corre
rrectl
ctly
y pos
positi
ition
on the shi
shims
ms 1 tou
touchi
ching
ng the
pistons and covered by the plate 2.
132

CLUTCH P.T.O.
3. Sta
Start
rt the en
engin
gine,
e, act
action
ion the P.T
P.T.O.
.O. clu
clutch
tch an
and
d che
check
ck ADJUST
ADJU STME
MENT
NT OF TH
THE
E DI
DIST
STRI
RIBU
BUTO
TOR
R
the pr
the pres
essu
sure
re va
valu
lue
e re
read
adin
ing
g on th the
e mamano
nome
meteter
r PISTON POSITION
5.9030.510.0 is the same as that given in “Technical For 110
Data and Prescriptions - Technical Data” for the trac- trac - — Check that the piston is free from the rod lever.
tor model in question. Se certain that when the control lever is fully pus-
4. If the value is not correct, proceed with another ac- hed back, the distributor is in line with the back
curate check of the clutch and/or the fuel pump (refer edge of the distributor body.
to: Hydraulic Pump Check). To adjust the position of the distributor, first loo-
5. Having checked,
checked, remo
remount
unt the shoc
shock k abso
absorber,
rber, sen the screw 1 then screw 2 at the same time
blocking
block ing the unio
union
n threa
threads
ds with the presc
prescribed
ribed seal
sealer.
er. moving the distributor body 3 until you bring it to
the correct position, then tighten first screw 2
then screw 1 .
ADJUSTMENT OF PLAY BETWEEN THE
MANIFOLD AND THE CLUTCH BODY
For 110
— Find out what play there is between the manifold
and the clutch body. If it is not within the values
of 1.8
1.8 to 2.2 mm (0.0708 to 0.0866 in) adjust it
as follows.
(1) Lo
Looseosenn thetwo scr
screws
ews 1 fix
fixingthe
ingthe bev
bevel
el squ
square
are 2.
(2) Mo
Move ve the ma
manif
nifold
old 3 in su
such
ch a wa
wayy to re
reac
achh va
valu
lues
es
given above, then tighten the screws 1 .
1 - Fixing screw
2 - Adjusting screw
1 - Fixing screws
2 - Adjusting screws
133

CLUTCH P.T.O.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
1 - Pump
2 - Pump fuel pipes
1 - Pump body
2 - Intern
Internal
al gears CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS
3 - External gears
4 - Pin Accurately wash the parts and visually check each
5 - Pump cover one for defects.
6 - Gasket 1. Ch
Chec
eck
k th
that
at th
the
e te
teet
eth
h of th
the
e ge
gearars
s wo
work
rks
s on al
alll si
side
des.
s.
7 - Union
8 - Delivery pipe to clutch If not, change any that are faulty.
9 - O-ring 2. Also check that the teeth are not chipped or show
10 - Fuel piping signs of excessive wear. If necessary change them.
11 - Spring 3. Check that the mating surfaces of the two parts of
12 - Cover the pump body are free from splits; bumps or chips. If
13 - Filter necessary change the defective parts.
14 - Plug 4. Ch
Check
eck tha
thatt the spa
spaces
ces an
andd in
inter
terna
nall pas
passag
sages
es of the
pump body are dean and free from particles.
REMOVAL
Remove the pump from the differential box (refer to: REASSEMBLY
Gearbox - P.T.O. - Dismounting). Remount
Remou nt the pu
pump
mp wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order,
er,
changing the O-ring and the gaskets.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Fixthe pump onto a vice with protective teeth and
loosen the screws fixing the pipes 2 to the pump. Re-
move the pipes together with the O-ring.
2. Loosen the six screws fixing the pump. Open the
pump and remove the two internal gears.
134

CLUTCH P.T.O.
INSTALLATION
Remount the pump into the differential box (refer to: Gearbox - P.T.O. - Remounting).
1 - Pump gear lever pin
2 - Pump gear lever
3 - Gear conductor
4 - Bearing
5 - Union
6 - Oil pump PTO body
7 - External gears
8 - Intern
Internal
al gears
9 - PTO clutch brake piston
10 - O-ring
11 - Safety valve
12 - Manifold
13 - PTO clutch body
14 - Shovel ring
15 - Seeger ring
16 - Band brake
17 - Disc package
18 - Packaging ring
19 - PTO pump closing screw
20 - PTO pump cover
135

CLUTCH P.T.O.
TECHNICAL DATA
Clutch PTO
Model
Features
110 130 150
Clutch manufacturer Manufacturer VALEO
Type hydraulic multidisc with band brake
Number of discs 4 7
Diameter of discs mm (in) 149 (5.87) 140 (5.51)
Number of shoulder rings 5 8
Disc lubrification pressure (P.T.O. release) bar 10 ÷ 14 7,5
Free run of brake control piston mm (in) 1,5 (0.06) 1,5 ÷ 2 (0.06 to 0.08)
Hydraulic pump as gears
Max. engine rev. I/1 9 ÷ 11 25
Max. calibrating pressure (P.T.O. disengaged) bar 10 ÷ 14 12 ÷ 17
Oil filter in metal
Filtration capacity micron 90
Filtration area mm (in) 330 (12.10)
Hydraulic distributor run mm (in) 14 (0.55)
Play between piston ring ends mm (in) 0,2 (0.008)
136

CLUTCH P.T.O.
1 - Support
2 - Return lever
3 - Drive lever
4 - Panel
Unit: mm (in)
Model
Type of check
110 130 150
“X” distance between the return lever and relative sup-

45 (1.77)
port
“Y” play between drive lever and panel 2 ÷ 3 (0.08 to 0.12)
Play between starter piston and band brake 1 ÷ 2 (0.04 to 0.08)
Play between manifold and clutch body 1,8 ÷ 2,2 (0.07 to 0.09)
Topping up of differential
Topping differential gear
Oil AGIP ROTRA THT (API - GL3) 110 - 130 - 150
oil
Fixatives and Sealants
Part Type Denomination Model Q.ty
Distributor body manifold Sealant HYLOMAR 110 - 130 -
Threaded unions Fixative LOCTITE 270 150 -
137

CLUTCH P.T.O.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Number Tool Name Page No.

Manometerin
Manome terin gly
glycer
cerine
ine bat
bath
hO
5. 9030.510.0
to 40 bar (0 te 580 p.s.i.)
5.9
.903
030.
0.51
517.
7.0
0 Flex
Flexib
ible
le un
unio
ion
n pi
pipi
ping
ng
138

CLUTCH P.T.O.
Incorrect distributor run Register control

control lever
Dist
Distri
ribu
buto
torr po
posi
siti
tion
on in
inco
corr
rrec
ectt Regi
Regist
ster
er di
dist
stri
ribu
buto
torr po
posi
siti
tion
on
Distri
Distribut
butor
or bod
body
y pos
positi
ition
on inc
incorr
orrect
ect Regist
Register
er dis
distri
tribut
butor
or bod
body
y pos
positi
ition
on
Over
erpr
pres
ess
sur
ure
e val
alv
ve da
dam
mag
aged
ed Che
hec
ck th
the
e val
alv
ve
P.T.O. is late starting Piston rings worn Change piston rings
Brake discs deformed Change brake discs
Dismount
Dismou nt and cle
clean
an the clu
clutch
tch bod
body
y
Piping blocked
and distributor
Pump capacity insufficient Adjust fuel pump PTO
Con
ontr
trol
ol co
cour
urs
se in
inc
cor
orre
rec
ct Adj
djus
ustt di
dis
str
trib
ibut
utor
or an
and
d le
leve
vers
rs
Brake discs worn Change discs

P.T.O. slides under stess
Check oil level
Insufficient pressure control Adjust the pump and distributor hou-
sing
Band brake worn Change band brake

P.T.O. doesn’t stop when disengaged Leak
Leaka
age in sta
tart
rter
er pi
pis
sto
ton
n Adj
djus
ustt pi
pis
sto
ton
n an
and
d di
dis
str
trib
ibut
utor
or ho
hous
usin
ing
g
Incorrect control run Adjust levers and distributor
139

CLUTCH P.T.O.
PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANC
140
HYDROSTATIC STEERING
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 PIPI
PIPING
NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
269
COLU
COLUMN
MN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Flex
Flexib
iblepipe
lepipes
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
251
1 Rigi
Rigid
d pi
pipe
pes.
s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Unions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
254
4 Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Pipes
Pipes lea
leadin
ding
g ou
outt of thedistr
thedistribu
ibutor
tor . . . . . . . . . 269
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
254 Pipes
Pipes en
enter
teringand
ingand com
comingout
ingout of thepump . . 270
DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 RESO
RESOUN
UNDE
DER
R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
270
0
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
255
5 Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 OIL PU

OIL PUMP
MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Clean
Cleaningcheck
ingcheckss an
and d con
controtrolsls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Axial play adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
274
4
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
261 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
POWER
POWER ST
STEER
EERING
ING HO
HOUSI
USING
NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Doubl
Double
e eff
effectfor
ectfor 4 whe
wheel/
el/dri
drive
ve tra
tracto
ctorr . . . . . . . . . 261 COMPL
COMPLETEHYDRA
ETEHYDRAULI
ULIC
C CIR
CIRCUI
CUIT
T . . . . . . . . . . 27
276
6
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
262 Safet
Safety
y val
valve
ve cal
calibr
ibrati
ation
on che
check
ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
276
6
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Remo
Remova
vall of ai
airr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
276
6
Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Oill re
Oi remo
mova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Singleeffec
Singleeffectt for 2 whe
wheel/
el/dri
drive
ve tra
tracto
ctorr . . . . . . . . . . 266 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
266 Tech
Techni
nica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
277
7
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Contro
Controls
ls an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
278
8
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 General prescriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE
ACTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
247

CARACTERISTIQUES GENERALES
The steering system which is without any direct me-

chanical
chanical link betw
between
een the whee
wheelsls and the stee
steering
ring
wheel,
ver. stops vibrations
Designed with reactivegoingopen from center,
the tyres it to the dri-
consents
the driver to feel turning movement on the steering
wheel so that he can quickly change direction.
The movement which is felt on the steering wheel in-
creases the effect of the self centering, so that, when 1 - Oil filters 25 
you lea
leave
ve the ste steeri
ering
ng whewheel,el, the whewheelsels au
autom
tomati
atical
cal-- 2 - Hydraulic pumps
ly align themselves with the tractor. 3 - Auxiliary hydraulic valves
The oil fro fromm a spe specia
ciall tan
tank k 1 is sen
sentt in prepressu
ssurere 4 - Hydraulic rear lift
through a resounder 12 to 12 to the distributor 3 of 3 of a pump 5 - Oil filters 15 
14 fo
foun
undd on ththe e up
uppeperr li
lid
d 15 of the gea gearborbox,
x, an
andd act
actio-
io- 6 - Hydraulic pumps
ned continuously by a speed gear. 7 - Power steering directional control valve
By turning the steering wheel 2 wheel 2 you you work on the distri- 8 - Radiator
butor positioning helical, and on the capacity shutter 9 - By-pass valve
which permits the flow of oil in pressure to the control 10 - Hydraulic circuit of the transmission lubrication
cylinders 10 in the ne neces
cessarsary y qu
quantantity
ity for the req
requir
uired
ed
turning. Depending which way you turn, the oil which
is foun
found d in the opposite
opposite cylin cylinder
der chamber,
chamber, retu returns
rns
through
throu gh the pipe pipes s 5 to the distribu
distributor tor and fro fromm it
through the pipe 8
pipe 8 to to the tank.
Befo
Be fore
re th
thee oi
oill is ta
take
kenn in by th thee pu
pumpit
mpit pa pass
sses
es th
thro
roug
ugh h
a filter which removes impurities in the oil.
The presence of the resounder, allows variations in
pressure and consequently vibrations, to be absor-
bed, therefore reducing the noise of the engine.
The two control cylinders, either double effect (for the
4 RM model) of single effect for (the 2 RM model) joi-
ned to the front hub 11 hub 11 ensures
ensures the necessary thrust
for turning in any conditions.
This
Th is sy
syst
stem
em alalsoso of
offe
fers
rs th
thee ad
adva
vant ntag
age e of be
beining
g ab
able
le to
drive the tractor even if the engine stop motor fails. A
valve
val ve sit
situa
uated
ted in the dis distri
tribu
butor
tor,, con
consensentsts the cap
capaci
acity
ty
shutter to take in oil from the exhaust circuit when the
pump delivery circuit has insufficient pressure.
248

7
r
a
b
0 6
5 5
1
0
8 1
1
9
2
r
a
b 4
8
3
249

STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
1 - Cover
2 - Steer
Steering
ing wheel fixing nuts
3 - Notch
Notcheded washer
4 - Left steering switch cover
5 - Covering
6 - Protector
7 - Sealed bearing
bearing
8 - Steer
Steering
ing wheel shell
9 - Spacer
10 Shaft
11 - Handle
12 - Lever
13 - Steering column tilt adjusting screw
14 - Spacers
15 - Support
16 - Holding pin
17 - Bracket
18 - Seeger
19 - Right steering switch cover
20 - Steering wheel
250

REMOVAL
1. Uns
Unscre
crew
w an
and
d rem
remove
ove the cov
cover
er 1
1 fro
from
m th
the
e mi
midd
ddle
le of
the steering wheel 2
wheel 2..
2. Loosen the steering wheel fixing nut 3
nut 3..
1 - Steering switch release wiring connections
6. Loosen
Loosen the two screw
screws s fixin
fixing
g the right stee
steering
ring
switch release group
group 1 in which the ignition change
over switch 2
switch 2 is
is found, and remove the cover.
1
2 -- Cover
Steering wheel
3 - Steering wheel fixing nut
3. Using extractor 5.9030.443.0 remove the steering

wheel.
1 - Right steering switch release cover

2 - Ignition change aver switch
4. Remove
Remove the ins
instru
trume
ment
nt pan
panel
el (re
(refer
fer to: Cab
Cabinin 7. Loosen the two inside screws of the left cover 1
cover 1 of
of
Dashboard). the steering switch release and remove it.
5. Disconnect the four wiring connections 1 of the
steering switch release.
251

1 - Steering column
1 - Left Steering switch release cover 2 - Shaft
8. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e tw
two
o sc
scre
rews
ws of th
the
e co
cove
ver
r 1
1 fro
from
m the ste
stee-
e- 10. Loosen the four screws fixing the shaft 1 to the
ring column of the steering wheel and remove it. supports 2
supports 2..
1 - Shaft
2 - Supports
11. Lift the steering wheel column 1

column 1 off,
off, removing the
spacer 2 placed
2 placed under the holding plate 3
plate 3..
CAUTION
During the removal of the steering column take
care
care to hol
holdd the distribu
distributor
tor pro
prope
perly
rly so tha
thatt it
doesn’t fall and get damaged.
1 - Steering column cover
9. Loosen the four screws fixing the steering column

to the shaft 2
shaft 2 and
and to the distributor under it.
252

1 - Steering column
2 - Spacer
3 - Holding plate 1 - Regulator screw
2 - Spacer
3 - Shaft
4 - Clutch spacer
12. Loo
Loosen
sen the two scr
screws
ews fix
fixin
ing
g the ste
steeri
ering
ng wh
wheel
eel til
tiltt
lever 1 to
1 to the regulator screw 2
screw 2..
DISASSEMBLY
1. Fix thesteer
thesteeringwhee
ingwheell hou
housin
sing
g 1 on
onto
to a vi
vice
ce,, an
and
d re
re--
move the rubb
rubber
er prot
protectio
ectionn 3 wiwith
th th
the
e he
help
lp of a po
poin
inte
ted
d
tool.
2. Extract the Seeger ring 2
ring 2 then carefully tap with a
rubber hammer on the upper part of the steering co-
lumn 4
lumn 4 then
then slip it out from below.
1 - Steering wheel tilt regulator lever

2 - Regulator screw
13. Loo
Loosen
sen the reg
regula
ulator
tor scr
screw
ew 1 an
and
d rem
remove
ove the spa
spa--
cer 2.
2.
14. Lif
Liftt the sha
shaft
ft 3 off up
upwar
wards
ds com
comple
plete
te wit
with
h theclutc
theclutch
h
1 - Steering wheel housing
spacer 4. 4.
2 - Seeger ring
3 - Rubber protection
4 - Steering column
253

CHECKS AND CONTROLS

Surface
1. Ch
Chec
eck
k th
that
at th
the
e be
bear
arin
ing
g 1 in
inse
sert
rted
ed in th
the
e sh
shel
elll 2 is no
nott à graisser
damaged, nor presents any form of malfunction. If so
change the shell.
1 - Rubber protection
2 - Steering column
1 - Bearing
2 - Shell REASSEMBLY
Reassemb
Reasse mble
le the stesteeri
ering
ng col
colum
umn n of the ste
steeri
ering
ng
whee
wh eell wo
work
rkin
ing
g in th
the
e re
reve
vers
rse
e or
orde
derr ad
adhe
heri
ring
ng to th
the
e fo
fol-
l-
2. Verify the integrity of the steering column. In parti- lowing instructions.
cular verify that the working seat of the bearings are — Take care that the steering column is placed un-
not scr
scratc
atche
hed,
d, an
and
d tha
thatt theteeth of thegroo
thegroovesves arenot der no stress during the reassembly.
worn or damage. — Take care to correctly match the distributor and
3. Ve
Veri
rify
fy th
the
e in
inte
tegr
grit
ity
y of th
the
e su
supp
ppor
ortt sh
shaf
aftt an
and
d if ne
nece
ces-
s- the steering column.
sary, change it. — Regulate the tightening of screws fixing the stee-
ring wheel tilt lever in such a way as to obtain the
required position.
— After tightening all parts, verify that the maximum
range of the steering wheel (full up and full
REMOUNTING down) works correctly.
— Mounting completed, verify that the steering
Proceed with the reassembly working in the reverse switch and the warning horn work correctly.
order,
— Tap,adhering to on
carefully, thethe
following instructions.
shaft until it touches the
bearing inside the steering housing.
— Neither grease nor lubricate the bearing inserted
in the shell.
— Verify that the steering column turns freely wi-
thout sticking, but that it does not have excessive
play.
— Before remounting the rubber protection 1
spread the steering column 2 with prescribed
grease in the position indicated in the diagram.
254

DISTRIBUTOR
1 - Fixing screw 10 - Pressure limit valve 19 - Short circuit valve
2 - Lower cap 11 - Capacity shutter 20 - Coupling
3 - Shim 12 - Spring holder 21 - Grooved hub
4 - Spacer 13 - Helical entrainer 22 - Bearing
5 - O-ring 14 - Distributor 23 - Fifth wheel
6 - Stator 15 - Anticavitation valve 24 - Teflon ring
7 - Rotor 16 - Distributor body 25 - Upper cap
8 - Intermediate flange 17 - Antish
Antishock
ock valve
9 - Non return valve 18 - Anticavitation valve
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel and steering column (refer to: Steering Wheel and Column - Removal).
2. Car
Carry
ry ou
outt the ble
bleed
eding
ing of the hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic cir
circui
cuitt (re
(refer
fer to: Co
Compl
mplete
ete Hyd
Hydrau
raulic
lic Cir
Circui
cuitt - Ble
Bleed
eding
ing of oil fro
from
m Hyd
Hydrau
raulic
lic
Circuit).
CAUTION
Keep the distributor pipes in a vertical position so as to avoid the loss of too much fluid.
3. Loosen the unions of the four pipes 1

1 and
and remove the distributor 2.
2 .
255

1 - Distributor pipes
2 - Distributor
1 - L union
2 - Lock nut
3 - Positioning ring
4 - O-ring
DISMOUNTING 5 - Washer
1. Fi
Fix
x the distri
distributo
butor
r 1
1 in a ho
horiz
rizont
ontal
al pos
positi
ition
on in a vic
vice.
e.
2. 4.
Loosen
hers the unions 2
unions 2 and remove the copper was-
3 underneath. Loosen
hers
hers 2 the unions 1
unions 1 and remove the copper was-
underneath.
2 underneath.
1 - Unions
1 - Distributor 2 - Washers
2 - Unions
3 - Washers
5.Only
On ly if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary,
y, ha
havi
ving
ng ha
had
d to ch
chan
ange
ge th
the
e se
seal
al on
the cover, work as follows:
3. Loosen the lock nut 2
nut 2 and
and remove the L union 1
union 1 to-
to-
gether with ring 3
ring 3,, O-ring 4
O-ring 4 and
and the washer 5.
5.
256

CAUTION
— Only two of the seven fixing screws of the dis- (5) Remove the teflon ring 6
ring 6,, the high pressure O-ring
tributor body caps must be only loosened, in 5 an
andd the
then
n thering 3 an
and
d thelow prepressu
ssure
re O-r
O-ring
ing 3 pla-
order
ord er to pr
proce
oceed
ed wit
with
h the tim
timing
ing of the dis
distri
tribu-
bu- ced inside the cover, with the help of a pointed imple-
tor during the remounting. ment.
— Bef
Before
ore pr
proce
oceedi
eding
ng to tak
take
e the dis
distri
tribut
butor
or apa
apart,
rt,
mark the relative position between the upper
cover and the distributor body with a notch.
— Proceed to remove the parts taking care not to
drop any or loss their order.
(1) Lo
(1) Loos
osen
en fi
five
ve of th
the
e se
seve
venn fi
fixi
xing
ng sc
scre
rews
ws of th
the
e up
uppe
per r
cover 4
cover 4 an
and
d low
lower
er cov
cover
er 1
1 of thedistri
thedistribut
butor
or bo
body
dy 2 then
loosen the other two screws.
(2) Rem
Removethe
ovethe up
uppeperr cov
cover
er com
comple
plete
te wit
with
h thejoint
thejoint3 3.
1 - Cover
2 - O-ring
3 - Low pressure O-ring
4 - Teflo
Teflonn low press
pressure
ure ring
5 - High pressure O-ring
6 - Teflon high pressure ring
7 - Fifth wheel
8 - Axle bearing
9 - Grooved hub
10 - Joint
(6) Lubricate the new seals then proceed with the re-
mounting of the low pressure seals, first inserting the
1 - Lowe r cover O-ring 1 in ththe
e ex
exte
tern
rnal
al ra
radi
dial
al gr
groo
oove
vess of th
the
e ho
hole
le in th
the
e
cover 3,
3 , then the Teflon ring 2
ring 2,, being careful to bend
3 - Joint
4 - Upper cover
the
the ri
ringint
nginto o a he
hear
artt sh
shap
ape e an
andd to pl
plac
ace
e it onthe O-
O-riring
ng
so that it lies properly all the way round.
(3) Pushing from the outside towards the inside, rere-
move the grooved hub 9 the axle bearing
bearing 8 and the
fifth wheel 7.
wheel 7.
(4) Pick off the O-ring placed on the top inside of the
cover 1 with
1 with a pointed instrument.
257

1 - Lower cover
2 - Spacer
3 - Rotor
4 - Stator
5 - Flange
6 - Capacity shutter
(3) Remove the O-rings on the stator and the flange

from their seats and lubricate the new O-rings and re-
place them correctly.
CLEANING CHECKS AND CONTROLS
1. Pro
Procee
ceed
d wit
with
h an acc
accura
urate
te cle
cleani
aning
ng of the dis
distri
tribut
butor
or
parts.
2. Ch
Check
eck tha
thatt all rec
recon
ondit
dition
ioned
ed areareas
as pre
presen
sentt no tra
trace
ce
of exexce
cess
ss we
wear ar,, sc
scra
ratc
tche
hess nonorr ot
othe
herr fa
faul
ults
ts;; if so
change them.
3. Check that the grooves of the capacity shutter, ro-
tors and stator are not worn or cracked. If so change
the damaged parts.
1 - O-ring 4. Verify that the distributor body is not craked or da-
2 - Teflon ring maged in any way. If so change the distributor.
3 - Cover 5. Che
Check
ck the con
conditditionof
ionof the thrthrea
eads
ds on the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor
and
an d on th
the
e ou
outstsid
idee of un
unio
ions
ns.. If th
they
ey ar
are
e wo
worn
rn or dadama
ma--
ged change them.
(7) Referring to the previous enlarged diagram mount
the new high pressure seal first placing the O-ring
O-ring 5
and then ring 6
ring 6..
REMOUNTING
NOTE
Press
Press do
down
wn the Tef
Teflon
lon rin
rings
gs aft
after
er you ha
have
ve pos
positi
itione
oned
d
CAUTION
them in order to get them to lie correctly.
If during remounting; you loose the order of the
parts of the entrainer with respect to those of the
distri
dis tribut
butor,
or, ins
insert
ert the en
entra
traine
inerr 1 in the dis
distri
tribut
butor
or
6. Us
Use
e th
the
e fo
foll
llow
owin
ing
g pr
proc
oced
edur
ure
e on
only
ly if yo
you
u ha
have
ve ha
had
d to
2 in such a way that the helical cables are turned
change the seals placed in the back part of the distri-
toward
tow ards
s the fro
front
nt of the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor,, an
and
d the hel
helica
icall
butor.
is placed in such a way that its upper part enters
(1) Completely loosen the last two fixing screws.
the distributor by about 1.5 mm (0.0590 in).
(2)) Re
(2 Remo
move
ve th
the
e lo
lowe
werr co
cove
ver
r 1
1, th
the
e sp
spac
acer
er 2
2, th
the
e ro
roto
tors
rs
3, thestato
thestator
r 4
4, theflang
theflange e 5 and the capa
capacity
city shut
shutter
ter 6
6.
258

3. Position the intermediate flange being careful to

correctly center the holes for the fixing screws.
4. Position the stator 1 centering
1 centering the fixing screw ho-
les with those of the intermediate flange.
5. Position the rotor 2 keeping
2 keeping the cable housing bet-
ween
we en th
the
e ro
roto
torr an
and
d th
thee st
stat
ator
or tu
turn
rned
ed do
down
wn an
andd al
alig
igne
nedd
with centreline X-X.
6. Cou
Couple
ple the spi
spigo
gott 3 of th
the
e ca
capa
paci
city
ty sh
shut
utte
terr in th
the
e ro
ro--
tor, with the line of the two bolts perpendicular to cen-
terline X-X.
1 - Entrainer
2 - Distributor
1. Position the control spigot of the capacity shutter 1

1
taking
taking ca
care
re th
that
at th
the
e pi
pin
n 2 is fi
fixe
xed
d in
insi
side
de th
the
e tw
two
o ca
cabl
bles
es
of the dis
distrib
tributo
utorr whi
which
ch arealign
arealigned ed wit
with
h theserra
theserratio
tion
n of
the hook of the entrainer 3. 3 .
1 - Stator
2 - Rotor
3 - Spigot
7. Proceed to check the axle play only if it has been

necessary to change one of the parts (refer to: Axle
Play Adjustment).
8. Mou
Mount
nt the spa
spacer
cer 2
2 an
and
d the low
lower
er cov
cover
er 1
1 and inse
insert
rt
the seven fixing screws.
1 - Capacity shutter
2 - Pin
3 - Entrainer
2. Turn the capacity shutter until the two nuts are in

line, as shown on the serration, and are parallel with
the external face of the distributor body.
NOTE 1 - Lower cover

During the following steps keep the entrainer and the 2 - Spacer
capacity shutter in the indicated position.
259

9. Proceed with the remounting of the front parts wor- AXIAL PLAY ADJUSTMENT
king in th
king the
e re
reve
verse
rse or
orde
derr an
and
d ad
adhe
heri
ring
ng to th
the
e fo
foll
llow
owin
ing
g
instructions.
— Lubricate the grooved hub on the front cover be- CAUTION
fore mounting. The adjustment
adjustment whic
whichh is indis
indispen
pensabl
sablee if ther
theree
— Check that the notches on the upper and the disdis- have
ha ve be
been
en rep
replac
laceme
ements
nts and any
anywa
way
y ne
nece
cessa
ssaryry if
tributor body coincide. the inside of the distributor has been taken to pie-
— Tighten the fixing screws to the following torque: ces,, ser
ces serves
ves to dete
determin
rmine e the spa
spacer
cer thic
thicknes
kness,s,
placed
pla ced be
betwe
tween
en the met
meter
ering
ing pu
pump
mp an
and
d the sp
spigo
igott
lever, so as to correctly position the distributor in
Tightening torque its housing.
Distributor cover fixing screws
20±3 Nm (196 ± 2,94 kgm; 1417.08 ± 21.26 ft lb)
NOTE
— During the tightening of the fixing screws try a Before
Before attac
attaching
hing the comp
comparato
aratorr to the distri
distributo
butor
r
turn the hub on the upper cover, this is in order body place it flat and zero it.
to guarantee a uniform distribution of the spring
load.
1. Using thetest ba
barr 5.9
5.903
030.3
0.333.
33.0
0 tog
togeth
ether
er wit
with
h a cen
cen--
10. Remount the unions of the distributor working in tesimal comparator 5.9030.272.0 positioned on the
the following manner. uppe
up perr par
partt of the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor bo
body
dy 1, pu
push
sh th
thee fe
feel
eler
er pi
pin
n
(1) Position the washer 7
7 and tighten the unions 6
unions 6 to 2 int
into
o con
contac
tactt wit
with
h the gro
groove
ove 3 of the he
helic
lical
al en
entra
traine
iner
r
the prescribed torque. and take the reading.
Tightening torque
Refer to: GENERAL
Bolt tightening regulations
(2) Pos
Positi
ition
on the was
washer
her 5
5 on the uni
unions
ons 6, fi
fitt ri
ring
ng 3 and
O-ring 4
O-ring 4 on the L union and tighten it until the O-ring
touches the washer
(3) Keeping underneath
the position of the it.
union 1 use a box
wrench to tighten the lock nut 2 to the prescribed
prescribed
torque.
Tightening torque
Refer to: GENERAL
Bolt tightening regulations
2 - Knob
3 - Entrainer groove
CAUTION
Turn the
as not todistributor body with
move the internal extreme caution so
parts.
2. Turn the distributor and position the spacer 1 then

1 then
position the test bar 5.9030.333.0 together with the
centesimal comparator 5.9030.272.0 on the distribu-
tor body 2
body 2 in
in such a way that the feeler pin 3
pin 3 touches
touches
the edge of the spacer.
3. Tu
Turn
rn theentra
theentraine
inerr an
and
d tak
take
e a rea
readin
ding:
g: if themediu
themedium m
movement between the two values is greater than
0.05 mm (0.0019
mm (0.0019 in) insert a spacer 1 of
1 of an adequate
size.
1 - L union 5 - Washer
2 - Lock nut 6 - Union
3 - Positioning ring 7 - Washer
4 - O-ring
260

REASSEMBLY
Proceed
Procee d wit
with
h thereass
thereassem
embly
bly of thedistr
thedistribu
ibutor
tor wo
worki
rking
ng
in the reverse order (refer to Steering Wheel Steering
Column - Reassembly) adhering to the following ins-
tructions:
— Top up the level of the hydrostatic circuit oil (re-
fer to: Steering Oil Tank - Reassembly).
— Deareate the circuit (refer to: Complete Hydraulic
Circuit - Deaereation of the Hydraulic Circuit).
1 - Spacer
2 - Distributor
3 - Feeler pin
POWER STEERING HOUSING

DOUBLE EFFECT FOR 4 WHEEL/DRIVE TRACTOR
1 - Gudgeon pin
2 - Cylin
Cylinder
der
3 - Lock nut
4 - Piston
5 - Support link
6 - Bush
7 - Gasket
8 - Dust cover ring
10 - Ring nut
11 - Shaft
13 - Ball bearing
14 - Spacer
15 - Grease nipple
261

REMOVAL 4. By pu
pull
llin
ing
g it fr
from
om th
the
e in
insi
side
de,, ex
extr
trac
actt th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt 1 com-
plete with the bush 2
bush 2 and
and the piston 3
piston 3..
Unfasten the unions and remove the power steering
housing (refer to: Front Axle - Removal).
CAUTION
AVERTISSEMENT
Neve
Neverr pu
putt th
the
e cy
cylin
linde
derr in a vi
vice
ce bl
bloc
ocki
king
ng it fr
from
om th
the
e
cable end.
1. Fix the jack ball bearing in a vice with protective
jaws.
2. Loosen the ring nut 1
nut 1 of
of the bush 2
bush 2 and push it in-
side the cylinder.
1 - Ring nut
2 - Bush
3. Rem
Remove
ove the com
compre
pressi
ssion
on rin
ringg 1 fr
fromits
omits se
seat
at onthe
cylinder 2 using
2 using a pointed tool.
1 - Shaft
2 - Bush
3 - Piston
5. Fix the roller 6 on

6 on the shaft in a vice and loosen the
lock nut 2.
nut 2.
6. Remove the piston 1piston 1 the
the bush 4
bush 4 and
and the ring nut 5
nut 5
by pu
pull
llin
ing
g it of
offf th
thee sh
shaf
aft.
t. It ne
nece
cess
ssar
aryy pu
push
sh th
the
e su
supp
ppor
ortt
link 7
link 7 on
on the piston with a pointed implement.
2 - Cylinder
262

8. If
it is necessary to change the gasket 1 1 on
on the in-
side
side of th
the
e bu
bush
sh 2, fi
firs
rstt re
remo
move
ve th
the
e du
dust
st ri
ring
ng 3 the
thenn re-
move the gasket.
1 - Gasket
2 - Bush
3 - Dust ring
1 - Piston 4 - Extruder ring
2 - Self locking nut
3 - Shaft
4 - Bush
CHECKS AND CONTROLS
5 - Ring nut
6 - Roller
7 - Support link 1. Check that the support links and dust rings are not
worn. If so, change them.
7. If necessary, with the help of a pointed implement, 2. Check that all the sliding areas of the shaft and the
take the compression rings
rings 1 from their seats then, cylind
cyl inder
er arenot scr
scratc
atched
hed,, tooworn or aredama
aredamagegedd in
tapping with a hammer and punch, extract the ball any way. If they are change them.
bearing 2
bearing 2 from
from the side you have taken the compres- 3. Check the fixing roller works correctly; in particular
sion ring from. check for excessive wear, scratches or oxidization. If
damaged change it.
REMOUNTING
1. Ifpreviously moved, mount the support link on the

piston working as follows:
(1)) He
(1 Heat
at th
the
e su
suppppor
ortt li
link
nk in wa
wate
terr he
heat
ated
ed to a te temp
mper era-
a-
ture of 90°C (194°F) for approximately five minutes.
(2) Usi
Using
ng too
tooll 5.9
5.9030
030.50.501.0
1.0 pla
place
ce it on the insinside ide of the
piston 1
piston 1 and slip on it the support link 2 2..
(3) Press the support link into its seat on the inside of
the piston 1
piston 1 with the sleeve of the tool. Then using a
ring
ring ga
gaug
uge e pr
pres
esss an
and d ke
keep
ep th
this
is po
posisiti
tion
on un
untitill th
thee ri
ring
ng is
completely cold.
2 - Ball bearing
263

1
2 -- Piston
Support link
2. Proceed with the remounting of the power steering working in reverse order adhering to the following instruc-
tions.
— If it has been necessary to remove the gasket inside the bush be careful not to damage the new parts when
remounting them as shown in the diagram.
— Remount the compression ring placed in front of the bush, first inserted one end and then the other so as to
avoid the bending of the ring.
— Accurately lubricate the dust ring and the roller.
— Correctly position the two conical parts of the piston and shaft then tighten the fixing screws.
264

REASSEMBLY
1 - Dust ring
2 - Ring nut
3 - Gasket
4 - Bush
5 - Cylinder
6 - Support link
7 - Self locking nut
8 - Ball bearing
9 - Compression rings
10 - Piston
11 - O-ring
12 - Shaft
Proceed
Procee d wit
withh the rea
reasse
ssemb
mbly
ly of the po
power
wer ste
steeri
ering
ng wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order
er (re
(refer
fer to: Fro
Front
nt Axl
Axle
e - Rea
Reasse
ssemb
mbly)
ly)
adhering to the following instructions.
— Reassembly completed, grease the fixing pins by way of the grease nipples.
— Top up the level of the hydraulic circuit oil (refer to: Steering Oil Tank. Reassembly).
— Proceed with the deaereation of the circuit (refer to: Complete Hydraulic Circuit - Deareation of the Hydraulic
Circuit).
265

SINGLE EFFECT FOR 2 WHEEL/DRIVE TRACTOR

1 - Cylinder
2 - Support link
3 - Rubber ring
4 - Dust cover
5 - Piston
6 - Compression
7 - Roller
REMOVAL
Loosen the cylinder and remove the power steering (refer to: Front Axle -Power Steering - Removal).
DISMOUNTING
Referring to the initial enlarged diagram operate as follows:

1. Fix the roller of cylinder 1 in
1 in a vice with protective jaws then extract the piston 5
piston 5..
2. If ne
neces
cessar
sary
y pic
pick
k ou
outt thecomp
thecompres ressio
sion
n rin
ring
g 6 andextra
andextract
ct therolle
theroller
r 7
7 fro
from
m theside youhave rem remove
oved
d the com
compre
pres-
s-
sion ring using a hammer and punch.
3. If necessary, pick out with a pointed tool, the dust cover 4
cover 4 the
the plastic support links 2
links 2 the
the rubber ring 3
ring 3..
CHECKS AND CONTROLS
1. Verify that the sliding areas both of the shaft and the cylinder do not show signs of scratching, are excessively
worn or are damaged in any way. If they are change the damaged parts.
2. Verify that the support links and the dust guard rings are in good condition. If not change them.
3. Verify that the roller works correctly. Also check far excessive wear, scratching or signs of oxidization. If faulty
change it.
REMOUNTING
Proceed with the remounting of the power steering working in the reverse order adhering to the following instruc-
tions.
— Remount the support links in the order given in the diagram and then the dust guard.
— Accurately lubricate the dust guard and the rollers.
266

1 - Cylinder
2 - Support link
3 - Rubber ring
4 - Dust guard
5 - Piston
7 - Roller
REASSEMBLY
Procee
Proceed
d wit
with
h the rea
reasse
ssembl
mbly
y of the cyl
cylind
inders
ers wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order
er (re
(refer
fer to: Fro
Front
nt Axl
Axle
e - Rem
Remou
ounti
nting)
ng) adh
adhe-
e-
ring
— to the following.
Reassembly completed, lubricate the fixing pins by way of the nipples.
— Top up with the level of the hydraulic oil (refer to: Steering Oil Tank - Reassembly).
267

PAGE INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANC
268

PIPING
CHECKS AND CONTROLS 6. On remounting the pipes be careful not to twist
them.
With reference to the diagram on page 1 (Circuit Dia- 7. On com
comple
pletio
tion
n of the op
opera
eratio
tion
n tig
tighte
hten
n all the
gram
gram)) pr
proc
ocee
eed
d wi
with
th a ca
care
refu
full vi
visu
sual
al ch
chec
eck
k of al
alll th
the
e pi
pi-- unions to the torque prescribed and top up the oil to
ping and unions. the quantity and type prescribed. Tightening torque
(refer to: Steering Oil Tank - Reassembly)
FLEXIBLE PIPES b. Special procedure for various types of pipes
Check
Check tha
thatt thepipe
thepipes
s 9, 6 and 12 arenot dam
damag
aged
ed,, and
in particular do not show signs of rubbing, slits, holes
or porosity or are in any way damaged. If necessary Pipes leading out of the distributor
change the pipes that are damaged.
Above all check that the flexible pipes do not touch or
interf
interfere
ere wit
with
h the en
engin
gine
e blo
block
ck sho
should
uld tha
thatt mov
movee 1. Remove the steering wheel and the steering co-
through vibrations. lumn (refer to: Steering Wheel Steering Column - Re-
moval).
2. Remove the side hoods.
3. Disconnect the electrical connections 1 and the
RIGID PIPES
cable mass
mass 2 fixed to the back of the panel board 3
Check that pipes 5
pipes 5,, 7, 13 and
13 and the union pipes on the then loosen the two fixing screws, one on the left and
power steering are not damaged and in particular do one on the right hand side of the panel board.
4. Working with great care, remove the panel board
not show signs of marks, oxidization or are deformed.
If necessary change the pipes that are damaged. without damaging the pipes, electric cables or any-
thing else near them.
UNIONS
— Check that the threaded unions present are tigh-

tened properly and have no traces of oxidization
or are otherwise damaged.
— If there are oil leaks, gently tighten the unions
and clean the leak. If it insists, change the union.
NOTE
On union where there is an O-ring present, or a gas-
ket, if the leak persists check the integrity of the part
and if necessary change it.
REPLACEMENT
a. Common procedure for all piping.
WARNING
Operate with care if the engine is hot.
1. Bleed the hydraulic circuit (refer to: Oil Bleeding).

2. Wh
When
en you sta
start
rt dis
dismo
mount
untingpipes
ingpipes blo
block
ck the en
ends
ds to
avoid the entry of foreign matter. 1 - Electrical connections
3. To remove the rigid pipes, loosen the unions from 2 - Cable mass
both ends. 3 - Back of panel board
4. To rem
remove
ove the fle
flexib
xible
le on
ones,
es, dis
discon
conne
nectct the fle
flexib
xible
le
5. Bleed the steering oil (refer to: Oil Bleeding).
pipes from the other end then remove.
6. Discon
Disconnect
nect the unio
unions
ns 1 fro
from
m the eng
engine
ine sid
side
e pip
pipes
es
5. Lo
Loose
osen
n allthe ban
bandsds tha
thatt fix thepipe
thepipess to thetract
thetractor.
or.
2 loosen the lock nut 3
nut 3 and remove the pipes 4
pipes 4 from
the inside of the cabin.
269

2. Loosen the three socket head fixing screws of the

intake pipe 1
pipe 1 and
and that of the breather pipe 2
pipe 2 of
of the oil
pump 3
pump 3..
3. If necessary, then loosen the other end of the pipe
and
an d re
remo
moveve it
it,, ei
eith
ther
er fro
from
m th
the
e ta
tank
nk or fr
from
om th
thee le
left
ft si
side
de
of the tractor.
1 - Intake pipe
2 - Breather pipe
3 - Oil pump
RESOUNDER
REPLACEMENT
NOTE
To facilitate the operation it is necessary to lower the
left tank (refer to: Fuelling - Tanks - Removal steps
from 1. - 9.).
1. Loosen the pipe unions

unions 1 and
and 3 using a contrast
spanner on the resounder union, then remove the re-
sounder 2.
2 .
2. Pro
Procee
ceedd wit
with
h the rea
reasse
ssembl
mbly y of the neneww res
resoun
ounde
der
r
working in the reverse order and tightening the pipe
unions with a contrast spanner.
1 - Unions 3 - Lock nut

2 - En
Engi
gine
ne si
side
de pi
pipi
ping
ng 4 - Di
Dist
stri
ribu
buto
torr pi
pipe
pes
s
7. On
Only
ly if it is ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y to re
remo
move
ve th
the
e ri
rigi
gid
d si
side
de pi
pipe
pes
s
of th
the
e st
stee
eeri
ring
ng,, lo
loos
osen
en th
the
e T un
unio
ions
ns pl
plac
aced
ed on th
the
e en
end
d
of the unions already removed.
8. Following the run of the rigid pipes, loosen all the
parts that fix to the engine and remove.
Pipes entering and coming out of the pump
1. Lift
the tractor
tractor ont
onto
o a sta
stand
nd,, rem
remove
ove the baback
ck 1 - Pipe joining resounder
resounder to pump
wheels and then lower the tank (refer to: Fuelling - 2 - Resounder
Tanks - Removal steps from 1. - 9.). 3 - Pipe joining resounder the hydrostatic distributor
270

OIL PUMP
1 - Hydraulic lifting pump 9 - Hydrostatic steering breather 15 - Pivot
2 - Gasket pipe pump 16 - Shoulder ring
3 - Spacer 10 - O-ring 17 - Ball bearing
4 - Ball bearing 11 - Hydrostatic steering hydraulic pump 18 - Seeger
5 - Joint 12 - Hydrostatic steering delivery 19 - Gear wheel
6 - Universal joint pipe pump 20 - Lifting pump breather pipe
7 - Gear wheel 13 - Cover 21 - Lifting pump oil delivery pipe
8 - Lubrication pipe 14 - Pin
REMOVAL
1. Ho
Hold
ld th
the
e tr
trac
acto
torr on a st
stan
and
d an
and
d re
remo
move
ve th
the
e ba
back
ck wh
whee
eels
ls,, th
then
en lo
lowe
werr th
the
e ta
tank
nk (re
(refe
ferr to
to:: Fu
Fuel
elli
ling
ng - Ta
Tank
nks
s Re
Remo
mova
vall
steps from 1. - 9.).
2. Refe
Referrin
rringg to the ori
origin
ginal
al enl
enlarg
arged
ed dia
diagra
gramm loo
loosen
sen the thr
three
ee soc
socket
ket hea
headd scr
screws
ews fix
fixing
ing the del
delive
ivery
ry pip
pipe
e 12 and lo-
osen the fixing bands of the flexible breather pipes 19pipes 19 from
from the oil pump.
3. Loosen the four screws fixing the pump 11
pump 11 to to the cover 13.
13 .
4. Remove the pump together with the gasket 2 2 and
and the O-ring 10
O-ring 10 of
of the delivery pipe 12.
pipe 12.
5. With ref
refere
erence
nce to the ori
origin
ginal
al en
enlar
larged
ged dia
diagra
gramm rem
remove
ove the spaspacer
cer 3
3 an
and
d the joi
joint
nt 5 the
thenn usi
using
ng a ma
magngnet
et rem
remove
ove
the two universal joints 5
joints 5 joining the joints 5
joints 5 to
to the gear 7.
7 .
6. Only if you have had to work on the main pump, use the following instructions.
(1) Remove the lifting housing (refer to: Lifting Group Lifting Housing - Removal).
(2) Loosen the unions for the lubrication pipes 8.
pipes 8.
(3) Loosen the three socket head screws fixing the oil pump delivery pipe 21.
271

(4) Loosen the bands from the pump breather pipe 20

pipe 20..
(5) Loosen the four screws fixing the lifting pump 1
pump 1 and
and remove it together with the gasket 2,
gasket 2, the
the spacer 3 and
3 and the
joint 5
joint 5..
(6) Loosen the twelve screws fixing the cover and remove it 13 it 13..
(7) Fix the cover in a vice, then using a hammer and punch extract the pin 14.
pin 14.
(8) Extract the pivot 15
pivot 15 using
using a hammer and punch, then remove the gear 19 together
19 together with the shoulder ring 16.
ring 16.
(9) Extract the gear 7 together
7 together with the two ball bearings 4
bearings 4 from
from the cover 13.
13 .
DISMOUNTING
1 - O-ring
2
3 -- Support
Cover link
4 - Gasket
5 - Segme
Segment
nt core
6 - Gasket
7 - Key
8 - Bearin
Bearings
gs
9 - Bushes
10 - Pipe union
11 - Pump body
12 - Engine block
13 - Conductor pinion
CAUTION
Pumps that have bearings, pinions or sumps which are damaged or worn cannot be repaired because of
their construction.
During a check, because of the possible loss of oil or a irregular delivery pressure it is only possible to
change the gaskets listed in the spares list.
When
Wh en re
remo
moun
untin
ting,
g, us
usee in an
any
y ca
case
se,, a ne
new
w se
sett of ga
gask
sket
ets,
s, af
afte
terr ha
havi
ving
ng ve
veri
rifie
fied
d th
that
at th
the
e pu
pump
mp do
doeses no
nott sh
show
ow
signs of wear because of rubbing or any other damage.
It is al
also
so in
indi
disp
spen
ensa
sabl
ble
e to ma
mark
rk ea
each
ch sising
ngle
le pa
part
rt in or
orde
derr to be su
sure
re th
that
at yo
youu re
remo
moun
untt th
them
em in th
the
e co
corr
rrec
ectt or
or--
der.
1. Lo
Loose
osen
n thefour scre
screws
ws fix
fixingthe
ingthe cov
cover
er 1
1 an
and
d the en
engin
gine
e blo
block
ck 3 to th
the
e pu
pumpbod
mpbody
y 2. Re
Remov
move
e thewashe
thewashers
rs un
under
der--
neath and then the cover.
272

4. Usinga pointed implement lift out the gaskets 2

then extract the bear
bearings
ings from thei
theirr seats pushing
pushing
from the inside towards the outside being careful not
to loose the joint pin.
1 - Bearings
2 - Gaskets
5. Lift
off the two pinions 1
pinions 1 and
and remove the bushes 2
bushes 2
from the bearings 3
bearings 3 on
on the engine block 4.
block 4.
1 - Cover
2 - Pump body
3 - Engine block
2. Re
Remo
move
ve the pu
pump
mp bo
body
dy 1 com
comple
plete
te wit
with
h the ga
gaske
skett
underneath.
1 - Pinion
2 - Bushes
3 - Bearing
4 - Block
6. Inorder to help with the remounting mark the two

bearings on the block.
7. Remove the bearings being careful not to damage
the joint pin.
1 - Pump body 8. Pu
Putt the blo
block
ck 1 in a vi
vice
ce wi
with
th th
the
e un
unde
derr si
sideupw
deupwar
ards
ds
and remove the seeger ring 2 ring 2..
3. In order to help with the remounting, mark the bea-
ring 1
ring 1 of
of the pump body.
273

4. Ch
Chec
eck
k bo
both
th th
the
e be
bear
arin
ings
gs an
and
d th
the
e pi
pini
nion
ons
s an
and
d ma
make
ke
certain that they are not worn, rubbed by foreign mat-
ter or dented.
NOTE
With the reference of gaskets, if any of the parts are
worn
worn or da
dama
magedyou
gedyou mus
mustt cha
changethe
ngethe who
whole
le pu
pump.
mp.
CAUTION
Do no
nott pr
pres
ess
s on th
the
e an
antie
tiext
xtru
rusi
sion
on ri
ring
ng to av
avoi
oid
d da
da--
maging it.
5. Check with a micrometer, that the height of the an-
+0,05
tiextrusion ring in within 21 mm, if not change it
-0,15
remembering to check the height of the new ring.
6. If the value is higher than that given mount the new
ring and correct the height with a very fine file.
1 - Block
2 - Seeger ring
9. Remove the support link 1

link 1..
REMOUNTING
1. Lubricate all parts with oil before mounting.
2. Correctly position all the gaskets in their seats, ta-
king particular care to correctly position the antiextru-
sion ring 1
ring 1 and
and the gaskets 2
gaskets 2 in
in the bearing seats 3
seats 3..
1
2 -- Gaskets
Antiextrusion ring
3 - Bearings
1 - Support link
3. Pla
Place
ce the pum
pump
p bo
body
dy 1 on th
the
e bl
bloc
ock
k 2 an
and
d ke
keep
ep it in
CHECKS AND CONTROLS position by placing in the holes on the pump body two
of the fixing screws 3
screws 3 of
of the cover.
1. After having removed all the gaskets present both 4. Being careful to remember the references made
on the cover and on the pump body, proceed with an during the dismounting, spread the block with a thin
accurate cleaning of all the parts with solvant. layer of grease then replace the lower bearings 4
bearings 4..
2. Accurately dry all the parts with compressed air
being careful that no solvant remains on them and so
damages the parts.
3. Visually check the inside of the pump body to see
that it is not damaged.
274

NOTE INSTALLATION
The open side of the gasket must be turned towards
the suction side of the pump body. Proceed to install the pump working in the reverse or-
der to the removal adhering to the following instruc-
tions. If it has been necessary to remove the gearbox
5. Ins
Insert
ert the two pin
pinion
ions
s 5 ma
makin
king
g cer
certai
tain
n tha
thatt the
they
y are cove
co verr fi
firs
rstt fi
fitt th
the
e fi
fixi
xing
ng sc
scre
rew
w 1 of th
the
e co
cove
verr th
then
en th
the
e li
lif-
f-
correctly positioned and that they rotate freely. ting pump 2.
pump 2.
1 - Pump body
2 - Base
3 - Screws
1 - Screw
4 - Bearings
2 - Hydraulic lifting pump
5 - Pinions
— Top up the oil level (refer to: Steering Oil Tank

6. Remove the two screws previously used to fix the
Reassembly).
pump and insert the upper bearings.
— Proceed to remove the air from the hydraulic cir-
7. Spread the inside of the cover with a thin layer of
cuit (refer to: Complete Hydraulic Circuit - Hy-
grease then fit the pump body and tighten the four
draulic Circuit Air Removal).
fixing screws to the prescribed torque.
CAUTION
Grad
Gr adua
uall
lly
y ti
tigh
ghte
ten
n th
the
e sc
scre
rews
ws at th
thee sa
same
me ti
time
me ma
ma--
king certain that the rotors turn freely.
Tightening torque
Pump cover fixing screws
- M8
20 ± 3 Nm
(2,04 ± 0,30 kgm; 14.75 ± 2.17 ft lb)
- M10
41 ± 5 Nm
(4,2 ± 0,5 kgm; 30.37 ± 3.62 ft lb)
275

COMPLETE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
SAFETY VALVE CALIBRATION CHECK
1. Pl
Plac
ace
e a ma
mano
nome
mete
terr 5.
5.90
9030
30.5
.513
13.0
.0 wi
with
th th
the
e he
help
lp of a REMOVAL OF AIR
flexible pipe 5.9030.517.4 and union 5.9030.57
5.9030.579.0
9.0 on
the internal union 1
union 1 of
of the power steering 2.
steering 2. 1. Switch on the engine and let it run at minimum.
2. Lo
Loos
osen
en th
the
e tw
two
o un
unio
ions
ns fo
foun
und
d on th
the
e po
powe
werr st
stee
eeri
ring
ng
and turn the steering wheel both ways until all the oil
with air bubbles comes out from them.
3. Ti
Tigh
ghte
ten
n th
the
e tw
two
o un
unio
ions
ns an
and
d ch
chec
eck
k th
the
e le
leve
vell of th
the
e oi
oill
in the tank. Top up if necessary.
NOTE
— It is recommended to change the oil every 1200
working hours by first emptying out the circuit
(refer to: Removal of Oil from Hydraulic Circuit)
and then refilling it (refer to: Reassembly - Stee-
ring Oil Tank).
OIL REMOVAL
1 - Union
2 - Power steering 1. Lo
Loose
osen
n theoil fee
feede
derr uni
unionson
onson thepowe
thepowerr ste
steeri
ering
ng..
2. Switch on the engine.
3. Slowly turn the steering wheel both ways for not
2. Switch on the engine and let it run in idle for a few more than ten seconds each way so as to avoid sei-
seconds. zing the pump.
3. Turn the steering as far as it will go, then turn the
steering
steer ing wheel clocclockwise
kwise until the manometer
manometer pin
stops at a maximum value.
4. If the indicated value is different to that of the maxi-
mum operating pressure for the model in question,
chan
ch angege th
the
e va
valv
lve
e ta
taki
king
ng ca
care
re to us
usee on
onee wi
with
th th
the
e sa
same
me
identification number so that you do not change the
calibr
cal ibrati
ation
on val
value
ue (re
(refer
fer to: Te
Techn
chnica
icall Dat
Data
a an
andd Spe
Specif
cifi-
i-
cations - Technical Details).
5. Repeat the same operation with the manometer
and relative union mounted on the external union of
the
the po powe
werr st
stee
eeri
ring
ng,, tu
turn
rnin
ingg th
thee ststee
eeri
ring
ng whwhee
eell
anti-clockwise.
276

TECHNICAL DATES
Model
Details
110 130 150
Manufacturer BOSCH
Type of pump HY/ZFS 11/]1 - L201

Dinamic oil
pump Max. engine rev. capacity l/1 41

Max. oil temperature °C 90
Manufacturer ZF (Z
(ZAHNRADFABRIK FR
FRIEDRICHSHAFENAG)
SERVOSTAT
Distributor type SERVOSTAT 8494.955.186
8491.955.576
Rotor size mm (in) 11.1 (0.44) 25.4 (1)
Steering wheel volume capacity cm3 84 191
Necessary capacity for servopump I/min 9 17
Allowed capacity for servopump I/min 6 ÷ 30 12 ÷ 50
Max. capacity I/min 80
Max. operating pressure bar delivery 210

return 130
Max. operating Temp. °C 80

Hydraulic dis-
Hydraulic
tributor Pressure of pres
Pressure pressure
sure limiti
limiting
ng calib
calibration
ration
bar 120
valve
Antishock valve calibration pressure bar 180
Antinoise valve calibration pressure bar 1,2
Identification plate readings
(1) From 8490 to 8497 open circui

8494
From 8470 to 8477 closed circuit
(2) Pump rotor height 955
(3) Calibration rating 102
(4) Safety valve calibration value 100
(5) Serial number 0878
(6) Guarantee date 10/82
Thrust capacity Kg 4560

Pow
ower
er ste
tee
e-
Max. piston run mm 185
ring
Steering wheel turns for a complete turn 3,14
Oil filter Type with wire net cartdridge in the tank
277

CONTROLS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Model
Details
110 130 150
Entrance “d” 1,5 mm
Helical distribution positioning
Normal mov
Normal move-
e-
0,05 mm
ment “s”
Distributor axial play
height “h” 21+0,05-0,15 mm
Antiextrusion ring hydrostatic oil pump plant
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Unit: Nm (kgm)
Model
Details
110 130 150
20 ± 3
Distributor cover fixing screws
(196 ± 294)
278

LUBRICANTS
AGIP ATF Dexron (GM Type

Working fluid Oil 110 - 13
130 - 15
150 2l
à Suffix A)
AGIP Grease 30 - (Grease

Steering column Grease
30)
Distributor support links Oil AGIP ATF Dexron
110-130-150
Hydrostatic distributor grooved hub Oil AGIP ATF Dexron
Power steering fixing pin Grease AGIP Grease 30
Lever ball bearings and dust rings Oil AGIP ATF Dexron
279

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool No. Name Page Ref.
5.90
5.9030
30.2
.272
72.0
.0 Com
Compa
para
rato
tor
r
5.90
5.9030
30.3
.333
33.0
.0 Comp
Compar
arat
ator
or su
supp
ppor
ortt
5.90
5.9030
30.4
.443
43.0
.0 Stee
Steeri
ring
ng wh
whee
eell pu
pulle
ller
r
5.90
5.9030
30.5
.513
13.0
.0 Mano
Manome
mete
ter
r
5.90
5.9030
30.5
.517
17.4
.4 Flex
Flexib
ible
le pi
pipe
pes
s
280

Before carrying out other trouble diagnosis first check:

— The pressure and wear of tyres
— Toe in check
— Vehicle must be on flat and dry land with the engine at minimum.
Distri
Distribut
butor
or sup
suppor
portt lin
links
ks ine
ineffi
fficie
cient
nt Change
Change sup
suppor
portt lin
links
ks on dis
distri
tribut
butor
or
Loss of circuit oil Tighten union to prescribed torque.
Loss of oil from unions on distributor, on
pump and on power steering housing If necessary change union gasket
Straining
Straining of distr
distributor
ibutor or power
power steerin
steering
g Change
Change worn
worn rings
rings
Presence of air in circuit Remove air from circuit
Correctt the
Correc the cal
calibr
ibrati
ation
on or cha
change
nge the
Safety valve calibration inadequate
valve
Pump
Pump de
deliv
liver
ery
y pr
pres
essu
sure
re to
too
o lo
low
w Chec
Check
k an
and
d if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y ch
chan
ange
ge pu
pump
mp
Steering wheel hard and/or wheels
rubbing Oil level too low Top up oil level
Change
Change pos
positi
ition
on of pip
pipe
e if nec
necess
essary
ary,,
Air breather pipe position wrong
change
(Only 2 RM) excessive play in steering Adjust play and if necessary change worn
rod parts
Power steering nut loose Tighten to prescribed torque
Top up oi
Top oill to co
corr
rrec
ectt le
leve
vel,
l, th
then
en pr
proc
ocee
eed
d to
Too little oil in the section
remove the air
Presence of air in the circuit Deaerate the circuit
Air breather unions loose Tighten unions to prescribed torque

Servosteering noisy
Pipes int
Pipes interf
erferr
erring
ing wit
with
h the eng
engine
ine blo
block
ck or Change the lie of pipes or if necessary
axle change them
Oil tank filter blocked Change the filter
Screws fixing the steering column distri-

Tighten the screws
butor loose
281

Distributor oil not arriving
- Tank filter blocked Change the filter
Check the piping and event

Check eventually
ually chang
change
e
- Delivery pipe damaged
any that are damaged
Tractor doesn’t turn
- Flexible breather pipes crushed or obs- Chan
Changethe
gethe lieof th
the
e pi
pipe
pes
s an
and
d ifnece
ifnecess
ssa-
a-
tructed ry change
- Irregular function of pump Checkan

kandifne
difnec
cessarych
ycha
angeth
ethe
e pump
- Presence of air in circuit Deaereate the circuit
Oil very dirty Change oil
Oil too hot

Distributeur bloqué
Pres
Press
sur
ure
e li
lim
mit va
valv
lve
e bl
bloc
ock
ked Unb
nblo
loc
ckva
kvalv
lve
e an
and
d ifne
ifnece
ces
ssar
ary
y cha
hang
nge
e it
Front axle too heavy Unload the axle
Change the worn parts and fill the circ

Change circuit
uit
Inadequate oil
with correct oil
Delivery
Delivery shutt
shutter
er of distr
distributorworn
ibutorworn
Filter blocked Change the filter and the worn parts
282
WORKSHOP MANUAL
LASER 110
LASER 130
LASER 150

WORKSHOP MANUAL
Seat and headquarters:

V.le Ing. F. Cassani, 15
24047 Treviglio (BG)
Tel. 0363/4211
Telex: 311472 Samtra I
LASER 110
LASER 130
LASER 150
introduction
This publication is intended for the trained technician who must operate on our tractors.
It con
contai
tains
ns al
alll gen
genera
erall inf
inform
ormati
ation
on rel
relati
ating
ng to ou
ourr tra
tracto
ctorr ran
range
ge,, an
and
d in par
partic
ticula
ularr it hig
highli
hligh
ghts
ts the ins
inspec
pectio
tion,
n, ove
overha
rhauli
uling
ng
and adjustment procedures as well as the main instructions for dismantling and reassembling operations.
The wor
worksh
kshop
op ma
manu
nual
al is a nat
natura
urall sum
summa
maryry for the mec
mecha
hanic
nic wh
whoo has att
atten
ende
dedd the voc
vocati
ation
onal
al tra
traini
ining
ng an
andd spe
specia
cializ
liza-
a-
tion
tion co
cour
urse
ses,
s, wh
whic
ich
h ar
are
e he
held
ld ev
ever
ery
y ye
year
ar at ou
ourr Se
Servi
rvice
ce Sc
Scho
hool
ol,, to pe
perm
rmit
it hi
him
m to pe
perf
rfor
orm
m a pr
prec
ecis
ise
e an
andd qu
qual
alif
ifie
ied
d wo
work
rk on
tractor.
Its contents are therefore an exhaustive reference book for the experienced mechanic who desires to refresh his me-
mory on the sequence of the operations to be done. It is then good practice for every authorized dealer mechanic to
have at his disposal this publication, so that it may be consulted quickly when necessary.
We wiwish
sh to th
than
ank
k in ad
adva
vanc
nce
e fo
forr th
the
e co
coop
oper
erat
atio
ion
n al
alll th
thos
os pe
peop
ople
le,, wh
who
o wi
will
ll le
lett us ha
have
ve th
thei
eirr su
sugg
gges
esti
tion
ons
s in or
orde
derr to ma
make
ke
this publication more complete.
Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy I
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 - ENGINE
ENGINE..............................................................................................................................VII
2 - GEARBOX
GEARBOX CLUTCH......................................................................................................1 - 18
GEARBOX ................................
..................................................................
...................................................................
...............................................19
..............19 - 112
GEARBOX LUBRICATION SYSTEM ..............................
...............................................................
........................................113
.......113 - 120
CLUTCH P.T.O........................................................................................................121 140
3 - AXLES
FRONT AXLE ..........................................................................................................141 - 160
FRONT DRIVING AXLE ..........................................................................................161 - 198
BACK AXLE.............................................................................................................199 - 212
4 - VEHICLE
BRAKES ..................................................................................................................213 - 242
5 - WHEELS AND TYRES

WHEELS AND TYRES ..............................
...............................................................
..............................................................243
.............................243 - 246
6 - CONTROLS
HYDROSTATIC STEERING....................................................................................247 - 268
7 - SYSTEMS
PIPING.....................................................................................................................269 - 270
OIL PUMP................................................................................................................271 - 275
COMPLETE HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT........................................................................276 - 282
8 - CABINE
COMPLETE CABINE...............................................................................................283 - 289
CAB ROOF AND INSIDE ROOF TRIM ...................................................................290 - 293
DOOR .................................
...................................................................
....................................................................
...................................................294
.................294 - 304
DASHBOARD .................................
..................................................................
...................................................................
........................................305
......305 - 310
SEATS ................................
..................................................................
....................................................................
...................................................311
.................311 - 321
9 - LIFTING GROUP
LIFTING GROUP.....................................................................................................335 - 353
LIFTING MECHANISM ..............................
...............................................................
..............................................................354
.............................354 - 381
SUPPLEMENTARY HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT

SUPPLEMENTARY HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT............................................................382 - 410
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING.........................................................................................411 - 422
II Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy
DIMENS
DIMENSION
IONS
S AND WEI
WEIGHT
GHTS
S
Description LASER 110 LASER 130 LASER 150

Tyres
- front 14.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R30
- rear 16.9R38 18.4R38 20.8R38
Max length
with front linkage B mm 4585 4620 4650
in 180,65 182,03 183,21
Max width mm 2340 2330 2360
in 92,20 91,80 92,98
Wheel base A mm 2761 2761 2761
in 108,78 108,78 108,78
Max. Height at safety frame mm 2705 2730 2765
in 106,58 107,56 108,94
Max. Height with cab (standard) mm 2690 2720 2748
in 105,99 107,17 108,27
Operating weight
with driver platform kg 4880 4990 5090
lb 10758 11001 11221
Total max permissible load kg 7500 8100 8500
lb 16535 17857 18739
Operating weight
with cab kg 4800 5300 5800
lb 10582 11684 12787
Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy III
PR
PRES
ESCR
CRIB
IBED
ED LU
LUBR
BRIC
ICAN
ANTS
TS AN
AND
D FU
FUEL
ELS
S
e s
g r * 0 0 0
n u 0 0 0 0 0
a o 0 2 2 5 2
h h 3 1 1 1
C
0 1
s 3 9 l /
n W 9 e / / L A
o 0 1 - v l A - A - D 1
i
t 1 e e 0 4 0 4 I 9
I 2 9
a G
6 M l
9 - E l v
e 3 G 1
L
9 3 G 1
L
9 6 0 9
c E
3 O 4 3 W I 8 W I 8 N 1 2 2 5
i
f F A 0 P 1 0 P 1 O F I 1 - 1 -
i D S E G 0 .
1 A T

1 A T R O G R C
c 0 A F 1 8
e S 4 D 2 - 2
2 E / O E / O X
E G
L G
N
E
p E A G A G
S W
5 C S
F L - B
1 A C L
I M
S O
T
T F
D S O
T
T F
D D
F D
F F
G
D
G
F
D
I M U S U S T S S S
E P A
A A
S
T T 2

C C T
O C E
B F
I
F
I I E Z
t R T S E
c T T A A E
u U L L E
d T U U M R
0 R F
o
r S M M S G
5 O O S
1 P S S R S O
- R O O K O R
K R R R K
0 A K K A
3 K A
A A A
1 l .
-
0
1 +
1
) r
1 l * ) ) )
6 ) e
t
3 2 l
s a *
* *
) 6 4 . . 6 . . 2 . . i
f
R e . .
g 2 . . 8 6 0 . .
X
E r
t
i S . . 6 2 . 7 0 3
( ( 2
0 x A 4
( h
t
i
S L U 1 4 2 3 5 . . M 6
A ( ( W
( 1 2 1 )
L *
*
(
S
L
E
U
F
D
N
A
S
T
N
A
C
I
R s
r
B l u
U o
r o
e
l t h
L x n 0
a o 5
D d r c e r
E e
i
l a h s
t z e
e c
t n e t
f
B p s e
E p R n u
l i
o r
f a
I u d o
i c p i
t e
s n e
l t d n c
R e a x c n a a
l
a u n o
i
C b x l d a t r p
S o e o e a o
t e
r
t n
i b
r
a
r
t r s
e c
i a
i °
E t
r g e k r
a n a b d 1
R a
P
n e e d
i r u a )
*
P E G C S B L R (
IV Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy
CON
CONVER
VERSIO
SION
N TABL
ABLE
E FRO
FROM
M
FROM TO multiply by:

inch cm 2.540
cm inch 0.394
foot m 0.305
m foot 3.281
yard m 0.914
m yard 1.094
Eng. miles km 1.609
km Eng. miles 0.622
2
Sq.in. cm 6.452
2
cm Sq2 .ft. 0.155

Sq.ft. m 0.093
2
m Sq.ft. 10.77
2
Sq.yard m 0.835
2
m Sq.yard 1.197
3
Cu.in. cm 16.39
3
cm Cu.in. 0.061
Cu.ft. Liter 28.36
Liter Cu.ft. 0.035
3
Cu.yard m 0.763
3
m Cu.yard 1.311
Imp.gall. Liter 4.547
Liter Imp.gall. 0.220
US gall. Liter 3.785
Liter US gall. 0.264
pint Liter 0.568
Liter pint 1.762
quart Liter 1.137
Liter quart 0.880
oz. kg 0.028
kg oz. 35.25
lb. kg 0.454
kg lb. 2.203
lb.ft. kgm 0.139
kgm lb.ft. 7.233
lb/in. kg/m 17.87
kg/m lb/in. 0.056
2
lb./sq.in. kg/cm 0.070
2
kg/cm lb/sq.in. 14.22
lb./Imp.gall. kg/l 0.100
kg/l lb./Imp.gall. 10.00
lb./US gall. kg/l 0.120
kg/l lb./US gall. 8.333
3
lb./cu.ft. kg/m 16.21
3
kg/m lb./cu.ft. 0.062
3
cu.ft./lb. m /kg 0.062
3
m /kg cu.ft./lb. 16.21
Nm kgm 0.102
kgm Nm 9.81
kW PS 1.36
PS kW 0.736
2
bar kg/cm 1.014
2
kg/cm bar 0.981
3
dm l 1
3
l dm 1
Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy V
HO
HOW
W TO ORD
RDE
ER SPAR
ARE
E PART
RTS
S
To en
ensur
sure
e pe
perfe
rfect
ct tra
tracto
ctorr eff
effici
icien
ency
cy thu
thus
s avo
avoidi
iding
ng ser
seriou
ious
s dra
drawb
wback
acks,
s, an
and
d to op
optim
timize
ize you
yourr inv
invest
estmen
mentt an
and
d the op
opera
eratio
tio--
nal expenses, the use of “ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS” is recommended.
Spare parts orders must specify the following:
— Tractor serial number and engine serial number (if the engine is concerned).
— Spare part name and reference code.
TRACTOR
TRACTOR IDEN
IDENTIFI
TIFICATI
CATION
ON DAT
DATA
A PLA
PLATE
TE
ENGINE TYPE AND SERIAL NUMBER
TRACTOR FRAME TYPE AND SERIAL NUMBER
VI Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy
ENGINE
Important: For all the instructions of assembly-disassembly,
testing and adjustments, and the regulations of the engine,
please refer to the specific manual of reparation
Motors series 1000/W (code 307.1072.3.5)
Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy VII

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANC
VIII Tractor Manuals Scotland - Please Do Not Copy
GEARBO
GEARBOX
X CL
CLUT
UTCH
CH
CONTENTS
GENE
GENERA
RAL
L FE
FEAT
ATUR
URES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CLUT
CLUTCH
CH PE
PEDA
DAL
L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Remova
Removals
ls andinsta
andinstalla
llatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 HYDRAU
HYDRAULICSYSTE
LICSYSTEM
M BL
BLEED
EEDING
ING . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s ..... ..... ...... ..... 4 CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Disa
Disass
ssem
embl
bly
y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CLUTCHMASTE
CLUTCHMASTER
R CYL
CYLIND
INDER
ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Flyw
Flywhe
heel
el . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Pres
Pressu
sure
re pl
plat
ate
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Disass
Disassem
emblbly
y ..... ...... ..... ..... ..... ....6 Clutch
Clutch di
disk
sk.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Checks
Che cks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s ..... ..... ...... ..... 7 Fork, sliding sleeve, and thrust
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 bear
bearin
ing
g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CLUTCHOPERA
CLUTCHOPERATIN
TING
G CYL
CYLIND
INDER.
ER. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disa
Disass
ssem
embl
bly
y ..... ...... ..... ..... ..... ....9 Techn
Technica
icall fea
featur
tures
es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s ..... ..... ...... ..... 9 Checks
Checks an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts..
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Gene
General
ral spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
HYDRAU
HYDRAULIC
LIC SYS
SYSTEMPIPIN
TEMPIPING
G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 TROUBLES
TROUBLESHOOT
HOOTING
ING AND CORR
CORRECTIO
ECTIONS.
NS. . . . 17
1
LIFTING GROUP
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 SENSIT
SENSITIVEMACHI
IVEMACHINE
NE ME
MEMBE
MBERS
RS . . . . . . . . . . . 35
358
8
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor fun
functi
ction
onal
al dia
diagra
gram
m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
336
6 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Lift
Liftin
ing
g ph
phas
ase
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
360
Neutra
Neutrall ph
phas
ase
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Loweringphase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
360
OIL
OIL FI
FILT
LTER
ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
339 SECONDAR
SECONDARY
Y HYDR
HYDRAULIC
AULICCYLIN
CYLINDER
DER . . . . . . . 361
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
OIL
OIL PU
PUMP
MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
RESO
RESOUN
UNDE
DER
R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
339
9 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
362
Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
LIFT
LIFTIN
ING
G HO
HOUS
USE.
E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
363
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
343
3 LIFTING
LIFTING CONT
CONTROL
ROL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
LEVER
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Cove
Coverr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Leve
Levers
rs in
insi
sideof
deof th
the
e ca
cabi
bin.
n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Lifting
Lifting con
contro
troll arm
arms s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Suppor
Supp ortt le
leve
vers
rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Co-a
Co-axi
xialshaf
alshaftt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Cylind
Cylinder
er an
and
d pis
piston
ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
366
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor con
contro
troll lev
lever
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 PIPI
PIPING
NG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Secon
Seconda
dary
ry dis
distri
tribut
butor
or rem
remova
ovall . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
347
7 Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
366
Checks
Checks an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
347
7 Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 CHECKSAND
CHECKSAND ADJ
ADJUST
USTMEN
MENTS
TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
348 Adjustment of the position control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Extern
External
al con
contro
trols
ls of theliftin
thelifting
g ho
housi
using
ng . . . . . . 367
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
350
0 Liftin
Lifting
g ho
housi
using
ng ins
insidecontr
idecontrols
ols . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Assembled distributor checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Checki
Checking
ng of thestrai
thestrain
n com
comman
mand
d . . . . . . . . . . 368
Dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Checki
Checking
ng of theliftin
thelifting
g sen
sensit
sitivi
ivity.
ty. . . . . . . . . . . 369
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor con
contro
troll lev
lever
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Contro
Controll of theworki
theworking
ng pre
pressu
ssure
re . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Distri
Distribu
butor
tor bod
body
y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 TECHNICAL DATA AND
Rear
Rear bo
body
dy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Fron
Frontt bo
body
dy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
352
2 Tech
Techni
nica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
371
1
Checks
Checks an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
353
3 Contro
Controll an
and
d ad
adjus
justme
tments
nts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Remounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
353 Gene
General
ral pre
prescr
script
iption
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
LIFTIN
LIFTING
G ME
MECHA
CHANIS
NISM
M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Remo
Remova
vall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
356
6 TROUBLE
TROUBLE SHOO
SHOOTING
TING AND CORR
CORRECTIO
ECTIONS
NS . . 378
Chec
Checks
ks an
and
d co
cont
ntro
rols
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
357
7
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
357
335

LIFTING GROUP
GENERAL FEATURES
DESCRIPTION — For the versions with the trailer hydraulic braking
system, the oil coming from the pump crosses
the brake control distributor before entering the
• The automatic
automatic command
command system of the lifter ma- lifting housing.
kes the vehicle a complete working instrument. — Inside the lifting housing; special oil galleries
• The lifter controls
controls are grouped
grouped on
on a dashboard
dashboard send oil to the auxiliary distributor (refer to: Sup-
situated to the right of the operator. plementary Hydraulic Circuit) and then to the lif-
ting distributor.
— The lever with the yellow knob; permits the lifting
and lowering of the implement and determines NOTE
the desired work position for controlled position The engaging of the auxiliary distributor excludes the
jobs. functi
function
oning
ing of the lif
lifter
ter (wi
(with
th exc
excep
epeti
etion
on of the po
posit
sition
ion
— The lever with the green knob permits the auto- “FLOAT”).
matic control of the implement’s work depth in
function with any resistance that the implement
may encounter. — The distributor, at open center, sends oil to the
— Suitably positioning the control levers, the mixed cylinders of the lifter and controls the lifting and
command strain-position is obtained. lowering of the implement.
— For certain versions two outside auxiliary hydrau-
lic cylinders; working on the lifting lever, increase
the lifting capacity.
• A special valve (valvematic
(valvematic device) regulates
regulates the — The hydraulic circuit oil is accumulated in the
flow rate of the oil in the circuit during the lowe- gearbox, completing the cycle.
ring of the implement, reducing the speed during
the last 20
last 20 to 30 cm (7.8
cm (7.8 to 11.7 in) of descent, SECONDARY
DISTRIBUTOR
HYDRAULIC
IMPLEMENTS
independent of the implements weight.
• An anti-shock
anti-shock valve, mounted
mounted on the delivery
delivery to
the: cylinder allows the avoidance of sudden
pressure increase provocated by the bouncing of SAFETY
VALVE
LIFTING
DISTRIBUTOR
LIFTING CYLINDER AND
SECONDARY
SECONDAR Y CYLINDER
the implement, with repercussions to the distribu-
tor, cylinder and hydraulic circuit components.
• The automatic
automatic strain control
control device (SAME origi-
nal system) is connected directly to the lower T RA
RAI LE
LER B AK
AKE T RA
RAI LE
LER H YD
YDR AU
AUL IC
IC
DISTRIBUTOR BRAKES
arms of the lifter. This solution allows an extraor-
dinary sensitivity in appraising the load variations
on the implement.
• The sensitive machine part, part, placed to the right
right of
RESOUNDER
the lifting housing, is achieved by a lever of the
arms of the three point connection In function
with the load variations on the implement, the
sensitive machine part controls the distributor
shaft so as to vary the work depth of the imple- PUMP FILTERS GEAR
ment.
• The circuit utilizes
utilizes the gear
gear oil and
and consists of
of the
following componen
components. ts. Pressurized oil
— Two parallel filters; placed before the pump; eli-
minate eventual impurities present in the oil. A Draining oil
special pressure sensor permits the signalling in
the cabin of any eventual blockages of the filters. DISTRIBUTOR FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
— A large capacity hydraulic pump positioned on
the cover of the gearbox; draws out the engine in LIFTING PHASE
a continuous way by a change wheel and sends
pressurized oil to the lifting unit and to the auxi- The movement towards the left of the distributor shaft
liary distributor. 5 allows the oil coming from the pump to flow over the
— A beeper placed between the pump and the lif- external area of the start up pilot valve. The valve 6
ting housing, absorbes pressure variations and then
then mo
move
vess le
left
ft al
allo
lowi
wing
ng th
the
e pr
pres
essu
suri
rize
zed
d oi
oill to wo
work
rk on
eliminate vibrations and the consequent noise of thestart up val
valve
ve 7 so as toclos
toclosee th
the
e fl
flowto
owto ththee dr
drai
ain.
n.
the system.
336

LIFTING GROUP
The flo
floww of oil tow
toward
ardss the dis
distri
tribut
butor
or sha
shaft
ft 5 (mi
(minor
nor qua
quanti
ntity)
ty) and the int
intake
ake val
valve
ve 7 can flo
flow
w tow
toward
ards
s the no
non-r
n-retu
eturn
rn
valve 4
valve 4 and
and the valvematic 8
valvematic 8 and
and feed the lifting cylinder.
1 - Piston
2 - Push rod
3 - Intake valve
4 - Non return valve
5 - Distributor shaft
6 - Start up pilot valve
7 - Start up valve
8 - Valvematic
9 - Anti-shock valve
External action
Pressurized oil
NEUTRAL PHASE
In ne
neutr
utral,
al, the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor sha
shaftft 5 is in a po
posi
siti
tion
on to bl
bloc
ockk th
the
e fl
flow
ow of oioill to th
the
e pi
pilo
lott st
star
artt up va
valv
lve.
e. In co
cons
nseqeque
uencncee th
the
e
start up valve does not close the flow to drain but allows the down flow of the oil coming from the pump.
The arm
arms s of the lif
lifter
ter rem
remain
ain in poposit
sition
ion whi
whilst
lst the no
non-r
n-retu
eturn
rn val
valve
ve 4 remremainainss clo
closed
sed,, sto
stoppi
pping
ng the oil in the lif
liftin
tingg cy-
linder 2
linder 2 fro
fromm fl
flow
owin
ing
g do
down
wn to
towa
wardrdss th
the
e dr
drai
ain.
n. Th
The
e pr
pres
essu
sure
re of oi
oill in th
the e se
sect
ctio
ion
n of cicirc
rcui
uitt be
betw
twee
een n th
the
e li
lift
ftin
ing
g cy
cyli
lind
nder
er
and the non-return valve 4
valve 4 is determined by the weight of the part.
1 - Secondary piston
2 - Push rod
3 - Intake valve
5
6 -- Start
Distributor shaft
up pilot valve
7 - Start up valve
8 - Valvematic
9 - Antishock valve
Oil coming fromthe pump

Pressurized oil
337

LIFTING GROUP
LOWERING PHASE
By mo
movin
ving
g the di
distri
stribu
butortor sha
shaft
ft 5 to th
the
e ri
righ
ghtt a ce
cert
rtai
ain
n qu
quan
antitity
ty of oi
oill is pe
perm
rmit itte
ted
d to co
come
me fr from
om th
the
e pu
pumpmp an
and
d pr
pres
esse
sess
on the outside surface of the secondary piston 1 piston 1..
De ce fait, le petit piston 1
piston 1 se se déplace vers la droite et pousse l’embout 2 2,, qui agit sur la bille à I’intérieur de la sou-
pape de non retour 4. 4 .
Conseq
Con sequen
uently
tly thesecon
thesecondar daryy pis
piston1
ton1 mo
moves
ves tow
toward
ards s the rig
rightht an
andd pupushe
shess thepush rod 2 wh whic
ich
h wo
work rks
s onthe ba
ball
ll on
the
the in
insi
side
de of th
thee no
non-
n-re
retuturn
rn va
valv
lve.
e. Th
Thee mo
moveveme
ment nt of th
thee ba
ballll al
allo
lows
ws a sm smalalll am
amouount
nt of oi
oill pr
pres
esen
entt in th
the
e in
insi
side
de ch
cham
am--
ber of the valve 4
valve 4 to
to down flow towards the outside provocating a fall in pressure. The difference in pressure esta-
blished between the upstream of the valve 4 and the relative internal chamber determines the movement of the
valve
val ve tow
toward
ardss theright
theright,, thetheref
refore
ore thecondu
theconduit it com
comple
pletel
telyy ope
opens ns tow
towardardss the dra
drain
in.. Th
The
e spe
speed ed of thedown flo flow
w of the
lifting cylinder oil is kept constant to the valvematic 8
8 independent
independent of the weight of the lifter.
1 - Secondary piston
2 - Push rod
3 - Intake valve
4 - Non-return valve
6 - Start up pilot valve
7 - Start up valve
8 - Valvematic
9 - Anti shock valve
External action
Oil flowing fowards the drain

Oil coming fromthe pump
338

LIFTING GROUP
OIL FILTER
REPLACEMENT
1. Operating underneath the vehicle and using span-
ner 5.9
ner 5.9030
030.51
.512.0
2.0 unl
unloos
oosen en the
then
n rem
removeove the two fil
filter
ters
s
1.
2. On re
remo
moun
unti
ting
ng re
refi
fill
ll th
the
e ne
neww fi
filt
lter
ers;
s; wi
with
th th
the
e re
reco
com-
m-
mended oil, lubricate the gasket and hand tighten to
the filter support.
3. Start the engine and check that there is no oil leak
from the filter gaskets.
1 - Hydraulic circuit oil filters

OIL PUMP
For the overhauling of the oil pump lifting control hou-
sing
sin g cir
circui
cuitt fol
follow
low the pro
proced
cedure
ure des
descri
cribed
bed in “Hy
“Hydro
dros-
s-
tatic Steering - Oil Pump”.
CAUTION
NOTE On remounting the pump it is advised to refill the
The lifting control circuit oil pump is found in front of pipe between the pump and oil filters with oil in
that of the steering circuit. To facilitate the dismoun- sucha
sucha wa
way
y asto fa
faci
cili
lita
tate
te th
the
e pr
prim
imin
ing
g of th
the
e pu
pump
mp..
ting
ting an
andd re
remo
moun
unti
ting
ng it is ad
advi
vise
sed
d to su
supp
ppor
ortt th
the
e tr
trac
acto
tor
r
with
wi th an ad
adeq
equa
uate
te ja
jack
ck an
andd re
remo
move
ve th
thee le
left
ft ba
backck wh
whee
eell
and lower the fuel tank.
RESOUNDER
REPLACEMENT
NOTE
For working ease it is advisable to remove the right
rear wheel supporting the, tractor with an adequate
jack.
1. Loosen the pipe fittings

fittings 1 and
and 2 using a contrast
spanner for the fitting of resounder 3. 3. Remove the re-
sounder.
2. Proceed with the remounting using the reverse or-
derr an
de and
d ti
tigh
ghte
ten
n th
the
e pi
pipe
pe fifitt
ttin
ings
gs us
usin
ing g a co
cont
ntra
rast
st sp
span
an--
ner.
1 - Resounder connection pipe - lifting housing

2 - Pump connection pipe - resounder
3 - Resounder
339

LIFTING GROUP
LIFTING HOUSE
1 - Seeger ring
2 - Right arm
3 - Bush
4 - Bush
5 - Seeger ring
6 - Rear position control lever
7 - Strain control lever
8 - Sensitive machine part lever
9 - Distributor with control lever
10 - Tie rod
12 - Spacer
13 - Cam return lever
14 - Fuel vapour air valve
15 - Plate
16 - Retai
Retainer
ner
17 - Air cap
18 - Cover
19 - Gasket
20 - Tie rod
21 - Adjus
Adjustable
table tie rod
22 - Roller
23 - Fork
24 - Tie rod
25 - Lever
26 - Pin
27 - Strain check return lever
28 - Spring
29 - Sensitive machine part return lever
30 - Shaft
31 - Connecting rod
32 - Lock pin
33 - Inside arm
34 - Oil level pipe
35 - O-ring
36 - Left arm
37 - Liftin
Lifting
g house
38 - Position control return lever
39 - Trailer hydraulic brake distributor with brackets and pipes
(only for certain models)
40 - Reso
Resounder
under lifting pipe - liftin
lifting
g house
41 - Piston
42 - Gasket
43 - O-ring
44 - Gasket
45 - Cap
46 - Secondary lifting cylinder control pipe fitting (only for certain models)
47 - Cap
48 - Cylin
Cylinder
der
49 - Teflon ring
50 - O-ring
51 - Position control lever
52 - O-ring
53 - Bush
54 - Tie rod
55 - Secondary distributor with brackets and control lever
340

LIFTING GROUP
341

LIFTING
LIFTING GROU
GROUP
P
PAGE INTEN
INTENTIONA
TIONALLY
LLY
LEFT
LEF T BLA
BLANC
NC
342

LIFTING GROUP
REMOVAL 5. Unh
Unhoo
ook
k the cla
clampi
mping
ng spr
spring
ings
s of the piv
pivots
ots 3 joining
the forks 1
forks 1 and
and the lever 2.
2 . Slip off the pivots and dis-
1. Su
Suppo
pport
rt the cen
centra
trall str
strut
ut 3 an
and
d rem
remove
ove thepin 6 and connect the lever.
slip off the pivot and remove the strut. 6. Unho
Unhookok the spr
spring
ing 6 wh
whic
ichh fi
fix
x th
the
e ro
rods
ds 7 to th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt
2. Re
Remo
moveve the spl
split
it pin 2 su
supp
ppor
ortt th
the
e si
side
de ti
tie
e ro
rod
d 7 and 4 and
and 5
5 and
and separate.
slip off the pin 1
pin 1..
3. Unloosen the clamp screws and remove the sup-
port 4
port 4..
1 - Pin 5 - Pivot
2 - Split pin 6 - Pin
3 - Central strut 7 - Side tie rod
4 - Support
4. For models with secondary hydraulic cylinders, re-

move the cylinder as follows.
(1) Loo
Loosenthe
senthe fitt
fitting
ing11 of th
the
e fu
fuel
el pi
pipeof
peof th
the
e cyl
cylin
inde
ders
rs 3.
(2) Remove the fixing split pin and slip off the pivot 2
and the rel
relati
ative
ve bu bush
sh an
and d tur
turnn the cylinde
cylinderr do
down-
wn-
wards.
1 - Fork
2 - Distributor control lever
3 - Pivot with bracket
4 - Outside shaft
5 - Inside shaft
6 - Metal clip
7 - Lower rod
7. Remove sensitive machine parts (refer to: Sensi-
tive Machine Parts - Dismounting).
8. Disconnect the pipes working as follows.
(1) Take off from the two fuel tanks the relative air pi-
pes.
(2) Disconnect the union fitting tube 3 on the lifting
house.
(3) Unscrew the clamp screw and remove pipe 2 pipe 2 from
from
the pump 6.
pump 6.
(4) Fo
Forr mod
models
els wit
with
h hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic bra
brake
ke di
distri
stribu
butor
tor for tra
traii-
lers, unscrew the union and separate the pipe 5 pipe 5 from
from
the gear cover. Separate also the pipe 5
pipe 5 from the fit-
1 - Fitting ting of the trailer brake distributor.
2 - Secon
Secondary
dary cylinder
cylinder fixing pivot of the arm of the lifter
3 - Secondary hydraulic cylinder
343

LIFTING GROUP
10. Unho
Unhook
ok the liftin
lifting
g hou
housing
sing 1 an
and
d us
usin
ing
g a cr
cran
ane.
e. Li
Lift
ft
the unit, slipping off the studs and the balancing pin
found on the gear box. If present; also remove gasket
2.
CAUTION
Work with particular so as not to damage the ca-
bin.
1 - Resounder
2 - Pressurized oil delivery pipe
3 - Pipe far pump bearing lubrication
4 - Pipe far trailer brake distributor
5 - Oil return pipe far trailer brake
6 - Hydraulic circuit pump
9. Uns
Unscre
crew
w theclampnuts of thetank 1 andoftheplug
4 an
and
d mo
move
ve to th
thee si
side
de.. Un
Unlo
loos
osen
en se
serere 3 an
andd all rem
remai-
ai-
ning nuts fixing the lifting housing 1
housing 1 to the gear box.
1 - Liftin
Lifting
g housing
2 - Gasket
DISMOUNTING
COVER
1. For models with a trailer hydraulic brake system

unscrew the bolt 2
bolt 2 and
and disengage the bracket 3
bracket 3 of
of the
plate 1.
plate 1.
2. Un
Unlo
loos
osen
en th
the
e tw
two o cl
clam
amp
p sc
scre
rews
ws of th
the
e pl
plat
ate
e 1 to th
the
e
lifting housing, move the plate to the side without dis-
connecting the secondary distributor pipes.
2 - Lifting house 4 - Plug for trailer lights

3 - Screws
344

LIFTING GROUP
1 - Pipe support plate
2 - Bolt 1 - Tie rod
3 - Pipe holding arm for trailer hydraulic brake 2 - Adjustable tie rod
4 - Lifting housing cover 3 - Seeger ring
4 - Fork
3. Unloosenthe clamp screws of cover 2 of

2 of the lifting
housing and remove with its gasket. 2. Re
Remov
move
e theSeeg
theSeeger
er rin
ring
g 2 onthe ri
righ
ghtt si
sideand
deand ta
take
ke
off th
off the
e ar
arm
m 1 of theshaft 3 kno
knocki
cking
ng thearm wit
with
h a ma
mal-
l-
let of soft metal.
NOTE
One of the screws fixes the fuel vapour air valve.
1 - Right arm
2 - Seeger ring
3 - Shaft
3. Fro
From
m the lef
leftt sid
side
e of the lif
liftin
ting
g hou
housin
sing
g rem
remove
ove sha
shaft
ft
3 with arm 1
arm 1 and bush 2
bush 2.. From the inside of the hou-
1 - Fuel tank air pipe
2 - Lifting housing cover sing remo
removeve leve
lever
r 6
6 wit
with
h therelat
therelative
ive ins
insidebush
idebush,, for
fork
k5
with
wi th th
the
e sh
shim
im ad
adju
just
stin
ing
g ri
ring
ng an
and
d th
the
e in
insi
side
de ar
arm
m 4 com-
plete with connecting rod.
LIFTING CONTROL ARMS
1. Unhook the Seeger clamp rings of the tie rod 1

rod 1 and
and CAUTION
2 and remove, also remove the clamping Seeger ring The lifting shaft can only be removed from the
3 of the fork 4
fork 4.. housing from the left hand side.
345

LIFTING GROUP
4. Tak
Take
e the lif
liftin
ting
g hou
housin
sing
g an
and
d the bu
bush
sh com
comple
plete
te wit
with
h CYLlNDER AND PISTON
O-ring from the shaft.
1. For mo
model
dels
s wit
with
h tra
traile
ilerr hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic bra
brake
ke dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor,, it
is advisable to remove the distributor, working as fol-
lows:
(1) Unscrew the pipe fitting
fitting 1 and remove the lifting
housing.
(2) Loosen the two bracket 2
bracket 2 clamp screws of the lif-
ting housing and remove the distributor
distributor 3 complete
with pipes and bracket.
1
2 -- L
Beufst harm 4
5 -- IFnosrikde arm
3 - Shaft 6 - Return lever with cam 1 - Oil delivery pipe to the lifting housing
2 - Bracket
DISTRIBUTOR 3 - Trailer hydraulic brake distributor
1. Remove the tie rod 1

rod 1 and
and 2
2,, separating the relative 2. Unloosen the six clamping screws of the flange 1
fixing range. and take off the cylinder complete with piston and
2. Loosen the two screws shown in the diagram and
O-ring situated behind the flange.
remove the distributor 3
3 together with the underlying 3. If necessary, for models with secondary hydraulic
O-ring. cylinders, unscrew the union 2
union 2 and
and remove complete
with its gasket and secondary cylinder delivery pipe.
1 - Tie rod
2 - Tie rod 1 - Lifting control cylinder flange
3 - Lifting control distributor 2 - Union fitting
346

LIFTING GROUP
4. Graduallyblow compressed air into the cylinder 3. If necessary substitute

the O-rings on the inside of
fuelling conduit in order to push the piston to the out- the bush 1.
bush 1.
side. 4. If necessary, remove the bush 1
bush 1 pusing
pusing it towards
the outside with punch and hammer.
CAUTION
Work
Wo rk wit
with
h ca
cauti
ution
on so tha
thatt thepisto
thepiston
n is not ex
expe
pel-
l-
led violently from the cylinder.
DISTRIBUTOR CONTRO L LEVER
1. Wo
Work
rkin
ing
g fr
from
om th
the
e ou
outs
tsid
ide
e of th
the
e li
lifti
fting
ng ho
hous
usin
ing,
g, un
uns-
s-
crew the lever bolts that need removing, take the le-
vers off the return pins and recuperate the tongue.
1 - Bush
SECONDARY DISTRIBUTOR REMOVAL
1. If
necessary, remove the secondary distributor to
the ou
outsi
tside
de of the lif
liftin
ting
g ho
housi
using
ng (re
(refer
fer to: Su
Suppl
pplem
emen
en--
1 - Position control lever tary Hydraulic Circuit - Distributor Dismounting).
2 - Strain check lever
4 - Tie rod
5 - Sensitive machine part lever CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
2. Fro
From
m the ins
insideof
ideof thehousi
thehousing
ng;; tak
take
e off theretur
thereturn
n le-
1. Accurately clean all components.
ver.
2. Check that the grooved profiles of the inside and
NOTE outs
ou tsid
ide
e of th
the
e le
leve
verr an
and
d of th
the e li
lift
ftin
ing
g sh
shaf
aftt ar
are
e no
nott de
den-
n-
Before removing the return lever 1 from
1 from the sensitive ted or show signs of excessive wear; if they do, re-
machine part unhook the spring 2
spring 2.. place the defective components.
3. Check that the bush of the lifting gear shaft is not
scra
sc ratc
tche
hed d or sh
show
ow si sign
gnss of se
seiz
izining
g or ex
exce
cessssiv
ivee we
wear
ar..
Replace the components that are not damaged.
4. Ch
Chececkk th
that
at al
alll th
the
e bu
bush
shes
es on th thee le
leve
verr an
andd on th
the
e li
lif-
f-
ting housing are not worn and that they are firmly in-
serted in their seats.
5. Note the diameters “d” and “D” of the piston and lif-
ting
tin g cyl
cylind
inder
er and checheckck tha
thatt the
theyy are wit
within
hin the val
value
ue li-
mit in the tabtable
le “Pi
“Pisto
ston,
n, Cyl
Cylind
inder
er anandd Se
Secon
condadary
ry Cyl
Cylin-
in-
ders”” (refe
ders (referr to: TechTechnica
nicall Data and Spec Specifica
ification
tions s
Checks and Adjustments).
1 - Sensitive machine part return lever

2 - Spring
3 - Strain check return lever
4 - Position control return lever
347

LIFTING GROUP
REMOUNTING
Proceed with the reass
Proceed reassemb
emblyly of the lifting housing
working in reverse order to the disassembly, taking
note of the following specifications.
— Clean and accurately degrease all the coupling
surfaces of the components.
— Replace all the gaskets and the O-ring, and
check that they are correctly in their seats.
— Replace the gasket on the lifting cylinder piston.
— Apply recommended sealer to the coupling area DISTRIBUTOR
and the cylinder flange and lifting control hou-
sing. 1 - Front body
— Tighten to the prescribed torque the following 2 - Spring fixing pin
components. 3 - Spring
4 - Cover
Tightening torque 5 - O-ring
Cylinder clamp screw to the lifting housing
7 - Non return valve piston control
275 ÷ 295 Nm 8 - Spring
(28 ÷ 30 Kgm; 202.44 to 216.9 ft lb) 9 - Washer
10 - Non return valve control
control push rod
— Lubricate with recommended grease, the groo- 11 - Distributor shaft
ved profiles of the lifter arms and the ends of the 12 - Non return valve
shaft where they have to be mounted. 13 - Spring
— When remounting the shaft on the outside arms 14 - Gasket
and on the inside arm observe the position of 15 - Pivot
oversized teeth markings on the grooved profi- 16 - Spring
les. 17 - Limit stop lever
18 - Adjustment screw
— When remounting the shaft knock, with a soft
19 - Lock pin
metal hammer, to set and allow mounting of the 20 - Pivot
Seeger ring of the outside arms. 21 - Fork
—
Replace the gasket between the lifting housing 22 - Pivot
and the relative cover, remount temporarily, the 23 - Lever
cover without blocking it, as after installation you 24 - Lever
must proceed with the adjusting of the inside 25 - Intermediate fork
components. 26 - Pivot
27 - Small plate
28 - Spacer
REASSEMBLY 29 - Pivot
30 - Lever support
Proceed with reassembly of the lifting housing using 31 - Cap
32 - Intake valve
the
the re
reve
vers
rsee or
orde
derr to th
that
at of th
the
e di
disa
sass
ssem
embl
bly,
y, us
usin
ing
g th
the
e
33 - Rear body
following recommend
recommendations.
ations. 34 - Start up valve
— Clean and degrease accurately the coupling area 35 - Spring
between the lifting housing and gear box and ap- 36 - Spring
ply the recommended sealer. 37 - Start up pilot valve piston
— Position the lifting housing on the gearbox cen- 38 - Spacer
tral pin. 39 - Shoul
Shoulder
der ring
— Lubricate with the recommended grease the lif- 40 - Retaining ring
ting mechanism joints before joining. 41 - Washer with retaining ring seat
— Reassembly completed, start the engine and 42 - Distributor spring
43 - Spring
work the lifter in such a way that the oil in the hy- 44 - Spacer
draulic circuit circulates. Stop the engine, control 45 - Valvematic piston
the oil level in the gear and if necessary top up. 46 - Union
NOTE
Because the oil travels slowly from the lifting housing
.to thegear
thegearbox
box,, wai
waitt for a few min
minute
utes
s be
befor
fore
e che
checki
cking
ng
the oil level.
— Carry out the adjustment on the lifting housing

and check the sensitivity of the lifter (refer to:
Checks and Adjustments).
348

LIFTING GROUP
349

LIFTING GROUP
REMOVAL 2. Rem
Remove
ove the Se
Seeg
eger
er rin
ring
g 4 an
and
d sl
slip
ip of
offf th
the
e pi
pivo
vott 5 so
as to free the fork 3
fork 3 of
of the distributor.
Remove the distributor from the lifting housing, wor- 3. Remove the spring 2
spring 2 and
and if necessary unscrew the
king as described in “Lifting Housing - Disassembly”. pivot 1
pivot 1..
ASSEMBLED DISTRIBUTOR CHECKS

Before dismounting the distributor proceed with the
cont
contro
roll of th
the
e se
seal
al of th
the
e no
non
n re
retu
turn
rn va
valv
lve,
e, us
usin
ing
g th
the
e fo
fol-
l-
lowing instructions.
1. Push theO-rin
theO-ring
g 6 in
into
to th
the
e se
seat
at of th
the
e sp
spac
ace
e 5 indica-
ted in the figure and fix a plate 4
plate 4 below
below the distributor
with
wi th tw
twoo bo
bolt
lts,
s, so th
that
at th
the
e sp
spac
acee 5 is perfe
perfectly
ctly close
closed.
d.
2. Unloosen the anti-shock valve 1
valve 1 keeping
keeping the fitting
3 blocked with a contrast spanner. Remove the valve
with its gasket 2
gasket 2..
3. Join the hydraulic pump 5.9030.520.4 to fitting 3,
pressurize the oil with the pump and check that there
are no leaks from the distributor.
1 - Sp
Spri
ring
ng fi
fixi
xing
ng pi
pivo
vott 4 - Se
Seeg
eger
er ri
ring
ng
2 - Spring 5 - Pivot
3 - Fork
4. Work
Working
ing on lev
lever
er un
unit
it 5 parti
partially
ally extra
extract
ct the distr
distribu-
ibu-
tor shaft 3
shaft 3,, and remove the split pin fixing the pivot 4
pivot 4..
Take off the pivot 4
pivot 4 and
and remove the lever group 5
group 5,, re-
covering the washer 2 2 and the spacer 1.
1 .
2 - Gasket
3 - Union - fitting
4 - Plate
5 - Lifting cylinder delivery oil hole
6 - O-ring
4. If th
ther
ere
e is oi
oill le
leak
akag
age
e it co
coul
uld
d be ca
caus
usedby
edby th
the
e in
inef
effi
fi--
ciency of the non return valve, therefore proceed with
overhauling of the distributor.
DISMOUNTING
DISTRIBUTOR CONTROL LEVER
1. Fi
Fitt th
the
e di
dist
stri
ribu
buto
torr on a su
suit
itab
able
le im
impl
plem
emen
entt fi
fixe
xed
d by a
clamp. 1 - Spacer 4 - Pivot
2 - Washer 5 - Lever unit
350

GROUPE élévateur
5. If ne
neces
cessar
sary
y str
strip
ip thelever un
unit
it tak
takingoff
ingoff therelat
therelative
ive 2. Unloosen the lower screw indicated in the diagram
fixing lock pin with hammer and punch. and separate the two distributor bodies.
6. If necessary dismount lever 2 so 2 so as to remove the
fixing lock pin 4
pin 4 from the pivot 5
pivot 5,, freeing the spring 1
and extract the pivot 3
pivot 3 with the lever 2.
2 . CAUTION
Work with the necessary caution so as to avoid
damaging the inside compartments.
1 - Spring 3 - Pivot
2 - Limit stop lever 4 - Lock pin
DISTRIBUTOR BODY
1. Unloosen
the three screws shown in the diagram.
Remove the lever support 1
support 1..
1 - Front body
2 - Rear body
REAR BODY
1. Remove from the rear body the push rod 1

rod 1 and
and the
relative washer 2,
2, the spring 5
spring 5 and
and the relative spacer
3 and the piston 6
piston 6 from
from the start up valve.
2. If necessary, remove the lock pin at the end of the
distributor shaft 7 an
and d ext
extrac
ractt theshaft 7 fro
from
m thefront
thefront..
3. If necessary, loosen the valve 4
valve 4 and remove.
1 - Lever support
351

LIFTING GROUP
FRONT BODY
1. Remove the O-ring and take off springs 1

1 and
and 3
3..
1 - Non return valve control
control push rod
2 - Washer
3 - Spacer
4 - Intake valve 1 - Distributor spring
5 - Start up pilot valve spring 2 - O-ring
6 - Start up valve piston 3 - Spring
4. Fix the rear body onto a clamp, unscrew cap 2

cap 2 and
and 2. Using pliers take from the body front the piston 1
and the inside shim adjustment ring.
extract
extra ct fr
from
om th
the
e fr
fron
ontt en
end
d th
the
e pi
pist
ston
on of th
the
e st
star
artt up pi
pilo
lott
valve.
5. Unscrew the cap 2
cap 2,, extract the spring and valve 3
valve 3
with pliers.
1 - Non return valve control piston
3. Fix the front body onto a clamp, unscrew the antis-

hock valve 1
valve 1 keeping
keeping blocked the fitting 2
fitting 2 with
with a con-
trast spanner.
4. Unscr
Unscrew
ew fittin
fitting
g 2 an
and
d ta
take
ke of
offf in th
thee fo
foll
llow
owin
ing
g or
orde
der:
r:
piston, spacer, spring and gasket.
1 - Start up pilot valve cap

2 - Non return valve cap
3 - Non return valve cap
352

LIFTING GROUP
1 - Front body
2 - Non return control
control valve push rod
3 - Rear body
5 - Ball
6 - Washer
7 - Non return control valve piston
2 - Fitting
5. Che
Check
ck tha
thatt the cal
calibr
ibrate
ated
d spe
specifcifica
icatio
tions
ns of the
spri
sp ring
ng ar
are
e wi
with
thin
in th
the
e va
valu
lues
es sp
spec
ecif
ifie
ied
d in th
thee ta
tabl
ble
e “D
“Dis
is--
tributor Spring” (refer to: Technical Data and Specifi-
cations Technical Details).
1. Accu
Accuratel
rately
y clea
clean
n all comp
compone
onents
nts of the distr
distribut
ibutor.
or.
2. Check that the distributor shaft, the various pistons
REMOUNTING
inside the distributor body and the relative work seats
Proceed with the remounting working in the reverse
are not scratched or show signs of excessive wear.
order to that of dismounting, taking note of the follo-
3. Check that the distributor shaft and pistons of the
wing instructions:
various valves move smoothly in their seats.
— Clean with specified solvant the cap threads and
4. Che
Checkck the rel
relati
ative
ve dim
dimens
ension
ionss of thepush rod 2 and
the fittings.
the pistons 7
pistons 7 working as follows:
— Replace the copper gaskets and support links.
(1) Insert the valve 4
valve 4 into
into the distributor rear body and
— Apply the specified sealer to the cap threads.
press the ball 5
ball 5 against
against the seat on the same valve.
— Tighten to the necessary torque the following
(2)) In
(2 Inse
sert
rt th
the
e pu
pushsh ro
rod
d 2 to ma
make
ke co
cont
ntac
actt wi
with
th th
the
e ba
ball
ll 5
components.
and note the protrudence “B” of the push rod with res-
pect to the distributor body surface.
Tightening torque
(3) Ins
Insert
ert theshim ad adjus
justme
tment
nt rin
ring
g 8 an
and
d thepisto
thepistonn 7 in
Anti-shock valve to the distributor
the seat on the distributor front body and note the di-
78 ± 4,8 Nm
mension “A” between the inside area of the small rod
(8 ± 0,5 kgm; 57.84 ± 3.62 ft lb)
and the distributor body surface.
(4) Check that the dimensional difference shown cor-
responds to the recommended value.
A – B  0,5 mm REASSEMBLY
If the recommen
recommende dedd val
value
ue is no
nott fou
found
nd ad
adjus
justt the Proceed with the remounting of the distributor on the
thickn
thickness
ess of theshim rin
ringg 8 or rep
replac
lacee thepush rod 2. lifting
lifting housing working
working in reverse order to the dis-
(5) Insert the washer 6
6 and check that the value bet- mounting taking note of the recommenda
recommendations
tions descri-
ween the outside surface of the washer and the distri- bed in “Lifting Housing - Remounting”.
butor body surface is as follows:
C  0,5 mm
If not eliminate the washer 6.

6.
353

LIFTING GROUP
LIFTING MECHANISM
1 - Pivot
2 - Left stabilizer
stabilizer 110
3 - Adjustable strut
4 - Joint
5
6 -- Ring nut stopper
Threaded coupling
7 - Left tie rod 110
8 - Pivot with fastener
9 - Left adjustable
adjustable tie rod 130-150
10 - Pivot
11 - Flange
12 - Faste
Fastener
ner
13 - Greaser
14 - Upper fork
15 - Adjustable coupling
17 - Lock nut
18 - Lower fork
19 - Right adjustable
adjustable tie rod 130-1
130-150
50
20 - Crank handle
handle
21 - Capped fork
22 - Gear wheel
24
25 - Adjusting
Axle bearing
bearin g device
body
26 - Lower fork
27 - Adjus
Adjustable
table tie rod devic
device
e 110
28 - Spacer
29 - Wash
Washer er
30 - Notched nut
31 - Split pin
32 - Bracket
33 - Joint
34 - Coupl
Coupling
ing
35 - Threaded tie rod
36 - Fork
37 - Right stabilizer 130-150
38 - Threaded coupling
39 - Coupl
Coupling
ing with joint
40 - Right stabilizer
stabilizer 110
41 - Pivot.
42 - Bracket
43 - Contour fastener
44 - Lower right arm
45 - Control lever for sensor parts
46 - Oil retainer ring
47 - Connecting shaft lower arm
48 - Left lower arm
49 - Left stabilizer 130-150
50 - Cord
51 - Handle
52 - Lever
53 - Spring
54 - Spring
55 - Pivot
354

LIFTING GROUP
355

LIFTING GROUP
REMOVAL 4. Ta
Take
ke of
offf th
the
e sp
spli
litt pi
pin
n an
and
d ex
extra
tract
ct th
the
e pi
pivo
vott 10
10,, col
collec
lec--
ting the relative washers and separate the stabilizer
1. Support the central strut 2
strut 2,, extract the pin 3
pin 3.. Take 11 from
11 from the support 9
support 9..
off the pivot 4
pivot 4 and
and remove the pin. 5. Take off the split pin 15
pin 15 from
from both sides of the sen-
2. If necessary, unloosen the support clamp screws 5screws 5 sor parts of the control shaft and loosen the two nuts
from the lifting housing and remove the support. 13..
13
3. Extract the pin 6
pin 6.. Support the lifting unit, tak off the 6. Ta
Takeke of
offf th
the
e sp
spli
litt pi
pin,
n, ex
extr
trac
actt th
the
e pi
pivo
vott 1 and remo
remove
ve
pivot and separate the side tie rod 8 from the lifting the lever 4 from
4 from the sensor part.
arm. Place the lower arm 12arm 12 on
on the floor.
1 - Pivot 9 - Support
2 - Central strut 10 - Pivot
3 - Pin 11 - Right stabilizer
4 - Pivot 12 - Lower right arm
5 - Support 13 - Notched nut
6 - Split pin 14 - Control lever for
7 - Pivot sensor part
8 - Rig
ight
ht sid
ide
e ti
tie
e ro
rod
d 15 - Sp
Spli
litt pi
pin
n
356

LIFTING GROUP
7. Un
Unscr
screw
ew the nu
nutt 4 an
and
d ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e pi
pivo
vott of th
the
e le
leve
ver
r 10. Only for models 110
6, the washer 3,
3 , the arm 5
arm 5 and
and the spacer 2. 2 . When
Wh en ne
neces
cessar
sary,
y, pro
procee
ceedd wit
with
h the dis
dismou
mounti
nting
ng of the
8. If ne
neces
cessar
saryy ununscr
screw
ew the bo bolts
lts 1 and remo
remove.
ve. side tie rod length adjusting device as follows.
Meanwhile
Mean while remove the leve lever
r 6 from
from the gro groove
oved
d (1) Unl
Unloo
oosen
sen the fou
fourr scr
screws
ews 2 andsepar
andseparate
ate the cov
cover
er
shape of the sensor part control shaft. 1 from the body 3
body 3..
NOTE
If necessary hit with a soft metal hammer, on the in-
side of the sensor part control lever.
1 - Forked cap
2 - Screw
3 - Adjusting device body
(2) Referring to the enlarged diagram on page 21

page 21,, ex-
1 - Bolt tract the pin 17
pin 17 and
and remove the gear wheel 22
wheel 22 of
of the
2 - Spacer cranking handle 20
handle 20 and
and the adjusting screw 23
screw 23..
3 - Washer (3) Loosen the adjusting screw 23 23 and
and take off the
4 - Castellated nut bearing 24
bearing 24..
5 - Lower right arm
6 - Command lever sensor part
CHECKS AND CONTROLS
9. If
necessary remove the shaft 2
shaft 2 as
as follows:
(1) Drain off oil. 1.
(2) Take off the shaft 2
shaft 2 on
on the left side of the gear. 2. Accurately
Check
Check tha clean
thatt the thelated
articu
art components.
iculated joi
joints
nts do not sho
show
w exc
exces-
es-
(3) Remove the oil guard ring 1
ring 1 from
from both sides of the sive play or signs of oxidization.
gearbox. 3. Check that the lower arms, the stabilizers and the
tie rods are not deformed and are functioning correc-
tly. If not, replace the defective components.
4. Only for models 110

Check the correct functioning of the tie rod length ad-
justing device, in particular check that the gear wheels
of the device are not damaged.
REASSEMBLY
Proceed with the remounting operating in the reverse
order to the dismounting taking note of the following
instructions:
— be-
Lubricate all the pins of the mechanism joints be-
fore remounting.
— If the shaft has been removed from the inside of
the gearbox replace the oil guard rings and top
up the oil in the gearbox.
1 - Oil guard ring — Lubricate with the recommended grease, the nip-
2 - Shaft ples on the side of the mechanism.
357

LIFTING GROUP
SENSITIVE MACHINE MEMBERS

1 - Cover 10 - Spacer 130-150
2 - Tie rod 11 - Rear spring
3 - Shoulder ring 12 - Spacer
4 - Front spring 13 - Spacer ring 110
5 - Front
Front spacer
spacer 130-1
130-15050 14 - Sensit
Sensitive
ive machin
machinee members
members
6 - Fr
Fron
ontt spa
paccer 11
1100 15 - Piv
ivo
ot
7 - Ring 16 - Fork
8 - Rea
earr spa
paccer 17 - Sen
enssit
itiv
ive
e mac
achi
hine
ne mem
embe
ber
r
9 - Ce
Cent
ntra
rall sp
spri
ring
ng 13
130-
0-15
1500 cont
co ntro
roll le
leve
ver
r
358

LIFTING GROUP
REMOVAL DISMOUNTING
1. Fix th
the
e se
sens
nsor
or pa
part
rt on
onto
to a cl
clam
amp
p an
and
d lo
loos
osen
en th
the
e bo
bolt
lt
1. Re
Remo
move
ve th
the
e sp
spli
litt pi
pin
n an
and
d ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e co
conn
nnec
ecti
ting
ng pi
pi--
vot 1 between the lever 2
vot 1 2 and the fork of the sensor 1.
2. Unscrew the cover 2
2 and remove.
part.
1 - Bolt
2 - Cover
3. Loosen the nut 1

nut 1 keeping
keeping the fork 2
fork 2 blocked
blocked with a
contrast spanner.
1 - Pivot
2 - Sensitive machine member control lever
2. Unscrew the two nuts shown in the diagram. Re-

move the sensitive machine member
member 2 and the two
spacers 1
spacers 1..
1 - Nut
2 - Fork
1 - Spacer 4. Unscrew the fork

fork 2 keeping the tie rod 1 blocked
2 - Sensor part with a contrast spanner.
359

LIFTING GROUP
3. Che
Check
ck tha
thatt the cal
calibr
ibrate
ated
d spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns of the
spring are within the recommended value of the table
“Sensitive Member Part Spring” (refer to: Technical
Data and Specifications - Technical Details).
REMOUNTING
1. Remount the tie rod
rod 1 all the components of the
sensor parts including the shoulder rings 4
rings 4,, then tigh-
ten
ten th
the
e nu
nuts
ts 2 by han
hand,d, unt
untilil you eli
elimin
minate
ate the pla
play
y be
bet-
t-
ween the two nuts 4
nuts 4..
NOTE
Forr mo
Fo mode
dels
ls 11
1100 fi
fitt th
the
e sp
spac
acer
er 3
3 be
betwe
tween
en the nu
nutt 2 and
the shoulder ring 4
ring 4..
1 - Tie rod
2 - Fork
5. Take off from the box the complete spring unit.

6. Fix the end of the tie rod 1
rod 1 on
on the clamp. Unscrew
the nut 2
nut 2 and
and take off the sensor part components.
1 - Tie rod
2 - Nut
3 - Spacer 110
4 - Shoul
Shoulder
der rings
5 - Spacer 130-150
6 - Rear spring
7 - Rear spacer
8 - Center spring 130-150
9 - Ring
10 - Front spring
11 - Front spacer
2. Grease the spring unit and place into the relative
casing and tighten by hand the fork on the tie rod.
3. Tighten the nut by a half turn so as to give the two
outside springs a preload, then block the fork against
1 - Tie rod
the nut.
2 - Nut 4. Ti
Tigh
ghte
tenn by ha
hand
nd th
the
e ca
casi
sing
ng co
coveverr so as to el
elim
imin
inat
ate
e
the pla
play
y bet
betwee
weenn the spr
spring
ing uni
unitt an
and
d the cas
casing
ing.. Whe
Whenn
CHECKS AND CONTROLS this is done tighten the lock bolt.
1. Accurately clean the components of the sensor

REASSEMBLY
parts. Proceed
Procee d wit
withh rem
remou
ounti
nting
ng wor
workin
king
g in the rev
revers
ersee ord
order
er
2. Proceed with a careful visual examination of the to the dismounting, then carry out the check of lifting
components and check that there are no signs of oxi- sensit
sen sitivi
ivity
ty (re
(refer
fer to: Che
Checks
cks an
and
d Adj
Adjust
ustme
ments
nts - Che
Checks
cks
dization. of Lifting Sensitivity).
360

LIFTING GROUP
SECONDARY HYDRAULIC CYLINDER

REMOVAL
1. Unloosen the fitting 1

fitting 1 of
of the cylinder 3 fuel
3 fuel pipe.
NOTE
Keep the pipe turned upwards to avoid loss of oil.
2. Support the cylinder, extract the holding split pin

and take off the pivot 2
pivot 2 and
and its relative bush.
1 - Fittings
2 - Fixin
Fixingg pivot of the secondary
secondary cylinder
cylinder on the arm
of the lifter
3. Only for model 150

Unloosen
Unloos en the scr
screwew 3, ta
take
ke of
offf th
the
e pi
pivo
vott 2 and remo
remove
ve
the cylin
cylinder
der 11. If ne
nece
cess
ssarary
y ta
take
ke ofofff th
the
e bu
bushsh 4 fro
from
m the
1 - Bush 9 - Cylinder cylinder seat.
2 - Upper arm 10 - Gasket
3 - Shaft 11 - Fitting
4 - Lock ring 12 - Bush (150)
5 - Seal ring 13 - Lower pivot (150)
6 - Guide ring 14 - Spacer (110)
7 - Teflon ring 15 - Seeger ring (110-130)
8 - Seal ring 16 - Bracket (110-130)
361

LIFTING GROUP
3. Working with caution, unhook the retaining ring 4

4,,
and the
and then
n tak
take
e off theshaft fro
from
m the cyl
cylind
inder
er an
and
d col
colle
lect
ct
the retaining ring.

2 - Lower pivot
3 - Lower pivot clamping screw
4 - Bush
Only for models 110-130
Remove the Seeger ring 3

ring 3 and
and take off the cylinder 1
1 1 - Fitting
from the bracket 2
bracket 2 pin.
pin. 2 - Gasket
3 - Shaft
4 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
5 - Cylinder
4. Remove the oil seal ring and the rubber ring from
the cylinder.
CAUTION
Work
Wo rk wi
with
th ca
caut
utio
ion
n so as no
nott to da
dama
mage
ge th
the
e ga
gask
sket
et
seat.
CHECKS AND CONTROLS

1. Ac
Accu
cura
rate
tely
ly cl
clea
ean
n th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt an
and
d th
the
e se
seat
at of th
the
e cy
cyli
lin-
n-
der gasket.
2. Che
Check
ck th
the
e sl
slid
idin
ing
g ar
area
ea of th
the
e sh
shaf
aftt is no
nott sc
scra
ratc
tche
hed,d,
has
ha s no tra
trace
ce of ex
exce
cess
ssiv
ive
e we
wearar or si
sign
gns s of da
dama
mage
ge,, if it
has substitute the shaft.
3. Measure the diameter “d1” of the shaft and check
that it is within the value limits given the table Piston,
Cylinders and Secondary Cylinder” (refer to: Techni-
1 - Secondary hydraulic cylinder cal Dat
Data a an
andd Re
Recom
comme
mend
ndati
ation
onss - Co
Contr
ntrol
ol and Adj
Adjust
ust--
2 - Bracket ments).
3 - Seeger ring
DISMOUNTING REMOUNTING
1. Unscrew the fitting 1

fitting 1 and
and remove together with the Proceed with the remo
Proceed remounti
unting
ng of the hydr
hydrauli
aulic
c cylin
cylinders
ders
gasket 2.
gasket 2. workin
wor king
g in the rev
revers
erse
e ord
order
er to the dis
dismou
mounti
nting
ng tak
taking
ing
2. Extract the shaft 3
shaft 3 of
of the cylinder until the retaining note of the following instructions.
ring 4
ring 4 mounted
mounted on the extreme end of the shaft, is ac- — Lubricate the new gasket and fit into the seat on
cessible from the hole on the fitting already dismoun- the cylinder as shown on the diagram.
ted.
362

LIFTING GROUP
— Place the shaft in the cylinder and push the retai-

ning ring into its seat working through the fitting
hole.
CAUTION
Work with particular caution so as not to damage
the shaft and the fitting screw thread.
REASSEMBLY
Proceed
Procee d wit
withh rem
remou
ounti
nting
ng of the hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic cyl
cylind
inders
ers on
1 - Oil seal ring
2 - Spring ring the vehicle, working in reverse order to that of the dis-
3 - Teflon ring mounting and lubricate the bushes and clamping pi-
4 - Seal ring vots.
— Position the retaining ring 1

ring 1 in the cavity of the
shaft 3
shaft 3 before
before placing it in the cylinder 2.
2.
1 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
2 - Shaft
3 - Cylinder
363

LIFTING GROUP
LIFTING CONTROL LEVER
1 - Clasp
2 - Knob
3 - Dial panel
4 - Panel
5 - Teflon ring
6 - Shoulder ring
7 - P.T.O. control lever
8 - Support
9 - Bracket
10 - Support lever pivot
11 - Lever
12 - Lever
13 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
14 - Tie rod
16 - Threa
Threaded
ded head
17 - Lock nut
18 - Lower rod control position
20 - Stress control lower rod
21 - Pivot
22 - Bracket
23 - Inside small shaft
24 - Tongue
25 - Washe
Washer r
26 - Metal clip
27 - Outside small shaft
28 - Bellow
29 - Upper rod
31 - Spring
364

LIFTING GROUP
REMOVAL
LEVERS INSIDE OF THE CABIN
1. Rem
Remove
ove thecontr
thecontrol
ol pa
panel
nel an
and
d the rig
right
ht whe
wheelh
elhou
ouse
se
trim on the inside of the cabin (refer to: Cabin Inside
Trimmings - Removal Right Mudguard Trim).
2. Unho
Unhook ok the cli
clips
ps 7 and disco
disconne
nnectct the leve
levers
rs 1 from
the rod 6
rod 6..
3. Un
Unscre
screw w the nut
nutss 5, ta
take
ke th
thee sp
spri
ring
ng 2 an
and
d th
the
e ri
ring
ngss3
and 4
and 4 and
and disengage the lever 1 from
1 from the support 8.
support 8.
4. Un
Unlo
loososen
en th
the
e sc
scre
reww sh
show
ownn in th
the e di
diag
agra
ram.
m. Ta
Take
ke of
off
f
the piv
pivotot 9 kee
keepin
pingg asi
aside
de the was
washehers
rs be
betwe
tween
en the le-
vers 1
vers 1.. Remove the levers 1
levers 1 and
and the P.T.O. lever.
1 - Washer 5 - Spacer
2 - Split pin 6 - Pivot
3 - Bracket 7 - Lever support
4 - Secondary distributor control lever
CO-AXIAL SHAFT
1. Undo the clips 2

clips 2 and
and disconnect the rod 1 rod 1 from le-
vers 3
vers 3 and
and 7
7..
2. Un
Unloloos
osen
en th
thee bo
bolt
lts
s of th
thee le
leve
vers
rs 3 and 7 and remo
remove
ve
them from the small shafts 4
shafts 4 and
and 5
5,, keeping the rela-
tive tongues.
3. Remove the bellow 6
bellow 6 from
from the shaft 5.
shaft 5.
1 - Li
Lift
ftin
ing
g co
cont
ntro
roll le
leve
verr 6 - Ro
Rodd
2 - Spring 7 - Metal clip
3 - Teflon ring 8 - Support
4 - Shoulder ring 9 - Pivot
5 - Bolt
SUPPORT LEVERS
1. Take off the split pin 2

2 and
and extract the washer 1.
1 .
2. Unloosen the clamp screws of the pivot 6 6,, take off
the piv
pivot
ot anddisco
anddisconn
nnect
ect thelever
thelevers
s 4, keep
keeping
ing the spa-
cer 5 and
5 and the washers placed between each lever se-
parate.
NOTE
For mo
mode
dels
ls wit
with
h fou
fourr dis
distrib
tributo
utors,
rs, the spa
spacer
cer 5
5 is sub
subs-
s-
tituted with a fourth control lever.
3. Unscrew the eight nuts fixing the support 7 to the

cabin, and the two screws that fix the bracket 3 Re--
3.. Re 1 - Rod 5 - Outside shaft
move the support 7
support 7 taking
taking it off from the coaxial small 2 - Metal clips 6 - Bellows
shaft. 3 - Lever 7 - Lever
4 - Inside shaft
365

LIFTING GROUP
4. Working from the rear of the vehicle, undo the clips PIPING
that
that fi
fix
x th
the
e ro
rods
ds 3 to theshaft
theshafts s 2 and 1 and sepa
separate
rate..
5. Remove the shaft
shaft 2 from the lower support pivot, CHECKS AND CONTROLS
then tilt the shafts 1 and
and 2 and take off from under -
neath. 1. Check the hydraulic circuit pipes for signs of defor-
6. If necessary, disconnect the rear end of the rod 3 3,, mation, or outside oxidization and/or and signs of de-
removing the retaining ring. toriation. Replace the damaged components.
2. If th
ther
eree ar
are
e oi
oill le
leak
aks
s fr
from
om ththe
e fi
fitt
ttin
ing
g ti
tigh
ghte
ten
n th
the
e fa
faul
ulty
ty
fittin
fitting g an
andd cle
clean
an the arearea.
a. If, du
durin
ringg the fun
functi
ction
oning
ing,, the
leak persists,
persists, procproceed
eed with the replacement
replacement of the
gask
ga sketets
s (f
(for
or fi
fitt
ttin
ingsgs th
that
at ha
have
ve th
them
em)) or of th
the
e co
comp
mplelete
te
piping.
REPLACEMENT
In case of removal and installation of piping, take not
of the following recommendations:
— To avoid the entry of foreign matter in the circuit,
clean the pipe connecting area that has to be re-
moved, and after the disconnection block the fit-
tings disconnected
disconnected..
— Having disconnected the pipe joining the gear-
box to the filters, completely drain the oil of the
gearbox.
— Put new gaskets on fitting that need them.
— For pipes with a connection flange, fit with preci-
sion, the clamp screws and tighten gradually, in
cross order.
— Mounting completed, start the engine, action the
lifting circuit to check that there are no leaks from
the fittings.
— Then refill the gear oil.
1 - Outside shaft
2 - Inside shaft
3 - Lower rod
REASSEMBLY
Proceed with the remounting of the levers working in
revers
rev ersee ord
order
er to tha
thatt of the dis
dismou
mounti
nting
ng,, ob
obser
servin
ving
g the
following recommend
recommendations.
ations.
— Lubricate with the recommended grease the
joints of the levers and control lever of the two
co-axiale shafts.
— Remounting completed, start the engine, and ac-
tion the levers to check the correct functioning of
the lifter checking that the control levers move
freely without force.
— If necessary, proceed with the adjusting of the
length of the control lever. (Refer to: Checks and
Adjustments):
366

LIFTING GROUP

NOTE (1) Disconnect the head 5
head 5 of
of the lever 2.
2.
The following
following adju
adjustme
stments
nts must be made keeping
keeping (2) Loosen the lock nut 4
nut 4 and loosen or unscrew the
note of the correct order. head 5 until
head 5 until you are able to connect to the lever 2
lever 2 (in
(in
beat on the pivot 1
pivot 1).
).
— Before proceeding with the adjustments, apply a (3) Tighten the lock nut 4
nut 4 and
and reconnect the head 5
head 5 to
to
counterweight of approximately 300 kg (660 lb) the lever 2.
2.
with point linkage to vehicle.
— The internal adjustment of the lifting housing is
necessary whenever the housing has been dis-
mounted and/or whenever detective inside com-
ponents have been replaced.
ADJUSTMENT OF THE POSITION

CONTROL
EXTERNAL CONTROLS OF THE LIFTING
HOUSING
1. Move the position control lever 2

2 (yellow knob) to
the end of section “POSITION” and the stress control
lever 1 (green
1 (green knob) to graded section “12".
1 - Block pin
2 - Lever
3 - Lower position control rod
4
5 -- Threaded
Lock nut head
LIFTING HOUSING INSIDE CONTROLS
1. Re
Remo
move
ve th
the
e co
cove
verr of th
the
e li
lifti
fting
ng ho
hous
usin
ing
g an
and
d it
its
s re
rela
la--
tive gasket.
2. Remove the oil level holding pipe on the inside of
the lifting housing and replace with a shorter pipe, so
that components to be controlled are above the level
of oil during the check.
3. Start the engine and engage the parking brake.
4. Che
Checkck th
that
at th
the
e wi
with
th th
thee le
leve
ver
r 2
2 in be
beat
at on th
the
e pi
pivo
vott 1
the piston 5
piston 5 of
of the litter protrudes from the cylinder by
the recommended “A”.
1
2 -- Strain command
Position lever
control lever A = 10 +0 -1 mm
5. It youare un
unabl
able
e to ver
verity
ity theabove
theabove,, loo
loosenthe
senthe nu
nuts
ts
2. Ch
Check
eck tha
thatt the le
lever
ver 2
2 is in be
beat
at on th
the
e pi
pivo
vott 1. If not 3 and tighten or untighten the tie rod until the piston
proceed with the adjustment of the rod 3
3 length,
length, wor- protru
pro trude
dess fro
from
m the cyl
cylind
inder
er by the rec
recom
omme
mende
ndedd qu
quo-
o-
king as follows: ta, then lock the nuts 3.
nuts 3.
367

LIFTING GROUP
NOTE
Lengthening the adjustable tie rod increases the pro-
trudence of the piston and vice-versa.

2 - Strai
Strain
n control lever
2. Checkthat in this position the piston 1 of the lifter

protrudes from the cylinder by the recommended “B”
quota.
B = 15 +0-1 mm
3. It
the above cannot be verified unloosen the nut 2
and tighten or loosen the screw 3
screw 3 until
until the piston pro-
trudes from the cylinder to the specified quota, then
block the nut 2
nut 2..
NOTE
Looseni
Loosening
ng the adju
adjustme
stment
nt screw incre
increases
ases the protr
protru-
u-
dence of the piston and vice-versa.
1 - Block pin
2 - Lever
3 - Nuts
4 - Adjustable tie rod
5 - Piston
6. Proceed with the checking of the strain command

control.
CHECKING OF THE STRAIN COMMAND

1. With the engine running move the position control
lever 1
1 (yellow knob) to the end of section “CONTR.”
and the strain control lever 2 (green
2 (green knob) to the posi- 1 - Piston
tion “O” of the graduated section. 2 - Nut
3 - Adjusting screw
368

LIFTING GROUP
4. Keepthe control position lever 1

1 (yellow knob) to 6. After checking, remount the oil lever hold pipe and
the end of the section “CONTR.”, and move the strain the lif
liftin
ting
g ho
housi
using
ng cov
cover
er tog
togeth
ether
er wit
withh the rel
relati
ative
ve ga
gas-
s-
command lever 2 (green knob) to the position “4" of kets.
the graduated section and check that the lifter start to
come up.
CHECKING OF THE LIFTING
NOTE
The centerline of the lever must be in alignment with SENSITIVITY
the notch of position “4".
NOTE
To ca
carry
rry ou
outt th
this
is op
oper
erat
atio
ion
n it is al
also
so ne
nece
cess
ssar
aryy to ho
hook
ok
a co
coun
unte
terw
rwei
eighghtt of ab
abou
outt 30
3000 kg (6
(660
60 lb
lb)) to th
the
e 3r
3rdd po
po--
sition.

2 - Strain command lever
5. If
the lifter does not start to come up as it should, 1. Start the engine.
proc
procee
eedd wi
with
th th
the
e ad
adju
just
stme
ment nt of th
the
e ro
rod
d le
leng
ngthth 2 as fo
fol-
l- 2. Keep the drive position lever 1 (yellow knob) to the
lows: end of the “CONTR.” section; move the strain com-
(1) Disconnect the head 4
head 4 from
from the lever 1.
1 . mand
ma nd lev
lever
er 2 (gr
(gree
een
n kno
knob)
b) so tha
thatt thelifti
thelifting
ng equ
equipm
ipmen
entt
(2) Loosen the lock nut 3nut 3 and
and tighten or untighten the lifts slightly, then stop the lifter in a balanced position
head 4
head 4 until
until it starts to lift with the strain command le- (lever in a position around “4" of the graduated sec-
ver in position “4". tion).
(3) Tighten the lock nut and reconnect the head 4 to
t-he lever 1.
1 .
1 - Lever 3 - Lock nut 1 - Drive position lever
2 - Lower
Lower strain
strain comma
command
nd 4 - Threaded
Threaded head
head 2 - Strain command lever
rod
369

LIFTING GROUP
3. Check that: For mode

models
ls with
without
out sec
seconda
ondary
ry hydr
hydraulic
aulic cylin-
— Manually pulling the counterweight upwards the ders
lifter continues to ride with ease.
— Manually pushing down the counterweight the lif- 1. Working from under the cabin unscrew the cap po-
po-
ter continues to lower with ease. sition on the lifting cylinder 1 and attach the flexible
4. If the unable to obtain the described conditions pipe 5.9030.517.0 with gauge 5.9030.513.0.
check that the lifting mechanism and all the kinematic
position drivings are reacting and are not forced.
CONTROL OF THE WORKING

PRESSURE
Models with secondary hydraulic cylinders.
Unscrew from the cylin

Unscrew cylinder
der 3
3 the pip
pipe
e 1 fitti
fitting
ng and app
apply
ly
suitable T union between pipe and cylinder.
Join to the T union, flexible pipe 5.9030.517.0 with
gauge 5.9030.51
5.9030.513.0.
3.0.
1 - Lifting cylinder
2. Sta
Start
rt theengi
theengine,put
ne,put the lif
lifter
ter in
into
to act
actionand
ionand no
note
te on
thegauge
thegauge theeffec
theeffectiv
tive
e wor
workin
king
g pre
pressu
ssure
re of thecircu
thecircuit.
it.
1 - Cylinder fuel pipe

2 - T union
370

LIFTING GROUP
TECHNICAL DATA
Hydraulic lifting circuit
Measurement unit: mm
Model
Details
110 130 150
Lifter type original with open center distributor
Pump type 6OSCH HY/ZFS 11/22,5 L 215
Pump capacity (max engine speed) I/1 64

+10
Safety valve calibration pressure (auxiliary distributor) bar 180 0
Anti shock calibration pressure bar 210+100
Auxiliary cylinders shaft stroke capacity mm 170
Lifting capacity with load concentratedon rotule at center

kg 4600 5400
rear wheels height
As above, with auxiliary cylinders kg 6400 7000
Constructor FIAAM
Model FT 4952 IN
Oil fiIters Quantity 2
Filtration grade 25
2
Filtration area cm 7550 x 2
371

LIFTING GROUP
Distributor spring
Model
Details
110 130 150
Quantity n 1
Wire diameter “d” 1,4
Outside diameter “D” 7,8

Consen
Cons enst
st valv
valve
e
spring
Free spring length “L” 54
4,115 kg 47,5
6,727 kg 43,37
Quantity n 1

Consenst pilo
lott
valve spring
Free spring length “L” 25,5
2,133 kg 15,2
Spring length under load
2,899 kg 11,5
Quantity n 1

Hydraulic
Hydraulic distr
distribu-
ibu-
torrod spring Free spring length “L” 110

4,4 kg 65
4 kg 60
Quantity n 2

Non
Non re
retu
turn
rn va
valv
lve
e
spring
2,96 kg 17
4,43 kg 13
Quantity n 1

VaIvematic spring Outside diameter “D” 12,2
Spring length under load 2,7 kg 40
372

LIFTING GROUP
Sensitive member part spring
Model
Details
110 130 150
Quantity n 1
Wire diameter “d” 9

Outside diameter “D” 51,5 ± 0,5
Front spring
Spring length under load 245 ± 5 kg 53
Flexibility mm/kg 0,0367
Quantity n 1
Wire diameter “d” 10,5 13
Outside diameter “D” 51,5 ± 0,5 65
Free spring length “L” 163 160

Rear spri ng
596 ± 10 kg 132 -
Spring length under load 272 kg - 149,7
790 kg - 130
Flexibility mm/kg 0,05197 0,038
Quantity n 1
Wire diameter “d” 7

Outside diameter D 37
CentraI spring
Spring length under load 221 kg 50
Flexibility mm/kg 0,0542
373

LIFTING GROUP
CONTROL AND ADJUSTMENTS

Piston, cylinder and slave cylinders
Model
Dimension check 110 130 150
Piston minimum diameter allowance ”d” 129,900 144,900
Cylinder maximum diameter allowance ”D” 130,100 145,100
Slave
Slave cy
cylind
linder
er rod min
minimu
imum
m dia
diamet
meter
er all
allowa
owance
nce ”d1” 49,900
Adjustment of position control lever and Strain control
1 - Piston
2 - Adjustable tie rod
3 - Adjusting screw
Model
Dimension check
110 130 150
100-1,0 (1) (2)

Piston protrudence “S" from the cylinder
150-1,0 (3) (4)
Lever position when being checked:

(1) Strain command lever (green knob) in position “12’
(2) Po
Posit
sition
ion con
contro
troll lev
lever
er (ye
(yello
llow
w kno
knob
b at the endof the sec
sector
tor “PO
“POSIT
SITlON
lON”” (le
(lever
ver on the out
outsid
side
e ot the lif
liftin
ting
g ho
housi
using
ng
at end stroke against the stop).
(3) Strain command lever (green knob) in position “0”
(4) Position control lever (yellow knob) at the end of sector “CONTR”
374

LIFTING GROUP
Distributor
1 - Small piston
2 - Washer
3 - Push rod
Model
Checking dimensions
110 130 150
Gap between push rod and inside of the non return valve drive
0,5
pin (1) ”A-B”
Gap “C” between the washer outside surface of the washer and
0,5
the surface of the distributor casing front
(1) Th
(1) The
e di
dime
mens
nsio
ions
ns sh
shou
ould
ld be me
meas
asur
ured
ed wi
with
th th
the
e pu
push
sh ro
rod
d be
bein
ing
g su
supp
ppor
orte
ted
d by th
the
e ba
ball
ll an
and
d th
the
e ba
ball
ll to
touc
uchi
hing
ng it
its
s se
seat
at
of the non return valve
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Measuring unit: Nm
Model
Details
110 130 150
Cylinder clamp screws to the lifting housing 275 ÷ 295 (28 ÷ 30)
Anti shock valve to the distributor 78 ± 4,8 (8 ± 05)
NOTE
All screw threads should be degreased and cleaned before tightening
375

LIFTING GROUP
Fluids and lubricants
Gear box 76 l
Oil AGIP ROTRA THT (API GL - 3)
Lifting housing (1) 20 l (1)
Lifter arm
Lifter arms
s dri
drive
ve sha
shaft
ft gro
groove
oved
d
GREASE Molikote MOLY - PASTE 450 - P -
profile
110-130-150
Lever joints and control rod
Sensitive machine part spring GREASE AGIP - GREASE 30 -
Lifter greasing mechanism
(1) On
(1) Only
ly du
duri
ring
ng th
the
e fu
func
ncti
tion
onin
ing
g 20 I (4
(4.4
.4 im
imp.
p. Ga
Gall
ll)) of oi
oill ac
accu
cumu
mula
late
ted
d in th
the
e in
insi
side
de of th
the
e li
lift
ftin
ing
g ho
hous
usin
ing;
g; wi
with
th th
the
e en
en--
gine stopped all the oil gradually goes to the gear box. (Only for models 110-130-150)
Sealant and Fixatives
Distributor cap screw threads Mastic Loctite 971 -

Contac
Con tactt sur
surfac
face
e bet
betwee
weenn lif
liftin
ting
g
Mastic Loctite 510 -
housing and gearbox
376

LIFTING GROUP
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool Number ToolName Ref. page
Hydrau
Hydraulic
lic circu
circuit
it oi
oill filt
filter
er
5.9030.512.0 5
wrench
Gauge0to250bar(0to3625
5.9030.513.0 36
p.s.i.) in glycerine bath
Flexible
Flexible pip
pipe
e for hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic cir
cir--
5.9030.517.0 36
cuit
5.9030.520.4 Hydraulic pump 16

377

LIFTING GROUP

Note
The following trouble diagnosis describes the possible conditions of the hydraulic circuit of the lifter with the pre-
sumption that the mechanism of the lifter is in working condition.
Theref
The refore
ore,, che
check
ck tha
thatt the lif
liftin
ting
g mec
mecha
hanis
nism
m is ad
adjus
justed
ted cor
correc
rectly
tly,, tha
thatt the loa
load d of the lif
lifter
ter is no
nott ab
above
ove the max
maximu
imumm
recommended weight and that the levers and tie rods are not damaged.
In the fol
follow
lowing
ing dia
diagra
gram m the
there re is sho
shown
wn the ge
geome
ometri
tric
c con
config
figura
uratio
tionn of the lif
lifter
ter wit
withh the max
maxim imum
um pe
permi
rmissi
ssible
ble loa
load,
d,
in function with the implement category.
WHELL AXLE
Measuring unit: mm
Implement type 2nd category 3rd category
Model
Felltures
110 - 130 - 150 150
A: Distance between load application point

and the lower 510 560
arm hook
B: Distance between lower arm hooks 825 ± 1,5 965 ± 1,5
C: Movement towards the outside of the lower arm hook 125 125
D: Movement towards the inside of the lower arm hook 125 125
378

LIFTING GROUP
Avoid overloading above the maximum

Overloaded lifter
bearable weight
Replace with the recommended quality

Incorrect quality of oil in the circuit
of oil
Check
Che ck gea
gearbo
rbox
x oil lev
level,
el, and if nec
necess
essa-
a-
Insufficient oil in the circuit
ry top-up
Oill fi
Oi filt
lter
er bl
bloc
ocke
ked
d (w
(war
arni
ning
ng lig
light
ht)) Repl
Replac
ace
e oi
oill fi
filt
lter
ers
s
Excessively worn gaskets on lifter pis-

Replace the gaskets
The lifter is unable to lift or is lifting too ton
slowly
Dist
Distri
ribu
buto
torr in
in-t
-tak
ake
e va
valv
lve
e bl
bloc
ocke
ked
d Over
Overha
haul
ul th
the
e di
dist
stri
ribu
buto
tor
r
Worn
Worn or de
defe
fect
ctiv
ive
e oi
oill pu
pump
mp Overha
Overhaulul an
andd ev
even entu
tual
ally
ly re
repl
plac
ace
e
Check tha
Check thatt the fit
fittin
tings
gs are cor
correc
rectly
tly tig
tigh-
h-
Emulsified oil
tened
tened andthat thegaske
thegaskets ts areeffic
areefficien
ientt
Supplementary hydraulic circuit defec- Refer to: Supplementary hydraulic cir-

tive cuit
Check
Check the calibration
calibration pressure;
pressure; if ne-
Incorrect calibration of the safety valve
cessary adjust
The
The li
lift
fter
er ho
hois
ists
ts on
only
ly pa
part
rtia
iall
lly
y Cont
Contro
roll le
leve
verr in
inco
corr
rrec
ectl
tly
y ad
adju
just
sted
ed Adju
Adjust
st co
corr
rrec
ectl
tly
y
The di
The dist
stri
ribu
buto
torr sh
shaf
aftt do
does
es no
nott sl
slid
ide
e in it
its
s
Overhaul the distributor
The arms of the lifter remain blocked in seat
the raised position, or they lower too
slowly Valvematic device or non return valve
Overhaul the distributor
blocked
Start the engine for some minutes and

Air
thepresent in the circuit
maintenance work )(entered during engage the distributor, in this way the
air present is eliminated
Worn
Worn or de
defe
fect
ctiv
ive
e oi
oill pu
pump
mp Over
Overha
haul
ul an
and
d if ne
nece
cess
ssar
ary
y re
repl
plac
ace
e
The lifter works irregularly (jerking)
Replace with the recommended quality
Emulsified oil or incorrect quality of oil
of oil
Overhaul and if necessary replace the

Defective non return valve
defective valve
379

LIFTING GROUP
Incorr
Incorrect
ect adj
adjust
ustmen
mentt of con
contro
troll lev
lever
er Adjust
Adjust cor
correc
rectly
tly
Defective safety valve or scarce grip of Overhaul and proceed with the correct
The lifter swings (unable to remain in the non return valve calibration
reached position)
Excessive wear of the piston gaskets
and/or
and/or of the sec
second
ondary
ary hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic cy
cylin
lin-- Replace the gaskets
ders (if mounted)
When the lifter arms are raised to the

Incorrect adjustment of the Distributor
maximum height, the safety valve dis- Adjust correctly
control lever and/or of the safety valve
charges oil
Overhaul the distributor and check the

Defective non return valve
non return valve
With the engine OFF the lifter arms lo-
wer Excessiv
Exces sive
e wea
wearr of the pis
piston
ton gas
gasket
ket
and/or
and/or of the sec
second
ondary
ary hyd
hydrau
raulic
lic cy
cylin-
lin- Replace the damaged gaskets
ders Of mounted)
Check tha
Check thatt the fit
fittin
tings
gs are tig
tighte
htened
ned cor
cor--
Air is present in the circuit
rectlyand
rectlyand tha
thatt thegaske
thegaskets ts areeffic
areefficien
ientt
Excessively noisy system (with circuit
pipe vibrations)
Move the pipes
pipes so there is no contac
contactt
Interferenc
Interference
e in the pipes(visual chec
check)
k)
between them and other components
Loosened pipe fittings Tighten correctly
Circuit oil leakage Worn or defective gaskets Replace
Damaged pipes Replace
Wrong fixture or fixture incorrectly cou- Check the fixture and that it is also cor-
pled rectly attached
Overhaul the lifting meccanism and eli-

Excessiv
Excessive
e play of the liftingmeccanis
liftingmeccanism
m
minate any excessive play
Slowness
the or absence
lifter whilst workingofwith
movement of Sensitive machine part wrongly adjus-
control of Overhaul sensitive machine part and
Overhaul
eventually replace the damaged com-
the strain ted or damaged
ponent
Incorr
Incorrectadjus
ectadjustm
tment
ent of thecontr
thecontrol
ol lev
lever
er Adjust
Adjust cor
correc
rectly
tly
Hardening of the lower arms support

Overhaul the lifting meccanism
shaft of the lifter
380
SUPPLEMEN
SUPPLEMENTARY
TARY HYDRAULI
HYDRAULIC
C
CIRCUIT
CONTENTS
GENERA
GENERAL
L FEA
FEATUR
TURES
ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Double
Double effe
effect
ct distr
distribut
ibutor
or with float
floatposi
position
tion . . . . . . 400
400
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Workin
Working
g dia
diagra
grams
ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Neut
Neutra
rall ph
phas
ase
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Work
Workin
ing
g ph
phas
ase
e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
383 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
OIL
OIL FI
FILT
LTER
ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (*) Transformation of distributor from double
OIL
OIL PU
PUMP
MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (*) to si
sing
ngle
le ef
effe
fect
ct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
401
SAFE
SAFETY
TY VA
VALV
LVE
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 DISTRI
DISTRIBUT
BUTOR
OR CON
CONTRO
TROL
L LE
LEVER
VER . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Checks and adjustment of maximum Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
operat
operatingpress
ingpressure
ure.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
385
5 Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Disass
Disassem
embly
bly an
and
d rea
reasse
ssemb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
386
6 Contro
Controll rodleng
rodlength
th adj
adjust
ustmen
mentt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 PIPE
PIPES
S AN
AND
D FI
FITT
TTIN
INGS
GS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Checks
Checks andverif
andverifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Reas
Reasse
semb
mbly
ly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
387 Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
DISTRIBUTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 WORKING PRESSURE CHECK OF
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 THEIMPLEME
THEIMPLEMENT
NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Simple/d
Simple/doubl
ouble
e effec
effectt distri
distributo
butorr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 TECHNICAL
TECHNICAL DATA AND SPEC
SPECIFICA
IFICATION
TIONS.
S. . . . 406
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Tech
Techni
nica
call da
data
ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
406
6
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Checks
Checks andadju
andadjustm
stmen
ents
ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Tighte
Tightenin
ning
g tor
torqu
ques.
es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Simple/double effect distributor with Gene
General
ral spe
specif
cifica
icatio
tions
ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
autom
automati
atic
c cen
center
tering(Kick
ing(Kick-ou
-outt eff
effect
ect)) . . . . . . . . . . 39
395
5 SPEC
SPECIA
IAL
L TO
TOOL
OLS
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Démontage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 TROUBLE
TROUBLE SHOO
SHOOTING
TING AND CORR
CORRECTIO
ECTIONS
NS . . 409
Checks
Checks an
and
d ver
verifi
ificat
cation
ions
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Checks and adjustment of the automatic
centering
centering pres
pressure
sure calib
calibratio
ration
n devi
device.
ce. . . . . . . . . . 398
(*) Seer: Lifting Group
381

GENERAL FEATURES
DESCRIPTION • - Double effect distributor with float
float position: as
well as the normal double function, it also
• The supplementary
supplementary hydraulic
hydraulic circuit system per- consents the distributor shaft to move to the
mits the rapid joining of various hydraulic imple- position FLOAT, in this way the machine is
ments to the rear of the vehicle. free to self regulate for external actions.
• The circuit that
that fuels the
the auxiliary distributor
distributor is • - For specific requirements it is possible
possible to ins-
the same as for the lifting drive (see: Lifting tall a fourth distributor in order to obtain a con-
Group General Specifications). trol unit with a total of 8 outlets.
• The distributors
distributors are of the modular
modular type and the
following models are equipped with a six way fit- WORKING DIAGRAMS
ting for double effect use:
• Simple/dou
Simple/doubleble effect distributor: a special de- NEUTRAL PHASE
vice allows the transformation of the distributor
to simple effect for particular jobs. In the neutral phase the distributor shaft 9 is positio-
• Simple/dou
Simple/doubleble effect distributors with automa- ned in such a way as to block the oil flow to the users
tic centering (kickout effect): offer the possibili- two delivery fittings 3
fittings 3.. The pressurized oil crosses the
ty of being transformed to single effect. A spe- distributor body and flows to the safety valves 10 valves 10 and
and
cial device also allows the distributor shaft to from there, by way of the pipe 8 pipe 8,, to the lifting distribu-
be kept in one of the two control, positions. tor.
The return to neutral is automatic when the Whenever the circuit pressure value is higher than
machine has completed the given operation that
that of th
the e ca
cali
libr
brat
ator
or va
valu
lue
e of th
the
e se
secu
curirity
ty va
valv
lve,
e, th
thee oi
oill
and consequently the circuit pressure value is is drained by way of the pipes 5 pipes 5.. In this position of the
higher than that of the device. shaft 9 the fittings
shaft fittings 3 are not connected with the ex-
haust
ha ust pip
pipes,
es, the
theref
refore
ore the imp
implem
lemen entt con
contro
trolle
lled
d by the
distributor is maintained in the reached position.
Pressurized oil
Oil to discharge (when

exceeding the maximum
operating pressure)
1 - Safety valve body

7 - Oil delivery pipe (pressurized)
2 - Maximum operating pressure adjusting screw
8 - Delivery pipe to lifting distributor (by way of neutral pi-
3 - Connection fittings to utilizer
pes)
4 - Distribution casing
5 - Oil backflow pipes (exhaust)
10 - Safety valve
382

WORKING PHASE
The moving of the distributor

distributor shaft 10 to the right In sha
shaft
ft po
posit
sition
ion 10
10,, oi
oill do
does
es no
nott fl
flow
ow to th
the
e li
lift
ftin
ing
g di
dist
stri
ri--
(Work position) determines the pressurized oil delive- delive- butor because the distributor neutral pipe b is closed.
ry flow
flow 5 to the utilizer; simultaneously allowing the The movement of the shaft towards the left 10 10 deter-
deter-
flow
flow of oi
oill 3 fro
from
m theutili
theutilizer
zer to theexhau
theexhaustst (cr
(cross
ossing
ing fit
fit-- mines the reverse flow 3
flow 3 and
and 5
5.. In any case the pre-
tings 4
tings 4)) vious instructions are still valid.
The pressurized oil also flows to the safety valve 11valve 11..
Whenever pressure in the circuit exceeds that of the
calibrated value of the safety valve, the oil is drained
by way of pipe 7
pipe 7..
Pressurized oil
Oil to discharge
Oil to discharge (when

exceeding the
maximum operating
pressure)
External action
1 - Security valve casing

2 - Maximum operating pressure adjusting screw
3 - Oil backflow pipe (exhaust)
4 - Utilizer connection fitting
6 - Distributor casing
7 - Oil backflow (exhaust)
9 - Neutral conduit (delivery to the lifting distributor)
11 - Securing valve
383

For distributors equipped with the simple/double ef- In th

this
is wa
way
y th
the
e de
deli
live
very
ry pi
pipe
pe 2 to th
the
e ut
util
iliz
izer
er is st
stop
oppe
ped
d
fect transformation device, the previous instructions and therefore, the distributor can, at the same time,
are valid. In this version working on screw 3, it is pos- fuel single effect functional tools.
sible
sib le to sen
send
d dir
direct
ect to exh
exhau
aust
st (pi
(pipe
pe 5) the pre
pressu
ssuriz
rized
ed
oil coming from the pump (pipe 7).
Double effect transformation device Single effect transformation device
1 - Oil backflow pipe (discharge)

2 - Deliv
Delivery
ery pipe to utiliz
utilizer
er
3 - Single/double effect transformation device Pressurized oil
4 - Distributor casing
5 - Oil backflow (discharge)
Oil to discharge
Movement
External action
384

SAFETY VALVE
1
2 -- Spring
Gasket
3 - Adjusting screw
4 - Lock nut
5 - Rear cap
6 - Cap
7 - Spacer
8 - Valve body
9 - O-Ring
10 - Teflon ring
11 - Security valve push rod
12 - Gasket
13 - Valve
14 - Washe
Washer r
15 - Built in hexagonal plug
2. Start the engine, insert the parking brake and start

CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF
MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE the distributor which is connected by a fitting to the
gauge.
1. Joi
Join
n the ga
gaug
uge
e 5.9
5.9030
030.51
.513.0
3.0 wit
with
h the sui
suitab
table
le fit
fittin
ting
g NOTE
to a rear quick coupling plug. When the distributor is equipped with an automatic
centering device, it is necessary to keep it inserted
manually to attain the maximum pressure in the cir-
cuit.
3. Check thegauge reading and verify that it is within
the prescribed value.
Safety valve pressure calibrating value
180+100 bar
4. When the recommended values have not been ve-
rified
(1) Un adjust
Unscr ewas
screw capfollows:
4 kee
keepin
ping
g loc
locked
ked the loc
locknu
knutt 1 wi
with
th a
contrast spanner. Remove the cap and the gasket.
(2) Loosen locknut 1
locknut 1 and unscrew adjusting screw 2
screw 2
until the correct pressure value is reached.
385

NOTE 2. Loosen the lock nut

nut 1 and unscrew the adjusting
— Loosen the screw to reduce pressure. screw 4
screw 4 and
and remove together with the gasket.
— Tighten the screw to increase pressure.
(3) On com
comple
pletio
tion
n of the che
check,
ck, tig
tighte
htenn loc
lock
k nu
nutt 1 to re
re--
comme
com mend
nded
ed tor
torqu
que.
e. Fit a new ga
gaske
skett 3 an
andd th
the
e ca
capp 4,
tightening to the recommended torque.
Tightening torque
Cap and locknut on rear side of safety valve
50 ÷ 55 Nm
(5 ÷ 5,5 kgm; 36.15 to 39.77 ft lb)
1 - Locknut
2 - Adjusting screw
3 - Gasket 1 - Lock nut
4 - Rear cap 2 - Rear gasket
3 - Cap
4 - Adjusting screw
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY 3. Remove the spring 2 and the spacer 1 from the
1. For the disassembly of the safety valve, refer to: valve casing.
Distributors - Disassembly steps 1. -7. taking care not
to strip distributor box.
2. Reassemble in reverse order observing the follo-
wing instructions.
— Accurately clean the connecting surface between
valve body and distributor.
— Fit new O-Rings and teflon ring in the four seats
of the hydraulic circuit on the valve body.
— On completion of the re-assembly, control the re-
gistration of the maximum operating pressure
(refer to: Checks and Adjustments of the Maxi-
mum Operating Pressure).
— Check gear oil level, and if necessary refill.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Fit the safety valve on a clamp with protective jaws
1 - Spacer
and un
and unsc
scre
rew
w th
the
e ca
cap
p 3, ke
keep
epin
ing
g th
the
e lo
lock
ck nu
nutt 1, se
secu
cure
re
2 - Spring
with
with the con
contra
trast
st spa
spanne
nner,r, rem
remove
ove the cap and ga gaske
skett
2.
386

4. With reference to the enlarged diagram, unscrew — Replace all O-rings, copper gaskets and the
cap 15 and remremove
ove the was
washe
her r 14
14,, O-R
O-Ring
ing 9, va
valv
lve
e 13 hexagonal built-in washer.
complete with push rod 1111 and gasket 12
12 from the — Tighten the following components to the recom-
valve casing. mended torque.
5. If necessary unscrew and remove the caps 6
caps 6 toge-
toge-
ther with their gaskets. Tightening torque
Hexagonal built-in cap on front
24 ÷ 27 Nm
(2,4 ÷ 2,7 - kgm; 17.35 to 19.52 ft lb)
CHECKS AND VERIFICA TIONS — Fit adjusting screw and partially tighten so that
the valve is tightened to a pressure lower than
1. Accuratelyclean the valve components and their that recommend
recommended. ed.
seats. — After the refitting of the safety valve to the distri-
2. Check that parts are not scratched or oxidized. butor box, proceed with the calibration (refer to:
Checks and Controls Maximum Operating Pres-
sure).
— Refit locknut and cap with the gaskets, tightening
to the specific torque.
REASSEMBL Y
Tightening torque
Rear side safety valve cap and locknut
Reassemble
cifications. in reverse order using the following spe- 50 ÷ 55 Nm
— Degrease cap and fitting threads with specified (5 ÷ 5,5 kgm; 36.15 to 39.77 ft lb)
solvant.
— Apply specified sealer on cap and fitting threads.
387

DISTRIBUTORS
1 - Plate (three distributors version) 10 - Safety valve 19 - Relay rod
1a - Plate (two distributors version) 11 - Fitting 20 - Pin
2 - Pipes. 12 - Fitting 21 - Split pin
3 - Gaskets 13 - Simple/double effect distributor 22 - Connecting link
4 - Seeger ring 14 - Double effect distributor with float posit. 23 - Washer
5 - Plate 15 - Single/double effect distributor with 24 - Spacer
6 - Quick connector automatic centering (kickout effect) 25 - Lock pin
7 - Retainer 16 - Teflon ring
8 - Distributor control lever 17 - O-Ring
9 - Plastic bush 18 - Lever support
388

DISASSEMBLY NOTE
The inside distributor pivot has two washers.
NOTE
The operation refers to a vehicle with three distribu-
tor
tors,
s, bu
numberbutt of
canalso be ap
appli
distributors.plied
ed to veh
vehicl
icles
es wit
with
h a dif
differ
ferent
ent
1. Wor
Workin
kingg be
behin
hind
d the veh
vehicl
icle,
e, un
unho
hookok the fix
fixing
ing
spring of the pivots 3
pivots 3,, connecting fork 1,
fork 1, and
and the lever
2. Slip off the pivots and separate the levers.
1 - Washers
2 - Split pin
3 - Pivots
4. Unscrew the nuts indicated in the diagram and re-

1 - Fork
move the plate 2
plate 2 complete with relay rod leaving the
2 - Distributor command lever
3 - Pivot
bushes 1
bushes 1 mounted
mounted on the internal support.
2. Unscrew distributor pipe fittings 2 that need remo-

ving,
ving, ho
holdi
lding
ng fir
firm
m wit
with
h con
contra
trast
st spa
spann
nner,
er, theconne
theconnecto
ctor
r
1 on the distributor.
1 - Plas
Plastic
tic bush
2 - Plate
1 - Distributor fitting
2 - Pipe fitting 5. Ma
Mark
rk the ass
assem
embly
bly po
posit
sition
ion of the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tors
s so as
to facilitate reassembly.
3. Sli
Slip
p off the piv
pivot
ot 3 hold
holding
ing split pin 2. Re
Remov
move
e piv
pivots
ots 6. Collect the four spacers 3
spacers 3,, and slip off the valve 2
valve 2
and collect the washers 1
washers 1.. and the distributors 1
distributors 1..
389

NOTE 8. Fi
Fix
x the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor on the cla
clamp
mp wit
with
h pro
protec
tectiv
tive
e jaw
jaws.
s.
For ver
versio
sions
ns wit
withh fou
fourr au
auxil
xiliar
iary
y dis
distrib
tributo
utors
rs it is nec
neces-
es- Slip of
Slip offf th
the
e sp
spli
litt pi
pin
n 1, rem
removethe
ovethe piv
pivot
ot 4 the wash
washers
ers 3
sary to unscrew and remove the four fixing studs as and the plates 5
plates 5
there
there is ins
insuff
uffici
icien
entt spa
space
ce to sli
slip
p thecomp
thecomponeonents
nts off si- 9. If nece
necessary
ssary,, unsc
unscrew
rew and remo
remove
ve the conn
connecto
ectors
rs 2
deways. and relative gaskets.
1 - Distributors
2 - Safety valve
3 - Spacers
7. Recover the four O-rings 3

O-rings 3 and the relative teflon
rings 2
rings 2 for
for each component.
1 - Split pin
2 - Fittings
3 - Washer
4 - Pivot
5 - Connecting link
1 - Safety valve
2 - Teflon ring
3 - O-ring
390

SIMPLE/DOUBLE EFFECT DISTRIBUTOR
1 - Support 8 - Teflon ring 14 - Spring fixing screw

2 - Oil guard ring 9 - Transformation screw for simple/ 15 - Cap
3 - Teflon ring double effect 16 - Non return valve
4 - Distributor casing 10 - Distributor shaft 17 - Spring
5 - O-ring 11 - Shovel ring 18 - Non return ball valve
6 - Retaining ring 12 - Bell socket 19 - Teflon ring
7 - Fitting 13 - Spring
DISASSEMBLY
Single/double effect device
1. Fix dis

distri
tribu
butor
torss int
intoo cla
clamp
mp wit
with
h pro
protec
tectiv
tive
e jaw
jaw..
Unscrew
Unscr ew the fittin
fitting
g 1 and rem
remove
ove it tog
togeth
ether
er wit
with
h
O-ring.
1 - Fitting
391

2. If
necessary remove the retaining ring 1
ring 1,, undo the 2. Unscrew thecap 2 then
cap 2 then slip off the distributor shaft
screws 3 an
and
d rep
replac
lace
e theO-rin
theO-ring
g 5 an
and
d theteflo
theteflon n rin
ring
g 4. complete with spring.
1 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
2 - Fitting
3 - Simple/double effect transformation screw 1 - Distributor shaft and spring group
4 - Teflon ring 2 - Cap
5 - O-ring
Distributor shaft 3. Slip

off the oil guard ring, the teflon ring and the
shoulder ring 4
ring 4 from the distributor shaft.
1. Un
Unsc
scre
rew
w th
the
e tw
two
o cl
clam
amp
p sc
scre
rews
ws of th
the
e su
supp
ppor
ortt 1, re
re--
move the support and the oil guard ring.
CAUTION
Operate with caution so as not to damage the dis-
tributor shaft.
2 - Oil guard ring
3
4 -- Shoulder
Teflon ring
ring
4. On
Only
ly whe
when
n ab
absol
solute
utely
ly nec
necess
essary
ary,, rem
remove
ove the dis
distri
tri--
butor shaft spring as follows.
1 - Support
392

WARNING
The ope
operat
ration
ion sho
should
uld be car
carrie
ried
d out on
only
ly wh
when
en ab-
solutely necessary as the spring clamp screw is
fixed to the specified torque with sealer and for
this reason the operation can be difficult.
(1) Fixthe endof thedistri

thedistribut
butor
or sha
shaft
ft on
onto
to theclamp
theclamp..
WARNING
So as not to pr
provo
ovoca
cate
te be
bendi
nding
ng str
stres
esss to the dis
distri
tri--
butor shaft, it is advisable to insert it into the dis-
tributor casing.
(2) Wit
With
h the sui
suitab
table
le imp
implem
lemenentt com
compre
press
ss the spr
spring
ing 3
in order to remove the bell 2
bell 2 of
of the screw 1.
screw 1.
(3) Loosen screw 1
screw 1;; release the spring gradually and
then remove it.
WARNING
It is advisable to heat the distributor shaft to ap- 1 - Distributor casing
proximately 150°C (302°F) before loosening the 2 - Teflon ring
screw so as to eliminate the sealer action. 3 - Oil guard ring
Non return valve
1. Push
Push the val
valve
ve 2 to th
the
e in
insi
side
de an
and
d re
remo
move
ve th
the
e re
reta
tai-
i-
ning ring 1
ring 1..
1 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
1 - Screw
2 - Outside bell
3 - Spring 2. Screw a threaded screw M5, onto the valve 1 and
4 - Inside bell take off the valve from the distributor. Remove spring
4 and the ball 5
ball 5 from
from the seat.
5. It ne
neces
cessar
sary
y rem
remove
ove tef
teflon
lon rin
ring
g 2 an
and
d th
the
e oi
oill gu
guar
ard
d3 3. Remove the O-ring 3
O-ring 3 and
and the teflon ring 2
ring 2 from
from the
from the distributor casing 1
casing 1.. valve 1.
valve 1.
393

Check als
Check also
o tha
thatt the sha
shaft
ft sli
slide
des
s ea
easil
sily
y int
into
o the dis
distri
tribu
bu--
tor.
REASSEMBLY
Proceed with the remounting working in the reverse

order, taking note of the following instructions.
— Degrease the threads of the caps and fittings
with solvant.
— Apply recommended sealer to the threads of the
caps.
— Replace all the copper gaskets and all the seal
rings.
— Tighten to the recommended torque the following
components.
Tightening torque
Clamp screw spring to the distributor shaft
16 ÷ 20 Nm
(1,5 ÷ 2 - kgm; 10.85 to 14.46 ft lb)
Distributor rear end cap

35 ÷ 50 Nm
(3,5 ÷ 5 kgm; 25.31 to 36.15 ft lb)
2 - Teflon ring
3 - O-ring
5 - Ball
5 - Sphère
1. Accurately clean the components and the seats of

the distributor.
2. Che
Check
ck the dis
distri
tribu
butor
tor sha
shaft
ft and wor
workin
king
g sea
seatt are not
scratched or show signs of excessive wear.

394

CI RCUIT HYDRAULIQUE SUPPLEIVIENTAIRE
SIMPLE/DOUBLE EFFECT DISTRIBUTOR WITH AUTOMATIC CENTERING (KICK-OUT

EFFECT)
1 - Pin 14 - Threaded bush 27 - Shoulder ring
2 - Spring 15 - Built-in hexagonal headless screw 28 - Teflon ring
3 - Washer 16 - Threaded coupling 29 - Oil guard ring
4 - Retaining ring 17 - Shim adjustment ring 30 - Shoulder ring
5 - Ring nut 18 - Outside bell 31 - Pin valve
6 - Cap 19 - Spring 32 - Distributor shaft
7 - Outside bush 20 - Inside bell 33 - Non return valve
8 - Shim adjustment 21 - Distributor body 34 - Spring
9 - Inside cap 22 - O-ring 35 - Non return ball valve
10 - Shim ring 23 - Fitting 36 - Teflon ring
11 - Spring 24 - Teflon ring 37 - Support
12 - Pin 25 - Single/double effect transformation screw
13 - Ball 26 - Push rod
395

CI RCUIT HYDRAULIQUE SUPPLEIVIENTAIRE
DISMOUNTING
Single/double effect device
For the- dism

Effect dismoun
ounting
ting refer
Dismounting to: Distri
Distributo
- Single/doublebutor
r Sing
Single/d
Effect le/doubl
ouble
Device. e
Distributor shaft
1. Fix
the distributor on a clamp with protective jaw,
unloo
unloosen
sen the two cla
clamp
mping
ing scr
screws
ews of the sup
suppor
portt 1 re-
move the support and oil guard ring beneath.
1 - Shim adjustments
2 - Threaded coupling
4. Fix the end of the distributor shaft onto the clamp,

push the outside bush bush 2 towards the threaded cou-
pling 3 so as to reach the notching of the threaded
pling
bush 1
bush 1..
CAUTION
In order not to provocate bending stress on the
distributor shaft it is advised to insert it into the
distributor casing.
5. Un
Unscr
screw
ew an
and
d rem
remove
ove the bus
bush
h 1 comp
complete
lete with out-
side bu
side bush,
sh, an
and
d rec
recove
overr allthe com
compo
pone
nents
nts ind
indica
icatedin
tedin
the diagram.
WARNING
Unscrew the bush with caution as the spring is
loaded.
1 - Support
2. Loosen the ring nut 1

nut 1,, then unscrew the cap 2
cap 2..
1 - Ring nut
2 - Cap
3. Recover the shim adjustment 1

adjustment 1,, loosen the threa-
ded coupling 2
coupling 2 and take off from the distributor body
the shaft, complete with outer devices.
WARNING 1 - Threaded bush 6 - Spring

2 - Outside bush 7 - Shoulder ring
Operate with caution so as not to damage the dis-
3 - Th
Thre
read
aded
ed co
coup
uplin
ling
g 8 - Te
Tefl
flon
on ri
ring
ng
tributor shaft.
4 - Shi
Shim
m adju
adjustm
stment
ent rin
ring
g 9 - Oil gua
guard
rd rin
ring
g
5 - Bells
396

6. Blo
Blow
w int
into
o the ho
hole
le ind
indica
icated
ted by the arr
arrow,
ow, un
until
til val
valve
ve CAUTION
6 and the push rod 4
rod 4 complete
complete with seal ring, slips off Do not excessively force the pin 2 so as not to da-
the distributor shaft. Then slip the shoulder rings 3, mage the internal components of the device.
two tef
teflonrings
lonrings 5 an
andd theO-rin
theO-ring
g 2 of
offf th
the
e pu
push
sh ro
rod
d 4.
2 - O-ring
3 - Shoulder ring
4 - Push rod
5 - Teflon ring
6 - Pin valve
7. If necessary remove the teflon ring 2

ring 2;; oil guard ring
1 - Retai
Retaining
ning ring
3 from the distributor casing 1
casing 1.. 2 - Pin
2. Slowly remove the clamp jaws in order to gradually

unload the spring of the device and remove from the
inside
inside:: the was
washer
her 4
4 the spr
spring
ing 3 th
the
e pi
pin
n 2, th
then
en sl
slip
ip of
off
f
the bush 5
bush 5 and
and recover the three balls 1.
balls 1.

Same Laser 110 130 150 Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Same Laser 110 130 150 Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Same Laser 110 130 150 Workshop Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tractor Manuals Scotland

Tractor Manuals Scotland

FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY

Tractor Manuals Scotland

Tractor Manuals Scotland

REMOVAL 6. Unscrew the two screws securing pin 1 to axle

7. Use a light alloy hammer and punch to tap on rear

5. Place appropriate containers under the power stee-

Tractor Manuals Scotland

8. By means of two levers 1,

1 - Front axle Assembly

Tractor Manuals Scotland

Tractor Manuals Scotland

DISASSEMBLY, CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS, REASSEMBLY

Tractor Manuals Scotland

STEERING TIE RODS

CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS

1 - Steering tie rods

Tractor Manuals Scotland

Threading Tightening Tightening

M18x1,5 132,5 13,5

M15x1,5 118 12,0

STEERING CENTRE LEVER

1 - Steering central lever

1 - Steering tie rods 5. Bymeans of a universal puller, remove bearing 3

Tractor Manuals Scotland

7. Install the centre lever by reversing the order of re-

pered roller ‘bearings and related races with the

a new disk, and a new O-ring.

CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS

1 - Steering centre lever

Tractor Manuals Scotland

1 - Wheel hub pin

1 - Front ball bearing

Tractor Manuals Scotland

10. Reassemble the hub by reversing the order of di- CAUTION

Tighten the castle nut 5

CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS CAUTION

Tractor Manuals Scotland

6. Remove thrust bearing 2

1 - Steering tie rod

1 - Steering outer lever

Tractor Manuals Scotland

CHECKS AND VERIFICATIONS

Wash the components thoroughly, and dry them with

1. Unscrew the nuts securing pins 2 for positioning

1 - Steering tie rod

Tractor Manuals Scotland

5. Rotatesleeve 1 around its axis so that joint 2

Left side (front view)

Right side (front view)

Tractor Manuals Scotland

(3) Screw screws 5

TECHNICAL DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

Type Model 110

wheels up to 20" mm 2÷6

Axle swing 12°

Tyre air pressure kg/cm2 (bar) 2,40 (2,35)

Tractor Manuals Scotland